Designation: C29/C29M − 09
Highway and Transportation Officials Standard
Standard Test Method for
Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C29/C29M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers the determination of bulk
density (“unit weight”) of aggregate in a compacted or loose
condition, and calculated voids between particles in fine,
coarse, or mixed aggregates based on the same determination.
This test method is applicable to aggregates not exceeding 125
mm [5 in.] in nominal maximum size.
NOTE 1—Unit weight is the traditional terminology used to describe the
property determined by this test method, which is weight per unit volume
(more correctly, mass per unit volume or density).
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard, as appropriate for a
specification with which this test method is used. An exception
lc
is with regard to sieve sizes and nominal size of aggregate, in
ia
which the SI values are the standard as stated in Specification
E11. Within the text, inch-pound units are shown in brackets.
The values stated in each system may not be exact equivalents;
fic
therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in non-
conformance with the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
of
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
un
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2009. Published January 2010. Originally
approved in 1920. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as C29/C29M – 07. DOI:
10.1520/C0029_C0029M-09.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
American Association of State
AASHTO No.: T19/T19M
C127 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
y
Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
C138/C138M Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield,
op
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D123 Terminology Relating to Textiles
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
2.2 AASHTO Standard:
T19/T19M Method of Test for Unit Weight and Voids in
Aggregate3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology C125 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 bulk density, n—of aggregate, the mass of a unit volume
of bulk aggregate material, in which the volume includes the
volume of the individual particles and the volume of the voids
between the particles. Expressed in kg/m3 [lb/ft3].
3.3 unit weight, n—weight (mass) per unit volume. (Depre-
cated term used–preferred term bulk density.)
3.3.1 Discussion—Weight is equal to the mass of the body
multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity. Weight may be
expressed in absolute units (newtons, poundals) or in gravita-
tional units (kgf, lbf), for example: on the surface of the earth,
a body with a mass of 1 kg has a weight of 1 kgf (approxi-
mately 9.81 N), or a body with a mass of 1 lb has a weight of
1 lbf (approximately 4.45 N or 32.2 poundals). Since weight is
equal to mass times the acceleration due to gravity, the weight
of a body will vary with the location where the weight is
determined, while the mass of the body remains constant. On
3
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO), 444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001,
http://www.transportation.org.
Page 1 of 180
 C29/C29M − 09
the surface of the earth, the force of gravity imparts to a body
that is free to fall an acceleration of approximately 9.81
m/s2 [32.2 ft/s2]. D123
3.4 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.4.1 voids, n—in unit volume of aggregate, the space
between particles in an aggregate mass not occupied by solid
mineral matter.
3.4.1.1 Discussion—Voids within particles, either perme-
able or impermeable, are not included in voids as determined
by this test method.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This test method is often used to determine bulk density
values that are necessary for use for many methods of selecting
proportions for concrete mixtures.
4.2 The bulk density also may be used for determining
for the aggregate size to be tested. The thickness of metal in the
measure shall be as described in Table 2. The top rim shall be
smooth and plane within 0.25 mm [0.01 in.] and shall be
parallel to the bottom within 0.5° (See Note 2). The interior
wall of the measure shall be a smooth and continuous surface.
NOTE 2—The top rim is satisfactorily plane if a 0.25-mm [0.01-in.]
feeler gage cannot be inserted between the rim and a piece of 6-mm
[1⁄4-in.] or thicker plate glass laid over the measure. The top and bottom
are satisfactorily parallel if the slope between pieces of plate glass in
contact with the top and bottom does not exceed 0.87 % in any direction.
5.3.1 If the measure is to also be used for testing for bulk
density of freshly-mixed concrete according to Test Method
C138/C138M, the measure shall be made of steel or other
suitable metal not readily subject to attack by cement paste.
Reactive materials, such as aluminum alloys are permitted,
where as a consequence of an initial reaction, a surface film is
formed which protects the metal against further corrosion.

y
mass/volume relationships for conversions in purchase agree- 5.3.2 Measures larger than nominal 28 L [1 ft3] capacity
ments. However, the relationship between degree of compac- shall be made of steel for rigidity, or the minimum thicknesses

op
tion of aggregates in a hauling unit or stockpile and that of metal listed in Table 2 shall be suitably increased.
achieved in this test method is unknown. Further, aggregates in
hauling units and stockpiles usually contain absorbed and 5.4 Shovel or Scoop—A shovel or scoop of convenient size
surface moisture (the latter affecting bulking), while this test for filling the measure with aggregate.
method determines the bulk density on a dry basis. 5.5 Calibration Equipment:
4.3 A procedure is included for computing the percentage of
voids between the aggregate particles based on the bulk density
determined by this test method.
lc 5.5.1 Plate Glass—A piece of plate glass, at least 6 mm [1⁄4
in.] thick and at least 25 mm [1 in.] larger than the diameter of
the measure to be calibrated.
5.5.2 Grease—A supply of water-pump, chassis, or similar
5. Apparatus grease.
ia
5.5.3 Thermometer—A thermometer having a range of at
5.1 Balance—A balance or scale accurate within 0.1 % of
least 10 to 32 °C [50 to 90 °F] and that is readable to at least
the test load at any point within the range of use, graduated to
0.5 °C [1 °F].
at least 0.05 kg [0.1 lb]. The range of use shall be considered
fic

5.5.4 Balance—A balance as described in 5.1.

to extend from the mass of the measure empty to the mass of
the measure plus its contents at 1920 kg/m3 [120 lb/ft3]. 6. Sampling
5.2 Tamping Rod—A round, straight steel rod, 16 mm [5⁄8 6.1 Obtain the sample in accordance with Practice D75, and
in.] in diameter and approximately 600 mm [24 in.] in length,
of

reduce to test sample size in accordance with Practice C702.

having the tamping end, or both ends, rounded to a hemispheri-
cal tip, the diameter of which is 16 mm [5⁄8 in.]. 7. Test Sample
5.3 Measure—A cylindrical metal measure, preferably pro- 7.1 The size of the sample shall be approximately 125 to
un

vided with handles. It shall be watertight, with the top and 200 % of the quantity required to fill the measure, and shall be
bottom true and even, and sufficiently rigid to retain its form handled in a manner to avoid segregation. Dry the aggregate
under rough usage. The measure shall have a height approxi- sample to essentially constant mass, preferably in an oven at
mately equal to the diameter, but in no case shall the height be 110 6 5 °C [230 6 9 °F].
less than 80 % nor more than 150 % of the diameter. The
capacity of the measure shall conform to the limits in Table 1
TABLE 2 Requirements for Measures
Thickness of Metal, min
TABLE 1 Capacity of Measures
Capacity of Measure Upper 38 mm
Nominal Maximum Bottom or 11⁄2 in. Remainder of wall
Capacity of MeasureA
Size of Aggregate of wallA
mm in. m3 [L] ft3 Less than 11 L 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm
12.5 ⁄
12 0.0028[2.8] ⁄
1 10 11 to 42 L, incl 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 3.0 mm
25.0 1 0.0093 [9.3] 1⁄ 3 over 42 to 80 L, incl 10.0 mm 6.4 mm 3.8 mm
37.5 11⁄2 0.014 [14] 1⁄ 2 over 80 to 133 L, incl 13.0 mm 7.6 mm 5.0 mm
75 3 0.028 [28] 1 Less than 0.4 ft3 0.20 in. 0.10 in. 0.10 in.
100 4 0.070 [70] 21⁄2 0.4 ft3 to 1.5 ft3, incl 0.20 in. 0.20 in. 0.12 in.
125 5 0.100 [100] 31⁄2 over 1.5 to 2.8 ft3, incl 0.40 in. 0.25 in. 0.15 in.
A over 2.8 to 4.0 ft3, incl 0.50 in. 0.30 in. 0.20 in.
The indicated size of measure shall be used to test aggregates of a nominal
A
maximum size equal to or smaller than that listed. The actual volume of the The added thickness in the upper portion of the wall may be obtained by placing
measure shall be at least 95 % of the nominal volume listed. a reinforcing band around the top of the measure.

Page 2 of 180
2
 C29/C29M − 09
8. Calibration of Measure
8.1 Measures shall be recalibrated at least once a year or
whenever there is reason to question the accuracy of the
calibration.
8.2 Determine the mass of the plate glass and measure the
nearest 0.05 kg [0.1 lb].
8.3 Place a thin layer of grease on the rim of the measure to
prevent leakage of water from the measure.
8.4 Fill the measure with water that is at room temperature
and cover with the plate glass in such a way as to eliminate
bubbles and excess water. Remove any water that may have
overflowed onto the measure or plate glass.
8.5 Determine the mass of the water, plate glass, and
measure to the nearest 0.05 kg [0.1 lb].
8.6 Measure the temperature of the water to the nearest
10.2 In rodding the first layer, do not allow the rod to strike
the bottom of the measure forcibly. In rodding the second and
third layers, use vigorous effort, but not more force than to
cause the tamping rod to penetrate to the previous layer of
aggregate.
NOTE 4—In rodding the larger sizes of coarse aggregate, it may not be
possible to penetrate the layer being consolidated, especially with angular
aggregates. The intent of the procedure will be accomplished if vigorous
effort is used.
10.3 Determine the mass of the measure plus its contents,
and the mass of the measure alone, and record the values to the
nearest 0.05 kg [0.1 lb].
11. Jigging Procedure
11.1 Fill the measure in three approximately equal layers as
described in 10.1, compacting each layer by placing the

y
measure on a firm base, such as a cement-concrete floor,
0.5 °C [1 °F] and determine its density from Table 3, raising the opposite sides alternately about 50 mm [2 in.], and
interpolating if necessary. allowing the measure to drop in such a manner as to hit with a

8.7 Calculate the volume, V, of the measure. Alternatively,
calculate the factor, F, for the measure.
NOTE 3—For the calculation of bulk density, the volume of the measure
in SI units should be expressed in cubic metres, or the factor as 1/m3.
However, for convenience the size of the measure may be expressed in
litres.
op
sharp, slapping blow. The aggregate particles, by this
procedure, will arrange themselves in a densely compacted
condition. Compact each layer by dropping the measure 50
times in the manner described, 25 times on each side. Level the

9. Selection of Procedure
lc surface of the aggregate with the fingers or a straightedge in
such a way that any slight projections of the larger pieces of the
coarse aggregate approximately balance the larger voids in the
surface below the top of the measure.
9.1 The shoveling procedure for loose bulk density shall be 11.2 Determine the mass of the measure plus its contents,
ia
used only when specifically stipulated. Otherwise, the compact and the mass of the measure alone, and record the values to the
bulk density shall be determined by the rodding procedure for nearest 0.05 kg [0.1 lb].
aggregates having a nominal maximum size of 37.5 mm
fic

[11⁄2 in.] or less, or by the jigging procedure for aggregates 12. Shoveling Procedure
having a nominal maximum size greater than 37.5 mm [11⁄2 in.]
12.1 Fill the measure to overflowing by means of a shovel
and not exceeding 125 mm [5 in.].
or scoop, discharging the aggregate from a height not to exceed
10. Rodding Procedure 50 mm [2 in.] above the top of the measure. Exercise care to
of

prevent, so far as possible, segregation of the particle sizes of

10.1 Fill the measure one-third full and level the surface which the sample is composed. Level the surface of the
with the fingers. Rod the layer of aggregate with 25 strokes of aggregate with the fingers or a straightedge in such a way that
the tamping rod evenly distributed over the surface. Fill the any slight projections of the larger pieces of the coarse
un

measure two-thirds full and again level and rod as above. aggregate approximately balance the larger voids in the surface
Finally, fill the measure to overflowing and rod again in the below the top of the measure.
manner previously mentioned. Level the surface of the aggre-
gate with the fingers or a straightedge in such a way that any 12.2 Determine the mass of the measure plus its contents,
slight projections of the larger pieces of the coarse aggregate and the mass of the measure alone, and record the values to the
approximately balance the larger voids in the surface below the nearest 0.05 kg [0.1 lb].
top of the measure.
13. Calculation
13.1 Bulk Density—Calculate the bulk density for the
rodding, jigging, or shoveling procedure as follows:
TABLE 3 Density of Water
M 5 ~ G 2 T ! /V (1)
Temperature
kg/m3 lb/ft3
°C °F or
15.6 60 999.01 62.366 M 5 ~G 2 T! 3 F (2)
18.3 65 998.54 62.336
21.1 70 997.97 62.301 where:
23.0 73.4 997.54 62.274
23.9 75 997.32 62.261 M = bulk density of the aggregate, kg/m3 [lb/ft3],
26.7 80 996.59 62.216 G = mass of the aggregate plus the measure, kg [lb],
29.4 85 995.83 62.166
T = mass of the measure, kg [lb],

Page 3 of 180
3
 C29/C29M − 09
V = volume of the measure, m3 [ft3 ], and
F = factor for measure, m−3 [ft−3].
13.1.1 The bulk density determined by this test method is
for aggregate in an oven-dry condition. If the bulk density in
terms of saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition is desired, use
the exact procedure in this test method, and then calculate the
SSD bulk density using the following formula:
Mssd 5 M @ 11 ~ A/100! # (3)
where:
MSSD = bulk density in SSD condition, kg/m3 [lb/ft3], and
A = % absorption, determined in accordance with Test
Method C127 or Test Method C128.
13.2 Void Content—Calculate the void content in the aggre-
gate using the bulk density determined by either the rodding,
jigging, or shoveling procedure, as follows:
% Voids 5 100@ ~ S 3 W ! 2 M # / ~ S 3 W ! (4)
where:
M = bulk density of the aggregate, kg/m3 [lb/ft3],
S = bulk specific gravity (dry basis) as determined in
accordance with Test Method C127 or Test Method
C128, and
W = density of water, 998 kg/m3 [62.3 lb/ft3].
13.3 Volume of Measure—Calculate the volume of a mea-
sure as follows:
V 5 ~ W 2 M ! /D
lc
(5)
ia
F 5 D/ ~ W 2 M ! (6)
where:
fic
V = volume of the measure, m3 [ft3]
W = mass of the water, plate glass, and measure, kg [lb]
M = mass of the plate glass and measure, kg [lb]
D = density of the water for the measured temperature,
kg/m3 [lb/ft3], and
of
F = factor for the measure, 1/m3 [1/ft3]
14. Report
un
14.1 Report the results for the bulk density to the nearest 10
kg/m3 [1 lb/ft3] as follows:
14.1.1 Bulk density by rodding, or
14.1.2 Bulk density by jigging, or
14.1.3 Loose bulk density.
14.2 Report the results for the void content to the nearest
1 % as follows:
14.2.1 Voids in aggregate compacted by rodding, %, or
14.2.2 Voids in aggregate compacted by jigging, %, or
14.2.3 Voids in loose aggregate, %.
15. Precision and Bias
15.1 The following estimates of precision for this test
method are based on results from the AASHTO Materials
4
Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Proficiency Sample Program,
with testing conducted using this test method and AASHTO
Method T 19/T19M. There are no significant differences be-
tween the two test methods. The data are based on the analyses
of more than 100 paired test results from 40 to 100 laborato-
ries.
15.2 Coarse Aggregate (bulk density):
15.2.1 Single-Operator Precision—The single-operator
standard deviation has been found to be 14 kg/m3 [0.88 lb/ft3]
(1s). Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by the
same operator on similar material should not differ by more
than 40 kg/m3 [2.5 lb/ft3] (d2s).
15.2.2 Multilaboratory Precision—The multilaboratory
standard deviation has been found to be 30 kg/m3 [1.87 lb/ft3]
(1s). Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests from
two different laboratories on similar material should not differ
by more than 85 kg/m3 [5.3 lb/ft3] (d2s).
y
15.2.3 These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and
(d2s) limits as described in Practice C670. The precision
op
estimates were obtained from the analysis of AMRL profi-
ciency sample data for bulk density by rodding of normal
weight aggregates having a nominal maximum aggregate size
of 25.0 mm [1 in.], and using a 14-L [1⁄2-ft3] measure.
15.3 Fine Aggregate (bulk density):
15.3.1 Single-Operator Precision—The single-operator
standard deviation has been found to be 14 kg/m3 [0.88 lb/ft3]
(1s). Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by the
same operator on similar material should not differ by more
than 40 kg/m3 [2.5 lb/ft3] (d2s).
15.3.2 Multilaboratory Precision—The multilaboratory
standard deviation has been found to be 44 kg/m3 [2.76 lb/ft3]
(1s). Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests from
two different laboratories on similar material should not differ
by more than 125 kg/m3 [7.8 lb/ft3] (d2s).
15.3.3 These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and
(d2s) limits as described in Practice C670. The precision
estimates were obtained from the analysis of AMRL profi-
ciency sample data for loose bulk density from laboratories
using a 2.8-L [1⁄10-ft3] measure.
15.4 No precision data on void content are available.
However, as the void content in aggregate is calculated from
bulk density and bulk specific gravity, the precision of the
voids content reflects the precision of these measured param-
eters given in 15.2 and 15.3 of this test method and in Test
Methods C127 and C128.
15.5 Bias—The procedure in this test method for measuring
bulk density and void content has no bias because the values
for bulk density and void content can be defined only in terms
of a test method.
16. Keywords
16.1 aggregates; bulk density; coarse aggregate; density;
fine aggregate; unit weight; voids in aggregates
Page 4 of 180
 C29/C29M − 09
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
C29/C29M – 07, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved December 1, 2009)

(1) Revised 5.5.1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

y
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 5 of 180
5
 Designation: C40/C40M − 11
Standard Test Method for
Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C40/C40M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers two procedures for an approxi-
mate determination of the presence of injurious organic impu-
rities in fine aggregates that are to be used in hydraulic cement
mortar or concrete. One procedure uses a standard color
solution and the other uses a glass color standard.
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
lc
ia
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
fic
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
of
C87 Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
un
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D1544 Test Method for Color of Transparent Liquids (Gard-
ner Color Scale)
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved April 1, 2011. Published June 2011. Originally
approved in 1921. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as C40–04. DOI:
10.1520/C0040_C0040M-11.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
American Association State
Highway and Transportation Officials Standard
AASHTO No.: T 21
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This test method is used in making a preliminary
y
determination of the acceptability of fine aggregates with
respect to the requirements of Specification C33 that relate to
organic impurities.
op
3.2 The principal value of this test method is to furnish a
warning that injurious amounts of organic impurities may be
present. When a sample subjected to this test produces a color
darker than the standard color it is advisable to perform the test
for the effect of organic impurities on the strength of mortar in
accordance with Test Method C87.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Glass Bottles—Colorless glass graduated bottles, ap-
proximately 240 to 470-mL [8 to 16-oz] nominal capacity,
equipped with watertight stoppers or caps, not soluble in the
specified reagents. In no case shall the maximum outside
thickness of the bottles, measured along the line of sight used
for the color comparison, be greater than 63.5 mm [2.5 in.] or
less than 38.1 mm [1.5 in.]. The graduations on the bottles shall
be in millilitres, or ounces (U.S. fluid), except that unmarked
bottles may be calibrated and scribed with graduations by the
user. In such case, graduation marks are required at only three
points as follows:
4.1.1 Standard Color Solution Level—75 mL [2.5 oz (U.S.
fluid)],
4.1.2 Fine Aggregate Level—130 mL [4.5 oz (U.S. fluid)],
and
4.1.3 NaOH Solution Level—200 mL [7 oz (U.S. fluid)].
4.2 Glass Color Standard
4.2.1 Glass standard colors shall be used as described in
Table 1 of Test Method D1544.
NOTE 1—A suitable instrument consists of five glass color standards
mounted in a plastic holder. Only the glass identified as Gardner Color
Standard No. 11 is to be used as the Glass Color Standard in 9.2.
5. Reagent and Standard Color Solution
5.1 Reagent Sodium Hydroxide Solution (3 %)—Dissolve 3
parts by mass of reagent grade sodium hydroxide (NaOH) in 97
parts of water.
Page 6 of 180
 C40/C40M − 11
5.2 Standard Color Solution—Dissolve reagent grade potas- sample with the color of light transmitted through the standard
sium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) in concentrated sulfuric acid (sp gr color solution. Record whether the color of the supernatant
1.84) at the rate of 0.250 g/100 mL of acid. The solution must liquid is lighter, darker, or equal to the color of the standard
be freshly made for the color comparison using gentle heat if color solution.
necessary to effect solution. 9.2 Glass Color Standard Procedure—To define more pre-
6. Sampling cisely the color of the supernatant liquid of the test sample, five
glass standard colors shall be used using the following colors:
6.1 The sample shall be selected in general accordance with
Practice D75.
7. Test Sample Gardner Color Organic Plate No.
Standard No.
7.1 The test sample shall have a mass of about approxi- 5 1
8 2
mately 450 g [1 lb] and be taken from the larger sample in 11 3 (standard)
accordance with Practice C702. 14 4
16 5
8. Procedure The comparison procedure described in 9.1 shall be used, except that the
organic plate number which is nearest the color of the supernatant liquid
8.1 Fill a glass bottle to the approximately 130-mL [4.5-

y
above the test specimen shall be reported. When using this procedure, it is
fluid oz] level with the sample of the fine aggregate (see not necessary to prepare the standard color solution.
Terminology C125) to be tested.

8.2 Add the sodium hydroxide solution until the volume of
the fine aggregate and liquid, indicated after shaking, is
approximately 200 mL [7 fluid oz].
8.3 Stopper the bottle, shake vigorously, and then allow to
stand for 24 h.
9. Determination of Color Value
9.1 Standard Color Solution Procedure—At the end of the
lc
op
10. Interpretation
10.1 When a sample subjected to this procedure produces a
color darker than the standard color, or Organic Plate No. 3
(Gardner Color Standard No. 11), the fine aggregate under test
shall be considered to possibly contain injurious organic
impurities. It is advisable to perform further tests before
approving the fine aggregate for use in concrete.

11. Precision and Bias

24-h standing period, fill a glass bottle to the approximately
ia
75-mL [2.5-fluid oz] level with the fresh standard color 11.1 Since this test produces no numerical values, determi-
solution, prepared not longer than 2 h previously, as prescribed nation of the precision and bias is not possible.
in 5.2. Hold the bottle with the test sample and the bottle with
fic

the standard color solution side-by-side, and compare the color 12. Keywords
of light transmitted through the supernatant liquid above the 12.1 colorimetric test; fine aggregate; organic impurities

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of

of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
un

and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 7 of 180
2
 Designation: C70 − 13
Standard Test Method for
Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C70; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers field determination of the
amount of surface moisture in fine aggregate by displacement
in water.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
lc
2. Referenced Documents
ia
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
fic
C566 Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
of
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This test method is not widely used. However, it is a
convenient procedure for field or plant determination of
un
moisture content of fine aggregate if specific gravity values are
known and if drying facilities are not available. It can be used
to adjust the aggregate mass for moisture content and to
determine surface moisture contribution to mixing water in
portland cement concrete.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2013. Published February 2013. Originally
approved in 1970. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as C70 – 06. DOI:
10.1520/C0070-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
American Association State
Highway and Transportation Officials Standard
AASHTO No.: T142
3.2 The accuracy of the test method depends upon accurate
information on the bulk specific gravity of the material in a
saturated surface-dry condition.
y
4. Apparatus
op
4.1 Balance, having a capacity of 2 kg or more and sensitive
to 0.5 g or less.
4.2 Flask—A suitable container or flask, preferably of glass
or noncorrosive metal. The container may be a pycnometer, a
volumetric flask, a graduated volumetric flask, or other suitable
measuring device. The volume of the container shall be from
two to three times the loose volume of the sample. The
container shall be so designed that it can be filled to the mark,
or the volume of its contents read, within 0.5 mL or less.
5. Sample
5.1 Select a representative sample of the fine aggregate to be
tested for surface moisture content. It shall weigh not less than
200 g. Larger samples will yield more accurate results.
6. Procedure
6.1 The surface water content may be determined either by
mass or volume. In each case the test shall be made at a
temperature range of 18 to 29°C.
6.2 Determination by Mass—Determine the mass of the
container, in grams, filled to the mark with only water. Before
placing the sample into the container, adjust the level of the
water so that it will be sufficient to cover the sample without
going over the original mark. Introduce the weighed sample of
fine aggregate into the container and remove the entrapped air.
Fill the container to the original mark, and determine the mass
in grams. Calculate the amount of water displaced by the
sample, as follows:
M d 5 M c 1M s 2 M (1)
where:
Md = mass of water displaced by the sample, g,
Mc = mass of container filled to the mark with water, g,
Ms = mass of sample, g, and
M = mass of container and sample, filled to the mark with
water, g.
Page 8 of 180

6.3 Determination by Volume—Measure a volume of water,
in millilitres, sufficient to cover the sample and place in the
container. Introduce the weighed sample of fine aggregate into
the container and remove the entrapped air. Determine the
combined volume of the sample and the water by direct reading
when a graduated flask is used. When a pycnometer or
volumetric flask of known volume is used, fill the container to
the known volume mark with an additional measured volume
of water. The flask or pycnometer volume is then equal to the
combined volume of sample and water. Calculate the amount
of water displaced by the sample, as follows:
Vs 5 V2 2 V 1 (2)
where:
Vs = volume of water displaced by the sample, mL,
V2 = combined volume of sample and water, mL, and
V1 = total volume of water in the flask or pycnometer
required to cover the sample and bring the level up to
the known volume mark, mL.
7. Calculation
7.1 Calculate the percentage of surface moisture in terms of
the saturated surface-dry fine aggregate (see Appendix X1), as
follows:
where:
P
P 5 @ ~ M d 2 V d ! / ~ M s 2 M d ! # 3 100
= surface moisture in terms of saturated surface-dry fine
aggregate, %,
ia
Vd = mass of the sample (Ms in 6.2) divided by the bulk
specific gravity of the fine aggregate in a saturated
surface-dry condition, determined as prescribed in Test
fic
Method C128, and
Md = mass of water displaced, g, and
Ms = mass of sample, g
7.2 Calculate the percentage of surface moisture in terms of
of
dry aggregate if the absorption of the aggregate is known as
follows:
P d 5 P @ 11 ~ P a /100! #
un
where:
Pd = surface moisture in terms of dry fine aggregate, %, and
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. DEVELOPMENT OF EQUATIONS
X1.1 These equations are readily derived from basic rela-
tionships. For convenience express P in terms of the ratio r,
that is, the ratio of the mass of surface moisture to the mass of
the saturated, surface-dry sample. It follows that:
M s 2 @ M s / ~ 11r ! #
r5
M s / ~ 11r !
C70 − 13
Pa = absorption of the fine aggregate, %, determined in
accordance with Test Method C128.
Total moisture content, on a dry aggregate basis, is the sum
of the surface moisture, Pd, and the absorption, Pa.
8. Report
8.1 Report surface moisture test results as determined by
this method to the nearest 0.1 %.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 This procedure is estimated to be less precise than
properly conducted moisture content tests by drying (Test
Method C566). Accurate specific gravity information is essen-
tial to the bias of this method. Test Method C566 can be used
to verify the level of bias.
9.2 Precision—These estimates of precision are based on
y
results from the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory
(AMRL) Proficiency Sample Program, of testing conducted on
op
Fine Aggregate Proficiency Sample Numbers 99 and 100. The
precision limits are based on test results submitted by 144
laboratories that tested two fine aggregate test samples of
approximately 500 g mass with average surface moisture
contents of 2.323 % and 2.075 % respectively.
lc(3)
9.2.1 Single-Operator Precision—The single-operator stan-
dard deviation of a single test result has been found to be
0.50 %.3 Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by
the same operator should not differ by more than 1.39 %.
9.2.2 Multilaboratory Precision—The multilaboratory stan-
dard deviation of a single test result has been found to be
0.82 %.3 Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests in
different laboratories on the same material should not differ by
more than 2.31 %.3
9.3 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias of this test procedure, no
statement on bias (other than that in 9.1) is made.
10. Keywords
10.1 fine aggregate; fine aggregate moisture; surface mois-
(4)
ture
3
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and d2s) limits as described in
Practice C670.
APPENDIX
X1.1.1 If G is bulk specific gravity of the saturated, surface-
dry fine aggregate, then
Ms Ms
Md 5 1M s 2 (X1.2)
G ~ 11r ! 11r
where the first term gives the water displaced by the
(X1.1)
saturated surface-dry fine aggregate and the second that dis-
placed by the surface moisture.
Page 9 of 180
2
 C70 − 13
X1.1.2 From Eq X1.2: Ms 5 V d G (X1.4)
Ms Md 2 M s X1.1.3 Substituting for Ms/(1 + r) and Ms in Eq X1.1 and
5 (X1.3)
11r 1 simplifying,
21
G
r 5 ~ M d 2 V d! / ~ M s 2 M d! (X1.5)
By definition,

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

y
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 10 of 180
3
 Designation: C87/C87M − 10

Standard Test Method for

Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength
of Mortar1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C87/C87M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the effect Specimens)
on mortar strength of the organic impurities in fine aggregate, C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
whose presence is indicated using Test Method C40. Compari- Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

y
son is made between compressive strengths of mortar made C150 Specification for Portland Cement
with washed and unwashed fine aggregate. C230/C230M Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests

op
of Hydraulic Cement
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units C305 Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each C511 Specification for Mixing Rooms, Moist Cabinets,
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard. Some values have only SI units because the
inch-pound equivalents are not used in the practice.
NOTE 1—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Speci-
fication E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for
lc Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
ia
information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the D3665 Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Ma-
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- terials
fic

priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.(Warning—Fresh Sieves
hydraulic cementitous mixtures are caustic and may cause 3. Summary of Test Method
chemical burns to exposed skin and tissue upon prolonged
of

exposure.)2 3.1 A portion of the fine aggregate that produced a color

darker than the standard in Test Method C40 is used to prepare
2. Referenced Documents mortar cube specimens. A separate portion of the same fine
aggregate is washed in sodium hydroxide solution to remove
2.1 ASTM Standards:3
un

the organic impurities that caused the failing result when tested
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
in accordance with Test Method C40, and that washed fine
C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates
aggregate is used to prepare another set of mortar cube
for Concrete
specimens.
C109/C109M Test Method for Compressive Strength of
3.2 After curing for a stated period, the compressive
strengths of the two sets of cube specimens are determined and
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on compared.
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
4. Significance and Use
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 2010. Published January 2011. Originally
approved in 1931. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as C87–05. DOI: 4.1 This test method is of significance in making a final
10.1520/C0087_C0087M-10.
2
determination of the acceptability of fine aggregates with
See section on Safety Precautions, Manual of Aggregate and Concrete Testing,
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02. respect to the requirements of Specification C33 concerning
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or organic impurities.
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on 4.2 This test method is applicable to those samples which,
the ASTM website. when tested in accordance with Test Method C40, have

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 11 of 180
1
 C87/C87M − 10
produced a supernatant liquid with a color darker than standard
color plate No. 3 or color solution.
4.3 Many specifications provide for the acceptance of fine
aggregate producing a darker color in the Test Method C40
test, when testing by this test method indicates the strength of
the mortar cubes prepared with the unwashed fine aggregate is
comparable to the strength of mortar cubes made with the
washed fine aggregate.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Flow Table, Flow Mold, and Caliper, as described in
Specification C230/C230M.
5.2 Tamper, Trowel, Cube Molds, and Testing Machine, as
described in Test Method C109/C109M.
5.3 Mixer, Bowl, and Paddle, as described in Practice C305.
5.4 Curing Apparatus, as described in Specification C511.
5.5 pH Paper, 0–14.
5.6 pH Meter, capable of reading to 0.1 pH units or better.
6. Reagents and Materials
6.1 Portland cement shall be Type I or Type II, meeting the
requirements of Specification C150.
6.2 Sodium Hydroxide Solution (3 %) —Dissolve 3 parts by
mass of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) in 97 parts water.
lc
6.3 Phenolphthalein—Dissolve 1 g of reagent grade phenol-
ia
phthalein in 1 L of 95 % reagent grade ethyl alcohol.
7. Sampling and Sample Preparation
fic
7.1 If sufficient material remains from the sample used for
testing in accordance with Test Method C40, use this material
for the tests described in this test method. If there is insufficient
material remaining, obtain another field sample from the same
of
source in accordance with Practice D75 and Practice D3665.
NOTE 2—At least 20 kg of fine aggregate should be available for the
testing described herein.
un
7.2 If the fine aggregate contains particles coarser than the
4.75-mm (No.4) sieve, remove the coarser particles by sieving
on the 4.75-mm (No.4) sieve, so that when the particles are
mixed in the designated mixer, there will be no damage to the
mixer or crushing of the fine aggregate particles. Determine the
percentage of the sample removed. (Warning—The clearances
between the paddle and the bowl specified in Practice C305 are
suitable when using the mortar made with graded standard
sand. To permit the mixer to operate freely and to avoid serious
damage to the paddle and bowl when coarser aggregates are
used, it may be necessary to set the clearance adjustment
bracket to provide greater clearances than specified. A clear-
ance of approximately 4.0 mm is required in Practice C305; a
clearance of approximately 5.0 mm has been found to be
satisfactory for this method when used with fine aggregate
from which the material retained on the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve
has been removed.)
7.3 Split the fine aggregate to be used for these tests into
two approximately equal portions, using the procedure de-
2
scribed in Practice C702. Set one portion aside to be used in the
unwashed condition. The second portion is to be washed before
use.
7.4 Preparing Washed Fine Aggregate:
7.4.1 Perform the washing and rinsing of the fine aggregate
with care to minimize the loss of fines, so that the aggregate
after washing and rinsing has a fineness modulus within 0.10 of
that of the unwashed aggregate.
7.4.2 Establishing a Standard for Thoroughness of
Rinsing—Place a small amount of the water to be used for
washing and rinsing in a clean, clear container, and determine
the pH of the water by use of pH paper, pH meter, or add a drop
of phenolphthalein to the wash water and retain for later
comparison.
7.4.3 Washing the Aggregate—Place sufficient quantity of
fine aggregate for three batches in a suitable container, flood
y
with the sodium hydroxide solution, and agitate thoroughly
with a spoon or trowel. At the end of the washing and after
allowing to stand for fines to settle, siphon off as much of the
op
sodium hydroxide solution as possible, without removing any
of the aggregate fines.
7.4.4 Rinsing the Aggregate—Add a large quantity of water
to the washed aggregate, agitate, allow to stand for fines to
settle, and then siphon off the rinse water. Repeat this operation
several times, until the water used for rinsing has a pH equal to
or lower than the pH of the water prior to contact with the fine
aggregate. If phenolphthalein was used as an indicator, the
color of the wash water is to be equal or lighter in color than
the solution prepared in 7.4.2.
7.4.5 Verifying Removal of Organic Impurities—Repeat the
Test Method C40 procedure to determine if the washing has
removed sufficient organic impurities to produce a satisfactory
result (color lighter than the standard). If the fine aggregate
continues to produce an unsatisfactory result (color darker than
the standard), repeat the washing and rinsing procedure (de-
scribed in 7.4.3 and 7.4.4) as many times as necessary until a
satisfactory result is obtained by Test Method C40.
8. Procedure
8.1 Number of Test Batches—Prepare three batches of
mortar using the washed aggregate and three batches of mortar
using the unwashed aggregate, on the same day. Mix the
batches, alternating between the washed and unwashed aggre-
gate.
8.2 Fine Aggregate—For both the washed and the unwashed
fine aggregates, bring the portions of fine aggregate to the
saturated surface dry condition as described in Test Method
C128. Prepare a quantity of aggregate of known mass (the
aggregate specimen) that is slightly more than needed to
produce a single batch of the desired consistency.
8.2.1 Optionally, if the absorption has been determined in
accordance with Test Method C128, prepare the aggregate for
test by adding to a known mass of dry aggregate the amount of
water it will absorb, mixing thoroughly, and permitting the
aggregate to stand in a covered pan for 30 min before use.
8.3 Preparation of Mortar—Prepare the mortar in a me-
chanical mixer in accordance with the procedure for mixing
mortars described in Practice C305, as modified below.
Page 12 of 180
 C87/C87M − 10
8.3.1 Use water and cement in quantities that will yield a
water-cement ratio of 0.6 by mass (See Note 3). The mixing
water shall be at a temperature of 23.0 6 2.0 °C [73.5 6 3.5
°F]. The mortar shall be proportioned to produce a consistency
of 100 6 5 % as determined by the Section on Flow Test (see
8.4.1).
NOTE 3—It has been found that 600 g of cement and 360 mL of water
will usually be adequate for a 6-cube batch. The flow is adjusted by the
quantity of fine aggregate added to the mixture.
8.3.2 After placing all the mixing water in the bowl, add the
cement to the water. Start the mixer and mix at the slow speed
(140 65 r/min) for 30 s. While still mixing at slow speed over
a 30-s period, add a measured quantity of aggregate estimated
to provide the proper consistency.
NOTE 4—The quantity of aggregate used may be determined by
subtracting from a known quantity of prepared aggregate the mass of the
portion remaining after mixing.
8.3.3 Stop the mixer, change to medium speed (285 6 10
r/min), and mix for 30 s.
8.3.4 Stop the mixer and let the mortar stand for 1.5 min.
During the first 15 s of this interval, quickly scrape down into
the batch any mortar that may have collected on the side of the
bowl, then for the remainder of this interval, cover the bowl
with the lid.
8.3.5 Finish by mixing for 1 min at medium speed. If the
flow appears to be too high during the first 30 s of this period,
stop the mixer briefly, add additional fine aggregate, and then
lc
complete the final 30 s of mixing.
ia
8.3.6 In any case requiring a remixing interval, any mortar
adhering to the side of the bowl shall be quickly scraped down
into the batch with the scraper prior to remixing.
fic
8.3.7 Make a determination of the flow.
8.4 Flow Test:
8.4.1 Carefully wipe the flow table clean. Dry the surface
and place the flow mold at the center. Immediately after
of
completing the mixing operation, place a layer of mortar
approximately 25 mm [1 in.] in thickness in the mold and tamp
20 times with the tamper. The tamping pressure shall be just
sufficient to ensure uniform filling of the mold. Slightly overfill
un
the mold with mortar and tamp as specified for the first layer.
Cut off the mortar to a plane surface, flush with the top of the
mold, by drawing the straight edge of the trowel (held nearly
perpendicular to the mold) with a sawing motion across the top
of the mold. Wipe the table top clean and dry, being especially
careful to remove any water from around the edge of the flow
mold. Lift the mold away from the mortar 1 min after
completing the mixing operation. Immediately drop the table
through a height of 12.7 mm [0.5 in.] ten times in 6 s. The flow
is the resulting increase in average diameter of the mortar
specimen, measured on at least four diameters at approxi-
mately equal angles, expressed as a percentage of the original
diameter.
8.4.2 Should the flow be too great, return the mortar to the
mixing vessel, add additional fine aggregate, mix for 30 s at
medium speed, and make another determination of the flow. If
more than two trials must be made to obtain a flow of 100 6
5 %, consider the mortar as a trial mortar, and prepare a new
batch.
3
8.4.3 If the mortar is too dry, discard the batch and prepare
a new batch starting with a smaller quantity of fine aggregate.
8.4.4 Determine the quantity of fine aggregate used by
subtracting the mass of the portion remaining from the original
mass of the aggregate specimen.
8.5 Molding Mortar Cubes—Immediately following
completion of a flow test that indicates acceptable consistency,
return the mortar from the flow table to the mixing bowl,
scrape down the bowl, and then remix the entire batch for 15
s at medium speed. Upon completion of mixing, shake the
excess mortar from the paddle into the bowl. Mold one set
(three cubes) from each batch, in accordance with Test Method
C109/C109M.
8.6 Curing and Testing Mortar Cubes—Store the test speci-
mens in a moist cabinet or moist room maintained at a
temperature of 23.0 6 2.0 °C [73.5 6 3.5 °F] and relative
y
humidity not less than 95 % for 24 6 1⁄2 h. Additional curing
shall be by immersion in saturated lime water maintained at a
op
temperature of 23.0 6 2.0 °C [73.5 6 3.5 °F]. Determine the
compressive strength of the cubes at 7 days in accordance with
Test Method C109/C109M.
9. Calculation and Report
9.1 Calculate the compressive strength of each specimen by
dividing the maximum load it carried during the test by the
cross-sectional area. Average the strengths of the three speci-
mens from each batch. Calculate three strength ratios by
dividing the average strength for a batch containing unwashed
fine aggregate by the average strength for the corresponding (in
respective order of mixing) batch containing washed fine
aggregate.
9.2 Report the average of the three ratios, expressed as a
percentage (to the nearest 1 %), as the relative strength for the
fine aggregate under test.
9.3 If the fine aggregate was sieved to remove particles
coarser than the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve (as described in 7.2), so
state in the report and indicate the quantity of material removed
as a percentage of the original sample mass.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 The following precision statement is applicable when a
test result is the average ratio, as defined by this test method,
of three pairs of mortar batch strength tests with all the batches
mixed on the same day and tested at the same age.
10.2 The single laboratory coefficient of variation has been
determined to be 5.4 % (See Note 5). Therefore, strength ratios
of two properly conducted tests in the same laboratory are not
expected to differ from each other by more than 15.3 % (See
Note 5) of their average. The maximum range (difference
between highest and lowest) of the three individual ratios used
in calculating the average are not expected to exceed 17 % (See
Note 5).
NOTE 5—These numbers represent respectively the (1s %) and (d2s %)
limits as described in Practice C670, calculated as described in the section
on Form of Statement for Which a Test Result is Defined as the Average
of a Specified Number of Measurements in Practice C670.
Page 13 of 180
 C87/C87M − 10
11. Keywords
11.1 aggregate; fine aggregate; organic impurities; mortar
strength

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue, C87–05,
that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved December 15, 2010)

(1) Revised the standard as a dual units test method. (2) Added new Note 1 and renumbered subsequent notes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

y
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards

op
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

lc
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
ia
fic
of
un

Page 14 of 180
4
 Designation: C88 − 13
Standard Test Method for
Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C88; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the testing of aggregates to
estimate their soundness when subjected to weathering action
in concrete or other applications. This is accomplished by
repeated immersion in saturated solutions of sodium or mag-
nesium sulfate followed by oven drying to partially or com-
pletely dehydrate the salt precipitated in permeable pore
spaces. The internal expansive force, derived from the rehy-
dration of the salt upon re-immersion, simulates the expansion
of water on freezing. This test method furnishes information
helpful in judging the soundness of aggregates when adequate
information is not available from service records of the
material exposed to actual weathering conditions.
lc
ia
1.2 The values given in parentheses are provided for infor-
mation purposes only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address the safety
fic
problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the
user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
of
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
un
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2013. Published August 2013. Originally
approved in 1931. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as C88 – 05. DOI:
10.1520/C0088-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
y
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
op
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
E100 Specification for ASTM Hydrometers
E323 Specification for Perforated-Plate Sieves for Testing
Purposes
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This test method provides a procedure for making a
preliminary estimate of the soundness of aggregates for use in
concrete and other purposes. The values obtained may be
compared with specifications, for example Specification C33,
that are designed to indicate the suitability of aggregate
proposed for use. Since the precision of this test method is poor
(Section 12), it may not be suitable for outright rejection of
aggregates without confirmation from other tests more closely
related to the specific service intended.
3.2 Values for the permitted-loss percentage by this test
method are usually different for fine and coarse aggregates, and
attention is called to the fact that test results by use of the two
salts differ considerably and care must be exercised in fixing
proper limits in any specifications that include requirements for
these tests. The test is usually more severe when magnesium
sulfate is used; accordingly, limits for percent loss allowed
when magnesium sulfate is used are normally higher than
limits when sodium sulfate is used.
NOTE 1—Refer to the appropriate sections in Specification C33 estab-
lishing conditions for acceptance of coarse and fine aggregates which fail
to meet requirements based on this test.
Page 15 of 180
 C88 − 13
4. Apparatus
4.1 Sieves—With square openings of the following sizes
conforming to Specifications E11 or E323, for sieving the
samples in accordance with Sections 6, 7, and 9:
150 µm (No. 100) 8.0 mm (5⁄16 in.)
9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.)
300 µm (No. 50) 12.5 mm (1⁄2 in.)
16.0 mm (5⁄8 in.)
600 µm (No. 30) 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.)
25.0 mm (1 in.)
1.18 mm (No. 16) 31.5 mm (11⁄4 in.)
2.36 mm (No. 8) 37.5 mm (11⁄2 in.)
50 mm (2 in.)
4.00 mm (No. 5) 63 mm (21⁄2 in.)
larger sizes by
4.75 mm (No. 4) 12.5-mm (1⁄2-in.)
spread
4.2 Containers—Containers for immersing the samples of
aggregate in the solution, in accordance with the procedure
described in this test method, shall be perforated in such a
manner as to permit free access of the solution to the sample
and drainage of the solution from the sample without loss of
aggregate.
NOTE 2—Baskets made of suitable wire mesh or sieves with suitable
openings are satisfactory containers for the samples.
4.3 Temperature Regulation—Suitable means for regulating
the temperature of the samples during immersion in the sodium
sulfate or magnesium sulfate solution shall be provided.
4.4 Temperature Recorder—With an accuracy of at least 1
lc
°F (0.5 °C) and capable of recording the temperature of the
ia
solution at least once every 15 minutes for the duration of the
test.
4.5 Balances—For fine aggregate, a balance or scale accu-
fic
rate within 0.1 g over the range required for this test; for coarse
aggregate, a balance or scale accurate within 0.1 % or 1 g,
whichever is greater, over the range required for this test.
4.6 Drying Oven—The oven shall be capable of being
of
heated continuously at 230 6 9 °F (110 6 5 °C) and the rate
of evaporation, at this range of temperature, shall be at least 25
g/h for 4 h, during which period the doors of the oven shall be
kept closed. This rate shall be determined by the loss of water
un
from 1-L Griffin low-form beakers, each initially containing
500 g of water at a temperature of 70 6 3 °F (21 6 2 °C),
placed at each corner and the center of each shelf of the oven.
The evaporation requirement is to apply to all test locations
when the oven is empty except for the beakers of water.
4.7 Specific Gravity Measurement—Hydrometers conform-
ing to the requirements of Specification E100, or a suitable
combination of graduated glassware and balance, capable of
measuring the solution specific gravity within 60.001.
5. Special Solutions Required
5.1 Prepare the solution for immersion of test samples from
either sodium or magnesium sulfate in accordance with 5.1.1 or
5.1.2 (Note 3). The volume of the solution shall be at least five
times the solid volume of all samples immersed at any one
time.
NOTE 3—Some aggregates containing carbonates of calcium or mag-
nesium are attacked chemically by fresh sulfate solution, resulting in
2
erroneously high measured losses. If this condition is encountered or is
suspected, repeat the test using a filtered solution that has been used
previously to test the same type of carbonate rock, provided that the
solution meets the requirements of 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 for specific gravity.
5.1.1 Sodium Sulfate Solution—Prepare a saturated solution
of sodium sulfate by dissolving a USP or equal grade of the salt
in water at a temperature of 77 to 86 °F (25 to 30 °C). Add
sufficient salt (Note 4), of either the anhydrous (Na2SO4) or the
crystalline (Na2 SO4·10H2O) form,3 to ensure not only satura-
tion but also the presence of excess crystals when the solution
is ready for use in the tests. Thoroughly stir the mixture during
the addition of the salt and stir the solution at frequent intervals
until used. To reduce evaporation and prevent contamination,
keep the solution covered at all times when access is not
needed. Allow the solution to cool to 70 6 2 °F (21 6 1 °C).
Again stir, and allow the solution to remain at the designated
temperature for at least 48 h before use. Prior to each use, break
y
up the salt cake, if any, in the container, stir the solution
thoroughly, and determine the specific gravity of the solution.
op
When used, the solution shall have a specific gravity not less
than 1.151 nor more than 1.174. Discard a discolored solution,
or filter it and check for specific gravity.
NOTE 4—For the solution, 215 g of anhydrous salt or 700 g of the
decahydrate per litre of water are sufficient for saturation at 71.6 °F (22
°C). However, since these salts are not completely stable and since it is
desirable that an excess of crystals be present, the use of not less than 350
g of the anhydrous salt or 750 g of the decahydrate salt per litre of water
is recommended.
5.1.2 Magnesium Sulfate Solution—Prepare a saturated so-
lution of magnesium sulfate by dissolving a USP or equal
grade of the salt in water at a temperature of 77 to 86 °F (25 to
30 °C). Add sufficient salt (Note 5), of either the anhydrous
(MgSO4) or the crystalline (MgSO4·7H2O) (Epsom salt) form,
to ensure saturation and the presence of excess crystals when
the solution is ready for use in the tests. Thoroughly stir the
mixture during the addition of the salt and stir the solution at
frequent intervals until used. To reduce evaporation and
prevent contamination, keep the solution covered at all times
when access is not needed. Allow the solution to cool to 70 6
2 °F (21 6 1 °C). Again stir, and allow the solution to remain
at the designated temperature for at least 48 h before use. Prior
to each use, break up the salt cake, if any, in the container, stir
the solution thoroughly, and determine the specific gravity of
the solution. When used, the solution shall have a specific
gravity not less than 1.295 nor more than 1.308. Discard a
discolored solution, or filter it and check for specific gravity.
NOTE 5—For the solution, 350 g of anhydrous salt or 1230 g of the
heptahydrate per litre of water are sufficient for saturation at 73.4 °F (23
°C). However, since these salts are not completely stable, with the hydrous
salt being the more stable of the two, and since it is desirable that an
excess of crystals be present, it is recommended that the heptahydrate salt
be used and in an amount of not less than 1400 g/litre of water.
3
Experience with the test method indicates that a grade of sodium sulfate desig-
nated by the trade as dried powder, which may be considered as approximately
anhydrous, is the most practical for use. That grade is more economically available
than the anhydrous form. The decahydrate sodium sulfate presents difficulties in
compounding the required solution on account of its cooling effect on the solution.
Page 16 of 180
 C88 − 13
5.1.3 Barium Chloride Solution—Prepare 100 mL of 5 % of sufficient size to yield 100 g after sieving to refusal. (In
barium chloride solution by dissolving 5 g of BaCl2 in 100 mL general, a 110-g sample will be sufficient.) Do not use fine
of distilled water. aggregate sticking in the meshes of the sieves in preparing the
samples. Weigh samples consisting of 100 6 0.1 g out of each
6. Samples of the separated fractions after final sieving and place in
6.1 The sample shall be obtained in general accordance with separate containers for the test.
Practice D75 and reduced to test portion size in accordance 7.2 Coarse Aggregate—Thoroughly wash and dry the
with Practice C702. sample of coarse aggregate to constant weight at 230 6 9 °F
6.2 Fine Aggregate—Fine aggregate for the test shall be (110 6 5 °C) and separate it into the different sizes shown in
passed through a 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) sieve. The sample shall be of 6.3 by sieving to refusal. Weigh out quantities of the different
such size that it will yield not less than 100 g of each of the sizes within the tolerances of 6.3 and, where the test portion
following sizes, which shall be available in amounts of 5 % or consists of two sizes, combine them to the designated total
more, expressed in terms of the following sieves: weight. Record the weights of the test samples and their
Passing Sieve Retained on Sieve
fractional components. In the case of sizes larger than 19.0 mm
(3⁄4 in.), record the number of particles in the test samples.
600 µm (No. 30) 300 µm (No. 50)
1.18 mm (No. 16) 600 µm (No. 30)

y
2.36 mm (No. 8) 1.18 mm (No. 16)
8. Procedure
4.75 mm (No. 4) 2.36 mm (No. 8) 8.1 Storage of Samples in Solution—Immerse the samples in
9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 4.75 mm (No. 4)

6.3 Coarse Aggregate—Coarse aggregate for the test shall
consist of material from which the sizes finer than the No. 4
sieve have been removed. The sample shall be of such a size
that it will yield the following amounts of the indicated sizes
that are available in amounts of 5 % or more:
Size (Square-Opening Sieves)
op
the prepared solution of sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate
for not less than 16 h nor more than 18 h in such a manner that
the solution covers them to a depth of at least 1⁄2 in. (Note 6).
Cover the containers to reduce evaporation and prevent the
accidental addition of extraneous substances. Maintain the

9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) to 4.75 mm (No. 4)

19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) to 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.)
Mass, g

300 ± 5
1000 ± 10
lc samples immersed in the solution at a temperature of 70 6 2 °F
(21 6 1 °C) for the immersion period.
NOTE 6—Suitably weighted wire grids placed over the sample in the
containers will permit this coverage to be achieved with very lightweight
Consisting of: aggregates.
ia
12.5-mm (1⁄2-in.) to 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) material 330 ± 5
19.0-mm (3⁄4-in.) to 12.5-mm (1⁄2-in.) material 670 ± 10 8.2 Drying Samples After Immersion—After the immersion
37.5-mm (1 1⁄2-in.) to 19.0-mm (3⁄4 in.) 1500 ± 50 period, remove the aggregate sample from the solution, permit
Consisting of:
it to drain for 15 6 5 min, and place in the drying oven. The
fic

25.0-mm (1-in.) to 19.0-mm (3⁄4-in.) material 500 ± 30

37.5-mm (1 1⁄2-in.) to 25.0-mm (1-in.) material
63-mm (2 1⁄2 in.) to 37.5-mm (1 1⁄2 in.)
Consisting of:
50-mm (2 in.) to 37.5-mm (1 1⁄2-in.) material
63-mm (2 1⁄2-in.) to 50-mm (2-in.) material
of
1000 ± 50 temperature of the oven shall have been brought previously to
5000 ± 300 230 6 9 °F (110 6 5 °C). Dry the samples at the specified
2000 ± 200 temperature until constant weight has been achieved. Establish
3000 ± 300 the time required to attain constant weight as follows: with the

Larger sizes by nominal 12.5-mm (1⁄2-in.) spread in sieve
size, each fraction
Consisting of:
75-mm (3-in.) to 63-mm (2 1⁄2-in.) material
90-mm (3 1⁄2-in.) to 75-mm (3-in.) material
un
oven containing the maximum sample load expected, check the
weight losses of test samples by removing and weighing them,
7000 ± 1000 without cooling, at intervals of 2 to 4 h; make enough checks
7000 ± 1000 to establish required drying time for the least favorable oven

100-mm (4-in.) to 90-mm (3 1⁄2-in.) material 7000 ± 1000

6.4 When an aggregate to be tested contains appreciable
amounts of both fine and coarse material, having a grading
with more than 10 weight % coarser than the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.)
sieve and, also, more than 10 weight % finer than the 4.75-mm
(No. 4) sieve, test separate samples of the minus No. 4 fraction
and the plus No. 4 fraction in accordance with the procedures
for fine aggregate and coarse aggregate, respectively. Report
the results separately for the fine-aggregate fraction and the
coarse-aggregate fraction, giving the percentages of the coarse-
and fine-size fractions in the initial grading.
7. Preparation of Test Sample
7.1 Fine Aggregate—Thoroughly wash the sample of fine
aggregate on a 300-µm (No. 50) sieve, dry to constant weight
at 230 6 9 °F (110 6 5 °C), and separate into the different sizes
by sieving, as follows: Make a rough separation of the graded
sample by means of a nest of the standard sieves specified in
6.2. From the fractions obtained in this manner, select samples
location (see 4.6) and sample condition (Note 7). Constant
weight will be considered to have been achieved when weight
loss is less than 0.1 % of sample weight in 4 h of drying. After
constant weight has been achieved, allow the samples to cool
to room temperature, when they shall again be immersed in the
prepared solution as described in 8.1.
NOTE 7—Drying time required to reach constant weight may vary
considerably for several reasons. Efficiency of drying will be reduced as
cycles accumulate because of salt adhering to particles and, in some cases,
because of increase in surface area due to breakdown. The different size
fractions of aggregate will have differing drying rates. The smaller sizes
will tend to dry more slowly because of their larger surface area and
restricted interparticle voids, but this tendency may be altered by the
effects of container size and shape.
8.3 Number of Cycles—Repeat the process of alternate
immersion and drying until the required number of cycles is
obtained.
8.4 After the completion of the final cycle and after the
sample has cooled, wash the sample free from the sodium

Page 17 of 180
3
 C88 − 13
sulfate or magnesium sulfate as determined by the reaction of sample tested is the loss in the test and is to be expressed as a
the wash water with barium chloride (BaCl2). Wash by percentage of the initial weight for use in Table 1.
circulating water at 110 6 10 °F (43 6 6 °C) through the Sieve Used to
samples in their containers. This may be done by placing them Size of Aggregate Determine Loss
in a tank into which the hot water can be introduced near the 100 mm (4 in.) to 90 mm (3 1⁄2 in.) 75 mm (3 in.)
bottom and allowed to overflow. In the washing operation, the 90 mm (3 1⁄2 in.) to 75 mm (3 in.) 63 mm (2 1⁄2 in.)
samples shall not be subjected to impact or abrasion that may 75 mm (3 in.) to 63 mm (2 1⁄2 in.) 50 mm (2 in.)
63 mm (2 1⁄2 in.) to 37.5 mm (1 1⁄2 in.) 31.5 mm (1 1⁄4 in.)
tend to break up particles. 37.5 mm (1 1⁄2 in.) to 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) 16.0 mm (5⁄8 in.)
NOTE 8—Tap water containing sulfates when used for the wash water 19 mm (3⁄4 in.) to 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 8.0 mm (5⁄16 in.)
9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) to 4.75 mm (No. 4) 4.0 mm (No. 5)
will cloud when tested with the barium chloride solution. The cloudiness
of a solution of tap water and the barium chloride solution should be 10. Qualitative Examination
judged so that tested wash water with the same degree of cloudiness can
be assumed to be free of sulfates from the test. 10.1 Make a qualitative examination of test samples coarser
than 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) as follows (Note 9):
9. Quantitative Examination 10.1.1 Separate the particles of each test sample into groups
9.1 Make the quantitative examination as follows: according to the action produced by the test (Note 9).
9.1.1 After the sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate has 10.1.2 Record the number of particles showing each type of

y
been removed, dry each fraction of the sample to constant distress.
weight at 230 6 9 °F (110 6 5 °C). Sieve the fine aggregate NOTE 9—Many types of action may be expected. In general, they may

over the same sieve on which it was retained before the test,
and sieve the coarse aggregate over the sieve shown below for
the appropriate size of particle. For fine aggregate, the method
and duration of sieving shall be the same as were used in
preparing the test samples. For coarse aggregate, sieving shall
be by hand, with agitation sufficient only to assure that all
undersize material passes the designated sieve. No extra
manipulation shall be employed to break up particles or cause
them to pass the sieves. Weigh the material retained on each
lc
sieve and record each amount. The difference between each of
ia
these amounts and the initial weight of the fraction of the
op
be classified as disintegration, splitting, crumbling, cracking, flaking, etc.
While only particles larger than 3⁄4 in. in size are required to be examined
qualitatively, it is recommended that examination of the smaller sizes be
made in order to determine whether there is any evidence of excessive
splitting.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following data (Note 10):
11.1.1 Weight of each fraction of each sample before test,
11.1.2 Material from each fraction of the sample finer than
the sieve designated in 9.1.1 for sieving after test, expressed as
a percentage of the original weight of the fraction,

TABLE 1 Suggested Form for Recording Test Data (with Illustrative Test Values)
fic

Percentage
Grading of Weight of Test
Passing Weighted
Sieve Size Original Sample, Fractions
Designated Percentage Loss
% Before Test, g
Sieve After Test
Soundness Test of Fine Aggregate
of

Minus 150 µm (No. 100) 6 ... ... ...

300 µm (No. 50) to No. 100 11 ... ... ...
600 µm (No. 30) to No. 50 26 100 4.2 1.1
1.18 mm (No. 16) to No. 30 25 100 4.8 1.2
2.36 mm (No. 8) to No. 16 17 100 8.0 1.4
un

4.75 mm (No. 4) to No. 8 11 100 11.2 1.2

9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) to No. 4 4 ... 11.2A 0.4
Totals 100.0 ... ... 5
Soundness Test of Coarse Aggregate
63 mm (2 1⁄2 in.) to 50 mm (2 in.)
50 mm (2 in.) to 37.5 mm (1 1⁄2 in.)
2825 g
1958 g J 2 1⁄2 to 1 1⁄2 in. 20 4783 4.8 1.0

37.5 mm (1 1⁄2 in.) to 25.0 mm (1 in.)

25 mm (1 in.) to 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.)
1012 g
513 g J 1 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 in. 45 1525 8.0 3.6

19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) to 12.5 mm (1⁄2 in.)

12.5 mm (in.) to 9.5 mm (in.)
675 g
333 g J ⁄ to 3⁄8 in.
34 23 1008 9.6 2.2

9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) to 4.75 mm (No. 4) 298 g 12 298 11.2 1.3

Totals 100 ... ... 8

A
The percentage loss (11.2 %) of the next smaller size is used as the percentage loss for this size, since this size contains less than 5 % of the original sample as received.
See 11.1.3.4.

Page 18 of 180
4
 C88 − 13
TABLE 2 Suggested Form for Qualitative Examination (with Illustrative Test Values)
Qualitative Examination of Coarse Sizes
Particles Exhibiting Distress
Total No. of
Splitting Crumbling Cracking Flaking
Sieve Size Particles
Before
No. % No. % No. % No. %
Test
63 mm (2 1⁄2 in.) to 37.5 2 7 ... ... 2 7 ... ... 29
mm (1 1⁄2 in.)
37.5 mm (1 1⁄2 in.) to 5 10 1 2 4 8 ... ... 50
19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.)

11.1.3 Weighted average calculated in accordance with Test
Method C136 from the percentage of loss for each fraction,
based on the grading of the sample as received for examination
or, preferably, on the average grading of the material from that
portion of the supply of which the sample is representative
test, and (2) the number of particles affected, classified as to
number disintegrating, splitting, crumbling, cracking, flaking,
etc., as shown in Table 2, and
11.1.6 Kind of solution (sodium or magnesium sulfate) and
whether the solution was freshly prepared or previously used.

y
except that: NOTE 10—Table 1, shown with test values inserted for purpose of
11.1.3.1 For fine aggregates (with less than 10 % coarser illustration, is a suggested form for recording test data. The test values
than the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) sieve), assume sizes finer than the

op
shown might be appropriate for either salt, depending on the quality of the
300-µm (No. 50) sieve to have 0 % loss and sizes coarser than aggregate.
the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) sieve to have the same loss as the next
smaller size for which test data are available. 12. Precision
11.1.3.2 For coarse aggregate (with less than 10 % finer 12.1 Precision—For coarse aggregate with weighted aver-
than the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve), assume sizes finer than the
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve to have the same loss as the next larger
size for which test data are available.
11.1.3.3 For an aggregate containing appreciable amounts
lc age sulfate soundness losses in the ranges of 6 to 16 % for
sodium and 9 to 20 % for magnesium, the precision indexes are
as follows:
Coefficient of Difference Between
of both fine and coarse material tested as two separate samples Variation Two Tests (D2S %),
ia
as required in 6.4, compute the weighted average losses (1S %), %A % of AverageA

separately for the minus No. 4 and plus No. 4 fractions based Multilaboratory:
on recomputed gradings considering the fine fraction as 100 % Sodium sulfate 41 116
fic

and the coarse fraction as 100 %. Report the results separately Magnesium sulfate 25 71
Single-Operator:
giving the percentage of the minus No. 4 and plus No. 4 Sodium sulfate 24 68
material in the initial grading. Magnesium sulfate 11 31
11.1.3.4 For the purpose of calculating the weighted
A
average, consider any sizes in 6.2 or 6.3 that contain less than These numbers represent, respectively, the (1S %) and (D2S %) limits as
of

described in Practice C670.

5 % of the sample to have the same loss as the average of the
next smaller and the next larger size, or if one of these sizes is
absent, to have the same loss as the next larger or next smaller
size, whichever is present.
un
12.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for this procedure, no state-
ment on bias is being made.

11.1.4 Report the weighted percentage loss to the nearest

whole number, 13. Keywords
11.1.5 In the case of particles coarser than 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) 13.1 aggregates; magnesium sulfate; sodium sulfate; sound-
before test: (1) The number of particles in each fraction before ness; weathering

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 19 of 180
5
 Designation: C117 − 13

Standard Test Method for

Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C117; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope 2.2 AASHTO Standard:

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the amount T11 Method of Test for Amount of Material Finer than
0.075-mm Sieve in Aggregate3

y
of material finer than a 75-µm (No. 200) sieve in aggregate by
washing. Clay particles and other aggregate particles that are
3. Summary of Test Method
dispersed by the wash water, as well as water-soluble materials,

op
will be removed from the aggregate during the test. 3.1 A sample of the aggregate is washed in a prescribed
manner, using either plain water or water containing a wetting
1.2 Two procedures are included, one using only water for
agent, as specified. The decanted wash water, containing
the washing operation, and the other including a wetting agent
suspended and dissolved material, is passed through a 75-µm
to assist the loosening of the material finer than the 75-µm (No.
(No. 200) sieve. The loss in mass resulting from the wash
200) sieve from the coarser material. Unless otherwise
specified, Procedure A (water only) shall be used.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
lc treatment is calculated as mass percent of the original sample
and is reported as the percentage of material finer than a 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve by washing.
ia
standard. 4. Significance and Use
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the 4.1 Material finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve can be
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the separated from larger particles much more efficiently and
fic

responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- completely by wet sieving than through the use of dry sieving.
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- Therefore, when accurate determinations of material finer than
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 75 µm in fine or coarse aggregate are desired, this test method
is used on the sample prior to dry sieving in accordance with
2. Referenced Documents
Test Method C136. The results of this test method are included
of

2.1 ASTM Standards:2 in the calculation in Test Method C136, and the total amount of
C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse material finer than 75 µm by washing, plus that obtained by dry
Aggregates sieving the same sample, is reported with the results of Test
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
un

Method C136. Usually, the additional amount of material finer

for Test Methods for Construction Materials
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2013. Published March 2013. Originally
approved in 1935. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as C117 – 04. DOI:
10.1520/C0117-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
than 75 µm obtained in the dry sieving process is a small
amount. If it is large, the efficiency of the washing operation
should be checked. It could also be an indication of degrada-
tion of the aggregate.
4.2 Plain water is adequate to separate the material finer
than 75 µm from the coarser material with most aggregates. In
some cases, the finer material is adhering to the larger particles,
such as some clay coatings and coatings on aggregates that
have been extracted from bituminous mixtures. In these cases,
the fine material will be separated more readily with a wetting
agent in the water.
3
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO), 444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 20 of 180
1
 C117 − 13
5. Apparatus and Materials
5.1 Balance—A balance or scale readable and accurate to
0.1 g or 0.1 % of the test load, whichever is greater, at any
point within the range of use.
5.2 Sieves—A nest of two sieves, the lower being a 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve and the upper a 1.18-mm (No. 16) sieve, both
conforming to the requirements of Specification E11.
5.3 Container—A pan or vessel of a size sufficient to
contain the sample covered with water and to permit vigorous
agitation without loss of any part of the sample or water.
5.4 Oven—An oven of sufficient size, capable of maintain-
ing a uniform temperature of 110 6 5 °C.
5.5 Wetting Agent—Any dispersing agent, such as liquid
dishwashing detergents, that will promote separation of the fine
materials.
NOTE 1—The use of a mechanical apparatus to perform the washing
operation is not precluded, provided the results are consistent with those
obtained using manual operations. The use of some mechanical washing
equipment with some samples may cause degradation of the sample.
6. Sampling
6.1 Sample the aggregate in accordance with Practice D75.
If the same test sample is to be tested for sieve analysis
according to Test Method C136, comply with the applicable
requirements of that test method.
6.2 Thoroughly mix the sample of aggregate to be tested
lc
ia
and reduce the quantity to an amount suitable for testing using
the applicable methods described in Practice C702. If the same
test sample is to be tested according to Test Method C136, the
minimum mass shall be as described in the applicable sections
fic
of that method. Otherwise, the mass of the test sample, after
drying, shall conform with the following:
Nominal Maximum SizeA Minimum Mass, g
of
4.75 mm (No. 4) or smaller 300
Greater than 4.75 mm (No. 4) 1000
to 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.)
Greater than 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 2500
to 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.)
un
Greater than 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) 5000
A
Based on sieve sizes meeting Specification E11.
7. Selection of Procedure
7.1 Procedure A shall be used, unless otherwise specified by
the Specification with which the test results are to be
compared, or when directed by the agency for which the work
is performed.
8. Procedure A—Washing with Plain Water
8.1 Dry the test sample in the oven to constant mass at a
temperature of 110 6 5 °C. Determine the mass to the nearest
0.1 % of the mass of the test sample.
8.2 If the applicable specification requires that the amount
passing the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve shall be determined on a
portion of the sample passing a sieve smaller than the nominal
maximum size of the aggregate, separate the sample on the
designated sieve and determine the mass of the material
2
passing the designated sieve to 0.1 % of the mass of this
portion of the test sample. Use this mass as the original dry
mass of the test sample in 10.1.
NOTE 2—Some specifications for aggregates with a nominal maximum
size of 50 mm or greater, for example, provide a limit for material passing
the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve determined on that portion of the sample
passing the 25.0-mm sieve. Such procedures are necessary since it is
impractical to wash samples of the size required when the same test
sample is to be used for sieve analysis by Test Method C136.
8.3 After drying and determining the mass, place the test
sample in the container and add sufficient water to cover it. No
detergent, dispersing agent, or other substance shall be added
to the water. Agitate the sample with sufficient vigor to result
in complete separation of all particles finer than the 75-µm (No.
200) sieve from the coarser particles, and to bring the fine
material into suspension. Immediately pour the wash water
containing the suspended and dissolved solids over the nested
y
sieves, arranged with the coarser sieve on top. Take care to
avoid, as much as feasible, the decantation of coarser particles
op
of the sample.
8.4 Add a second charge of water to the sample in the
container, agitate, and decant as before. Repeat this operation
until the wash water is clear.
NOTE 3—If mechanical washing equipment is used, the charging of
water, agitating, and decanting may be a continuous operation.
8.5 Return all material retained on the nested sieves by
flushing to the washed sample. Dry the washed aggregate in the
oven to constant mass at a temperature of 110 6 5 °C and
determine the mass to the nearest 0.1 % of the original mass of
the sample.
NOTE 4—Following the washing of the sample and flushing any
material retained on the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve back into the container, no
water should be decanted from the container except through the 75-µm
sieve, to avoid loss of material. Excess water from flushing should be
evaporated from the sample in the drying process.
9. Procedure B—Washing Using a Wetting Agent
9.1 Prepare the sample in the same manner as for Procedure
A.
9.2 After drying and determining the mass, place the test
sample in the container. Add sufficient water to cover the
sample, and add wetting agent to the water (Note 5). Agitate
the sample with sufficient vigor to result in complete separation
of all particles finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve from the
coarser particles, and to bring the fine material into suspension.
Immediately pour the wash water containing the suspended and
dissolved solids over the nested sieves, arranged with the
coarser sieve on top. Take care to avoid, as much as feasible,
the decantation of coarser particles of the sample.
NOTE 5—There should be enough wetting agent to produce a small
amount of suds when the sample is agitated. The quantity will depend on
the hardness of the water and the quality of the detergent. Excessive suds
may overflow the sieves and carry some material with them.
9.3 Add a second charge of water (without wetting agent) to
the sample in the container, agitate, and decant as before.
Repeat this operation until the wash water is clear.
9.4 Complete the test as for Procedure A.
Page 21 of 180
 C117 − 13
10. Calculation Program, with testing conducted by this test method and
10.1 Calculate the amount of material passing a 75-µm (No. AASHTO Method T 11T11Method of Test for Amount of
200) sieve by washing as follows: Material Finer than 0.075-mm Sieve in Aggregate3. The
significant differences between the methods at the time the data
A 5 @ ~ B 2 C ! /B # 3 100 (1) were acquired is that Method T 11T11Method of Test for
where: Amount of Material Finer than 0.075-mm Sieve in Aggregate3
A = percentage of material finer than a 75-µm (No. 200) required, while Test Method C117 prohibited, the use of a
sieve by washing, wetting agent. The data are based on the analyses of more than
B = original dry mass of sample, g, and 100 paired test results from 40 to 100 laboratories.
C = dry mass of sample after washing, g. 12.1.1 The precision values for fine aggregate in Table 1 are
based on nominal 500-g test samples. Revision of this test
11. Report method in 1994 permits the fine aggregate test sample size to
11.1 Report the following information: be 300 g minimum. Analysis of results of testing of 300-g and
11.1.1 Report the percentage of material finer than the 500-g test samples from Aggregate Proficiency Test Samples
75-µm (No. 200) sieve by washing to the nearest 0.1 %, except 99 and 100 (Samples 99 and 100 were essentially identical)
if the result is 10 % or more, report the percentage to the produced the precision values in Table 2, which indicates only
nearest whole number. minor differences due to test sample size.

y
11.1.2 Include a statement as to which procedure was used. NOTE 6—The values for fine aggregate in Table 1 will be revised to
reflect the 300-g test sample size when a sufficient number of Aggregate

12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision—The estimates of precision of this test
method listed in Table 1 are based on results from the
AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory Proficiency Sample
TABLE 1 Precision
op
Proficiency Tests have been conducted using that sample size to provide
reliable data.
12.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for the procedure in this test
method, no statement on bias is made.

Standard
Deviation (1s)A , %
lc
Acceptable Range
of two Results
(d2s)A , %
13. Keywords
13.1 aggregate; coarse aggregate; fine aggregate; grading;
loss by washing; 75 µm (No. 200) sieve; size analysis
ia
Coarse AggregateB
Single-Operator Precision 0.10 0.28 TABLE 2 Precision Data for 300-g and 500-g Test Samples
Multilaboratory Precision 0.22 0.62
Within Between
Fine AggregateC Fine Aggregate Proficiency Sample
Laboratory Laboratory
Single-Operator Precision 0.15 0.43
fic

Sample No. of
Multilaboratory Precision 0.29 0.82 Test Result Average 1s d2s 1s d2s
Size Labs
A
These numbers represent the (1s) and (d2s) limits as described in Practice AASHTO T11/ASTM 500 g 270 1.23 0.08 0.24 0.23 0.66
C670. C117
B
Precision estimates are based on aggregates having a nominal maximum size of Total material 300 g 264 1.20 0.10 0.29 0.24 0.68
19.0 mm (1⁄4 in.) with less than 1.5% finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve. passing the 75–µm
of

C
Precision estimates are based on fine aggregates having 1.0 to 3.0% finer than (No. 200) sieve by
the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve. washing (%)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
un

in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 22 of 180
3
 Designation: C123/C123M − 14 American Association State
Highway and Transportation Standard
AASHTO No.: T 113

Standard Test Method for

Lightweight Particles in Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C123/C123M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope C127 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the per- Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
centage of lightweight particles in aggregate by means of C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific

y
sink-float separation in a heavy liquid of suitable specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
gravity. C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing

op
Size
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units C1005 Specification for Reference Masses and Devices for
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in Determining Mass and Volume for Use in the Physical
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
Testing of Hydraulic Cements
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard. Some values have only SI units because the
inch-pound equivalents are not used in the practice.
NOTE 1—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Speci-
lc D3665 Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Ma-
terials
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
ia
fication E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for E100 Specification for ASTM Hydrometers
information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size.
1.3 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes 3. Terminology
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
fic

(excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered 3.1 For definitions of terms used in this test method, refer to
as requirements of the standard. Terminology C125.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
4. Significance and Use
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
of

responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. For a specific
hazard statement, see 6.1.4.
un
4.1 This test method is used to determine conformance with
provisions of Specification C33 pertaining to the amount of
lightweight material in fine and coarse aggregates. A heavy
liquid with a specific gravity of 2.0 is used to separate particles

which may be classified as coal or lignite. Heavier liquids are

2. Referenced Documents
to be used to check the percentages of other lightweight
2.1 ASTM Standards:2 particles such as chert and shale having a specific gravity less
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates than 2.40.
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates 4.2 The test method is useful in identifying porous aggre-
gate particles in research activities or in petrographic analyses.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 5. Apparatus
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 2014. Published January 2015. Originally
5.1 Balances—For determining the mass of fine aggregates,
approved in 1936. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as C123/C123M–12. a balance having a capacity of not less than 500 g, sensitive to
DOI: 10.1520/C0123_C0123M-14. at least 0.1 g: for determining the mass of coarse aggregate, a
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or balance having a capacity of not less than 5000 g, sensitive to
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on at least 1 g. Both balances shall conform to the accuracy
the ASTM website. criterion of the applicable sections of Specification C1005.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States

1 Page 23 of 180
 C123/C123M − 14
5.2 Containers suitable for drying the aggregate sample,
and containers suitable for holding the heavy liquid during the
sink-float separation.
5.3 Skimmer—A piece of 300-µm (No. 50) sieve cloth,
conforming to Specification E11, of suitable size and shape for
separating the floating particles from the heavy liquid.
5.4 Hot Plate or Oven.
5.5 Sieves, 300-µm (No. 50) and 4.75-mm (No. 4) conform-
ing to Specification E11.
5.6 Specific Gravity Measurement—A hydrometer conform-
ing to the physical requirement sections for individual hydrom-
eters of Specification E100, or a suitable combination of
graduated glassware and balance capable of measuring the
liquid specific gravity within 60.01.
6. Heavy Liquid
6.1 The heavy liquid shall be able to achieve the required
specific gravity and be readily removable from the sample. The
heavy liquid shall consist of one of the following (see 6.1.4):
6.1.1 A solution of zinc chloride in water (for a specific
gravity up to about 2.0).
6.1.2 A solution of zinc bromide in water (for a specific
gravity up to about 2.4).
6.1.3 A mixture of heavy organic liquids proportioned to
achieve the desired specific gravities (see Note 2).
lc
NOTE 2—Suggested liquids (and their specific gravities) include:
ia
tetrabromoethane (2.95), dibromoethane (2.70), 26 tetrachloroethane
(1.63), dichloromethane (1.33).
6.1.4 Warning—Chlorinated and brominated organic com-
fic
pounds are highly toxic and extremely dangerous to use and
emit toxic fumes when heated. They shall be used only in a
hood (preferably of the down-draft type) or out-of-doors, and
care shall be taken to avoid inhalation or contact with the eyes
or skin. They shall be handled only by personnel trained in
of
their use. Storage of these chemicals shall be in a secured
location. There is no particular hazard from the fumes of
zinc-chloride solution (6.1.1) or zinc-bromide solution (6.1.2)
un
but goggles and gloves shall be worn to prevent contact with
the eyes or skin.
6.1.5 A mixture of water soluble heavy inorganic liquids
proportioned to achieve the desired specific gravities (see Note
3).
NOTE 3—Suggested liquids (and their specific gravities) include, but are
not limited to, solutions of lithium metatungstate (2.95) and lithium
heteropolytungstates (2.85).
6.2 The specific gravity of the heavy liquid shall be main-
tained within 60.01 of the specified value at all times during
the test.
7. Sampling
7.1 Secure a field sample of the aggregate in accordance
with Practices D75 and D3665. Reduce the sample to test
portion size in accordance with Practice C702.
7.2 Dry the test portion to constant mass at a temperature of
110 6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F] before testing and sieve to remove
2 Page 24 of 180
the undersize material as specified in 8.1 and 8.2. The
minimum size of the test specimen shall be as follows:
Nominal Maximum Size Minimum Mass of
of Aggregate Sample, g [lb]
(square-opening sieves)
4.75 mm or smaller (No. 4 or smaller) 200 [0.5]
9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 1 500 [3]
12.5 to 19.0 mm (1⁄2 to 3⁄4 in.) 3 000 [7]
25 to 37.5 mm (1 to 11⁄2 in.) 5 000 [11]
50 mm or larger (2 in. or larger) 10 000 [22]
8. Procedure
8.1 Fine Aggregate—Allow the dried test specimen of fine
aggregate to cool to room temperature and then sieve over a
300-µm (No. 50) sieve until less than 1 % of the retained
material passes the sieve in 1 min of continuous sieving.
Determine the mass of the material coarser than the 300-µm
y
(No. 50) sieve to the nearest 0.1 g, and bring this material to a
saturated-surface-dry condition by means of the procedure
specified in Test Method C128 (see 8.1.1), then introduce it
op
into the heavy liquid (see 6.1.4) in a suitable container. The
volume of liquid shall be at least three times the absolute
volume of the aggregate. Pour the liquid, including the floating
particles, into a second container, passing it through the
skimmer, taking care that only the floating particles are poured
off with the liquid and that none of the fine aggregate that sinks
is decanted onto the skimmer. Return to the first container the
liquid that has been collected in the second container and, after
further agitation of the sample by stirring, repeat the decanting
process just described until the specimen is free of floating
particles. Wash the decanted particles contained on the skim-
mer in an appropriate solvent to remove the heavy liquid.
Alcohol is appropriate for the chlorinated and brominated
organic compounds and water for the zinc-chloride and zinc-
bromide solutions. After the decanted particles have been
washed, allow them to dry (see 8.1.2). Brush the dry decanted
particles from the skimmer onto the balance pan and determine
the mass to the nearest 0.1 g. If more precise determination is
required, the decanted particles shall be dried to constant mass
at 110 6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F] to determine the value of W1 used
for the calculation in 9.1 (see 8.1.3).
8.1.1 If the absorption as determined in accordance with
Test Method C128 is known, the fine aggregate is permitted to
be prepared for test by adding to a known mass of dry sand the
amount of water it will absorb, mixing thoroughly, and
permitting the sand to stand in a covered pan for 30 min before
use.
8.1.2 Drying shall take place in the hood or out-of-doors if
other than zinc chloride or zinc bromide is used. An oven or hot
plate is permitted to be used to accelerate the drying providing
that it is done in the hood or that the oven is forced-air
ventilated to the outside of the building and that a temperature
of 115 °C [240 °F] is not exceeded.
8.1.3 Normally the discrepancy between oven-dry mass and
saturated-surface-dry mass of the decanted particles will not
significantly affect the calculated percentage of light-weight
particles.
8.2 Coarse Aggregate—Allow the dried test specimen of
coarse aggregate to cool to room temperature and sieve over a
 C123/C123M − 14
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. Determine the mass of the material where:
coarser than the 4.75-m (No. 4) sieve to the nearest 1 g, and L = percentage by mass of lightweight particles,
bring to a saturated-surface-dry condition by means of the W1 = dry mass of particles that float,
procedure specified in Test Method C127; then introduce it into W2 = dry mass of portion of specimen coarser than 300-µm
the heavy liquid in a suitable container. The volume of liquid (No. 50) sieve, and
shall be at least three times the absolute volume of the W3 = dry mass of portion of specimen coarser than the
aggregate. Using the skimmer, remove the particles that float to 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve.
the surface, and save them. Repeatedly agitate the remaining 10. Report
particles, and remove the floating particles until no additional
10.1 Report the following information:
particles rise to the surface. Wash the particles which are
10.1.1 Identification of the aggregate as to source, type and
skimmed off in an appropriate solvent to remove the heavy
nominal maximum size,
liquid (see 8.1). After the heavy liquid has been removed, allow 10.1.2 The mass of the test sample used,
the particles to dry (see 8.1.2). Determine the mass of the 10.1.3 Type and specific gravity of heavy liquid used for the
decanted particles to the nearest 1 g. If a more precise test, and
determination is required, dry the particles to constant mass at 10.1.4 Percentage by mass of lightweight particles rounded
110 6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F] to determine the value of W1 used to nearest 0.1 %.

y
for the calculation in 9.1 (see 8.1.3).
11. Precision and Bias
9. Calculation 11.1 Precision—No interlaboratory or intralaboratory stud-

9.1 Calculate the percentage by mass of lightweight par-
ticles (particles floating on the heavy liquid) as follows:
For fine aggregate:
op
ies have been conducted using this test method to determine
precision indices. The committee is seeking pertinent data from
users of the test method.
11.2 Bias—Bias of the test method may be estimated by

For coarse aggregate:

L 5 ~ W 1 /W 2 ! 3 100 lc (1)
running separate specific gravity and absorption determinations
on individual particles of the separate sink, or float fractions, or
both.
12. Keywords
ia
L 5 ~ W 1 /W 3 ! 3 100 (2) 12.1 aggregate; heavy liquid; lightweight particles

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
fic

in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
of

responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
un

address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

3 Page 25 of 180
 Designation: C125 − 15

Standard Terminology Relating to

Concrete and Concrete Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C125; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* C143/C143M Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement

1.1 This standard is a compilation of definitions of terms as Concrete
they are used in standards under the jurisdiction of Committee C219 Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement
C09. C294 Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Con-

y
crete Aggregates
1.2 Other terminology under the jurisdiction of Committee C403/C403M Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete
C09 is included in two specialized standards. Terms relating to

op
Mixtures by Penetration Resistance
constituents of concrete aggregates are defined in Descriptive C494/C494M Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Nomenclature C294. Terms relating to constituents of aggre- Concrete
gates for radiation-shielding concrete are defined in Descrip- C511 Specification for Mixing Rooms, Moist Cabinets,
tive Nomenclature C638. Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the
1.3 Related terminology for hydraulic cement is included in
Terminology C219. Additionally, the American Concrete Insti-
tute (ACI) has a standard terminology for the concrete indus-
try.2 In the event of conflict between definitions in Terminology
lc Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes
C638 Descriptive Nomenclature of Constituents of Aggre-
gates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete
C939 Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-
C125 and definitions in the ACI standard terminology or in Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
ia
Terminology C219, definitions in Terminology C125 shall C1074 Practice for Estimating Concrete Strength by the
govern for Committee C09 standards. Maturity Method
1.4 When a term is used in an ASTM standard for which C1077 Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete
fic

Committee C09 is responsible, it is included herein only if used
in more than one Committee C09 standard.
NOTE 1—The subcommittee responsible for this standard will review
definitions on a five-year basis to determine if the definition is still
appropriate as stated. Revisions will be made when determined necessary.
of
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Testing Agency Evaluation
C1240 Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious
Mixtures
C1437 Test Method for Flow of Hydraulic Cement Mortar

The year shown in parentheses at the end of a definition indicates the year C1610/C1610M Test Method for Static Segregation of Self-
the definition or revision to the definition was approved. A letter R and a
Consolidating Concrete Using Column Technique
year indicate when the definition was reviewed. No date indicates the term
has not yet been reviewed. C1611/C1611M Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-
un

Consolidating Concrete
2. Referenced Documents E135 Terminology Relating to Analytical Chemistry for
2.1 ASTM Standards:3 Metals, Ores, and Related Materials
C94/C94M Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
3. Terms and Their Definitions
absorption, n—the process by which a liquid is drawn into and
1
This terminology is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on tends to fill permeable pores in a porous solid body; also, the
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.91 on Terminology. increase in mass of a porous solid body resulting from the
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2015. Published April 2015. Originally penetration of a liquid into its permeable pores. (R2008)
approved in 1936. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as C125–14. DOI: DISCUSSION—In the case of concrete and concrete aggregates, unless
10.1520/C0125-15.
2
otherwise stated, the liquid involved is water, the increase in mass is
Available from American Concrete Institute (ACI), P.O. Box 9094, Farmington
Hills, MI 48333-9094, http://www.terminology.concrete.org.
that which does not include water adhering to the outside surface, the
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or increase in mass is expressed as a percentage of the dry mass of the
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM body and the body is considered to be “dry” when it has been treated
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on by an appropriate process to remove uncombined water, such as drying
the ASTM website. to constant mass at a temperature between 100 and 110°C.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 26 of 180
1
 C125 − 15
accreditation, n—of testing agency, a process by which an
evaluation authority attests that a testing agency has dem-
onstrated the competency to perform specific tasks in accor-
dance with a standard. (2011)
admixture, n—a material other than water, aggregates, hydrau-
lic cementitious material, and fiber reinforcement that is
used as an ingredient of a cementitious mixture to modify its
freshly mixed, setting, or hardened properties and that is
added to the batch before or during its mixing. (R2008)
accelerating admixture, n—an admixture that increases the
rate of reaction of compounds in cementitious materials thus
reducing time of setting and increasing early strength devel-
opment of a cementitious mixture. (2014)
air-entraining admixture, n—admixture that causes the de-
velopment of a system of microscopic air bubbles in concrete
or mortar during mixing. (R2008)
chemical admixture, n—an admixture in the form of a liquid,
suspension, or water-soluble solid. (2014)
mineral admixture, n—deprecated term. (R2008)
DISCUSSION—This term has been used to refer to different types of
water insoluble, finely divided materials such as pozzolanic materials,
cementitious materials, and aggregate. These materials are not similar,
and it is not useful to group them under a single term. The name of the
specific material should be used, for example, use “pozzolan,” “slag
cement,” or “finely divided aggregate,” as is appropriate.
retarding admixture, n—an admixture that decreases the rate
of reaction of compounds in cementitious materials thus
lc
ia
increasing time of setting of a cementitious mixture. (2014)
water-reducing admixture, n—admixture that either in-
creases the slump of freshly mixed mortar or concrete without
fic
increasing the water content or that maintains the slump with a
reduced amount of water due to factors other than air entrain-
ment. (R2008)
water-reducing admixture, high-range, n—a water-reducing
admixture capable of producing at least 12 % reduction of
of
water content when tested in accordance with Specification
C494/C494M and meeting the other relevant requirements of
Specification C494/C494M. (R2008)
un
aggregate, n—granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed
stone, or iron blast-furnace slag, used with a cementing
medium to form hydraulic-cement concrete or mortar.
(R2008)
coarse aggregate, n—(1) aggregate predominantly retained
on the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve; or (2) that portion of an
aggregate retained on the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. (R2008)
DISCUSSION—The definitions are alternatives to be applied under
differing circumstances. Definition (1) is applied to an entire aggregate
either in a natural condition or after processing. Definition (2) is applied
to a portion of an aggregate. Requirements for properties and grading
should be stated in the specification.
fine aggregate, n—(1) aggregate passing the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.)
sieve and almost entirely passing the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve
and predominantly retained on the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve; or
(2) that portion of an aggregate passing the 4.75-mm (No. 4)
sieve and retained on the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve. (R2008)
DISCUSSION—The definitions are alternatives to be applied under
differing circumstances. Definition (1) is applied to an entire aggregate
2
either in a natural condition or after processing. Definition (2) is applied
to a portion of an aggregate. Requirements for properties and grading
should be stated in the specifications.
heavyweight aggregate, n—see high-density aggregate.
high-density aggregate, n—aggregate with relative density
greater than 3.3, such as: barite, magnetite, limonite, ilmenite,
iron, or steel. (R2008)
lightweight aggregate, n—see low-density aggregate.
low-density aggregate, n—aggregate with bulk density less
than 1120 kg/m3 [70 lb/ft3], such as: pumice, scoria, volcanic
cinders, tuff, and diatomite; expanded or sintered clay, shale,
slate, diatomaceous shale, perlite, vermiculite, or slag; and end
products of coal or coke combustion. (R2008)
normal-density aggregate, n—aggregate that is neither high
nor low density. (R2008)
y
DISCUSSION—This term refers to aggregate with relative density
typically ranging between 2.4 and 3.0, or with bulk density typically
ranging between 1120 kg/m3 [70 lb/ft3] and 1920 kg/m3 [120 lb/ft3].
op
normalweight aggregate, n—see normal-density aggregate.
air content, n—the volume of air voids in cement paste,
mortar, or concrete, exclusive of pore space in aggregate
particles, usually expressed as a percentage of total volume
of the paste, mortar, or concrete. (R2008)
air-cooled blast-furnace slag—see blast-furnace slag, air-
cooled.
air, entrained, n—air voids, typically between 10 and 1000 µm
(1 mm) in diameter and spherical or nearly so, that are
incorporated intentionally into a cementitious mixture dur-
ing mixing by use of an air entraining admixture. (2012)
DISCUSSION—Entrained air is used primarily to increase the durability
of cementitious mixtures exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing in
wet environments. Entrained air may affect workability and strength of
a hardened cementitious mixture.
air, entrapped, n—air voids, typically 1 mm or larger in size
and mainly irregular in shape, that are incorporated uninten-
tionally into a cementitious mixture during mixing and
handling. (2012)
air void—see void, air.
authority, evaluation, n—an independent entity, apart from
the testing agency being evaluated, that has the capability to
provide an unbiased evaluation of the technical activities of
concrete and concrete aggregates testing agencies. (2011)
DISCUSSION—Two acceptable methods of evaluation are inspection
and accreditation, and these services are offered by various evaluation
authorities.
blast-furnace slag, n—the nonmetallic product, consisting
essentially of silicates and aluminosilicates of calcium and
other bases, that is developed in a molten condition simul-
taneously with iron in a blast furnace. (R2008)
blast-furnace slag, air-cooled , n—the material resulting from
solidification of molten blast-furnace slag under atmospheric
conditions; subsequent cooling may be accelerated by appli-
cation of water to the solidified surface. (R2008)
Page 27 of 180
 C125 − 15
blast-furnace slag, expanded, n—the low density cellular
material obtained by controlled processing of molten blast-
furnace slag with water or water and other agents, such as
steam or compressed air or both. (R2011)
blast-furnace slag, granulated, n—the glassy, granular mate-
rial formed when molten blast-furnace slag is rapidly chilled,
as by immersion in water. (R2008)
bleeding, n—the autogenous flow of mixing water within, or
its emergence from, a newly placed cementitious mixture
caused by the settlement of the solid materials within the
mass. (R2013)
bulk density, n—of aggregate, the mass of a unit volume of
bulk aggregate material (the unit volume includes the
volume of the individual particles and the volume of the
voids between the particles). (R2008)
DISCUSSION—This term replaces the deprecated term unit weight—of
aggregate.
calcined, adj—heated to a temperature less than the melting
point so as to bring about a decomposition, phase transition,
or removal of a volatile fraction of a solid material. (2012)
calibration, n—of measuring instrument, a process that, under
specified conditions and following a standard procedure,
establishes metrological traceability by determining: (1) the
relationship between the quantity values provided by mea-
lc
surement standards or certified reference materials and the
ia
corresponding indications from a measuring instrument or
system; and (2) the estimated uncertainty of measurements
made subsequently with the instrument or system. (2011)
fic
DISCUSSION—Calibration takes into account systematic error (or bias)
of the measuring instrument or system as well as random error that is
associated with the use of the measurement instrument or system and
error associated with the measurement standards or certified reference
materials. Calibration should not be confused with an adjustment of a
of
measuring instrument or with verification of a measuring instrument.
Sometimes the first step alone is mistakenly called calibration, but
performing only the first step is the process of standardization. In tests
of concrete and concrete aggregates, standardization of measuring
un
instruments or systems is often sufficient.
cellular concrete—see concrete, cellular.
cement, hydraulic, n—a cement that sets and hardens by
chemical reaction with water and is capable of doing so
under water. (R2008)
cement, slag, n—granulated blast-furnace slag that has been
ground to cement fineness, with or without additions, and
that is a hydraulic cement. (2011)
cementitious material (hydraulic) , n—an inorganic material
or a mixture of inorganic materials that sets and develops
strength by chemical reaction with water by formation of
hydrates and is capable of doing so under water. (R2008)
cementitious material, supplementary, (SCM), n—an inor-
ganic material that contributes to the properties of a cemen-
titious mixture through hydraulic or pozzolanic activity, or
both. (2012)
3
DISCUSSION—Some examples of supplementary cementitious materi-
als are fly ash, silica fume, slag cement, rice husk ash, and natural
pozzolans. In practice, these materials are used in combination with
portland cement.
cementitious mixture, n—a mixture (mortar, concrete, or
grout) containing hydraulic cement. (R2008)
certification, n—of technician, a procedure to determine and
attest in writing that an individual is qualified to perform
specific test methods or practices. (2013)
compound, curing, n—a liquid that, when applied to the
surface of newly-placed concrete, forms a membrane that
impedes the evaporation of water and, in the case of white
pigmented compounds, reflects heat. (2010)
concrete, n—a composite material that consists essentially of a
binding medium within which are embedded particles or
y
fragments of aggregate; in hydraulic-cement concrete, the
binder is formed from a mixture of hydraulic cement and
op
water. (R2008)
concrete, cellular, n—a lightweight hydraulic-cement concrete
having a homogeneous void or cell structure attained using
gas-forming chemicals or foaming agents. (R2008)
concrete, fresh, n—concrete which possesses enough of its
original workability so that it can be placed and consolidated
by the intended methods. (R2008)
concrete, hardened, n—concrete that has developed sufficient
strength to serve some defined purpose or resist a stipulated
loading without failure. (R2008)
concrete, roller-compacted, RCC, n—concrete compacted
while fresh by a roller, often a vibratory roller. (R2008)
concrete, self-consolidating, SCC, n—concrete that can flow
around reinforcement and consolidate under its own weight
without additional effort and without exceeding specified
limits of segregation. (2010)
DISCUSSION—Project specifications shall indicate the acceptable seg-
regation based upon a specified test method. Test Method C1610/
C1610M provides a procedure for determining the degree of aggregate
segregation under static conditions and the Appendix of Test Method
C1611/C1611M describes a non-mandatory technique for assessing the
degree of segregation under flowing conditions.
consistency, n—of a fresh cementitious mixture, the relative
mobility or ability to flow. (2010)
DISCUSSION—This characteristic of fresh cementitious mixtures is
difficult to quantify and empirical test methods have been adopted to
provide indicators of consistency. For example, the slump test de-
scribed in Test Method C143/C143M is used for concrete, the flow
table method described in Test Method C1437 is used for mortar, and
the flow cone method described in Test Method C939 is used for grout.
consolidation, n—of cementitious mixtures, the process of
increasing the density of a fresh cementitious mixture in a
form, mold, or container by reducing the volume of voids.
(2009)
DISCUSSION—Except for self-consolidating concrete, consolidation
is accomplished by inputting mechanical energy, typically by rodding,
Page 28 of 180
 C125 − 15
tamping, tapping, vibration, or some combination of these actions.
Specific apparatus and methods for consolidation are defined in the
relevant C09 Standards.
crushed gravel—see gravel, crushed.
crushed stone—see stone, crushed.
curing, n—action taken to maintain moisture and temperature
conditions in a freshly-placed cementitious mixture to allow
hydraulic cement hydration and (if applicable) pozzolanic
reactions to occur so that the potential properties of the
mixture may develop. (2010)
curing compound—see compound, curing.
density, n—mass per unit volume of a material (preferred over
term unit weight). (2013)
DISCUSSION—For materials with pores that can become filled with
water, such as aggregate, different modifiers are applied to the term
density depending on which portions of the material are included in
defining the volume. The modifiers shown on the right are used:
Included in the Volume Modifier
Solid portion of material absolute
Solid portion of material plus impermeable pores apparent
Solid portion of material plus permeable and No modifier is used
impermeable pores
able pores.
lc
For example, the term apparent density would be the mass of the
solid material divided by the volume of solid material plus imperme-
If permeable pores are included in the volume, a delimiting term
(or an abbreviation) is used in parentheses to define the moisture
condition of the permeable pores when mass is measured. These de-
ia
limiting terms are oven-dry (OD) and saturated-surface-dry (SSD).
For example, the term density (SSD) would be the density of a po-
rous material in its SSD condition. The delimiting term is not used
fic
with absolute density or apparent density, because permeable
pores are not included in the defining volume.
density, relative, n—the ratio of the density of material at a
stated temperature to the density of distilled water at that
stated temperature; if a temperature is not stated, it is
of
assumed to be 23°C [73.5°F]. (2013)
DISCUSSION—As discussed for the term density, for a porous material
(such as aggregate), different modifiers and delimiting terms are used
for relative density depending on which density of the material is used
un
in calculating the ratio. For example, apparent relative density refers
to the ratio of apparent density to the density of water and relative
density (SSD) refers to the ratio of density (SSD) to the density of
water.
duration, impact, n—the time that the impactor used to
generate stress waves is in contact with the test surface; also
referred to as contact time. (2015)
elongated piece (of aggregate) , n—a particle of aggregate for
which the ratio of the length to width of its circumscribing
rectangular prism is greater than a specified value (see also
flat piece (of aggregate). (R2010)
engineer, licensed professional, n—an individual who is
licensed to practice engineering as defined by the statutory
requirements of the professional licensing laws of the
governing jurisdiction; also referred to as registered profes-
sional engineer. (2011)
entrained air—see air, entrapped.
4
entrapped air—see air, entrained.
examiner, n—(1) an individual with the requisite technical
qualifications to conduct and score impartially an examina-
tion of a person’s ability to perform specific test methods or
practices; (2) an individual designated by a certification body
to conduct and score certification examinations. (2011)
DISCUSSION—An individual who only supervises a multiple-choice
type of written examination but does not evaluate the competence of the
candidates to perform specific procedures is not considered an exam-
iner. The examiner requires requisite technical qualifications to exercise
judgment in scoring a candidate’s ability to perform a specific proce-
dure.
fibers, n—slender filaments, which may be discrete or in the
form of bundles, networks, or strands of natural or manu-
factured materials, which can be distributed uniformly
throughout a fresh cementitious mixture. (R2010)
y
fineness modulus, n—of aggregate, a factor obtained by
adding the percentages of material in the sample that is
op
coarser than each of the following sieves (cumulative
percentages retained), and dividing the sum by 100: 150- µm
(No. 100), 300-µm (No. 50), 600-µm (No. 30), 1.18-mm
(No. 16), 2.36-mm (No. 8), 4.75-mm (No. 4), 9.5-mm
(3⁄8-in.), 19.0-mm (3⁄4-in.), 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.), 75-mm (3-in.),
150-mm (6-in.). (R2010)
flat piece (of aggregate), n—a particle of aggregate for which
the ratio of the width to thickness of its circumscribing
rectangular prism is greater than a specified value (see also
elongated piece (of aggregate)). (R2010)
fly ash, n—the finely divided residue that results from the
combustion of ground or powdered coal and that is trans-
ported by flue gases from the combustion zone to the particle
removal system. (R2010)
fog room, n—a moist room in which the humidity is controlled
by atomization of water. (see moist room) (2011)
frequency, sampling, n—as applied to digital data acquisition
instruments, the rate at which the points that comprise the
waveform are recorded; the inverse of the sampling interval,
expressed in Hz or samples/s; also referred to as sampling
rate. (2015)
fresh concrete—see concrete, fresh.
granulated blast-furnace slag—see blast-furnace slag,
granulated.
gravel, n—coarse aggregate resulting from natural disintegra-
tion and abrasion of rock or processing of weakly bound
conglomerate. (see aggregate ) (2011)
gravel, crushed, n—the product resulting from the use of
mechanical devices to break gravel particles into smaller
fragments. (2014)
grout, n—a mixture of cementitious material and water, with or
without aggregate or admixtures, that is used primarily to fill
voids. (2011)
grout (nonshrink), hydraulic-cement, n—a hydraulic-cement
grout that produces a volume that, when hardened under
Page 29 of 180
 C125 − 15
stipulated test conditions, is greater than or equal to the
original installed volume, often used as a transfer medium
between load-bearing members. (R2010)
hardened concrete—see concrete, hardened.
hardening, n—gain of strength, and other properties, of a
cementitious mixture as a result of hydration that occurs
after final setting (for the definition of hydration, see
Terminology C219). (2011)
hydraulic cement—see cement, hydraulic.
inspection, laboratory, n—a comprehensive evaluation of a
testing agency that includes: (1) an examination of testing
equipment for conformance to applicable tolerances; (2) an
evaluation of the performance of test procedures for each
standard submitted by the testing agency for review; (3) a
review of the agency’s quality system based on criteria listed
in Practice C1077; and (4) a summary report that lists
deviations from the standards under review. (2011)
interval, sampling, n—as applied to digital data acquisition
instruments, the time difference between any two adjacent
points in a waveform. (2015)
laitance, n—a layer of weak material derived from cementi-
tious materials and aggregate fines carried to the surface of
a cementitious mixture by bleeding. (2011)
lime-saturated water, n—for curing test specimens, water
lc
containing calcium hydroxide at saturation level and in
ia
contact with solid calcium hydroxide so that saturation is
maintained. (R2010)
manufactured sand—see sand, manufactured.
fic
material, certified reference, n—a material, accompanied by
a certificate, one or more of whose property values are
certified by a procedure that establishes traceability to an
accurate realization of the unit in which property values are
of
expressed, and for which each certified property value is
accompanied by an uncertainty at a stated level of confi-
dence. (E135) (2011)
un
DISCUSSION—The certificate provides traceable values and associated
uncertainties of the properties of the material and must be retained with
the material.
material, consensus reference, n—a material whose proper-
ties are based on average values obtained in an interlabora-
tory study or proficiency testing program that involves the
use of standardized measurement systems. (2011)
DISCUSSION—Consensus reference materials can be used internally by
laboratories for periodic verification of measuring instruments or
measurement processes.
material, reference, n—material, sufficiently homogeneous
and stable with reference to specified properties, which has
been established to be fit for its intended use in measurement
or in examination of nominal properties. (VIM4) (2011)
4
International Vocabulary of Metrology—Basic and General Concepts and
Associated Terms (VIM), 3rd Ed., 2008. Developed by Joint Committee for Guides
in Metrology, www.iso.org/sites/JCGM/JCGM-Introduction.htm.
5
maturity, n—the extent of the development of a property of a
cementitious mixture. (R2010)
DISCUSSION—This term is usually used to describe the extent of
relative strength development of concrete. However, the term can also
be applied to the evolution of other properties which are dependent on
the chemical reactions which occur in the cementitious materials. At
any age, maturity is dependent on the curing history. (R2010)
maturity function, n—a mathematical expression which uses
the measured temperature history of a cementitious mixture
during the curing period to calculate an index that is
indicative of the maturity at the end of that period. (R2010)
maturity index, n—an indicator of maturity which is calcu-
lated from the temperature history of the cementitious
mixture by using a maturity function. (R2010)
DISCUSSION—The calculated index is indicative of maturity provided
there has been a sufficient supply of water for hydration or pozzolanic
y
reaction of the cementitious materials during the time interval used in
the calculation. Two widely used maturity indexes are the temperature-
time factor and the equivalent age. See Practice C1074.
op
maximum size (of aggregate), n—in specifications for, or
description of aggregate, the smallest sieve opening through
which the entire amount of aggregate is required to pass.
(R2010)
method, impact-echo, n—nondestructive test method based on
the use of a short-duration mechanical impact to generate
transient stress waves and the use of a broadband receiving
transducer placed adjacent to the impact point. (2015)
moist room, n—an enclosed room for storage and curing of
paste, mortar, and concrete specimens in which temperature
and high relative humidity can be controlled within specified
limits. (see Specification C511) (R2010)
nominal maximum size (of aggregate), n—in specifications
for, or description of aggregate, the smallest sieve opening
through which the entire amount of the aggregate is permit-
ted to pass. (R2010)
DISCUSSION—Specifications on aggregates usually stipulate a sieve
opening through which all of the aggregate may, but need not, pass so
that a stated maximum proportion of the aggregate may be retained on
that sieve. A sieve opening so designated is the nominal maximum size
of the aggregate.
oven-dry, adj—the condition that results when a specimen is
dried by heating in an oven at 110 6 5°C [230 610°F] for
sufficient time to reach constant mass as defined by the test
method. (2013)
period, sampling, n—the duration of the waveform, which
equals the number of points in the waveform multiplied by
the sampling interval; also referred to as record length.
(2015)
plate, n—as applied to stress-wave testing, any prismatic
structure where the lateral dimensions are at least six times
the thickness. (2015)
pores, impermeable, n—those spaces in a specimen that do
not become filled with water when the specimen is sub-
merged for a prescribed time. (2013)
Page 30 of 180
 C125 − 15
DISCUSSION—For a material composed of particles, such as aggregate,
the term pores refers to the spaces within particles. The spaces between
particles are called voids. See bulk density of aggregate.
pores, permeable, n—those spaces in a specimen that become
filled with water when the specimen is submerged for a
prescribed time. (2013)
pozzolan, n—a siliceous or siliceous and aluminous material
that in itself possesses little or no cementitious value but
will, in finely divided form and in the presence of water,
chemically react with calcium hydroxide at ordinary tem-
peratures to form compounds possessing cementitious prop-
erties. (2012)
pozzolan, natural, n—a raw or calcined naturally occurring
material that behaves as a pozzolan. (2012)
DISCUSSION—Examples of natural pozzolans include volcanic ash,
tuff, pumicite, opaline chert, opaline shale, metakaolin, and diatoma-
ceous earth.
rate, sampling, n—see frequency, sampling.
rodding, n—consolidation of a fresh cementitious mixture by
repeated insertion of a rod. (2009)
roller-compacted concrete, RCC—see concrete, roller-
compacted.
sand, n—fine aggregate resulting from natural disintegration
and abrasion of rock or processing of completely friable
lc
sandstone. (R2012)
ia
sand, manufactured, n—fine aggregate produced by crushing
rock, gravel, iron blast-furnace slag, or hydraulic-cement
concrete. (R2012)
fic
saturated-lime water, n—see lime-saturated water.
saturated-surface-dry (SSD), adj—the condition in which the
permeable pores of a specimen are filled with water to the
of
extent achieved by submerging the specimen for a prescribed
time, but without free water on the surface. (2013)
segregation, n—the unintentional separation of the constitu-
un
ents of concrete or particles of an aggregate, causing a lack
of uniformity in their distribution. (R2012)
self-consolidating concrete, SCC—see concrete, self-
consolidating.
setting, n—the process, due to chemical reactions, occurring
after the addition of mixing water, that results in a gradual
development of rigidity of a cementitious mixture. (R2012)
shotcrete, n—a mortar or concrete that is projected pneumati-
cally at high velocity onto a surface. (2013)
shotcrete, dry-mix, n—shotcrete in which most of the mixing
water is added at the nozzle. (2013)
shotcrete, wet-mix, n—shotcrete in which most of the
ingredients, including water, are mixed before introduction into
the delivery hose. (2013)
shrinkage, chemical, n—the reduction in volume of cementi-
tious paste that occurs during hydration because the reaction
6
products occupy less volume occupied originally by the
water and unreacted cementitious materials. (2015)
shrinkage, autogenous, n—the reduction in bulk volume that
occurs during hydration due to chemical shrinkage within a
sealed cementitious mixture, not subjected to external forces
and under constant temperature, measured typically from the
time of final setting. (2015)
DISCUSSION—The word "sealed" means that exterior water is not able
to travel to the interior and fill the empty pores resulting from chemical
shrinkage. The formation of partially water-filled internal pores (see
self-desiccation) results in menisci that give rise to internal tensile
stresses that cause the bulk shrinkage. While autogenous shrinkage
results from chemical shrinkage, the magnitude of autogenous shrink-
age is less than the chemical shrinkage after setting occurs because the
aggregate particles and the hydrated cement paste network restrain the
shrinkage. The restraint may, in turn, lead to cracking.
self-desiccation, n—the reduction in the internal relative
y
humidity of a sealed cementitious mixture, due to chemical
shrinkage, that may reduce the rate of hydration or stop
hydration. (2015)
op
silica fume, n—very fine pozzolanic material, composed
mostly of amorphous silica produced by electric arc furnaces
as a by-product of the production of elemental silicon or
ferro-silicon alloys (also known as condensed silica fume or
microsilica). (C1240) (2013)
slag cement—see cement, slag.
slump flow, n—the average diameter of the spread concrete
mass, obtained from two measurements perpendicular to
each other, after a self-consolidating concrete has ceased to
flow during a slump-flow test. (R2012)
DISCUSSION—Slump flow of self-consolidating concrete is measured
using Test Method C1611/C1611M.
specific gravity, n—see preferred term, density, relative.
(2013)
DISCUSSION—The term specific gravity has been defined as the ratio
of mass of a volume of a material at a stated temperature to the mass
of the same volume of distilled water at that stated temperature. This
dimensionless quantity is the same as relative density. The term
relative density is preferred because it is more descriptive of its
meaning. Some C09 standards use the terminology relative density
(specific gravity) to assist in the transition to the preferred term.
spectrum, amplitude, n—a plot of relative amplitude versus
frequency that is obtained from the waveform or time-
domain data using a Fourier transform technique. (2015)
DISCUSSION—The peaks in the amplitude spectrum correspond to the
dominant frequencies in the time-domain data.
stability, n—of self-consolidating concrete (SCC), the ability
of self-consolidating concrete to resist separation of the paste
from the aggregates. (R2012)
standard, measurement, n—a measuring system, material
measure, or certified reference material providing embodi-
ment of the definition of a measurement unit, with stated
quantity value and its measurement uncertainty. (2011)
DISCUSSION—A measurement standard is used frequently as a refer-
ence to assign measurement results to other quantities, thereby estab-
lishing metrological traceability through calibration of other measure-
ment standards, instruments, or systems.
Page 31 of 180
 C125 − 15
standard, reference—an object or device for which properties
are sufficiently well established to be used for standardiza-
tion of an apparatus or for assessment of a measurement
method. (2011)
standardization, n—of measuring instrument, a process that,
under specified conditions and following a standard
procedure, establishes: (1) the relationship between the
quantity values provided by reference standards or reference
materials and the corresponding indications from a measur-
ing instrument or system; or (2) the adjustment to be applied
to test equipment when its performance is compared to that
of an accepted standard or process. (2011)
DISCUSSION—Standardization in case (1) is a simplified form of
calibration that accounts for systematic error (bias) but does not
evaluate random error. Standardization, therefore, does not address all
of the elements of uncertainty of measurement and does not lead to
traceable measurements. An example of case (2) standardization is
adjusting the number of blows of a mechanically-operated hammer so
it applies the same energy as a specified number of blows of a
manually-operated hammer.
stone, crushed, n—the product resulting from the use of
mechanical devices to break rocks, boulders, or large cobble-
stones into smaller fragments. (2014)
supplementary cementitious material, (SCM)—see cementi-
tious material, supplementary, (SCM).
tamping, n—consolidation of a fresh cementitious mixture by
repeated blows to the surface of the mixture with a specified
lc
ia
tool. (2013)
tapping, n—striking the side of a mold to close voids in a fresh
cementitious mixture created by rodding or an internal
fic
vibrator. (2009)
test, acceptance, n—a test performed to determine whether an
individual lot of a product conforms to specified require-
ments. (2011)
of
test, check, n—a test performed on a new specimen for
comparison against a previous test result. (2014)
DISCUSSION—Standards may require a new sample be obtained to
un
prepare the specimen for the check test, or they may permit the new
specimen to be made from the same sample. For example, Specification
C94/C94M permits a check test on a new sample for comparison
against a preliminary test result obtained from a sample taken near the
start of discharge.
testing, proficiency, n—a process in which an organization
distributes homogenous samples of a material for testing by
participating testing agencies for the purpose of comparing,
on an anonymous basis, the relative testing performance of
the testing agencies. (2011)
time of setting, n—the elapsed time from the addition of
mixing water to a cementitious mixture until the mixture
reaches a specified degree of rigidity as measured by a
specific procedure. (R2012)
DISCUSSION—Development of rigidity during setting is a gradual and
continuous process, and the time of setting is defined arbitrarily in
terms of a given test method. For cementitious mixtures, time of setting
is usually defined as the elapsed time to attain a specified level of
resistance to penetration by a probe. For example, the time of initial
7
setting of concrete is determined by Test Method C403/C403M and is
defined as the elapsed time, after initial contact of cement and water, for
the mortar sieved from the concrete to reach a penetration resistance of
500 psi [3.5 MPa].
time of final setting (of concrete), n—the elapsed time, after
initial contact of cement and water, required for the mortar
sieved from the concrete to reach a penetration resistance of
4000 psi [27.6 MPa]. (C403/C403M). (R2012)
time of initial setting (of concrete), n—the elapsed time, after
initial contact of cement and water, required for the mortar
sieved from the concrete to reach a penetration resistance of
500 psi [3.5 MPa]. (C403/C403M). (R2012)
traceability, metrological, n—property of a measurement
result whereby the result can be related to a reference
through a documented unbroken chain of calibrations, each
contributing to the measurement uncertainty. (VIM4) (2011)
y
transform, Fourier, n—a numerical technique used to convert
digital data from the time domain to the frequency domain
op
and used in stress-wave or chemical spectroscopy methods.
(2015)
unit weight, n—of aggregate, deprecated term—use preferred
term bulk density—of aggregate. (2013)
verification, n—of measuring instrument, the process of ob-
taining objective evidence to confirm that values indicated
by a measuring instrument or system are within a specified
range of known values of a reference standard. (2013)
vibration, n—agitation of a fresh cementitious mixture by an
internal or external vibrating device to assist in consolidating
the mixture in a form, mold, or container. (2009)
void, air , n—a space in a cementitious mixture that is filled
with air (see air, entrained and air, entrapped). (2012)
water-cement ratio, n—the ratio of the mass of water, exclud-
ing water absorbed by the aggregates, to the mass of portland
cement in a cementitious mixture, stated as a decimal (see
also water-cementitious material ratio). (2015)
DISCUSSION—This term, abbreviated as w/c, is applicable to cemen-
titious mixtures that contain only portland cement as the cementitious
material. For cementitious mixtures containing blended hydraulic
cement, or a combination of portland cement and separate addition of
supplementary cementitious materials, use the term water-
cementitious material ratio.
water-cementitious material ratio, n—the ratio of the mass of
water, excluding water absorbed by the aggregates, to the
mass of cementitious material (hydraulic) in a cementitious
mixture, stated as a decimal (see also water-cement ratio).
(2015)
DISCUSSION—This term, abbreviated as w/cm, is applicable to cemen-
titious mixtures that contain cementitious material other than only
portland cement, such as a blended hydraulic cement, or a combination
of portland cement and separate addition of other supplementary
cementitious materials. If portland cement is the only cementitious
material contained in the cementitious mixture, use the term water-
cement ratio..
waveform, n—a recorded digital signal from a transducer that
is a plot of voltage versus time. (2015)
Page 32 of 180
 C125 − 15
workability, n—of concrete, that property of freshly mixed 4. Keywords
concrete that affects the ease with which it can be mixed, 4.1 aggregates; concrete; definitions; terminology
placed, consolidated, and struck off. (2014)

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (C125 – 14)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved Feb. 1, 2015.)

(1) Revised the definitions for water-cement ratio and water- echo; period, sampling; plate; rate, sampling; self-
cementitious material ratio. desiccation; shrinkage, autogenous; shrinkage, chemical;
(2) Added definitions for the terms duration, impact; spectrum, amplitude; transform, Fourier; and waveform.
frequency, sampling; interval, sampling; method, impact-

y
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the

op
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website

lc
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/
ia
fic
of
un

Page 33 of 180
8
 Designation: C127 − 15

Standard Test Method for

Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C127; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-

1.1 This test method covers the determination of relative gregates
C128 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

y
density (specific gravity) and the absorption of coarse aggre-
gates. The relative density (specific gravity), a dimensionless and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
quantity, is expressed as oven-dry (OD), saturated-surface-dry C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

op
(SSD), or as apparent relative density (apparent specific Aggregates
gravity). The OD relative density is determined after drying the C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Struc-
aggregate. The SSD relative density and absorption are deter- tural Concrete
mined after soaking the aggregate in water for a prescribed C332 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulat-
duration. ing Concrete
1.2 This test method is not intended to be used with
lightweight aggregates that comply with Specification C332
Group I aggregates.
lc C566 Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
ia
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this Size
standard. D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D448 Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and
fic

1.4 The text of this test method references notes and

footnotes that provide explanatory material. These notes and Bridge Construction
footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
considered as requirements of this test method. Sieves
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the 2.2 AASHTO Standard:
of

safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the AASHTO T 85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- Aggregate3
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
3. Terminology
un

bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.

3.1 For definition of terms used in this standard, refer to
2. Referenced Documents Terminology C125.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C29/C29M Test Method for Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) 4. Summary of Test Method
and Voids in Aggregate 4.1 A sample of aggregate is immersed in water for 24 6 4
h to essentially fill the pores. It is then removed from the water,
the water dried from the surface of the particles, and the mass
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on determined. Subsequently, the volume of the sample is deter-
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates. mined by the displacement of water method. Finally, the
Current edition approved Jan. 1, 2015. Published March 2015. Originally sample is oven-dried and the mass determined. Using the mass
approved in 1936. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as C127–12. DOI:
10.1520/C0127-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
3
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Officials (AASHTO), 444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001,
the ASTM website. http://www.transportation.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 34 of 180
1
 C127 − 15
values thus obtained and formulas in this test method, it is
possible to calculate relative density (specific gravity) and
absorption.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Relative density (specific gravity) is the ratio of mass of
an aggregate to the mass of a volume of water equal to the
volume of the aggregate particles – also referred to as the
absolute volume of the aggregate. It is also expressed as the
ratio of the density of the aggregate particles to the density of
water. Distinction is made between the density of aggregate
particles and the bulk density of aggregates as determined by
Test Method C29/C29M, which includes the volume of voids
between the particles of aggregates.
5.2 Relative density is used to calculate the volume occu-
pied by the aggregate in various mixtures containing aggregate,
including hydraulic cement concrete, bituminous concrete, and
other mixtures that are proportioned or analyzed on an absolute
volume basis. Relative density (specific gravity) is also used in
the computation of voids in aggregate in Test Method C29/
C29M. Relative density (specific gravity) (SSD) is used if the
aggregate is in a saturated-surface-dry condition, that is, if its
absorption has been satisfied. Alternatively, the relative density
(specific gravity) (OD) is used for computations when the
aggregate is dry or assumed to be dry. lc
5.3 Apparent relative density (specific gravity) pertain to the
solid material making up the constituent particles not including
ia
the pore space within the particles that is accessible to water.
5.4 Absorption values are used to calculate the change in the
mass of an aggregate due to water absorbed in the pore spaces
within the constituent particles, compared to the dry condition,
fic
when it is deemed that the aggregate has been in contact with
water long enough to satisfy most of the absorption potential.
The laboratory standard for absorption is that obtained after
submerging dry aggregate for a prescribed period of time.
of
Aggregates mined from below the water table commonly have
a moisture content greater than the absorption determined by
this test method, if used without opportunity to dry prior to use.
Conversely, some aggregates that have not been continuously
un
maintained in a moist condition until used are likely to contain
an amount of absorbed moisture less than the 24-h soaked
condition. For an aggregate that has been in contact with water
and that has free moisture on the particle surfaces, the
percentage of free moisture is determined by deducting the
absorption from the total moisture content determined by Test
Method C566.
5.5 The general procedures described in this test method are
suitable for determining the absorption of aggregates that have
had conditioning other than the 24-h soak, such as boiling
water or vacuum saturation. The values obtained for absorption
by other test methods will be different than the values obtained
by the prescribed soaking, as will the relative density (specific
gravity) (SSD).
6. Apparatus
6.1 Balance—A device for determining mass that is
sensitive, readable, and accurate to 0.05 % of the sample mass
2
at any point within the range used for this test, or 0.5 g,
whichever is greater. The balance shall be equipped with
suitable apparatus for suspending the sample container in water
from the center of the platform or pan of the balance.
6.2 Sample Container—A wire basket of 3.35 mm (No. 6) or
finer mesh, or a bucket of approximately equal breadth and
height, with a capacity of 4 to 7 L for 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.)
nominal maximum size aggregate or smaller, and a larger
container as needed for testing larger maximum size aggregate.
The container shall be constructed so as to prevent trapping air
when the container is submerged.
6.3 Water Tank—A watertight tank into which the sample
container is placed while suspended below the balance.
6.4 Sieves—A 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve or other sizes as
needed (see 7.2 – 7.4), conforming to Specification E11.
y
6.5 Oven—An oven of sufficient size, capable of maintain-
ing a uniform temperature of 110 6 5 °C (230 6 9 °F).
op
7. Sampling
7.1 Sample the aggregate in accordance with Practice D75.
7.2 Thoroughly mix the sample of aggregate and reduce it to
the approximate quantity needed using the applicable proce-
dures in Practice C702. Reject all material passing a 4.75-mm
(No. 4) sieve by dry sieving and thoroughly washing to remove
dust or other coatings from the surface. If the coarse aggregate
contains a substantial quantity of material finer than the
4.75-mm sieve (such as for Size No. 8 and 9 aggregates in
Classification D448), use the 2.36-mm (No. 8) sieve in place of
the 4.75-mm sieve. Alternatively, separate the material finer
than the 4.75-mm sieve and test the finer material according to
Test Method C128.
NOTE 1—If aggregates smaller than 4.75 mm (No. 4) are used in the
sample, check to ensure that the size of the openings in the sample
container is smaller than the minimum size aggregate.
7.3 The minimum mass of test sample to be used is given as
follows. Testing the coarse aggregate in several size fractions is
permitted. If the sample contains more than 15 % retained on
the 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.) sieve, test the material larger than 37.5
mm in one or more size fractions separately from the smaller
size fractions. When an aggregate is tested in separate size
fractions, the minimum mass of test sample for each fraction
shall be the difference between the masses prescribed for the
maximum and minimum sizes of the fraction.
Nominal Maximum Size, Minimum Mass of Test
mm (in.) Sample, kg (lb)
12.5 (1⁄2 ) or less 2 (4.4)
19.0 (3⁄4 ) 3 (6.6)
25.0 (1) 4 (8.8)
37.5 (11⁄2 ) 5 (11)
50 (2) 8 (18)
63 (21⁄2 ) 12 (26)
75 (3) 18 (40)
90 (31⁄2 ) 25 (55)
100 (4) 40 (88)
125 (5) 75 (165)
7.4 If the sample is tested in two or more size fractions,
determine the grading of the sample in accordance with Test
Method C136, including the sieves used for separating the size
fractions for the determinations in this method. In calculating
Page 35 of 180
 C127 − 15
the percentage of material in each size fraction, ignore the
quantity of material finer than the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve (or
2.36-mm (No. 8) sieve when that sieve is used in accordance
with 7.2).
NOTE 2—When testing coarse aggregate of large nominal maximum
size requiring large test samples, it may be more convenient to perform the
test on two or more subsamples, and the values obtained combined for the
computations described in Section 9.
8. Procedure
8.1 Dry the test sample in the oven to constant mass at a
temperature of 110 6 5 °C, cool in air at room temperature for
1 to 3 h for test samples of 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.) nominal
maximum size, or longer for larger sizes until the aggregate has
cooled to a temperature that is comfortable to handle (approxi-
mately 50 °C). Subsequently immerse the aggregate in water at
to 3 h, or until the aggregate has cooled to a temperature that
is comfortable to handle (approximately 50 °C), and determine
the mass.
9. Calculations
9.1 Relative Density (Specific Gravity):
9.1.1 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (OD)—Calculate
the relative density (specific gravity) on the basis of oven-dry
aggregate as follows:
Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ OD! 5 A/ ~ B 2 C ! (1)
where:
A = mass of oven-dry test sample in air, g,
B = mass of saturated-surface-dry test sample in air, g, and
C = apparent mass of saturated test sample in water, g.
9.1.2 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (SSD)—Calculate

y
room temperature for a period of 24 6 4 h. When Specification
C330 or Specification C332 Group II lightweight aggregates the relative density (specific gravity) on the basis of saturated-
surface-dry aggregate as follows:

op
are used, immerse the aggregate in water at room temperature
for a period of 72 6 4 h, stirring for at least one minute every Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ SSD! 5 B/ ~ B 2 C ! (2)
24 h.
9.1.3 Apparent Relative Density (Specific Gravity)—
8.2 When the absorption and relative density (specific Calculate the apparent relative density (specific gravity) as
gravity) values are to be used in proportioning concrete follows:
mixtures in which the aggregates will be in their naturally
moist condition, the requirement in 8.1 for initial drying is
optional, and, if the surfaces of the particles in the sample have
been kept continuously wet until tested, the requirement in 8.1
lc Apparent relative density ~ specific gravity! 5 A/ ~ A 2 C !

9.2 Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Values—If

the sample is tested in separate size fractions, compute the
(3)
ia
for 24 6 4 h or 72 6 4 h soaking is also optional. average values for relative density (specific gravity) of the size
fraction computed in accordance with 9.1 using the following
NOTE 3—Values for absorption and relative density (specific gravity)
equation:
(SSD) may be significantly higher for aggregate not oven dried before
fic

soaking than for the same aggregate treated in accordance with 8.1. This 1
is especially true of particles larger than 75 mm since the water may not G5
P1
~ see Appendix X1 ! (4)
P2 Pn
be able to penetrate the pores to the center of the particle in the prescribed 1 1…
soaking period. 100 G 1 100 G 2 100 G n

8.3 Remove the test sample from the water and roll it in a where:
of

large absorbent cloth until all visible films of water are
removed. Wipe the larger particles individually. A moving
stream of air is permitted to assist in the drying operation. Take
care to avoid evaporation of water from aggregate pores during
un
G = average relative density (specific gravity).
All forms of expression of relative density
(specific gravity) can be averaged in this
manner,

the surface-drying operation. Determine the mass of the test
sample in the saturated surface-dry condition. Record this and
all subsequent masses to the nearest 0.5 g or 0.05 % of the
sample mass, whichever is greater.
8.4 After determining the mass in air, immediately place the
saturated-surface-dry test sample in the sample container and
determine its apparent mass in water at 23 6 2.0 °C. Take care
to remove all entrapped air before determining its mass by
shaking the container while immersed.
NOTE 4—The difference between the mass in air and the mass when the
sample is submerged in water equals the mass of water displaced by the
sample.
NOTE 5—The container should be immersed to a depth sufficient to
cover it and the test sample while determining the apparent mass in water.
Wire suspending the container should be of the smallest practical size to
minimize any possible effects of a variable immersed length.
8.5 Dry the test sample in the oven to constant mass at a
temperature of 110 6 5 °C, cool in air at room temperature 1
G1, G2... Gn = appropriate average relative density (specific
gravity) values for each size fraction depend-
ing on the type of relative density (specific
gravity) being averaged, and
P1, P2, ... Pn = mass percentages of each size fraction pres-
ent in the original sample (not including finer
material—see 7.4).
9.3 Absorption—Calculate the percentage of absorption, as
follows:
Absorption, % 5 @ ~ B 2 A ! /A # 3 100 (5)
9.4 Average Absorption Value—If the sample is tested in
separate size fractions, the average absorption value is the
average of the values as computed in 9.3, weighted in
proportion to the mass percentages of each size fraction present
in the original sample (not including finer material—see 7.4) as
follows:
A 5 ~ P 1 A 1 /100! 1 ~ P 2 A 2 /100! 1… ~ P n A n /100! (6)

Page 36 of 180
3
 C127 − 15
where: TABLE 1 Precision
A = average absorption, %, Acceptable Range of
Standard Deviation Two Results (d2s)A
A1, A2 ... An = absorption percentages for each size
Single-Operator Precision:
fraction, and Relative density (specific gravity) 0.009 0.025
P1, P2, ... Pn = mass percentages of each size fraction pres- (OD)
ent in the original sample. Relative density (specific gravity) 0.007 0.020
(SSD)
10. Report Apparent relative density (specific 0.007 0.020
gravity)
10.1 Report relative density (specific gravity) results to the
Multilaboratory Precision:
nearest 0.01 and indicate the basis for relative density (specific Relative density (specific gravity) 0.013 0.038
gravity) as either (OD), (SSD), or apparent. (OD)
Relative density (specific gravity) 0.011 0.032
10.2 Report the absorption result to the nearest 0.1 %. (SSD)
Apparent relative density (specific 0.011 0.032
10.3 If the relative density (specific gravity) and absorption gravity)
values were determined without first drying the aggregate, as A
These numbers represent the (d2s) limits as described in Practice C670. The
permitted in 8.2, note that fact in the report. precision estimates were obtained from the analysis of combined AASHTO
Materials Reference Laboratory proficiency sample data from laboratories using

y
11. Precision and Bias 15 h minimum saturation times and other laboratories using 24 ± 4 h saturation
times. Testing was performed on normal-weight aggregates, and started with
11.1 The estimates of precision of this test method listed in aggregates in the oven-dry condition.

op
Table 1 are based on results from the AASHTO Materials
Reference Laboratory Proficiency Sample Program, with test-
ing conducted by this test method and AASHTO Method T 85.
The significant difference between the methods is that Test 11.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material for
Method C127 requires a saturation period of 24 6 4 h, while determining the bias for the procedure in this test method, no
AASHTO Method T 85 requires a saturation period of 15 h
minimum. This difference has been found to have an insignifi-
cant effect on the precision indices. The data are based on the
analyses of more than 100 paired test results from 40 to 100
lc statement on bias is being made.

12. Keywords
12.1 absorption; aggregate; apparent relative density; coarse
laboratories. aggregate; relative density; specific gravity
ia
APPENDIXES
fic

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. DEVELOPMENT OF EQUATIONS

of

X1.1 The derivation of the equation is from the following 1

G5 (X1.3)
simplified cases using two solids. Solid 1 has a mass M1 in
grams and a volume V1 in millilitres; its relative density
M1
M 1 1M 2 S D
V1
M1
1
M2
M 1 1M 2 S D
V2
M2
un

(specific gravity) (G1) is therefore M1/V1. Solid 2 has a mass M However, the mass fractions of the two solids are:
2 and volume V2, and G2 = M2/V2. If the two solids are
M 1 / ~ M 1 1M ! 5 P 1 /100 and M 2 / ~ M 1 1M 2 ! 5 P 2 /100 (X1.4)
considered together, the relative density (specific gravity) of 2

the combination is the total mass in grams divided by the total and,
volume in millilitres: 1/G 1 5 V 1 /M 1 and 1/G 2 5 V 2 /M 2 (X1.5)
G 5 ~ M 1 1M 2 ! / ~ V 1 1V 2 ! (X1.1) Therefore,
Manipulation of this equation yields the following: 1
G5 (X1.6)
P1 1 P2 1
1 1 1
G5 5 (X1.2) 100 G 1 100 G 2
V 1 1V 2 V1 V2
M 1 1M 2
1
M 1 1M 2 M 1 1M
An example of the computation is given in Table X1.1.
2

Page 37 of 180
4
 C127 − 15
TABLE X1.1 Example of Calculation of Weighted Values of
Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption for a Coarse
Aggregate Tested in Separate Sizes
Relative
% in Density
Size Sample Mass Absorption,
Original (Specific
Fraction, mm (in.) Used in Test, g %
Sample Gravity)
(SSD)
4.75 to 12.5 44 2213.0 2.72 0.4
(No. 4 to 1⁄2)
12.5 to 37.5 35 5462.5 2.56 2.5
(1⁄2 to 11⁄2 )
37.5 to 63 21 12593.0 2.54 3.0
(11⁄2 to 21⁄2 )

Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (SSD)

1
G SSD 5 5 2.62
0.44 0.35 0.21
1 1
2.72 2.56 2.54

y
Average Absorption

A 5 ~ 0.44! ~ 0.4! 1 ~ 0.35! ~ 2.5! 1 ~ 0.21! ~ 3.0! 5 1.7 %

op
X2. INTERRELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN RELATIVE DENSITIES (SPECIFIC GRAVITIES) AND ABSORPTION AS DEFINED
IN TEST METHODS C127 AND C128

X2.1 Where:
Sd = relative density (specific gravity) (OD),
lc Sa 5
1
11A/100
2
A
5
12
A
Ss

~S 2 1! F G
(X2.3)
Ss 100 100 s
ia
Ss = relative density (specific gravity) (SSD),
Sa = apparent relative density (apparent specific gravity),
and
A5 S Ss
Sd D
2 1 100 (X2.4)

A = absorption in %.
S Sa 2 Ss
D
fic

A5 100 (X2.5)
S a~ S s 2 1 !
X2.2 Calculate the values of each as follows:
S s 5 ~ 11A/100! S d (X2.1)
1 Sd
of

Sa 5 5 (X2.2)
1 A AS d
2 12
S d 100 100
un

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 38 of 180
5
 Designation: C128 − 15

Standard Test Method for

Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Fine
Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C128; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

1.1 This test method covers the determination of relative C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
density (specific gravity) and the absorption of fine aggregates. gregates
The relative density (specific gravity), a dimensionless quality, C127 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

y
is expressed as oven-dry (OD), saturated-surface-dry (SSD), or and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
as apparent relative density (specific gravity). The OD relative C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Struc-

op
density is determined after drying the aggregate. The SSD tural Concrete
relative density and absorption are determined after soaking the C332 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulat-
aggregate in water for a prescribed duration. ing Concrete
C188 Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement
1.2 This test method is not intended to be used for light- C566 Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
weight aggregates that comply with Specification C332 Group
I aggregates.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
lc Aggregate by Drying
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
standard. Size
ia
1.4 The text of this test method references notes and C1252 Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine
footnotes that provide explanatory material. These notes and Aggregate (as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface
footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be Texture, and Grading) (Withdrawn 2015)3
fic

considered as requirements of this test method. D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D854 Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the Water Pycnometer
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 2.2 AASHTO Standard:
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
of

AASHTO T 84 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine

priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- Aggregates4
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
3. Terminology
2. Referenced Documents
un

3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this

2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C29/C29M Test Method for Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”)
and Voids in Aggregate
C70 Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate
C117 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Jan. 1, 2015. Published March 2015. Originally
approved in 1936. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as C128–12. DOI:
10.1520/C0128-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
standard, refer to Terminology C125.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A sample of aggregate is immersed in water for 24 6 4
h to essentially fill the pores. It is then removed from the water,
the water is dried from the surface of the particles, and the
mass determined. Subsequently, the sample (or a portion of it)
is placed in a graduated container and the volume of the sample
is determined by the gravimetric or volumetric method. Finally,
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO), 444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001,
http://www.transportation.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 39 of 180
1
 C128 − 15
the sample is oven-dried and the mass determined again. Using
the mass values thus obtained and formulas in this test method,
it is possible to calculate relative density (specific gravity) and
absorption.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Relative density (specific gravity) is the ratio of mass of
an aggregate to the mass of a volume of water equal to the
volume of the aggregate particles – also referred to as the
absolute volume of the aggregate. It is also expressed as the
ratio of the density of the aggregate particles to the density of
water. Distinction is made between the density of aggregate
particles and the bulk density of aggregates as determined by
Test Method C29/C29M, which includes the volume of voids
between the particles of aggregates.
5.2 Relative density is used to calculate the volume occu-
pied by the aggregate in various mixtures containing aggregate
including hydraulic cement concrete, bituminous concrete, and
other mixtures that are proportioned or analyzed on an absolute
volume basis. Relative density (specific gravity) is also used in
the computation of voids in aggregate in Test Method C29/
C29M and in Test Method C1252. Relative density (specific
gravity) (SSD) is used in the determination of surface moisture
on fine aggregate by displacement of water in Test Method
C70. Relative density (specific gravity) (SSD) is used if the
lc
aggregate is in a saturated surface-dry condition, that is, if its
absorption has been satisfied. Alternatively, the relative density
(specific gravity) (OD) is used for computations when the
ia
aggregate is dry or assumed to be dry.
5.3 Apparent relative density (specific gravity) pertain to the
solid material making up the constituent particles not including
fic
the pore space within the particles that is accessible to water.
This value is not widely used in construction aggregate
technology.
5.4 Absorption values are used to calculate the change in the
of
mass of an aggregate material due to water absorbed in the pore
spaces within the constituent particles, compared to the dry
condition, if it is deemed that the aggregate has been in contact
with water long enough to satisfy most of the absorption
un
potential. The laboratory standard for absorption is that ob-
tained after submerging dry aggregate for a prescribed period
of time. Aggregates mined from below the water table com-
monly have a moisture content greater than the absorption
determined by this test method, if used without opportunity to
dry prior to use. Conversely, some aggregates that have not
been continuously maintained in a moist condition until used
are likely to contain an amount of absorbed moisture less than
the 24-h soaked condition. For an aggregate that has been in
contact with water and that has free moisture on the particle
surfaces, the percentage of free moisture is determined by
deducting the absorption from the total moisture content
determined by Test Method C566 by drying.
5.5 The general procedures described in this test method are
suitable for determining the absorption of aggregates that have
had conditioning other than the 24-h soak, such as boiling
water or vacuum saturation. The values obtained for absorption
by other test methods will be different than the values obtained
2
by the prescribed 24-h soak, as will the relative density
(specific gravity) (SSD).
6. Apparatus
6.1 Balance—A balance or scale having a capacity of 1 kg
or more, sensitive to 0.1 g or less, and accurate within 0.1 % of
the test load at any point within the range of use for this test
method. Within any 100-g range of test load, a difference
between readings shall be accurate within 0.1 g.
6.2 Pycnometer (for Use with Gravimetric Procedure)—A
flask or other suitable container into which the fine aggregate
test sample can be readily introduced and in which the volume
content can be reproduced within 6 0.1 cm3. The volume of
the container filled to mark shall be at least 50 % greater than
the space required to accommodate the test sample. A volu-
metric flask of 500-cm3 capacity or a fruit jar fitted with a
y
pycnometer top is satisfactory for a 500-g test sample of most
fine aggregates.
op
6.3 Flask (for Use with Volumetric Procedure)—A Le Chat-
elier flask as described in Test Method C188 is satisfactory for
an approximately 55-g test sample.
6.4 Mold and Tamper for Surface Moisture Test—The metal
mold shall be in the form of a frustum of a cone with
dimensions as follows: 40 6 3-mm inside diameter at the top,
906 3-mm inside diameter at the bottom, and 75 6 3 mm in
height, with the metal having a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm.
The metal tamper shall have a mass of 340 6 15 g and a flat
circular tamping face 25 6 3 mm in diameter.
6.5 Oven—An oven of sufficient size, capable of maintain-
ing a uniform temperature of 110 6 5 °C (230 6 9 °F).
7. Sampling
7.1 Sample the aggregate in accordance with Practice D75.
Thoroughly mix the sample and reduce it to obtain a test
specimen of approximately 1 kg using the applicable proce-
dures described in Practice C702.
8. Preparation of Test Specimen
8.1 Place the test specimen in a suitable pan or vessel and
dry in the oven to constant mass at a temperature of 110 6 5
°C (230 6 9 °F). Allow it to cool to comfortable handling
temperature (approximately 50 °C), cover with water, either by
immersion or by the addition of at least 6 % moisture to the
fine aggregate, and permit to stand for 24 6 4 h. When
Specification C330 or Specification C332 Group II lightweight
aggregates are used, immerse the aggregate in water at room
temperature for a period of 72 6 4 h, stirring for at least one
minute every 24 h.
8.1.1 When the absorption and relative density (specific
gravity) values are to be used in proportioning concrete
mixtures in which the aggregates will be in their naturally
moist condition, the requirement in 8.1 for initial drying is
optional, and, if the surfaces of the particles in the sample have
been kept continuously wet until tested, the requirement in 8.1
for 24 6 4 h soaking or 72 6 4 h is also optional.
NOTE 1—Values for absorption and for relative density (specific
gravity) (SSD) may be significantly higher for aggregate not oven dried
Page 40 of 180
 C128 − 15
before soaking than for the same aggregate treated in accordance with 8.1.
8.2 Decant excess water with care to avoid loss of fines (see
also Appendix X1), spread the sample on a flat nonabsorbent
surface exposed to a gently moving current of warm air, and
stir frequently to secure homogeneous drying. Employ me-
chanical aids such as tumbling or stirring to assist in achieving
the saturated surface-dry condition, if desired. Continue this
operation until the test specimen approaches a free-flowing
condition. Follow the procedure in 8.3 to determine if surface
moisture is still present on the constituent fine aggregate
particles. Make the first trial for surface moisture when there is
still some surface water in the test specimen. Continue drying
with constant stirring and test at frequent intervals until the test
indicates that the specimen has reached a surface-dry condi-
tion. If the first trial of the surface moisture test indicates that
moisture is not present on the surface, it has been dried past the
saturated surface-dry condition. In this case, thoroughly mix a
few millilitres of water with the fine aggregate and permit the
specimen to stand in a covered container for 30 min. Then
resume the process of drying and testing at frequent intervals
for the onset of the surface-dry condition.
8.3 Test for Surface Moisture—Hold the mold firmly on a
smooth nonabsorbent surface with the large diameter down.
Place a portion of the partially dried fine aggregate loosely in
the mold by filling it to overflowing and heaping additional
material above the top of the mold by holding it with the
cupped fingers of the hand holding the mold. Lightly tamp the
lc
fine aggregate into the mold with 25 light drops of the tamper.
ia
Start each drop approximately 5 mm above the top surface of
the fine aggregate. Permit the tamper to fall freely under
gravitational attraction on each drop. Adjust the starting height
fic
to the new surface elevation after each drop and distribute the
drops over the surface. Remove loose sand from the base and
lift the mold vertically. If surface moisture is still present, the
fine aggregate will retain the molded shape. Slight slumping of
the molded fine aggregate indicates that it has reached a
of
surface-dry condition.
8.3.1 Some fine aggregate with predominately angular-
shaped particles or with a high proportion of fines does not
un
slump in the cone test upon reaching the surface-dry condition.
Test by dropping a handful of the fine aggregate from the cone
test onto a surface from a height of 100 to 150 mm, and
observe for fines becoming airborne; presence of airborne fines
indicates this problem. For these materials, consider the
saturated surface-dry condition as the point that one side of the
fine aggregate slumps slightly upon removing the mold.
NOTE 2—The following criteria have also been used on materials that
do not readily slump:
(1) Provisional Cone Test—Fill the cone mold as described
in 8.3 except only use 10 drops of the tamper. Add more fine
aggregate and use 10 drops of the tamper again. Then add
material two more times using 3 and 2 drops of the tamper,
respectively. Level off the material even with the top of the
mold, remove loose material from the base; and lift the mold
vertically.
(2) Provisional Surface Test—If airborne fines are noted
when the fine aggregate is such that it will not slump when it
is at a moisture condition, add more moisture to the sand, and
3
at the onset of the surface-dry condition, with the hand lightly
pat approximately 100 g of the material on a flat, dry, clean,
dark or dull nonabsorbent surface such as a sheet of rubber, a
worn oxidized, galvanized, or steel surface, or a black-painted
metal surface. After 1 to 3 s, remove the fine aggregate. If
noticeable moisture shows on the test surface for more than 1
to 2 s then surface moisture is considered to be present on the
fine aggregate.
(3) Colorimetric procedures described by Kandhal and Lee,
Highway Research Record No. 307, p. 44.
(4) For reaching the saturated surface-dry condition on a
single size material that slumps when wet, hard-finish paper
towels can be used to surface dry the material until the point is
just reached where the paper towel does not appear to be
picking up moisture from the surfaces of the fine aggregate
particles.
y
9. Procedure
9.1 Test by either the gravimetric procedure in 9.2 or the
op
volumetric procedure in 9.3. Make all determinations of mass
to 0.1 g.
9.2 Gravimetric (Pycnometer) Procedure:
9.2.1 Partially fill the pycnometer with water. Introduce into
the pycnometer 500 6 10 g of saturated surface-dry fine
aggregate prepared as described in Section 8, and fill with
additional water to approximately 90 % of capacity. Agitate the
pycnometer as described in 9.2.1.1 (manually) or 9.2.1.2
(mechanically).
9.2.1.1 Manually roll, invert, or agitate the pycnometer (or
use a combination of these actions) to eliminate visible air
bubbles.
NOTE 3—About 15 to 20 min are normally required to eliminate the air
bubbles by manual methods. Dipping the tip of a paper towel into the
pycnometer has been found to be useful in dispersing the foam that
sometimes builds up when eliminating the air bubbles. Optionally, a small
amount of isopropyl alcohol may be used to disperse the foam.
9.2.1.2 Mechanically agitate the pycnometer by external
vibration in a manner that will not degrade the sample. A level
of agitation adjusted to just set individual particles in motion is
sufficient to promote de-airing without degradation. A me-
chanical agitator shall be considered acceptable for use if
comparison tests for each six-month period of use show
variations less that the acceptable range of two results (d2s)
indicated in Table 1 from the results of manual agitation on the
same material.
9.2.2 After eliminating all air bubbles, adjust the tempera-
ture of the pycnometer and its contents to 23.0 6 2.0 °C if
necessary by partial immersion in circulating water, and bring
the water level in the pycnometer to its calibrated capacity.
Determine the total mass of the pycnometer, specimen, and
water.
9.2.3 Remove the fine aggregate from the pycnometer, dry
in the oven to constant mass at a temperature of 110 6 5 °C
(230 6 9 °F), cool in air at room temperature for 1 6 1⁄2 h, and
determine the mass.
9.2.4 Determine the mass of the pycnometer filled to its
calibrated capacity with water at 23.0 6 2.0 °C.
9.3 Volumetric (Le Chatelier Flask) Procedure:
Page 41 of 180
 C128 − 15
9.3.1 Fill the flask initially with water to a point on the stem Apparent relative density ~ specific gravity! 5 A/ ~ B1A 2 C ! (5)
between the 0 and the 1-mL mark. Record this initial reading
10.2.3.2 Volumetric Procedure:
with flask and contents within the temperature range of 23.0 6
2.0 °C. Add 55 6 5 g of fine aggregate in the saturated Apparent relative density ~ specific gravity!
surface-dry condition (or other measured quantity as neces- S 1 ~ A/S !
5 (6)
sary). After all fine aggregate has been introduced, place the 0.9975 ~ R 2 2 R 1 ! 2 @ ~ S 1 /S !~ S 2 A ! #
stopper in the flask and roll the flask in an inclined position, or 10.3 Absorption—Calculate the percentage of absorption as
gently whirl it in a horizontal circle so as to dislodge all follows:
entrapped air, continuing until no further bubbles rise to the
Absorption, % 5 100 @ ~ S 2 A ! /A # (7)
surface (Note 4). Take a final reading with the flask and
contents within 1 °C of the original temperature. 11. Report
NOTE 4—A small measured amount (not to exceed 1 mL) of isopropyl 11.1 Report relative density (specific gravity) results to the
alcohol may be used to eliminate foam appearing on the water surface.
The volume of alcohol used must be subtracted from the final reading
nearest 0.01 and indicate the basis for relative density (specific
(R2). gravity), as either oven-dry (OD), saturated-surface-dry (SSD),
or apparent.
9.3.2 For determination of the absorption, use a separate
500 6 10-g portion of the saturated surface-dry fine aggregate, 11.2 Report the absorption result to the nearest 0.1 %.

y
dry to constant mass, and determine the dry mass. 11.3 If the relative density (specific gravity) values were
determined without first drying the aggregate, as permitted in

op
10. Calculations 8.2, note that fact in the report.
10.1 Symbols: A = mass of oven dry specimen, g
12. Precision and Bias
B = mass of pycnometer filled with water, to calibration
mark, g 12.1 Precision—The estimates of precision of this test
C = mass of pycnometer filled with specimen and water to
calibration mark, g
R1 = initial reading of water level in Le Chatelier flask, mL
R2 = final reading of water in Le Chatelier flask, mL
lc method (listed in Table 1) are based on results from the
AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory Proficiency Sample
Program, with testing conducted by this test method and
AASHTO T 84. The significant difference between the meth-
S = mass of saturated surface-dry specimen (used in the ods is that Test Method C128 requires a saturation period of 24
ia
gravimetric procedure for density and relative density (specific
gravity), or for absorption with both procedures), g TABLE 1 Precision
S1 = mass of saturated surface-dry specimen (used in the
fic

Acceptable
volumetric procedure for density and relative density (specific Standard Range of
gravity)), g Deviation Two Results
(d2s)A
10.2 Relative Density (Specific Gravity): Single-Operator Precision
10.2.1 Relative Density (Specific Gravity ) (Oven dry)— Relative density (specific gravity)
of

Calculate the relative density (specific gravity) on the basis of (OD) 0.011 0.032
oven-dry aggregate as follows: Relative density (specific gravity)
10.2.1.1 Gravimetric Procedure: (SSD) 0.0095 0.027
un

Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ OD! 5 A/ ~ B1S 2 C ! (1) Apparent relative density (specific
gravity) 0.0095 0.027
10.2.1.2 Volumetric Procedure:
B
Absorption, % 0.11 0.31
Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ OD! 5 @ S 1 ~ A/S ! # / @ 0.9975 ~ R 2 Multilaboratory Precision
2 R 1! # (2) Relative density (specific gravity)
(OD) 0.023 0.066
10.2.2 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (Saturated
Relative density (specific gravity)
Surface-dry)—Calculate the relative density (specific gravity) (SSD) 0.020 0.056
on the basis of saturated surface-dry aggregate as follows:
10.2.2.1 Gravimetric Procedure: Apparent relative density (specific
gravity) 0.020 0.056
Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ SSD! 5 S/ ~ B1S 2 C ! (3)
Absorption,B % 0.23 0.66
10.2.2.2 Volumetric Procedure: A
These numbers represent the (d2s) limits as described in Practice C670. The
Relative density ~ specific gravity! ~ SSD! 5 S 1 / @ 0.9975 ~ R 2 2 R 1 ! # precision estimates were obtained from the analysis of combined AASHTO
Materials Reference Laboratory proficiency sample data from laboratories using
(4) 15 to 19-h saturation times and other laboratories using 24 ± 4-h saturation time.
Testing was performed on normal weight aggregates, and started with aggregates
10.2.3 Apparent Relative Density (Specific Gravity)— in the oven-dry condition.
B
Calculate the apparent relative density (specific gravity) as Precision estimates are based on aggregates with absorptions of less than 1 %
and may differ for manufactured fine aggregates and the aggregates having
follows: absorption values greater than 1 %.
10.2.3.1 Gravimetric Procedure:

Page 42 of 180
4
 C128 − 15
6 4 h, and AASHTO Test Method T 84 requires a saturation 13. Keywords
period of 15 to 19 h. This difference has been found to have an 13.1 absorption; aggregate; apparent relative density; fine
insignificant effect on the precision indices. The data are based
aggregate; relative density; specific gravity
on the analyses of more than 100 paired test results from 40 to
100 laboratories.
12.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for this test method, no
statement on bias is being made.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. POTENTIAL DIFFERENCES IN BULK RELATIVE DENSITY AND ABSORPTION DUE TO PRESENCE OF MATERIAL
FINER THAN 75 µm

y
X1.1 It has been found that there may be significant depends on both the amount of the material finer than 75 µm

differences in bulk relative density and absorption between fine
aggregate samples tested with the material finer than 75 µm
(No. 200) present and not present in the samples. Samples from
which the material finer than 75 µm is not removed usually
give a higher absorption and a lower bulk relative density
lc
compared with testing the same fine aggregate from which the
material finer than 75 µm is removed following the procedures
of Test Method C117. Samples with material finer than 75 µm
may build up a coating around the coarser fine aggregate
ia
particles during the surface drying process. The resultant
relative density and absorption that is subsequently measured is
that of the agglomerated and coated particles and not that of the
fic
op
present and the nature of the material. When the material finer
than 75 µm is less than about 4 % by mass, the difference in
relative density between washed and unwashed samples is less
than 0.03. When the material finer than 75 µm is greater than
about 8 % by mass, the difference in relative density obtained
between washed and unwashed samples may be as great as
0.13. It has been found that the relative density determined on
fine aggregate from which the material finer than 75 µm has
been removed prior to testing more accurately reflects the
relative density of the material.
X1.2 The material finer than 75 µm, which is removed, can
be assumed to have the same relative density as the fine

parent material. The difference in absorption and relative
density determined between samples from which the material
finer than 75 µm have not been removed and samples from
which the material finer than 75 µm have been removed
of
aggregate. Alternatively, the relative density (specific gravity)
of the material finer than 75 µm may be further evaluated using
Test Method D854, however, this test determines the apparent
relative density and not the bulk relative density.

X2. INTERRELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN RELATIVE DENSITIES (SPECIFIC GRAVITIES) AND ABSORPTION AS DEFINED
IN TEST METHODS C127 AND C128
un

X2.1 This appendix gives mathematical interrelationships 1 Sd

Ss 5 5 (X2.2)
among the three types of relative densities (specific gravities) 1 A ASd
2 12
and absorption. These may be useful in checking the consis- S d 100 100
tency of reported data or calculating a value that was not 1
reported by using other reported data. or S a 5 (X2.3)
11A/100 A
2
X2.2 Where: Ss 100

Sd = relative density (specific gravity) (OD), Ss

5
Ss = relative density (specific gravity) (SSD), A
Sa = apparent relative density (apparent specific gravity),
15 ~S 2 1!
100 s
and
A = absorption, in %. A5 S Ss
Sd D
2 1 100 (X2.4)

Calculate the values of each as follows:

S s 5 ~ 11A/100! S d (X2.1)
A5 S Sa 2 Ss
Sa ~Ss 2 1! D 100 (X2.5)

Page 43 of 180
5
 C128 − 15
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 44 of 180
6
 Designation: C131/C131M − 14

Standard Test Method for

Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C131/C131M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
1.1 This test method covers a procedure for testing of coarse Aggregates
C535 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-

y
aggregates with a maximum size smaller than 37.5 mm ([11⁄2
in.] for resistance to degradation using the Los Angeles testing Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los
machine (Note 1). Angeles Machine

op
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
NOTE 1—A procedure for testing coarse aggregate larger than 19.0 mm for Test Methods for Construction Materials
[3⁄4 in.] is covered in Test Method C535. Thus coarse aggregates with a
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
maximum size between 19 mm [3⁄4 in.] and 37.5 mm [11⁄2 in.] may be
tested by Test Method C535 or Test Method C131/C131M. Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
lc E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves

3. Terminology
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
ia
with the standard. 3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this test
method, refer to Terminology C125.
NOTE 2—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Speci-
fication E11. The Alternative designation given in parentheses is for 4. Summary of Test Method
fic

information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
of
4.1 This test is a measure of degradation of mineral aggre-
gates of standard gradings resulting from a combination of
actions including abrasion or attrition, impact, and grinding in
a rotating steel drum containing a specified number of steel

priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-

bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. spheres, the number depending upon the grading of the test
sample. As the drum rotates, a shelf plate picks up the sample
2. Referenced Documents and the steel spheres, carrying them around until they are
un

dropped to the opposite side of the drum, creating an impact-

2.1 ASTM Standards:2
A6/A6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
crushing effect. The contents then roll within the drum with an
abrading and grinding action until the shelf plate picks up the
sample and the steel spheres, and the cycle is repeated. After
the prescribed number of revolutions, the contents are removed
from the drum and the aggregate portion is sieved to measure
the degradation as percent loss.

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on 5. Significance and Use
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 5.1 This test has been widely used as an indicator of the
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved July 1, 2014. Published July 2014. Originally approved relative quality or competence of various sources of aggregate
in 1937. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as C131 – 06. DOI: 10.1520/C0131 having similar mineral compositions. The results do not
_C0131M-14.
2
automatically permit valid comparisons to be made between
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
sources distinctly different in origin, composition, or structure.
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Assign specification limits with extreme care in consideration
the ASTM website. of available aggregate types and their performance history in

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 45 of 180
1
 C131/C131M − 14
specific end uses. The percent loss determined by this test
method has no known consistent relationship to the percent
loss for the same material when tested by Test Method C535.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Los Angeles Machine—A Los Angles machine, con-
forming in all essential characteristics to the design shown in
Fig. 1, shall be used. The machine shall consist of a hollow
steel cylinder, with a wall thickness of at least 12 mm [1⁄2 in.]
(Note 3) closed at both ends, conforming to the dimensions
shown in Fig. 1, having an inside diameter of 711 6 5 mm [28
6 0.2 in.], and an inside length of 508 6 5 mm [20 6 0.2 in.].
The interior surface of the cylinder shall be free from protru-
sions disrupting the path of the sample and steel spheres except
for the shelf described below. The cylinder shall be mounted on
stub shafts attached to the ends of the cylinder but not entering
it, and shall be mounted in such a manner that it rotates with
the axis in a horizontal position within a tolerance in slope of
1 in 100. An opening in the cylinder shall be provided for the
lc
ia
fic
of
un
FIG. 1 Los Angeles Testing Machine
2
introduction of the test sample. A suitable, dust-tight cover
shall be provided for the opening with means for bolting the
cover in place. The cover shall be so designed as to maintain
the cylindrical contour of the interior surface unless the shelf is
so located that the steel spheres and sample shall not impact on
or near the door opening and the opening cover during the test.
A removable steel shelf extending the full length of the
cylinder and projecting inward 89 6 2 mm [3.5 6 0.1 in.] shall
be mounted on the interior cylindrical surface of the cylinder,
in such a way that a plane centered between the large faces
coincides with an axial plane. The shelf shall be of such
thickness and so mounted, by bolts or other suitable means, as
to be firm and rigid. The position of the shelf (Note 4) shall be
such that the sample and the steel spheres shall not impact on
or near the opening and its cover, and that the distance from the
shelf to the opening, measured along the outside circumference
of the cylinder in the direction of rotation, shall be not less than
y
1270 mm [50 in.]. Inspect the shelf periodically to determine
that it is not bent either lengthwise or from its normal radial
op
Page 46 of 180
 C131/C131M − 14
position with respect to the cylinder. If either condition is
found, repair or replace the shelf before further tests are
conducted.
NOTE 3—Tolerances for wall thickness are given in Specification
A6/A6M.
NOTE 4—The use of a shelf of wear-resistant steel, rectangular in cross
section and mounted independently of the cover, is preferred. However, a
shelf consisting of a section of rolled angle, properly mounted on the
inside of the cover plate, may be used provided the direction of rotation is
such that the charge will be caught on the outside face of the angle.
6.1.1 The machine shall be so driven and so counterbal-
anced as to maintain a rotation speed of 30 to 33 rpm (Note 5).
If an angle is used as the shelf, the direction of rotation shall be
such that the charge is caught on the outside surface of the
angle.
NOTE 5—Back-lash or slip in the driving mechanism is very likely to
furnish test results which are not duplicated by other Los Angeles
8. Test Sample Preparation
8.1 Wash the reduced sample (see 9.1.1) and oven dry at 110
6 5°C [230 6 9°F] to a constant mass, separate into individual
size fractions, and recombine to the grading of Table 1 most
nearly corresponding to the range of sizes in the aggregate as
furnished for the work. Record the mass of the sample prior to
test to the nearest 1 g.
9. Procedure
9.1 Place the test sample and the charge in the Los Angeles
testing machine and rotate the machine at a speed of 30 to 33
r/min for 500 revolutions (Note 7). After the prescribed number
of revolutions, discharge the material from the machine and
make a preliminary separation of the sample on a sieve coarser
than the 1.70-mm (No. 12) sieve. Sieve the finer portion on a
1.70-mm (No. 12) sieve in a manner conforming to Test

y
machines producing constant peripheral speed. Method C136. Wash the material coarser than the 1.70-mm
6.2 Sieves, conforming to Specification E11. (No. 12) sieve and oven-dry at 110 6 5°C [230 6 9°F] to a

op
constant mass, and determine the mass to the nearest 1 g (Note
6.3 Balance—A balance or scale accurate within 0.1 % of
8).
test load over the range required for this test.
NOTE 7—Valuable information concerning the uniformity of the sample
6.4 Charge—The charge shall consist of steel spheres or ball under test may be obtained by determining the loss after 100 revolutions.
bearings each having a diameter of between 46 mm [ 1 13⁄16 in.] The loss should be determined by dry sieving the material on the 1.70-mm
and 48 mm [1 7⁄8 in.] and each having a mass of between 390
and 445 g.
6.4.1 The charge (steel spheres or ball bearings), (Note 6)
depending upon the grading of the test sample as described in
lc sieve without washing. The ratio of the loss after 100 revolutions to the
loss after 500 revolutions should not greatly exceed 0.20 for material of
uniform hardness. When this determination is made, take care to avoid
losing any part of the sample; return the entire sample, including the dust
of fracture, to the testing machine for the final 400 revolutions required to
Section 8, shall be as follows:
ia
complete the test.
Number of Mass of NOTE 8—Elimination of washing after test will seldom reduce the
Grading Spheres Charge, g measured loss by more than about 0.2 % of the original sample mass.
A 12 5000 ± 25
B 11 4580 ± 25 9.1.1 If the aggregate is essentially free of adherent coatings
fic

C 8 3330 ± 20 and dust, the requirement for washing after the test is optional.
D 6 2500 ± 15 However, in the case of referee testing, the washing procedure
NOTE 6—The total mass specified requires an average mass of each shall be performed.
steel sphere or ball bearing of 416 g. Steel spheres or ball bearings 46.0
mm [113⁄16 in.] and 47.6 mm [17⁄8 in.] in diameter, having a mass of
of

10. Calculation
approximately 400 and 440 g each, respectively, are readily available.
Steel spheres or ball bearings 46.8 mm [127⁄32 in.] in diameter having a 10.1 Calculate the loss (difference between the original
mass of approximately 420 g may also be obtainable. The charge may mass and the final mass of the test sample) as a percentage of
consist of a mixture of these sizes conforming to the mass tolerances of
the original mass of the test sample. Report this value as the
un

6.4 and 6.4.1.

percent loss (Note 9).
7. Sampling
NOTE 9—The percent loss determined by this test method has no known
7.1 Obtain the field sample in accordance with Practice consistent relationship to the percent loss for the same material when
D75, and reduce the field sample to adequate sample size in tested by Test Method C535.
accordance with Practice C702. Percent Loss 5 @ ~ C 2 Y ! ⁄ C # 3 100 (1)

TABLE 1 Gradings of Test Samples

Sieve Size (Square Openings) Mass of Indicated Sizes, g
Grading
Passing Retained on
A B C D
37.5 mm (11⁄2 in.) 25.0 mm (1 in.) 1 250 ± 25 ... ... ...
25.0 mm (1 in.) 19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) 1 250 ± 25 ... ... ...
19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.) 12.5 mm (1⁄2 in.) 1 250 ± 10 2 500 ± 10 ... ...
12.5 mm (1⁄2 in.) 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 1 250 ± 10 2 500 ± 10 ... ...
9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) 6.3 mm (1⁄4 in.) ... ... 2 500 ± 10 ...
6.3 mm (1⁄4 in.) 4.75-mm (No. 4) ... ... 2 500 ± 10 ...
4.75-mm (No. 4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) ... ... ... 5 000 ± 10

Total 5 000 ± 10 5 000 ± 10 5 000 ± 10 5 000 ± 10

Page 47 of 180
3
 C131/C131M − 14
where:
C = mass of original test sample, g, and
Y = final mass of the test sample, g.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Identification of the aggregate as to source, type, and
nominal maximum size;
11.1.2 Grading designation from Table 1 used for the test;
and
11.1.3 Loss by abrasion and impact of the sample expressed
to the nearest 1 % by mass.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 For nominal 19.0-mm (3⁄4-in.) maximum size coarse
aggregate with percent losses in the range of 10 to 45 %, the
multilaboratory coefficient of variation has been found to be
APPENDIX
lc
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. MAINTENANCE OF SHELF
X1.1 The shelf of the Los Angeles machine is subject to
ia
severe surface wear and impact. With use, the working surface
of the shelf is peened by the balls and tends to develop a ridge
of metal parallel to and about 32 mm [11⁄4 in.] from the junction
fic
of the shelf and the inner surface of the cylinder. If the shelf is
made from a section of rolled angle, not only may this ridge
develop but the shelf itself may be bent longitudinally or
transversely from its proper position.
of
X1.2 The shelf should be inspected periodically to deter-
mine that it is not bent either lengthwise or from its normal
un
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (C131 – 06)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved July 1, 2014.)
(1) Revised the standard into a dual measurement system with
the units of measurement now stated in either SI units or
inch-pound units.
(2) Revised Sections 1, 5, 6, 8, 9.
(3) Revised Notes 1, 3, and 6.
4
4.5 %.3 Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests
from two different laboratories on samples of the same coarse
aggregates are not expected to differ from each other by more
than 12.7 %3 (95 % probability) of their average. The single-
operator coefficient of variation has been found to be
2.0 %.3 Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by
the same operator on the same coarse aggregate are not
expected to differ from each other by more than 5.7 % (95 %
probability) of their average.3
12.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for this procedure, no state-
ment on bias is being made.
13. Keywords
13.1 abrasion; aggregate (coarse; small size); degradation;
impact; Los Angeles machine
y
3
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s%) and (d2s%) limits as
described in Practice C670.
op
radial position with respect to the cylinder. If either condition
is found, the shelf should be repaired or replaced before further
tests are made. The influence on the test result of the ridge
developed by peening of the working face of the shelf is not
known. However, for uniform test conditions, it is recom-
mended that the ridge be ground off if its height exceeds 2 mm
[0.1 in.].
(4) Added Note 2.
(5) Repositioned Notes 7 and 8.
(6) Added Eq. 1.
(7) Replaced Fig. 1.
Page 48 of 180
 C131/C131M − 14
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 49 of 180
5
 Designation: C136/C136M − 14

Standard Test Method for

Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C136/C136M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* C637 Specification for Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the particle Concrete
size distribution of fine and coarse aggregates by sieving. C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
for Test Methods for Construction Materials

y
1.2 Some specifications for aggregates which reference this C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
test method contain grading requirements including both Size
coarse and fine fractions. Instructions are included for sieve

op
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
analysis of such aggregates. E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
1.3 Units—The values stated in either SI units or inch- Sieves
pound units are to be regarded separately as standard. The 2.2 AASHTO Standard:
values stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; AASHTO No. T 27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in non-
conformance with the standard.
NOTE 1—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Speci-
lc Aggregates3

3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this
fication E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for
ia
information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size. standard, refer to Terminology C125.
Specification E11 cites the following with respect to SI units versus
inch-pound units as standard. “The values stated in SI units shall be 4. Summary of Test Method
considered standard for the dimensions of the sieve cloth openings and the
fic

wire diameters used in the sieve cloth. The values stated in inch-pound 4.1 A sample of dry aggregate of known mass is separated
units shall be considered standard with regard to the sieve frames, pans,” through a series of sieves of progressively smaller openings for
and covers.
determination of particle size distribution.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 5. Significance and Use
of

responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-

priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- 5.1 This test method is used primarily to determine the
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. grading of materials proposed for use as aggregates or being
used as aggregates. The results are used to determine compli-
un

2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C117 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2014. Published February 2015. Originally
approved in 1938. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as C136 – 06. DOI:
10.1520/C0136_C0136M-14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
ance of the particle size distribution with applicable specifica-
tion requirements and to provide necessary data for control of
the production of various aggregate products and mixtures
containing aggregates. The data may also be useful in devel-
oping relationships concerning porosity and packing.
5.2 Accurate determination of material finer than the 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve cannot be achieved by use of this test method
alone. Test Method C117 for material finer than 75-µm sieve by
washing should be employed.
5.3 Refer to methods of sampling and testing in Specifica-
tion C637 for heavyweight aggregates.
3
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, 444 North Capitol St. N.W., Suite 225, Washington, DC 20001.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 50 of 180
1
 C136/C136M − 14
6. Apparatus
6.1 Balances—Balances or scales used in testing fine and
coarse aggregate shall have readability and accuracy as fol-
lows:
6.1.1 For fine aggregate, readable to 0.1 g and accurate to
0.1 g or 0.1 % of the test load, whichever is greater, at any
point within the range of use.
6.1.2 For coarse aggregate, or mixtures of fine and coarse
aggregate, readable and accurate to 0.5 g or 0.1 % of the test
load, whichever is greater, at any point within the range of use.
6.2 Sieves—The sieve cloth shall be mounted on substantial
frames constructed in a manner that will prevent loss of
material during sieving. The sieve cloth and standard sieve
frames shall conform to the requirements of Specification E11.
Nonstandard sieve frames shall conform to the requirements of
Specification E11 as applicable.
NOTE 2—It is recommended that sieves mounted in frames larger than
standard 203.2-mm [8 in.] diameter be used for testing coarse aggregate to
reduce the possibility of overloading the sieves. See 8.3.
6.3 Mechanical Sieve Shaker—A mechanical sieving
device, if used, shall create motion of the sieves to cause the
particles to bounce, tumble, or otherwise turn so as to present
different orientations to the sieving surface. The sieving action
shall be such that the criterion for adequacy of sieving
described in 8.4 is met in a reasonable time period.
NOTE 3—Use of a mechanical sieve shaker is recommended when the
lc
ia
size of the sample is 20 kg or greater, and may be used for smaller
samples, including fine aggregate. Excessive time (more than approxi-
mately 10 min) to achieve adequate sieving may result in degradation of
the sample. The same mechanical sieve shaker may not be practical for all
fic
sizes of samples, since the large sieving area needed for practical sieving
of a large nominal size coarse aggregate very likely could result in loss of
a portion of the sample if used for a small sample of coarse aggregate or
fine aggregate.
6.4 Oven—An oven of appropriate size capable of maintain-
of
ing a uniform temperature of 110 6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F].
7. Sampling
un
7.1 Sample the aggregate in accordance with Practice D75.
The size of the field sample shall be the quantity shown in
Practice D75 or four times the quantity required in 7.4 and 7.5
(except as modified in 7.6), whichever is greater.
7.2 Thoroughly mix the sample and reduce it to an amount
suitable for testing using the applicable procedures described in
Practice C702. The sample for test shall be approximately the
quantity desired when dry and shall be the end result of the
reduction. Reduction to an exact predetermined quantity shall
not be permitted.
NOTE 4—Where sieve analysis, including determination of material
finer than the 75-µm sieve, is the only testing proposed, the size of the
sample may be reduced in the field to avoid shipping excessive quantities
of extra material to the laboratory.
7.3 Fine Aggregate—The size of the test sample, after
drying, shall be 300 g minimum.
7.4 Coarse Aggregate—The size of the test sample of coarse
aggregate shall conform with the following:
2
Nominal Maximum Size, Test Sample Size,
Square Openings, mm (in.) min, kg [lb]
9.5 (3⁄8) 1 [2]
12.5 (1⁄2) 2 [4]
19.0 (3⁄4) 5 [11]
25.0 (1) 10 [22]
37.5 (11⁄2) 15 [33]
50 (2) 20 [44]
63 (21⁄2) 35 [77]
75 (3) 60 [130]
90 (31⁄2) 100 [220]
100 (4) 150 [330]
125 (5) 300 [660]
7.5 Coarse and Fine Aggregate Mixtures—The size of the
test sample of coarse and fine aggregate mixtures shall be the
same as for coarse aggregate in 7.4.
7.6 Samples of Large Size Coarse Aggregate—The size of
sample required for aggregate with 50-mm [2-in.] nominal
maximum size or larger is such as to preclude convenient
y
sample reduction and testing as a unit except with large
mechanical splitters and sieve shakers. As an option when such
op
equipment is not available, instead of combining and mixing
sample increments and then reducing the field sample to testing
size, conduct the sieve analysis on a number of approximately
equal sample increments such that the total mass tested
conforms to the requirement of 7.4.
7.7 In the event that the amount of material finer than the
75-µm (No. 200) sieve is to be determined by Test Method
C117, proceed as follows:
7.7.1 For aggregates with a nominal maximum size of 12.5
mm [1⁄2 in.] or less, use the same test sample for testing by Test
Method C117 and this test method. First test the sample in
accordance with Test Method C117 through the final drying
operation, then dry sieve the sample as stipulated in 8.2 – 8.7
of this test method.
7.7.2 For aggregates with a nominal maximum size greater
than 12.5 mm [1⁄2 in.], use a single test sample as described in
7.7.1, or optionally use separate test samples for Test Method
C117 and this test method.
7.7.3 Where the specifications require determination of the
total amount of material finer than the 75-µm sieve by washing
and dry sieving, use the procedure described in 7.7.1.
8. Procedure
8.1 Dry the sample to constant mass at a temperature of 110
6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F].
NOTE 5—For control purposes, particularly where rapid results are
desired, it is generally not necessary to dry coarse aggregate for the sieve
analysis test. The results are little affected by the moisture content unless:
(1) the nominal maximum size is smaller than about 12.5 mm (1⁄2 in.); (2)
the coarse aggregate contains appreciable material finer than 4.75 mm
(No. 4); or (3) the coarse aggregate is highly absorptive (a lightweight
aggregate, for example). Also, samples may be dried at the higher
temperatures associated with the use of hot plates without affecting
results, provided steam escapes without generating pressures sufficient to
fracture the particles, and temperatures are not so great as to cause
chemical breakdown of the aggregate.
8.2 Select sieves with suitable openings to furnish the
information required by the specifications covering the mate-
rial to be tested. Use additional sieves as desired or necessary
to provide other information, such as fineness modulus, or to
regulate the amount of material on a sieve. Nest the sieves in
Page 51 of 180
 C136/C136M − 14
order of decreasing size of opening from top to bottom and
place the sample on the top sieve. Agitate the sieves by hand or
by mechanical apparatus for a sufficient period, established by
trial or checked by measurement on the actual test sample, to
meet the criterion for adequacy or sieving described in 8.4.
8.3 Limit the quantity of material on a given sieve so that all
particles have opportunity to reach sieve openings a number of
times during the sieving operation. For sieves with openings
smaller than 4.75-mm (No. 4), the quantity retained on any
sieve at the completion of the sieving operation shall not
exceed 7 kg/m2 of sieving surface area (Note 6). For sieves
with openings 4.75 mm (No. 4) and larger, the quantity
retained in kg shall not exceed the product of 2.5 × (sieve
opening, mm × (effective sieving area, m2)). This quantity is
shown in Table 1 for five sieve-frame dimensions in common
use. In no case shall the quantity retained be so great as to
Strike the side of the sieve sharply and with an upward motion
against the heel of the other hand at the rate of about 150 times
per minute, turn the sieve about one sixth of a revolution at
intervals of about 25 strokes. In determining sufficiency of
sieving for sizes larger than the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve, limit
the material on the sieve to a single layer of particles. If the size
of the mounted testing sieves makes the described sieving
motion impractical, use 203-mm [8 in.] diameter sieves to
verify the sufficiency of sieving.
8.5 In the case of coarse and fine aggregate mixtures, refer
to 8.3.1 to prevent overloading of individual sieves.
8.5.1 Optionally, reduce the portion finer than the 4.75-mm
(No. 4) sieve using a mechanical splitter according to Practice
C702. If this procedure is followed, compute the mass of each
size increment of the original sample as follows:
W1
A5 3B (1)

y
cause permanent deformation of the sieve cloth. W2
8.3.1 Prevent an overload of material on an individual sieve
by one of the following methods: where:

8.3.1.1 Insert an additional sieve with opening size interme-
diate between the sieve that may be overloaded and the sieve
immediately above that sieve in the original set of sieves.
8.3.1.2 Split the sample into two or more portions, sieving
each portion individually. Combine the masses of the several
portions retained on a specific sieve before calculating the
percentage of the sample on the sieve.
8.3.1.3 Use sieves having a larger frame size and providing
greater sieving area.
lc
ia
NOTE 6—The 7 kg/m2 amounts to 200 g for the usual 203-mm [8-in.]
diameter sieve (with effective sieving surface diameter of 190.5 mm [7.5
in.].
fic
op
A = mass of size increment on total sample basis,
W1 = mass of fraction finer than 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve in
total sample,
W 2 = mass of reduced portion of material finer than
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve actually sieved, and
B = mass of size increment in reduced portion sieved.
8.6 Unless a mechanical sieve shaker is used, hand sieve
particles larger than 75 mm [3 in.] by determining the smallest
sieve opening through which each particle will pass. Start the
test on the smallest sieve to be used. Rotate the particles, if
necessary, in order to determine whether they will pass through
a particular opening; however, do not force particles to pass

8.4 Continue sieving for a sufficient period and in such
manner that, after completion, not more than 1 % by mass of
the material retained on any individual sieve will pass that
sieve during 1 min of continuous hand sieving performed as
follows: Hold the individual sieve, provided with a snug-fitting
of
through an opening.
8.7 Determine the mass of each size increment on a scale or
balance conforming to the requirements specified in 5.1 to the
nearest 0.1 % of the total original dry sample mass. The total
mass of the material after sieving should check closely with

pan and cover, in a slightly inclined position in one hand. original mass of sample placed on the sieves. If the amounts

TABLE 1 Maximum Allowable Quantity of Material Retained on a Sieve, kg [lb]

un

Nominal Dimensions of SieveA

Sieve [8-in.] [10-in.] [12-in.] [14-in. by [14.5-in. by
Opening diameterB diameterB diameterB 14-in.] 23-in.]
Size, mm Sieving Area, m2 [ft2]
0.0285 [0.3] 0.0457 [0.5] 0.0670 [0.7] 0.1225 [1.3] 0.2158 [2.3]
C C C C
125 67.4 [1481⁄2 ]
C C C
100 30.6 [671⁄2 ] 53.9 [1183⁄4 ]
C C
90 15.1 [331⁄4 ] 27.6 [603⁄4 ] 48.5 [1063⁄4 ]
C
75 8.6 [19] 12.6 [273⁄4 ] 23.0 [503⁄4 ] 40.5 [891⁄4 ]
C
63 7.2 [153⁄4 ] 10.6 [231⁄4 ] 19.3 [421⁄2 ] 34.0 [75]
50 3.6 [8] 5.7 [13] 8.4 [181⁄2 ] 15.3 [333⁄4 ] 27.0 [591⁄2 ]
37.5 2.7 [6] 4.3 [91⁄2 ] 6.3 [133⁄4 ] 11.5 [251⁄4 ] 20.2 [441⁄2 ]
25.0 1.8 [4] 2.9 [61⁄2 ] 4.2 [91⁄4 ] 7.7 [17] 13.5 [293⁄4 ]
19.0 1.4 [31⁄2 ] 2.2 [43⁄4 ] 3.2 [71⁄2 ] 5.8 [123⁄4 ] 10.2 [221⁄2 ]
12.5 0.89 [2] 1.4 [3] 2.1 [43⁄4 ] 3.8 [81⁄4 ] 6.7 [143⁄4 ]
9.5 0.67 [11⁄2 ] 1.1 [21⁄2 ] 1.6 [31⁄2 ] 2.9 [61⁄4 ] 5.1 [111⁄4 ]
4.75 0.33 [3⁄4 ] 0.54 [11⁄4 ] 0.80 [13⁄4 ] 1.5 [31⁄4 ] 2.6 [53⁄4 ]
A
Sieve frame dimensions in inch units: 8.0-in. diameter; 10.0-in. diameter, 12.0-in. diameter; 13.8 by 13.8 in. (14 by 14 in. nominal); 14.6 by 22.8 in. (16 by 24 in. nominal).
B
The sieve area for round sieve frames is based on an effective diameter 12.5 mm [1⁄2 in.] less than the nominal frame diameter, because Specification E11 permits the
sealer between the sieve cloth and the frame to extend 6.5 mm [1⁄4 in.] over the sieve cloth. Thus the effective sieving diameter for a 203-mm [8.0-in.] diameter sieve frame
is 190.5 mm [7.5 in.]. Sieves produced by some manufacturers do not infringe on the sieve cloth by the full 6.5 mm [1⁄4 in.].
C
Sieves indicated have less than five full openings and should not be used for sieve testing except as provided in 8.6.

Page 52 of 180
3
 C136/C136M − 14
differ by more than 0.3 %, based on the original dry sample TABLE 2 Precision
mass, the results should not be used for acceptance purposes. Standard
Acceptable
Total Percentage of Range of Two
8.8 If the sample has previously been tested by Test Method Deviation (1s),
Material Passing Results (d2s),
%A
C117, add the mass finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve %A
determined by that test method to the mass passing the 75-µm Coarse Aggregate:B
Single-operator <100 $95 0.32 0.9
(No. 200) sieve by dry sieving of the same sample in this test precision <95 $85 0.81 2.3
method. <85 $80 1.34 3.8
<80 $60 2.25 6.4
9. Calculation <60 $20 1.32 3.7
<20 $15 0.96 2.7
9.1 Calculate percentages passing, total percentages <15 $10 1.00 2.8
<10 $5 0.75 2.1
retained, or percentages in various size fractions to the nearest <5 $2 0.53 1.5
0.1 % on the basis of the total mass of the initial dry sample. If <2 >0 0.27 0.8
the same test sample was first tested by Test Method C117, Multilaboratory <100 $95 0.35 1.0
precision <95 $85 1.37 3.9
include the mass of material finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) <85 $80 1.92 5.4
size by washing in the sieve analysis calculation; and use the <80 $60 2.82 8.0
total dry sample mass prior to washing in Test Method C117 as <60 $20 1.97 5.6

y
<20 $15 1.60 4.5
the basis for calculating all the percentages. <15 $10 1.48 4.2
9.1.1 When sample increments are tested as provided in 7.6, <10 $5 1.22 3.4

op
total the masses of the portion of the increments retained on <5 $2 1.04 3.0
<2 >0 0.45 1.3
each sieve, and use these masses to calculate the percentages as Fine Aggregate:
in 9.1. Single-operator <100 $95 0.26 0.7
precision <95 $60 0.55 1.6
9.2 Calculate the fineness modulus, when required, by <60 $20 0.83 2.4
adding the total percentages of material in the sample that is <20 $15 0.54 1.5
coarser than each of the following sieves (cumulative percent-
ages retained), and dividing the sum by 100: 150-µm (No.
100), 300-µm (No. 50), 600-µm (No. 30), 1.18-mm (No. 16),
2.36-mm (No. 8), 4.75-mm (No. 4), 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.), 19.0-mm
lc Multilaboratory
precision
<15
<10
<2
<100
<95
<60
$10
$2
>0
$95
$60
$20
0.36
0.37
0.14
0.23
0.77
1.41
1.0
1.1
0.4
0.6
2.2
4.0
ia
(3⁄4-in.), 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.), and larger, increasing in the ratio of <20 $15 1.10 3.1
2 to 1. <15 $10 0.73 2.1
<10 $2 0.65 1.8
<2 >0 0.31 0.9
10. Report
fic

A
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and (d2s) limits described in
10.1 Depending upon the form of the specifications for use Practice C670.
B
of the material under test, the report shall include the follow- The precision estimates are based on aggregates with nominal maximum size of
19.0 mm (3⁄4 in.).
ing:
10.1.1 Total percentage of material passing each sieve, or
of

10.1.2 Total percentage of material retained on each sieve, through 90). The values in the table are given for different
or ranges of total percentage of aggregate passing a sieve.
10.1.3 Percentage of material retained between consecutive 11.1.1 The precision values for fine aggregate in Table 2 are
sieves. based on nominal 500-g test samples. Revision of this test
un

10.2 Report percentages to the nearest whole number, ex-
cept if the percentage passing the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve is less
than 10 %, it shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 %.
10.3 Report the fineness modulus, when required, to the
nearest 0.01.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—The estimates of precision for this test
method are listed in Table 2. The estimates are based on the
results from the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory
Proficiency Sample Program, with testing conducted by Test
Method C136 and AASHTO No. T 27. The data are based on
the analyses of the test results from 65 to 233 laboratories that
tested 18 pairs of coarse aggregate proficiency test samples and
test results from 74 to 222 laboratories that tested 17 pairs of
fine aggregate proficiency test samples (Samples No. 21
method in 1994 permits the fine aggregate test sample size to
be 300 g minimum. Analysis of results of testing of 300-g and
500-g test samples from Aggregate Proficiency Test Samples
99 and 100 (Samples 99 and 100 were essentially identical)
produced the precision values in Table 3, which indicate only
minor differences due to test sample size.
NOTE 7—The values for fine aggregate in Table 2 will be revised to
reflect the 300-g test sample size when a sufficient number of Aggregate
Proficiency Tests have been conducted using that sample size to provide
reliable data.
11.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias in this test method, no
statement on bias is made.
12. Keywords
12.1 aggregate; coarse aggregate; fine aggregate; gradation;
grading; sieve analysis; size analysis

Page 53 of 180
4
 C136/C136M − 14
TABLE 3 Precision Data for 300-g and 500-g Test Samples
Fine Aggregate Proficiency Sample Within Laboratory Between Laboratory
Test Result Sample Size Number Labs Average 1s d2s 1s d2s
Test Method C136/AASHTO No. T 27
Total material passing the 4.75-mm No. 4 sieve (%) 500 g 285 99.992 0.027 0.066 0.037 0.104
300 g 276 99.990 0.021 0.060 0.042 0.117

Total material passing the 2.36-mm No. 8 sieve (%) 500 g 281 84.10 0.43 1.21 0.63 1.76
300 g 274 84.32 0.39 1.09 0.69 1.92

Total material passing the 1.18-mm No. 16 sieve (%) 500 g 286 70.11 0.53 1.49 0.75 2.10
300 g 272 70.00 0.62 1.74 0.76 2.12

Total material passing the 600 µm No. 30 sieve (%) 500 g 287 48.54 0.75 2.10 1.33 3.73
300 g 276 48.44 0.87 2.44 1.36 3.79

Total material passing the 300 µm No. 50 sieve (%) 500 g 286 13.52 0.42 1.17 0.98 2.73
300 g 275 13.51 0.45 1.25 0.99 2.76

Total material passing the 150 µm No. 100 sieve (%) 500 g 287 2.55 0.15 0.42 0.37 1.03
300 g 270 2.52 0.18 0.52 0.32 0.89

y
Total material passing the 75 µm No. 200 sieve (%) 500 g 278 1.32 0.11 0.32 0.31 0.85
300 g 266 1.30 0.14 0.39 0.31 0.85

op
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
lc
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
C136 – 06, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved Dec. 1, 2014)
ia
(1) Revised (with designation change) from SI-only to com-
bined SI/inch-pound standard, where values stated in either SI
or inch-pound units are regarded separately as standard.
fic

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
of

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
un

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 54 of 180
5
 Designation: C142/C142M − 10 American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials Standard
AASHTO No. T112

Standard Test Method for

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C142/C142M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 3. Significance and Use

1.1 This test method covers the approximate determination 3.1 This test method is of primary significance in determin-
of clay lumps and friable particles in aggregates. ing the acceptability of aggregate with respect to the require-
ments of Specification C33.

y
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in 4. Apparatus

op
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
4.1 Balance—A balance or scale accurate to within 0.1 % of
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
the mass of the test sample at any point within the range of use.
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
Balances shall conform to the accuracy of the applicable
with the standard.
sections of Specification C1005.
NOTE 1—Sieve sizes openings are identified by their Specification E11
designation with their alternative Specification E11 designation given in
parentheses for information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
lc 4.2 Containers—Rust-resistant containers of a size and
shape that will permit the spreading of the sample on the
bottom in a thin layer.
4.3 Sieves—Sieves conforming to Specification E11.
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
ia
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 4.4 Drying Oven—An oven providing free circulation of air
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- and capable of maintaining a temperature of 110 6 5 °C [230
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 6 10 °F].
fic

2. Referenced Documents 5. Samples

5.1 Aggregate for this test method shall consist of the
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
material remaining after completion of testing in accordance
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
with Test Method C117. To provide the quantities designated in
of

C117 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
5.3 and 5.4, it may be necessary to combine material from
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
more than one test by Test Method C117.
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates 5.2 Dry the aggregate to substantially constant mass at a
un

C1005 Specification for Reference Masses and Devices for temperature of 110 6 5 °C [230 6 10 °F].
Determining Mass and Volume for Use in the Physical 5.3 Test samples of fine aggregate shall consist of the
Testing of Hydraulic Cements particles coarser than a 1.18-mm (No. 16) sieve and shall have
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test a mass not less than 25 g.
Sieves
5.4 Separate the test samples of coarse aggregate into
different sizes, using the following sieves: 4.75-mm (No. 4),
9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.), 19.0-mm (3⁄4-in.), and 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.). The
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on test sample shall have a mass not less than indicated in the
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
following table:
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 2010. Published January 2011. Originally Size of Particles Making Up Mass of Test Sample,
approved in 1938. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as C142–97(2004). DOI: Test Sample min, g
10.1520/C0142_C0142M-10.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or 4.75 to 9.5-mm (No. 4 to 3⁄8-in.) 1000
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM 9.5 to 19.0-mm (3⁄8 to 3⁄4-in.) 2000
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on 19.0 to 37.5-mm (3⁄4 to 11⁄2-in.) 3000
the ASTM website. Over 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.) 5000

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 55 of 180
1
 C142/C142M − 10
5.5 In the case of mixtures of fine and coarse aggregates,
separate the material on the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve, and
prepare the samples of fine and coarse aggregates in accor-
dance with 5.3 and 5.4.
6. Procedure
6.1 Determine the mass of the test sample to the accuracy
specified in 4.1 and spread it in a thin layer on the bottom of the
container, cover it with distilled water, and soak it for a period
of 24 6 4 h. Roll and squeeze particles individually between
the thumb and forefinger to attempt to break the particle into
smaller sizes. Do not use the fingernails to break up particles,
or press particles against a hard surface or each other. Classify
any particles that can be broken with the fingers into fines
removable by wet sieving as clay lumps or friable particles.
After all discernible clay lumps and friable particles have been
broken, separate the detritus from the remainder of the sample
P 5 @ ~ M 2 R ! /M # 3 100 (1)
where:
P = percent of clay lumps and friable particles,
M = mass of test sample (for fine aggregate the mass of the
portion coarser than the 1.18-mm (No. 16) sieve as
described in 5.3), and
R = mass of particles retained on designated sieve as
determined in accordance with 6.2.
7.2 For coarse aggregates, the percent of clay lumps and
friable particles shall be an average based on the percent of
clay lumps and friable particles in each sieve size fraction
weighted in accordance with the grading of the original sample
before separation or, preferably, the average grading of the
supply represented by the sample. Should the aggregate con-
tain less than 5 % of any of the sizes specified in 6.1, that size
shall not be tested but, for the purpose of calculating the

y
by wet sieving over the sieve prescribed in the following table: weighted average, shall be considered to contain the same
Size of Sieve for Removing
percent of clay lumps and friable particles as the next larger or

op
Size of Particles Making Up Residue of Clay Lumps and next smaller size, whichever is present.
Sample Friable Particles
8. Precision and Bias
Fine aggregate (retained on 850-µm (No. 20)
1.18-mm (No. 16) sieve) 8.1 Precision3—The estimate of the precision of this test
4.75 to 9.5-mm (No. 4 to 3⁄8-in.) 2.36-mm (No. 8) method is provisional and is based on samples of one fine
9.5 to 19.0-mm (3⁄8 to 3⁄4-in.)
19.0 to 37.5-mm (3⁄4 to 11⁄2-in.)
Over 37.5-mm (11⁄2-in.)
4.75-mm
4.75-mm
4.75-mm
Perform the wet sieving by passing water over the sample
through the sieve while manually agitating the sieve, until all
(No.
(No.
(No.
4)
4)
4)
lc aggregate that was tested by ten different operators at nine
different laboratories. For that sample, the average “percent of
clay lumps and friable particles” in the aggregate was 1.2 %,
and the standard deviation was 0.6 %. Based on this standard
ia
undersize material has been removed. deviation, the acceptable range of two test results on samples
from the same aggregate sent to different laboratories is 1.7 %.
6.2 Remove the retained particles carefully from the sieve,
dry to substantially constant mass at a temperature of 110 6 5 8.2 Bias—Since there is no acceptable reference material for
determining the bias for the procedure in this test method, no
fic

°C [230 6 10 °F], allow to cool, and determine the mass to the

nearest 0.1 % of the mass of the test sample as defined in 5.3 statement is being made.
or 5.4.
9. Keywords
7. Calculation 9.1 aggregates; clay lumps; friable particles
of

7.1 Calculate the percent of clay lumps and friable particles

in fine aggregate or individual sizes of coarse aggregate as 3
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
follows: be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:C09-1016.
un

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

Page 56 of 180
2
 Designation: C227 − 10

Standard Test Method for

Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C227; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the sus- 2.1 ASTM Standards:2

y
ceptibility of cement-aggregate combinations to expansive C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
reactions involving hydroxyl ions associated with the alkalies C109/C109M Test Method for Compressive Strength of

op
(sodium and potassium) by measurement of the increase (or Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
decrease) in length of mortar bars containing the combination Specimens)
during storage under prescribed conditions of test. C289 Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of
1.2 Alkalies participating in the expansive reactions usually Aggregates (Chemical Method)
are derived from the cement; under some circumstances they C294 Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Con-
may be derived from other constituents of the concrete or from
external sources. Two types of alkali reactivity of aggregates
are recognized: (1) an alkali-silica reaction involving certain
siliceous rocks, minerals, and natural or artificial glasses and
lc crete Aggregates
C295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete
C305 Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement
ia
(2) an alkali-carbonate reaction involving dolomite in certain Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency
calcitic dolomites and dolomitic limestones (see Descriptive C441 Test Method for Effectiveness of Pozzolans or Ground
Nomenclature C294). The method is not recommended as a Blast-Furnace Slag in Preventing Excessive Expansion of
means to detect the latter reaction because expansions pro- Concrete Due to the Alkali-Silica Reaction
fic

duced in the mortar-bar test by the alkali-carbonate reaction
(see Test Method C586) are generally much less than those
produced by the alkali-silica reaction for combinations having
equally harmful effects in service.
of
C490 Practice for Use of Apparatus for the Determination of
Length Change of Hardened Cement Paste, Mortar, and
Concrete
C511 Specification for Mixing Rooms, Moist Cabinets,

1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the
standard. When combined standards are cited, the selection of Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes
measurement system is at the user’s discretion subject to the C586 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Carbon-
ate Rocks as Concrete Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder
un

requirements of the referenced standard.

Method)
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
C856 Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
Concrete
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
C1437 Test Method for Flow of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Sieves
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
2
C09.26 on Chemical Reactions. For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2010. Published March 2010. Originally contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
approved in 1950. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as C227–03. DOI: Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
10.1520/C0227-10. the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 57 of 180
1
 C227 − 10
3. Significance and Use
3.1 Data correlating the results of tests performed using this
test method with performance of cement-aggregate combina-
tions in concrete in service, results of petrographic examination
of aggregates (Guide C295), and results of tests for potential
reactivity of aggregates by chemical methods have been
published in Test Method C289 and should be consulted in
connection with the use of results of tests performed using this
test method as the basis for conclusions and recommendations
concerning the use of cement-aggregate combinations in con-
crete.
3.2 The results of tests performed using this method furnish
information on the likelihood that a cement-aggregate combi-
nation is potentially capable of harmful alkali-silica reactivity
with consequent deleterious expansion of concrete. Criteria to
determine potential deleterious alkali-silica reactivity of
cement-aggregate combinations from the results of this test
method have been given in the Appendix of Specification C33.
3.3 Insignificant expansion may result when potentially
deleteriously reactive siliceous rocks are present in compara-
tively high proportion even when a high-alkali cement is used.
This may occur because the alkali-silica reaction products are
characterized by an alkali to silica ratio that is so low as to
minimize uptake of water and swelling, or because of alkali
leaching from the bars (see section on containers). Dolomitic
aggregates that are deleteriously affected by the alkali-
lc
carbonate reaction when employed as course aggregate in
ia
concrete may not produce notable expansion in this test
method. Also, significant expansion may occur rarely in the test
for reasons other than alkali-aggregate reaction, particularly
fic
the presence of sulfates in the aggregate that produce a sulfate
attack upon the cement paste, ferrous sulfides (pyrite,
marcasite, or pyrrhotite) that oxidize and hydrate with the
release of sulfate, and materials such as free lime (CaO) or free
of
magnesia (MgO) in the cement or aggregate that progressively
hydrate and carbonate.
3.4 When expansions in excess of those given in the
Appendix of Specification C33 are shown in results of tests
un
performed using this test method, it is strongly recommended
that supplementary information be developed to confirm that
the expansion is actually due to alkali reactivity. Sources of
such supplementary information include: (1) petrographic
examination of the aggregate to determine if known reactive
constituents are present; (2) examination of the specimens after
tests to identify the products of alkali reactivity; and (3) tests of
the aggregate for potential reactivity by chemical methods
(Test Method C289).
3.5 When it has been concluded from the results of tests
performed using this test method and supplementary informa-
tion as outlined that a given cement-aggregate combination
should be considered potentially deleteriously reactive, addi-
tional studies may be appropriate to develop information on the
potential reactivity of other combinations containing the same
cement with other aggregates, the same aggregate with other
cements, or the same cement-aggregate combination with a
mineral admixture.
2
4. Apparatus
4.1 The apparatus shall conform to Specification C490,
except as follows:
4.2 Sieves—Square hole, woven-wire cloth sieves, shall
conform to Specification E11.
4.3 Mixer, Paddle, and Mixing Bowl— Mixer, paddle, and
mixing bowl shall conform to the requirements of Practice
C305, except that the clearance between the lower end of the
paddle and the bottom of the bowl shall be 5 to 6 mm.
4.4 Tamper and Trowel—The tamper and trowel shall con-
form to Test Method C109/C109M.
4.5 Containers—Covered containers for storing the test
specimens shall be constructed of material that is resistant to
corrosion under the test conditions. The wall thickness of the
container and cover shall be less than 6 mm to reduce the
y
insulating effect and provide a rapid heat transfer for the initial
14-day test period. The cover shall be constructed in a manner
op
to maintain a tight seal between the cover and top of the
container wall (Note 1). The container shall be arranged to
provide every surface of each specimen with approximately an
equal exposure to an absorbent wicking material. The speci-
mens shall not be in direct contact with the wicking material
but every surface shall be within 30 mm or less of the the
wicking. A typical arrangement of such a container is shown in
Fig. 1. The inner sides and the center core of the containers are
to be lined with an absorbent material, such as blotting or filter
paper, to act as a wick and to ensure that the atmosphere in the
container is quickly saturated with water vapor when it is
sealed after the specimens are placed therein. The wicking
liners will extend into the top of the water in the bottom of the
container and above the tops of the specimens. Make provi-
sions to support the bars in a vertical position with the lower
end of the bars approximately 25 mm above the surface of the
water in the containers. The weight of the specimens shall not
be supported on the metal gage studs. A supporting rack shall
be provided to ensure that the specimens do not touch the
wicking material or each other. The supporting rack shall be
constructed of brass wire or other material that is resistant to
corrosion under the test conditions and shall not act as a vapor
barrier but provide free movement of vapors within the
container. Provisions shall be made to prevent water from
splashing and dripping onto the specimens (Notes 2-4). If
required to prevent the growth of mold on the wicking, add a
suitable fungicide to the water in the container. The container
size and internal arrangement of the specimens and wicking
may be varied at the users discretion, providing expansion data
for all specimens can be shown to be equivalent to that
developed with the container herein described.
NOTE 1—This seal may be achieved by a double wrap of vinyl tape 38
mm or greater in width, overlaying the lid and container wall along its full
circumference.
NOTE 2—The shape and spacing of the center wicking material may be
maintained during the test by the use of rubber bands or hardware cloth.
NOTE 3—If concern exists for adequately preventing dripping or
splashing, the water should be tested for pH and alkali content.
NOTE 4—The container described in 4.5 and in Fig. 1 has been shown
to produce large and reproducible expansions with cement-aggregate
combinations such as borosilicate glass: high-alkali cement combination
Page 58 of 180
 C227 − 10
FIG. 1 Diagram of an Acceptable Assembled Container
called for by Test Method C441. However, recent work, at a few
lc
laboratories, suggests that the same factors that are responsible for the
success with the Test Method C441 mixtures, that is, high, constant,
uniform internal relative humidity, will, under certain testing regimes
ia
permitted by this test method, promote leaching of alkali from the
specimens and result in little or no expansion from some known
deleteriously alkali-reactive aggregate: high-alkali cement combinations.
Each laboratory should evaluate its containers with a known deleteriously
fic
alkali-reactive aggregate (not borosilicate glass which releases alkali) and
a high-alkali cement, to establish that the expected level of expansion is
obtained. If not, try removing the wicking to reduce the condensation and
leaching. Minimizing the temperature variation within the storage room
and the room in which the bars are read may also reduce condensation on
of
and leaching from the bars.
5. Temperature and Humidity
5.1 The temperature of the molding room and dry materials
un
shall be maintained at not less than 20 °C and not more than
27.5 °C. The temperature of the mixing water, of the moist
closet or moist room, and of the room in which the measure-
ments are made shall not vary from 23 °C by more than 2.0 °C.
5.2 The relative humidity of the molding room shall be not
less than 50 %. The moist closet or room shall conform to
Specification C511.
5.3 The storage room in which the specimens in containers
are stored shall be maintained at a temperature that shall not
vary from 38.0 °C by more than 2.0 °C.
6. Selection and Preparation of Materials
6.1 Selection of Aggregate—Materials proposed for use as
fine aggregate in concrete shall be processed as described in
6.2 with a minimum of crushing. Materials proposed for use as
coarse aggregate in concrete shall be processed by crushing to
produce as nearly as practical a graded product from which a
sample can be obtained. The sample shall have the grading as
3
y
op
prescribed in 6.2 and be representative of the composition of
the coarse aggregate as proposed for use.
6.1.1 When a given quarried material is proposed for use,
both as coarse and as fine aggregate, it will be tested only by
selection of an appropriate sample crushed to the fine aggregate
sizes, unless there is reason to expect that the coarser size
fractions have a different composition than the finer sizes and
that these differences might significantly affect expansion due
to reaction with the alkalies in cement. In this case the coarser
size fractions should be tested in a manner similar to that
employed in testing the fine aggregate sizes.
6.1.2 Coarse aggregate crushed to sand size may give
increased expansion, owing to the increased surface exposed
upon crushing. Therefore, if coarse aggregate tested by this
method produces an excessive amount of expansion, the
material shall not be classed as objectionably reactive with
alkali unless tests of concrete specimens confirm the findings
of the tests of the mortar.
6.2 Preparation of Aggregate—Fine aggregate shall be
tested in a grading meeting the requirements of the specifica-
tions for the project except that any material retained on the
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve shall be removed. Fine aggregates being
tested for reasons other than to determine compliance with
individual specifications, and all coarse aggregates to which
this method is applied shall be graded in accordance with the
requirements prescribed in Table 1. Aggregates in which
sufficient quantities of the sizes specified in Table 1 do not exist
shall be crushed until the required material has been produced.
In the case of aggregates containing insufficient amounts of one
or more of the larger sizes listed in Table 1, and if no larger
material is available for crushing, the first size in which
sufficient material is available shall contain the cumulative
percentage of material down to that size as determined from the
Page 59 of 180
 C227 − 10
TABLE 1 Grading Requirements
Sieve Size
Mass %
Passing Retained on
4.75-mm (No. 4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) 10
2.36-mm (No. 8) 1.18-mm (No. 16) 25
1.18-mm (No. 16) 600-µm (No. 30) 25
600-µm (No. 30) 300-µm (No. 50) 25
300-µm (No. 50) 150-µm (No. 100) 15
grading specified in Table 1. When such procedures are
required, special note shall be made thereof in the test report.
After the aggregate has been separated into the various sieve
sizes, each size shall be washed with a water spray over the
sieve to remove adhering dust and fine particles from the
aggregate. The portions retained on the various sieves shall
then be dried and, unless used immediately, each such portion
shall be stored individually in a clean container provided with
a tight-fitting cover.
6.3 Selection and Preparation of Cement:
6.3.1 Job Cement—When it is desired to evaluate a particu-
lar cement-aggregate combination for use in particular work,
the cement or cements used shall meet the requirements for the
work and shall be from the source or sources expected to be
used in the work. If several cements may be used in the work,
tests desirably should be made using each of these; in any case,
the cement or cements whose alkali content exceeds 0.60 %,
calculated as Na2O, should be used.
lc
6.3.2 Reference Cements—When it is desired to evaluate
ia
aggregates for general use or to compare aggregates for
investigational purposes, the cement used shall be of the
highest alkali content representative of the general use
fic
intended, or available to the laboratory making the tests. The
cement or cements selected should comply with applicable
specifications. Additional information of value may be ob-
tained by conducting tests in parallel with cements of different
alkali content, different Na2O:K2O ratio, or using pozzolans.
of
6.3.3 Preparation of Cement—Cement for use in this test
shall be passed through a 850-µm (No. 20) sieve to remove
lumps before use.
un
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of Test Specimens:
7.1.1 Number of Specimens—Make at least four test
specimens, two from each of two batches, for each cement-
aggregate combination.
7.1.2 Preparation of Molds—Prepare the molds in accor-
dance with the requirements of Specification C490.
7.1.3 Proportioning of Mortar—Proportion the dry materi-
als for the test mortar using 1 part of cement to 2.25 parts of
graded aggregate by mass. The quantities of dry materials to be
mixed at one time in the batch of mortar for making two
specimens shall be 300 g of cement and 675 g of aggregate
made up by recombining the portions retained on the various
sieves (see 6.2) in the grading prescribed in Table 1 or of
aggregate in a grading meeting the requirements of the
specifications for the project. The amount of mixing water,
measured in millimetres, shall be such as to produce a flow of
105 to 120 (as determined in accordance with Test Method
4
C1437) except that the flow table shall be given 10 drops in
approximately 6 s. Express the amount of mixing water used as
a percent by mass of the cement.
7.1.4 Mixing of Mortar—Mix the mortar in accordance with
the requirements of Practice C305.
7.1.5 Molding of Test Specimens—Immediately following
completion of the flow test return the mortar from the flow
table to the mixing bowl. Mix the entire batch for a period of
15 s. Start molding specimens with a total elapsed time of not
more than 2 min and 15 s after completion of the original
mixing of the mortar batch. Fill the molds with two approxi-
mately equal layers, each layer being compacted with the
tamper. Work the mortar into the corners, around the gage
studs, and along the surfaces of the mold with the tamper until
a homogeneous specimen is obtained. After the top layer has
been compacted, cut off the mortar flush with the top of the
y
mold and smooth the surface with a few strokes of the trowel.
7.1.5.1 When a duplicate batch of mortar is to be made
op
immediately for additional specimens, a second flow test is not
required, in which case allow the mortar to stand in the mixing
bowl for 90 s and then remixed for 15 s before starting the
molding of the specimens.
7.1.6 Sequence of Making Batches of Mortar—When more
than one cement-aggregate combination is to be tested as part
of a single investigation, make the total number of batches of
mortar (two per cement-aggregate combination) in random
order, except that in no case shall the two batches representing
a single cement-aggregate combination be made consecutively.
When the making of all of the specimens for a single
investigation requires that batches be made on 2 working days,
each cement-aggregate combination shall be represented by
one batch made on each day, and the order in which the
combinations are represented by batches shall be different on
the 2 days. When more than 2 days are required, one cement-
aggregate combination shall be represented by a batch made on
each of the working days.
7.2 Storage and Measurement of Test Specimens:
7.2.1 Initial Storage and Measurement—After each mold
has been filled, place the mold immediately in the moist
cabinet or room. The specimens shall remain in the molds for
24 6 2 h. Then remove them from the molds and, while being
protected from loss of moisture, properly identify and measure
for initial length. The initial and all subsequent measurements
shall be made and recorded to the nearest 0.002 mm.
7.2.2 Subsequent Storage and Measurement—Stand the
specimens on end over, but not in contact with, water in the
storage container. Seal and place the container for 12 days in a
cabinet or room maintained at a temperature of 38.0 6 2.0 °C.
When the specimens are 14 days old measure their length after
removal of the container and contents from the storage room or
cabinet, and after the container and contents have been stored
at 23.0 6 2.0 °C for at least 16 h before opening the container
and making the 14-day measurement. Additional measure-
ments shall be made at later ages as required.
7.2.3 Additional information of value may often be obtained
by returning the specimens to the 38.0 °C storage after the
14-day test and making additional measurements at later ages.
Page 60 of 180
 C227 − 10
Measurements at ages of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, and 12 months and, if
necessary, at least every 6 months thereafter are suggested.
7.2.4 After each length measurement specimens may be
examined, in the same manner described in Section 9, to
provide supplemental information on their condition.
7.2.5 All specimens placed in a given container after the
initial length measurement at 24 6 2 h shall have been made
on the same day and shall be placed in the container at the same
time so that all specimens in a given container shall be due for
measurement at the same time. Each time length measurements
are made, clean the container and change the water.
7.2.6 Always place the specimens in the comparator with
the same end uppermost and after measurement replace the
specimens in the container in inverted position as compared
with the previous period.
8. Calculation
8.1 Calculate the difference between the initial length of the
specimen and the length at each period of measurement to the
nearest 0.001 % of the effective gage length and record as the
expansion of the specimen for that period. Report the average
of the expansion of the four specimens of a given cement-
aggregate combination to the nearest 0.01 % as the expansion
for the combination for a given period.
9. Examination at End of Test
9.1 After the final length change measurements have been
made, each specimen shall be tested for warping and shall be
lc
ia
examined (see Note 5).
9.1.1 Warping—The warping, if any, that each specimen has
manifested during the test period, shall be determined by
placing the specimen on a plane surface and measuring the
fic
maximum separation between the specimen and the surface.
The specimen shall be placed so that its ends curve down to the
reference surface and the measurement made to the nearest 0.3
mm.
of
9.1.2 Examination—Items to be noted in the examination
include:
9.1.2.1 Presence, location, and type of pattern of cracking,
9.1.2.2 Appearance of surfaces, surface mottling, and
un
9.1.2.3 Surficial deposits or exudations, their nature, thick-
ness and continuity.
NOTE 5—When it is believed that additional features of noteworthy
5
importance are likely to be revealed thereby, a further examination of the
interior of the specimen may be made, following Practice C856. In such
cases, the presence of gel-filled pores and fissures, evidence of reaction
with aggregate particles of specific types and the nature of such evidence
and the properties of the reaction products are among the items to be
noted.
10. Report
10.1 Report the following information:
10.1.1 Type and source of aggregate,
10.1.2 Type and source of portland cement,
10.1.3 Alkali content of cement as percent potassium oxide
(K2O), sodium oxide (Na2O), and calculated sodium oxide
(Na2O) equivalent,
10.1.4 Average length change in percent at each reading of
the specimens,
10.1.5 Any relevant information concerning the preparation
of aggregates, including the grading of the aggregate when it
y
differs from that given in 6.2,
10.1.6 Any significant features revealed by examination of
op
the specimens during and after test,
10.1.7 Amount of mixing water expressed as percent by
mass of cement, and
10.1.8 Type, source, proportions, and chemical analyses,
including Na2O and K2O, of any pozzolans employed in the
tests.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision shall be considered satisfactory if the differ-
ences in the value for percentage expansion of any given
specimen in a group from the average value for percentage
expansion of the group does not exceed 0.003, except that, if
the average expansion exceeds 0.020 %, the repeatability shall
be considered satisfactory if the percentage expansion of each
specimen molded from the same cement-aggregate combina-
tion is within 15 % of the average.
11.2 Interlaboratory test data for the determination of revi-
sions to this section in accordance with Practice C670 are being
evaluated by Subcommittee C09.02.02 and will be included in
a later revision of this test method.
12. Keywords
12.1 aggregate; alkali-silica reaction; cement; length
change; mortar
Page 61 of 180
 C227 − 10
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
C227–03, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved February 1, 2010)

(1) Revised the standard to delete inch-pound units throughout.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

y
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 62 of 180
6
 Designation: C289 − 07

Standard Test Method for

Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical
Method)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C289; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* C1293 Test Method for Determination of Length Change of

1.1 This test method covers chemical determination of the Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates

y
potential reactivity of an aggregate with alkalies in portland-
cement concrete as indicated by the amount of reaction during D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
24 h at 80 °C between 1 N sodium hydroxide solution and D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion

op
aggregate that has been crushed and sieved to pass a 300-µm Materials for Wire and Cable
sieve and be retained on a 150-µm sieve. E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as E60 Practice for Analysis of Metals, Ores, and Related
standard. Materials by Spectrophotometry
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
lc 2.2 American Chemical Society Documents:
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifica-
tions
ia
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. A specific precau- NOTE 1—For suggestions on the testing of reagents not listed by the
tionary statement is given in 5.7.1. American Chemical Society, see “Reagent Chemicals and Standards,” by
Joseph Rosin, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., New York, NY, and the “United
2. Referenced Documents States Pharmacopeia.”
fic

2.1 ASTM Standards:2

3. Significance and Use
C114 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic
Cement 3.1 When this test method is used to evaluate the potential
C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of reactivity of siliceous components in the aggregate with
of

Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method) alkalies in hydraulic-cement concrete, it must be used in

C295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for combination with other methods. Do not use the results of tests
Concrete by this test method as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing for sources with regard to ASR.
un

Size
3.2 Reactions between a sodium hydroxide solution and
C1005 Specification for Reference Masses and Devices for
siliceous components in the aggregate have been shown to
Determining Mass and Volume for Use in the Physical
correlate with the performance of some aggregates in concrete
Testing of Hydraulic Cements
structures. The results from this test method can be obtained
C1260 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Ag-
quickly, and, while not completely reliable in all cases, they
gregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
can provide useful data.

1
3.3 This test method can be employed as a quality control
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee tool to periodically check samples from an existing source with
C09.26 on Chemical Reactions. an acceptable service history.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2007. Published December 2007. Originally
approved in 1952. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as C289 – 03. DOI:
10.1520/C0289-07.
4. Apparatus
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
4.1 Scales—The scales and weights used for weighing
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on materials shall conform to the requirements prescribed in
the ASTM website. Specification C1005.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 63 of 180
1
 C289 − 07
4.2 Balances—The analytical balance and weights used for
determining dissolved silica by the gravimetric method shall
conform to the requirements prescribed in Test Methods C114.
4.3 Crushing and Grinding Equipment—A small jaw
crusher and disk pulverizer or other suitable equipment capable
of crushing and grinding aggregate to pass a 300-µm sieve.
4.4 Sieves:
4.4.1 300-µm and 150-µm square-hole, woven wire-cloth
sieves conforming to Specification E11.
4.4.2 A 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve.
4.5 Containers—Reaction containers of 50 to 75-mL
capacity, made of corrosion-resistant steel or other corrosion-
resistant material, and fitted with airtight covers. A container
that has been found suitable is shown in Fig. 1. Other
containers, made of corrosion-resistant material such as
polyethylene, may be suitable. Such suitability can be demon-
strated by a change in the alkalinity of the sodium hydroxide
solution (Rc, Section on Reduction in Alkalinity) when used
alone as a blank in the container in question, of less than 10
mmol/L.
4.6 Constant-Temperature Bath—A liquid bath capable of
maintaining a temperature of 80 6 1 °C for 24 h.
4.7 Spectrophotometer or Photometer—A spectrophotom-
eter or photoelectric photometer capable of measuring the
transmission of light at a constant wavelength of approximately
410 nm (see Practice E60).
4.8 Glassware—All glass apparatus and vessels should be
carefully selected to meet the particular requirements for each
operation. Standard volumetric flasks, burets, and pipets should
be of precision grade.

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

NOTE 1—All dimensions are in mm.

FIG. 1 Reaction Container

Page 64 of 180
2
 C289 − 07
5. Reagents
5.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents shall
conform to Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society
Specifications. Other grades may be used, provided it is first
ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently high purity to
permit its use without lessening the accuracy of the determi-
nation.
5.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references
to water shall be understood to mean reagent water conforming
to Type IV of Specification D1193.
5.3 Ammonium Molybdate Solution—Dissolve 10 g of am-
monium molybdate ((NH4)6 Mo7O24·4H2O) in 100 mL of
water. If the solution is not clear, filter through a fine-texture
paper. Store the solution in a polyethylene container (see Note
2).
5.4 Hydrochloric Acid (1.19 kg/L)—Concentrated hydro-
chloric acid (HCl). Store the solution in a chemically resistant
glass or suitable plastic container (see Note 2).
5.5 Hydrochloric Acid, Standard (0.05 N)—Prepare ap-
proximately 0.05 N HCl and standardize to 60.0001 N. Store
the solution in a chemically resistant glass or suitable plastic
container (see Note 2).
5.6 Hydrochloric Acid (1 + 1)—Mix equal volumes of con-
centrated HCl (1.19 kg/L) and water. Store the solution in a
lc
chemically resistant glass or suitable plastic container (see
ia
Note 2).
5.7 Hydrofluoric Acid (approximately 50 % HF)—
Concentrated hydrofluoric acid. Store in a polyethylene bottle
fic
(see Note 2).
5.7.1 Warning—Before using HF, review (1) the safety
precautions for using HF, (2) first aid for burns, and (3) the
emergency response to spills, as described in the manufactur-
of
er’s Material Safety Data Sheet or other reliable safety litera-
ture. HF can cause very severe burns and injury to unprotected
skin and eyes. Suitable personal protective equipment should
always be used. These should include full-face shields, rubber
un
aprons, and gloves impervious to HF. Gloves should be
checked periodically for pin holes.
5.8 Oxalic Acid Solution—Dissolve 10 g of oxalic acid
dihydrate in 100 mL of water. Store the solution in a chemi-
cally resistant glass or suitable plastic container (see Note 2).
5.9 Phenolphthalein Indicator Solution—Dissolve 1 g of
phenolphthalein in 100 mL of ethanol (1 + 1). Store the
solution in a chemically resistant glass or suitable plastic
container (see Note 2).
5.10 Silica Standard Solution—Prepare a standard silica
solution containing approximately 10 mmol of silica (SiO2)/L
by dissolving sodium metasilicate in water. Store the solution
in a polyethylene bottle. Use a 100-mL aliquot of the solution
to determine its SiO2 content by the procedure described in 8.2.
Do not use a standard silica solution older than 1 year, since
dissolved ionic silica in such a solution slowly polymerizes,
causing spuriously low photometric readings (see Note 2).
3
5.11 Sodium Hydroxide, Standard Solution (1.000 6 0.010
N)—Prepare a 1.000 6 0.010 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH)
solution and standardize to 60.001 N. Store the solution in a
polyethylene bottle (Note 2). Protect the dry reagent and
solution from contamination by carbon dioxide.
5.12 Sulfuric Acid (sp gr 1.84)—Concentrated sulfuric acid
(H2SO4). Store the solution in a chemically resistant glass
container (see Note 2).
NOTE 2—In selecting the container, take care to ensure that the reagent
will not be modified by reaction with the material composing the
container, including pigments or other additives, or by transpiration of
phases through the walls of the container. Containers with wall thickness
not less than 0.51 mm and composed of high-density polyethylene
meeting the requirements of Specification D1248, for materials of Type
III, Class A, are suitable.
6. Selection and Preparation of Test Samples
y
6.1 The test can be used for either fine or coarse aggregate,
and when the fine and coarse aggregate are of the same
op
material it can be used for the total aggregate.
6.2 Obtain the aggregate sample in accordance with Practice
D75. Use the sample sizes given in Table number 1 of Practice
D75.
6.2.1 For samples of aggregate with a nominal maximum
size less than 19.0 mm, split the sample in half in accordance
with Practice C702. Crush one half as described in 6.2.3.
Retain the other half for further testing if desired.
6.2.2 For samples of aggregate with a nominal maximum
size 19.0 mm or larger, mix and quarter the sample in
accordance with Practice C702. Crush one quarter as described
in 6.2.3. Retain the other three quarters of the sample for
further testing if desired.
6.2.3 Crush the sample in a jaw-crusher using small por-
tions at a time, retaining all fractions, until the sample passes
a 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. Reduce the crushed sample to 300 6
5 g by splitting in accordance with Practice C702.
6.3 Sieve the 300-g sample, discarding all material that
passes the 150-µm (No. 100) sieve. Crush or grind the sample
in small portions using a disk pulverizer, rotary mill (rotating-
puck) device, or mortar and pestle. To minimize the production
of material passing the 150-µm (No.100) sieve, use several
passes of the portion through the equipment, removing material
passing the 300-µm (No. 50) sieve before regrinding the
remainder. If the amount of material retained on the 150-µm
(No. 100) sieve is less than 100 g after pulverizing the entire
300-g sample, discard the sample and pulverize a new 300-g
sample (Note 3).
NOTE 3—An over-pulverized sample may not produce the correct
chemical test results. A properly pulverized sample will have about 110 to
150 g of material remaining on the 150-µm (No. 100) sieve after washing.
6.4 To ensure that all material finer than the 150-µm sieve
has been removed, wash the sample over a 150-µm sieve. Do
not wash more than 100 g over a 203-mm diameter sieve at one
time. Dry the washed sample at 105 6 5 °C for 20 6 4 h. Cool
the sample and again sieve on the 150-µm sieve. If inspection
of the sample indicates the presence of silty or clayey coatings
on particles, repeat the washing and drying procedure, and
Page 65 of 180
 C289 − 07
sieve as before over the 150-µm sieve. Reserve the portion
retained on the 150-µm sieve for the test sample.
7. Reaction Procedure
7.1 Weigh out three representative 25.00 6 0.05-g portions
of the dry 150-µm to 300-µm test sample prepared in accor-
dance with Section 6. Place one portion in each of the three of
the reaction containers, and add by means of a pipet, 25 mL of
the 1.000 N NaOH solution. To a fourth reaction container, by
means of a pipet, add 25 mL of the same NaOH solution to
serve as a blank. Seal the four containers and gently swirl them
to liberate trapped air.
7.2 Immediately after the containers have been sealed, place
them in a liquid bath maintained at 80 6 1.0 °C. After 24 6 1⁄4
h, remove the containers from the bath and cool them, for 15
6 2 min, under running tap water having a temperature below
30 °C.
7.3 Immediately after the containers have been cooled, open
them and filter the solution from the aggregate residue. Use a
porcelain Gooch crucible (see Note 4) with a disk of rapid,
analytical-grade filter paper cut to fit the bottom of the crucible,
setting the crucible in a rubber crucible holder in a funnel.
lc
Place a dry test tube, 35 to 50-mL capacity, in the filter flask to
collect the filtrate, and seat the funnel in the neck of the filter
flask. With the aspirator in operation or the vacuum line open,
decant a small quantity of the solution onto the filter paper so
ia
it will seat properly in the crucible. Without stirring the
contents of the container, decant the remaining free liquid into
the crucible. When the decantation of the liquid has been
completed, discontinue the vacuum and transfer the solids
fic
remaining in the container to the crucible and pack in place
with the aid of a stainless-steel spatula. Then apply and adjust
the vacuum to approximately 51 kPa. Continue the filtration
until further filtration yields filtrate at the approximate rate of
of
1 drop every 10 s; reserve the filtrate for further tests. Record
the total amount of time during which the vacuum is applied as
the filtration time; make every effort to achieve an equal
un
filtration time for all samples in a set, by uniformity of
procedure in the assembly of the filtration apparatus and the
packing of the solids in the crucible.
NOTE 4—Coors Size No. 4 Gooch crucibles, or equivalent, have been
found satisfactory for this purpose.
7.4 Filter the blank according to the procedure described in
7.3. Apply the vacuum for a length of time equal to the average
filtration time for the three specimens.
7.5 Immediately following the completion of filtration, stir
the filtrate to assure homogeneity, then take by pipet an aliquot
of 10 mL of the filtrate and dilute with water to 200 mL in a
volumetric flask. Reserve this diluted solution for the determi-
nation of the dissolved SiO2 and the reduction in alkalinity.
7.6 If the diluted filtrate is not to be analyzed within 4 h
following completion of the filtration, transfer the solution to a
clean, dry polyethylene container and close the container by
means of a stopper or tight-fitting cap or lid.
4
8. Analysis of Filtrate
8.1 Measure dissolved silica using either the gravimetric
method (See 8.2) or the photometric method (See 8.3) and
measure reduction in alkalinity (See 8.4).
8.2 Dissolved Silica by the Gravimetric Method
8.2.1 Procedure:
8.2.1.1 Transfer by pipet 100 mL of the dilute solution (7.5)
to an evaporating dish, preferably of platinum for speed in
evaporation, add 5 to 10 mL of HCl (1.19 kg/L), and evaporate
to dryness on a steam bath. Without heating the residue further,
treat it with 5 to 10 mL of HCl (1.19 kg/L) and then an equal
amount of water, or at once pour 10 to 20 mL of HCl (1 + 1)
upon the residue. Cover the dish and digest for 10 min on the
steam bath or a hot plate. Dilute the solution with an equal
volume of hot water, filter immediately through quantitative-
grade, low–ash filter paper, and wash the separated silica
y
(SiO2) thoroughly with hot water (see Note 5) and reserve the
residue.
op
NOTE 5—The washing of the SiO2 precipitates can be made more
effective by using hot HCl (1 + 99) and then completing the washing with
hot water.
8.2.1.2 Again evaporate the filtrate to dryness, baking the
residue in an oven for 1 h at 105 to 110 °C. Take up the residue
with 10 to 15 mL of HCl (1 + 1) and heat on the bath or hot
plate. Dilute the solution with an equal volume of hot water
and catch and wash the small amount of SiO2 it contains on
another filter paper. This second evaporation is necessary only
when determining the concentration of the standard sodium
metasilicate solution in 5.10. For the other test solutions, it can
be eliminated.
8.2.1.3 Transfer the papers containing the residue (8.2.1.1
and 8.2.1.2) to a platinum crucible (see Note 6). Dry and ignite
the papers, first at a low heat until the carbon of the filter paper
is completely consumed without inflaming, and finally at 1100
to 1200 °C until the mass remains constant.
NOTE 6—The mass of the empty crucible may be determined if one
wishes to know the magnitude of impurities in the residue of SiO2.
8.2.1.4 Treat the SiO2 thus obtained, which will contain
small amounts of impurities, in the crucible with a few drops of
water, about 10 mL of HF, and one drop of H2SO4, and
evaporate cautiously to dryness on the steam bath. Finally, heat
the small residue at 1050 to 1100 °C for 1 to 2 min, cool, and
determine the mass. The difference between this determination
and that previously obtained represents the amount of SiO2.
8.2.2 Calculation: Calculate the SiO2 concentration of the
NaOH solution filtered from the aggregate material, as follows:
S c 5 3330 3 W (1)
where:
Sc = concentration of SiO2 in mmol/L in the original filtrate,
and
W = grams of SiO2 found in 100 mL of the dilute solution.
8.3 Dissolved Silica by the Photometric Method
8.3.1 Application: This method is applicable to the determi-
nation of crystalloidal (noncolloidal) silica (see Note 7) in all
aqueous solutions except those with excessive color interfer-
ences (tannin and so forth), but it will not determine total silica.
Page 66 of 180

The method is particularly applicable to rapid control analysis
of crystalloidal silica below 10 ppm.
NOTE 7—Crystalloidal (noncolloidal) silica reacts with molybdate ion
in acid solution (optimum pH 1.2 to 1.5) to form a greenish yellow
silico-molybdate color complex the intensity of which is approximately
proportional to the silica concentration of the solution, but does not follow
Beer’s law perfectly.
8.3.2 Preparation of Calibration Curve:
8.3.2.1 Prepare a series of solutions of known silica con-
centration varying from 0.0 to 0.5 mmol/L by diluting portions
of the stock solution of sodium silicate (5.10). Transfer the
portions of sodium silicate solution to 100-mL volumetric
flasks about half filled with water.
8.3.2.2 Add 2 mL of the ammonium molybdate solution and
1 mL of HCl (1 + 1), and agitate by swirling the flask. Allow
the solution to stand for 15 min at room temperature. Add 1.5
6 0.2 mL of the oxalic acid solution, fill the flask to the mark
with water, and mix thoroughly. Allow the solution to stand for
5.0 6 0.1 min. Read the transmittance of the various solutions
on the photometer at 410 nm, in comparison with that of water.
8.3.2.3 Prepare a calibration curve by plotting the percent
transmittance or absorbance readings against the known con-
centrations of silica in each solution.
8.3.3 Determination of Dissolved Silica:
8.3.3.1 Transfer by pipet a 10-mL aliquot of the dilute
solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask half filled with water and
proceed as directed in 8.3.2.2 and 8.3.2.3. Read the concentra-
tion of silica in the solution directly from the previously
lc
ia
prepared calibration curve correlating transmission of light of
this wave length with silica concentration. If the transmittance
is below 30 % or above 50 %, a smaller or larger aliquot of the
diluted solution shall be used.
fic
8.3.4 Calculation:
8.3.4.1 Calculate the SiO2 concentration of the NaOH
solution filtered from the aggregate material, as follows:
S c 5 20 3 ~ 100/V ! 3 C
of
where:
Sc = concentration of SiO2, mmol/L in the original filtrate,
un
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS
X1.1 Correlations between data obtained by this method,
expansion of mortar bars containing high-alkali cement, petro-
graphic examinations of aggregates, and performance of ag-
gregates in concrete structures have been published (1-7).3 On
the basis of these data, the solid curve shown in Fig. X1.1 has
been established. A potentially deleterious degree of alkali
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the references appearing at the
end of this test method.
C289 − 07
C = concentration of silica in the solution measured in the
photometer, mmol/L, and
V = millilitres of dilute solution used from 7.5.
8.4 Reduction in Alkalinity
8.4.1 Procedure: Transfer by pipet a 20-mL aliquot of the
dilute solution (7.5) to a 125-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add 2 or 3
drops of phenolphthalein solution, and titrate with 0.05-N HCl
to the phenolphthalein end point.
8.4.2 Calculation: Calculate the reduction in alkalinity as
follows:
R c 5 ~ 20N/V 1 !~ V 3 2 V 2 ! 3 1000 (3)
where:
Rc = the reduction in alkalinity, mmol/L,
N = normality of the HCl used for the titration,
V1 = millilitres of dilute solution used from 7.5,
V2 = millilitres of HCl used to attain the phenolphthalein
y
end point in the test sample, and
V3 = millilitres of HCl used to attain the phenolphthalein
op
end point in the blank.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 Precision—Information concerning the precision of this
test method is being investigated and will be published when
the proper data have been obtained and analyzed as prescribed
in Practice C670.
9.2 Preliminary data on precision indicate that the test
results may be considered satisfactory if none of the three
values of Rc (and of Sc) differs from the average of the three
by more than the following amounts: (1) when the average is
100 mmol or less, 12 mmol/L, and (2) when the average is
more than 100 mmol/L, 12 %.
9.3 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias of this test method, no
statement on bias is made.
(2)
10. Keywords
10.1 aggregate reactivity; alkali; alkali-silica reactivity;
concrete aggregates
reactivity is indicated if any of the threeRc, Sc points lie on the
deleterious side of the curve in Fig. X1.1. However, potentially
deleterious aggregates represented by points lying above the
dashed line in Fig. X1.1 may give relatively low expansions in
mortar or concrete even though they are extremely reactive
with alkalies. These aggregates should be considered to indi-
cate a potentially deleterious degree of reactivity until the
innocuous character of the aggregate is demonstrated by
service records or by supplementary tests in accordance with
the provisions of Test Methods C227, C1260, or C1293, as
Page 67 of 180
5
 C289 − 07

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

FIG. X1.1 Illustration of Division Between Innocuous and Deleterious Aggregates on Basis of Reduction in Alkalinity Test

Page 68 of 180
6
 C289 − 07
applicable. The additional test method(s) should be selected
based on the mineralogical characteristics of the aggregate. It is
recommended that these mineralogical properties be deter-
mined with a petrographic examination in accordance with the
provisions of Guide C295.
X1.2 Results of this test may not be correct for aggregates
containing carbonates of calcium, magnesium, or ferrous iron,
such as calcite, dolomite, magnesite, or siderite; or silicates of
magnesium such as antigorite (serpentine) (6,7). The error
introduced by calcium carbonate is not significant unless Sc and
Rc values indicate the potential reactivity is marginal. Exami-
nations of the aggregate in accordance with Guide C295, can
be used to determine the presence of minerals of this type.
X1.3 It is recommended that interpretations based upon this
method be correlated with Guide C295 and service records of
the aggregate. The results of this test do not predict the
late-slow silica-silicate reactivity in concrete that may result
with aggregates containing strained or micro-granulated
quartz, or aggregates composed of metagraywacke, meta-
siltstone, meta-quartz, and similar rocks.

REFERENCES

(1) Mielenz, R. C., and Witte, L. P., “Tests Used by the Bureau of Concretes, ASTM STP 99, ASTM, 1950, p. 153.
Reclamation for Identifying Reactive Concrete Aggregates,” (4) Slate, F. O., “Chemical Reactions of Indiana Aggregates in Disinte-

y
Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 48, 1948, pp. 1071–1103 and discussion, p. gration of Concrete,” Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 49, 1949, p. 954.
1104. (5) Lerch, William, “Chemical Reactions of Concrete Aggregates,” ASTM

(2) Mielenz, R. C., Greene, K. T., and Benton, E. J., “Chemical Test for
Reactivity of Aggregates with Cement Alkalies: Chemical Processes
in Cement-Aggregate Reaction,” Proceedings, Am. Concrete Inst.,
Vol 44, 1948, p. 193.
(3) Lerch, William, “Studies of Some Methods of Avoiding Expansion
and Pattern Cracking Associated with the Alkali-Aggregate
Reaction,” Symposium on Use of Pozzolanic Materials in Mortars and
lc
ia
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
op
STP 169, ASTM, 1956, p. 334.
(6) Mielenz, R. C., and Benton, E. J., “Evaluation of the Quick Chemical
Test for Alkali Reactivity of Concrete Aggregate,” Bulletin 171,
Highway Research Board, 1958, p. 1.
(7) Chaiken, Bernard, and Halstead, W. J., “Correlation Between Chemi-
cal and Mortar Bar Tests for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Concrete
Aggregates,” Public Roads, Vol 30, 1959, p. 177.

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
fic

C289 – 03, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved November 1, 2007)

(1) Reorganized the test method, moving old Sections 8–13

into new Section 8.
of

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
un

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 69 of 180
7
 Designation: C294 − 12

Standard Descriptive Nomenclature for

Constituents of Concrete Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C294; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope C332 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulat-

1.1 This descriptive nomenclature provides brief descrip- ing Concrete
tions of some of the more commonly occurring, or more C638 Descriptive Nomenclature of Constituents of Aggre-
important, natural and artificial materials of which mineral gates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete

y
aggregates are composed. The descriptions provide a basis for
understanding these terms as applied to concrete aggregates. 3. Terminology

When appropriate, brief observations regarding the potential
effects of using the natural and artificial materials in concrete
are discussed.
NOTE 1—These descriptions characterize minerals and rocks as they
occur in nature and blast-furnace slag or lightweight aggregates that are
prepared by the alteration of the structure and composition of natural
material. Information about lightweight aggregates is given in Specifica-
tions C330, C331, and C332.
1.2 This standard does not include descriptions of constitu-
lc
ia
ents of aggregates used in radiation shielding concrete. See
Descriptive Nomenclature C638.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
fic
op
3.1 For definitions of terms in this standard, refer to
Terminology C125.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This descriptive nomenclature provides information on
terms commonly applied to concrete aggregates. This standard
is intended to assist in understanding the meaning and signifi-
cance of the terms.
4.2 Many of the materials described frequently occur in
particles that do not display all the characteristics given in the
descriptions, and most of the described rocks grade from
varieties meeting one description to varieties meeting another

standard. No other units of measurement are included in this

standard. with all intermediate stages being found.
4.3 The accurate identification of rocks and minerals can, in
2. Referenced Documents
many cases, be made only by a qualified geologist,
2.1 ASTM Standards:2 mineralogist, or petrographer using the apparatus and proce-
of

C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method)
un
dures of these sciences. Reference to these descriptions may,
however, serve to indicate or prevent gross errors in identifi-
cation. Identification of the constituent materials in an aggre-

gate may assist in characterizing its engineering properties, but

C289 Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of
Aggregates (Chemical Method)
C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Struc-
tural Concrete
C331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete
Masonry Units
1
This descriptive nomenclature is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee
C09 on Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee C09.65 on Petrography.
Current edition approved July 1, 2012. Published September 2012. Originally
approved in 1952. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as C294–05. DOI:
10.1520/C0294-12.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
identification alone cannot provide the sole basis for predicting
behavior of aggregates in service. Aggregates of any type or
combination of types may perform well or poorly in service
depending upon the exposure to which the concrete is
subjected, the physical and chemical properties of the matrix in
which they are embedded, their physical condition at the time
they are used, and other factors. Constituents that may occur
only in minor amounts in the aggregate may or may not
decisively influence its performance. Information about con-
crete aggregate performance in concrete has been published by
ASTM.3
3
Klieger, P., and Lamond, J. F., editors, Significance of Tests and Properties of
Concrete and Concrete-Making Materials, ASTM STP 169C, 1994.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 70 of 180
1
 C294 − 12
CONSTITUENTS OF NATURAL MINERAL
AGGREGATES
5. Classes and Types
5.1 The materials found as constituents of natural mineral
aggregates are minerals and rocks.
5.2 Minerals are naturally occurring inorganic substances of
more or less definite chemical composition and usually of a
specific crystalline structure. The physical nature of the rock-
forming minerals and aspects of crystal chemistry determine
the important physical and chemical properties of natural
mineral aggregates. Certain assemblages of rock-forming min-
erals possess desirable qualities for use as aggregates in
cementitious materials.
5.2.1 Minerals are characterized by their crystallographic,
physical, and optical properties and their chemical composi-
tion. The crystallographic properties of minerals may be
determined by x-ray diffraction and optical properties (1-6).
The physical properties of minerals include but are not limited
to crystal habit, cleavage, parting, fracture, hardness, specific
gravity, luster, color, streak, magnetism, luminescence, and
pyroelectricity (7). The optical properties of minerals include
pleochroism, and sign of elongation (2-5). Methods to deter-
mine the chemical composition of minerals include but are not
limited to optical properties (5), flame photometry (7,8),
lc
but are not limited to refractive index, birefringence, optic sign,
ia
chemical spot tests (9,10), various staining techniques (11),
x-ray fluorescence, and electron microscopy (12-14).
5.2.2 Different minerals may have the same chemical com-
position but different crystallographic and physical properties.
fic
Such sets of minerals are known as polymorphs. Distinguish-
ing between some polymorphs can be important for determin-
ing the suitability of aggregates for use in cementitious
materials.
of
5.3 Rocks are classified according to origin into three major
divisions: igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic. These three
major groups are subdivided into types according to mineral
un
and chemical composition, texture, and internal structure. Most
rocks are composed of several minerals but some are composed
of only one mineral. Certain examples of the rock quartzite are
composed exclusively of the mineral quartz, and certain
limestones are composed exclusively of the mineral calcite.
Individual sand grains frequently are composed of particles of
rock, but they may be composed of a single mineral, particu-
larly in the finer sizes.
5.3.1 Igneous rocks form from molten matter either at or
below the earth’s surface.
5.3.2 Sedimentary rocks form near the earth’s surface by the
accumulation and consolidation of the products of weathering
and erosion of existing rocks, or by direct chemical precipita-
tion. Sedimentary rocks may form from pre-existing igneous,
metamorphic, or sedimentary rocks.
5.3.3 Metamorphic rocks form from pre-existing igneous,
sedimentary, or metamorphic rocks by the action of heat or
pressure or both.
2
6. Silica Minerals
6.1 Quartz—a very common hard mineral composed of
silica (SiO2). It will scratch glass and is not scratched by a
knife. When pure it is colorless with a glassy (vitreous) luster
and a shell-like (conchoidal) fracture. It lacks a visible cleav-
age (the ability to break in definite directions along even
planes) and, when present in massive rocks such as granite, it
usually has no characteristic shape. It is resistant to weathering
and is therefore an important constituent of many sand and
gravel deposits and many sandstones. It is also abundant in
many light-colored igneous and metamorphic rocks. Some
strained, or intensely fractured (granulated), and microcrystal-
line quartz may be potentially deleteriously reactive with the
alkalies in the hydraulic cement paste.
6.2 Opal—a hydrous form of silica (SiO2 · nH2O) which
occurs without characteristic external form or internal crystal-
y
line arrangement as determined by ordinary visible light
methods. When X-ray diffraction methods are used, opal may
op
show some evidences of internal crystalline arrangement. Opal
has a variable water content, generally ranging from 3 to 9 %.
The specific gravity and hardness are always less than those of
quartz. The color is variable and the luster is resinous to glassy.
It is usually found in sedimentary rocks, especially some
cherts, and is the principal constituent of diatomite. It is also
found as a secondary material filling cavities and fissures in
igneous rocks and may occur as a coating on gravel and sand.
The recognition of opal in aggregates is important because it is
potentially deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in hydraulic
cement paste or with the alkalies from other sources, such as
aggregates containing zeolites, and ground water.
6.3 Chalcedony—chalcedony has been considered both as a
distinct mineral and a variety of quartz. It is frequently
composed of a mixture of microscopic fibers of quartz with a
large number of submicroscopic pores filled with water and air.
The properties of chalcedony are intermediate between those of
opal and quartz, from which it can sometimes be distinguished
only by laboratory tests. It frequently occurs as a constituent of
the rock chert and is potentially deleteriously reactive with the
alkalies in hydraulic cement paste.
6.4 Tridymite and cristobalite—high temperature crystalline
forms of silica (SiO2) sometimes found in volcanic rocks. They
are metastable at ordinary temperatures and pressures. They are
rare minerals in aggregates except in areas where volcanic
rocks are abundant. A type of cristobalite is a common
constituent of opal. Tridymite and cristobalite are potentially
deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in hydraulic cement
paste.
7. Feldspars
7.1 The minerals of the feldspar group are the most abun-
dant rock-forming minerals in the crust of the earth. They are
important constituents of all three major rock groups, igneous,
sedimentary, and metamorphic. Since all feldspars have good
cleavages in two directions, particles of feldspar usually show
several smooth surfaces. Frequently, the smooth cleavage
surfaces show fine parallel lines. All feldspars are slightly less
hard than, and can be scratched by, quartz and will, when fresh,
Page 71 of 180
 C294 − 12
easily scratch a penny. The various members of the group are
differentiated by chemical composition and crystallographic
properties. The feldspars orthoclase, sanidine, and microcline
are potassium aluminum silicates, and are frequently referred
to as potassium feldspars. The plagioclase feldspars include
those that are sodium aluminum silicates and calcium alumi-
num silicates, or both sodium and calcium aluminum silicates.
This group, frequently referred to as the “soda-lime” group,
includes a continuous series, of varying chemical composition
and optical properties, from albite, the sodium aluminum
feldspar, to anorthite, the calcium aluminum feldspar, with
intermediate members of the series designated oligoclase,
andesine, labradorite, and bytownite. Potassium feldspars and
sodium-rich plagioclase feldspars occur typically in igneous
rocks such as granites and rhyolites, whereas, plagioclase
feldspars of higher calcium content are found in igneous rocks
of lower silica content such as diorite, gabbro, andesite, and
basalt.
8. Ferromagnesian Minerals
8.1 Many igneous and metamorphic rocks contain dark
green to black minerals that are generally silicates of iron or
magnesium, or of both. They include the minerals of the
amphibole, pyroxene, and olivine groups. The most common
amphibole mineral is hornblende; the most common pyroxene
mineral is augite; and the most common olivine mineral is
lc
forsterite. Dark mica, such as biotite and phlogopite, are also
considered ferromagnesian minerals. The amphibole and py-
ia
roxene minerals are brown to green to black and generally
occur as prismatic units. Olivine is usually olive green, glassy
in appearance, and usually altered. Biotite has excellent cleav-
age and can be easily cleaved into thin flakes and plates. These
fic
minerals can be found as components of a variety of rocks, and
in sands and gravels. Olivine is found only in dark igneous
rocks where quartz is not present, and in sands and gravels
close to the olivine source.
of
9. Micaceous Minerals
9.1 Micaceous minerals have perfect cleavage in one direc-
un
tion and can be easily split into thin flakes. The mica minerals
of the muscovite group are colorless to light green; of the
biotite group, dark brown to black or dark green; of the
lepidolite group, white to pink and red or yellow; and of the
chlorite group, shades of green. Another mica, phlogopite, is
similar to biotite, commonly has a pearl-like luster and bronze
color, and less commonly is brownish red, green, or yellow.
The mica minerals are common and occur in igneous,
sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks, and are common as
minor to trace components in many sands and gravels. The
muscovite, biotite, lepidolite, and phlogopite minerals cleave
into flakes and plates that are elastic; the chlorite minerals, by
comparison, form inelastic flakes and plates. Vermiculite (a
mica-like mineral) forms by the alteration of other micas and is
brown and has a bronze luster.
9.2 Because micaceous materials have a high surface area,
they can influence the properties of freshly mixed and hardened
concrete. Aggregates with a high mica content can reduce
workability and increase the water demand of the concrete
3
(15). The shape and perfect cleavage of micaceous minerals
may result in a poor bond to the cementitious paste (16).
10. Clay Minerals
10.1 The term “clay” refers to natural material composed of
particles in a specific size range less than 2 µm (0.002 mm).
Mineralogically, clay refers to a group of layered silicate
minerals including the clay-micas (illites), the kaolin group,
very finely divided chlorites, and the swelling clays—smectite
including montmorillonites. Members of several groups, par-
ticularly micas, chlorites, and vermiculites, occur both in the
clay-size range and in larger sizes. Some clays are made up of
alternating layers of two or more clay groups. Random, regular,
or both types of interlayering are known. If smectite is a
significant constituent in such mixtures, then fairly large
volume changes may occur with wetting and drying.
y
10.2 Clay minerals are hydrous aluminum, magnesium, and
iron silicates that may contain calcium, magnesium, potassium,
sodium, and other exchangeable cations. They are formed by
op
alteration and weathering of other silicates and volcanic glass.
The clay minerals are major constituents of clays and shales.
They are found disseminated in carbonate rocks as seams and
pockets and in altered and weathered igneous and metamorphic
rocks. Clays may also be found as matrix, void fillings, and
cementing material in sandstones and other sedimentary rocks.
10.3 Most aggregate particles composed of, or containing,
large proportions of clay minerals are soft and, because of the
large internal surface area of the constituents, they are porous.
Some of these aggregates will disintegrate when wetted. Rocks
in which the cementing matrix is principally clay, such as
clay-bonded sandstones, and rocks in which swelling clay
minerals (smectite) are present as a continuous phase or matrix,
such as in some altered volcanics, may slake in water or may
disintegrate in the concrete mixer. Rocks of this type are
unsuitable for use as aggregates. Rocks having these properties
less well developed will abrade considerably during mixing,
releasing clay, and raising the water requirement of the
concrete containing them. When such rocks are present in
hardened concrete, the concrete will manifest greater volume
change on wetting and drying than similar concrete containing
non-swelling aggregate.
11. Zeolites
11.1 The zeolite minerals are a large group of hydrated
aluminum silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth elements
which are soft and usually white or light colored. They are
formed as a secondary filling in cavities or fissures in igneous
rocks, or within the rock itself as a product of hydrothermal
alteration of original minerals, especially feldspars. Some
zeolites, particularly heulandite, natrolite, and laumontite,
reportedly produce deleterious effects in concrete, the first two
having been reported to raise the alkali content in concrete by
releasing alkalies through cation exchange and thus increasing
alkali reactivity when alkali-reactive aggregate constituents are
present. Laumontite and its partially dehydrated variety leon-
hardite are notable for their substantial volume change with
wetting and drying. Both are found in rocks such as quartz
diorites and some sandstones.
Page 72 of 180
 C294 − 12
12. Carbonate Minerals
12.1 The most common carbonate mineral is calcite (cal-
cium carbonate, CaCO3). The mineral dolomite consists of
calcium carbonate and magnesium carbonate (CaCO3 · MgCO3
or CaMg(CO3)2) in equivalent molecular amounts, which are
54.27 and 45.73 mass percent, respectively. Both calcite and
dolomite are relatively soft, the hardness of calcite being 3 and
that of dolomite 31⁄2 to 4 on the Mohs scale, and are readily
scratched by a knife blade. They have rhombohedral cleavage,
which results in their breaking into fragments with smooth
parallelogram shaped sides. Calcite is soluble with vigorous
effervescence in cold dilute hydrochloric acid; dolomite is
soluble with slow effervescence in cold dilute hydrochloric
acid and with vigorous effervescence if the acid or the sample
is heated or if the sample is pulverized.
13. Sulfate Minerals
13.1 Carbonate rocks and shales may contain sulfates as
impurities. The most abundant sulfate mineral is gypsum
(hydrous calcium sulfate; CaSO4 · 2H2O); anhydrite (anhy-
drous calcium sulfate, CaSO4) is less common. Gypsum is
usually white or colorless and characterized by a perfect
cleavage along one plane and by its softness, representing
hardness of 2 on the Mohs scale; it is readily scratched by the
lc
fingernail. Gypsum may form a whitish pulverulent or crystal-
line coating on sand and gravel. It is slightly soluble in water.
13.2 Anhydrite resembles dolomite in hand specimen but
has three cleavages at right angles; it is less soluble in
ia
hydrochloric acid than dolomite, does not effervesce and is
slightly soluble in water. Anhydrite is harder than gypsum.
Gypsum and anhydrite occurring in aggregates can cause
fic
sulfate attack in concrete and mortar.
14. Iron Sulfide Minerals
14.1 The sulfides of iron, pyrite, marcasite, and pyrrhotite
of
are frequently found in natural aggregates. Pyrite is found in
igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks; marcasite is
much less common and is found mainly in sedimentary rocks;
pyrrhotite is less common but may be found in many types of
un
igneous and metamorphic rocks. Pyrite is brass yellow, and
pyrrhotite bronze brown, and both have a metallic luster.
Marcasite is also metallic but lighter in color and finely divided
iron sulfides are soot black. Pyrite is often found in cubic
crystals. Marcasite readily oxidizes with the liberation of
sulfuric acid and formation of iron oxides, hydroxides, and, to
a much smaller extent, sulfates; pyrite and pyrrhotite do so less
readily. Marcasite and certain forms of pyrite and pyrrhotite are
reactive in mortar and concrete, producing a brown stain
accompanied by a volume increase that has been reported as
one source of popouts in concrete. Reactive forms of iron
sulfides may be recognized by immersion in saturated lime
water (calcium hydroxide solution); upon exposure to air the
reactive varieties produce a brown coating within a few
minutes.
15. Iron Oxide Minerals, Anhydrous and Hydrous
15.1 There are two common iron oxide minerals: (1) Black,
magnetic: magnetite (Fe3O4), and (2) red or reddish when
4
powdered: hematite (Fe2 O3); and one common hydrous oxide
mineral, brown or yellowish: goethite (FeO(OH)). Another
common iron-bearing mineral is black, weakly magnetic,
ilmenite (FeTiO3). Magnetite and ilmenite are important acces-
sory minerals in many dark igneous rocks and are common
detrital minerals in sediments. Hematite is frequently found as
an accessory mineral in reddish rocks. Limonite, the brown
weathering product of iron-bearing minerals, is a field name for
several varieties of hydrous iron oxide minerals including
goethite; it frequently contains adsorbed water, and various
impurities such as colloidal or crystalline silica, clay minerals,
and organic matter. The presence of substantial amounts of soft
iron-oxide minerals in concrete aggregate can color concrete
various shades of yellow or brown. Very minor amounts of iron
minerals color many rocks, such as ferruginous sandstones,
shales, clay-ironstones, and granites. Magnetite, ilmenite, and
hematite ores are used as heavy aggregates.
y
DESCRIPTIONS OF IGNEOUS ROCKS
op
16. General
16.1 Igneous rocks are those formed by cooling from a
molten rock mass (magma). They may be divided into two
classes: (1) plutonic, or intrusive, that have cooled slowly
within the earth; and (2) volcanic, or extrusive, that formed
from quickly cooled lavas. Plutonic rocks have grain sizes
greater than approximately 1 mm, and are classified as coarse-
or medium-grained. Volcanic rocks have grain sizes less than
approximately 1 mm, and are classified as fine-grained. Volca-
nic rocks frequently contain glass. Both plutonic and volcanic
rocks may consist of porphyries, that are characterized by the
presence of large mineral grains in a fine-grained or glassy
groundmass. This is the result of sharp changes in rate of
cooling or other physico-chemical conditions during solidifi-
cation of the melt.
16.2 Igneous rocks are usually classified and named on the
basis of their texture, internal structure, and their mineral
composition which in turn depends to a large extent on their
chemical composition. Rocks in the plutonic class generally
have chemical equivalents in the volcanic class.
17. Plutonic Rocks
17.1 Granite—granite is a medium- to coarse-grained, light-
colored rock characterized by the presence of potassium
feldspar with lesser amounts of plagioclase feldspars and
quartz. The characteristic potassium feldspars are orthoclase or
microcline, or both; the common plagioclase feldspars are
albite and oligoclase. Feldspars are more abundant than quartz.
Dark-colored mica (biotite) is usually present, and light-
colored mica (muscovite) is frequently present. Other dark-
colored ferromagnesian minerals, especially hornblende, may
be present in amounts less than those of the light-colored
constituents. Quartz-monzonite and granodiorite are rocks
similar to granite, but they contain more plagioclase feldspar
than potassium feldspar.
17.2 Syenite—syenite is a medium- to coarse-grained, light-
colored rock composed essentially of alkali feldspars, namely
microcline, orthoclase, or albite. Quartz is generally absent.
Page 73 of 180
 C294 − 12
Dark ferromagnesian minerals such as hornblende, biotite, or
pyroxene are usually present.
17.3 Diorite—diorite is a medium- to coarse-grained rock
composed essentially of plagioclase feldspar and one or more
ferromagnesian minerals such as hornblende, biotite, or pyrox-
ene. The plagioclase is intermediate in composition, usually of
the variety andesine, and is more abundant than the ferromag-
nesian minerals. Diorite usually is darker in color than granite
or syenite and lighter than gabbro. If quartz is present, the rock
is called quartz diorite.
17.4 Gabbro—gabbro is a medium- to coarse-grained, dark-
colored rock consisting essentially of ferromagnesian minerals
and plagioclase feldspar. The ferromagnesian minerals may be
pyroxenes, amphiboles, or both. The plagioclase is one of the
calcium-rich varieties, namely labradorite, bytownite, or an-
orthite. Ferromagnesian minerals are usually more abundant
than feldspar. Diabase (in European usage dolerite) is a rock of
similar composition to gabbro and basalt but is intermediate in
mode of origin, usually occurring in smaller intrusions than
gabbro, and having a medium to fine-grained texture. The
terms “trap” or “trap rock” are collective terms for dark-
colored, medium- to fine-grained igneous rocks especially
diabase and basalt.
17.5 Peridotite—peridotite is composed of olivine and py-
roxene. Rocks composed almost entirely of pyroxene are
known as pyroxenites, and those composed of olivine as
dunites. Rocks of these types are relatively rare but their
lc
ia
metamorphosed equivalent, serpentinite, is more common.
17.6 Pegmatite—extremely coarse-grained varieties of igne-
ous rocks are known as pegmatites. These are usually light-
fic
colored and are most frequently equivalent to granite or syenite
in mineral composition.
18. Fine-Grained and Glassy Extrusive Igneous Rocks
18.1 Volcanic Rock—volcanic or extrusive rocks are the
of
fine-grained equivalents of the coarse-and-medium-grained
plutonic rocks. Equivalent types have similar chemical com-
positions and may contain the same minerals. Volcanic rocks
un
commonly are so fine-grained that the individual mineral
grains usually are not visible to the naked eye. Porphyritic
textures are common, and the rocks may be partially or wholly
glassy or non-crystalline. The glassy portion of a partially
glassy rock usually has a higher silica content than the
crystalline portion. Some volcanic or extrusive rocks may not
be distinguishable in texture and structure from plutonic or
intrusive rocks that originated at shallow depth.
18.2 Glassy Volcanic Rocks—These rocks are of particular
significance because they contain, or may contain, high silica
glass that is alkali-reactive, and secondary minerals that are
alkali-reactive or release alkalies into concrete. The high silica
glasses, generally classed as those containing more than 55 %
silica, are known to be alkali-reactive, whereas the low-silica
glasses are not. Among igneous rocks that contain, or may
contain, high silica glass are: obsidian, pumice, trachyte,
rhyolite, scoria, dacite, basalt, andesite, and perlite. Aggregates
containing these rocks include crushed parent rock where the
aggregate is constituted totally of the rock, or as varying
5
percentages in gravels and sands. Glassy rocks, particularly the
more siliceous ones, are potentially deleteriously reactive with
the alkalies in hydraulic cement paste.
18.3 Volcanic Glass—igneous rocks composed wholly of
glass are named on the basis of their texture and internal
structure. A dense dark natural glass of high silica content is
called obsidian, while lighter colored finely vesicular glassy
froth filled with elongated, tubular bubbles is called pumice.
Dark-colored coarsely vesicular types containing more or less
spherical bubbles are called scoria. Pumices are usually
silica-rich (corresponding to rhyolites or dacites), whereas
scorias usually are more basic (corresponding to basalts). A
high-silica glassy lava with an onion-like structure and a pearly
luster, containing 2 to 5 % water, is called perlite. When heated
quickly to the softening temperature, perlite puffs to become an
artificial pumice. Glass with up to 10 % water and with a dull
y
resinous luster is called pitchstone.
18.4 Felsite—light-colored, very fine-grained igneous rocks
op
are collectively known as felsites. The felsite group includes
rhyolite, dacite, andesite, and trachyte, which are the equiva-
lents of granite, quartz diorite, diorite, and syenite, respec-
tively. These rocks are usually light colored but they may be
gray, green, dark red, or black. When they are microcrystalline
or contain natural glass, rhyolites, dacites, and andesites are
potentially deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in hydraulic
cement paste.
18.5 Basalt—fine-grained extrusive equivalent of gabbro
and diabase. When basalt contains natural glass, the glass is
generally lower in silica content than that of the lighter-colored
extrusive rocks and hence is not deleteriously reactive with the
alkalies in hydraulic cement paste; however, exceptions have
been noted in the literature with respect to the alkali reactivity
of basaltic glasses.
18.6 Vesicles and other voids in volcanic rocks may contain
alkali-reactive forms of silica such as opal, cristobalite,
tridymite, and various varieties of microcrystalline quartz.
Additionally, zeolitic minerals can release alkalies and thus
increase the alkalies in the paste.
DESCRIPTIONS OF SEDIMENTARY ROCKS
19. General
19.1 Sedimentary rocks are stratified rocks usually laid
down under water, although they can also be formed by wind
and glacial action. Sediments may be composed of particles of
preexisting rocks derived by mechanical agencies or they may
be of chemical or organic origin. The sediments are usually
indurated by cementation or compaction during geologic time,
although the degree of consolidation may vary widely.
19.2 Gravel, sand, silt, and clay form the group of uncon-
solidated sediments. Although the distinction between these
four members is made on the basis of their particle size, a
general trend in the composition occurs. Gravel and, to a lesser
degree, coarse sands usually consist of rock fragments; fine
sands and silt consist predominantly of mineral grains; and clay
exclusively of mineral grains, largely of the group of clay
Page 74 of 180
 C294 − 12
minerals. All types of rocks and minerals may be represented in
unconsolidated sediments.
20. Conglomerates, Sandstones, and Quartzites
20.1 These rocks consist of particles of sand or gravel, or
both, with or without interstitial and cementing material. If the
particles include a considerable proportion of gravel, the rock
is a conglomerate. If the particles are in the sand sizes, that is,
less than 2 mm but more than 0.06 mm in major diameter, the
rock is a sandstone or a quartzite. If the rock breaks around the
sand grains, it is a sandstone; if the grains are largely quartz
and the rock breaks through the grains, it is quartzite.
Conglomerates, and sandstones are sedimentary rocks but
quartzites may be sedimentary (orthoquartzites) or metamor-
phic (metaquartzites). The cementing or interstitial materials of
sandstones may be quartz, opal, calcite, dolomite, clay, iron
oxides, or other materials. These may influence the quality of
a sandstone as concrete aggregate. If the nature of the cement-
ing material is known, the rock name may include a reference
to it, such as opal-bonded sandstone or ferruginous conglom-
erate. Opal-containing rocks may be potentially deleteriously
reactive with alkalies in the hydraulic cement paste.
20.2 Graywackes and subgraywackes—gray to greenish
and sand-sized rock fragments in an abundant matrix resem-
lc
gray sandstones containing angular quartz and feldspar grains,
bling claystone, shale, argillite, or slate. Graywackes grade into
subgraywackes, the most common sandstones of the geologic
ia
column.
20.3 Arkose—coarse-grained sandstone derived from
granite, containing conspicuous amounts of feldspar.
fic
21. Claystones, Shales, Argillites, and Siltstones
21.1 These very fine-grained rocks are composed of, or
derived by erosion of sedimentary silts and clays, or of any
of
type of rock that contained clay. When relatively soft and
massive, they are known as claystones, or siltstones, depending
on the size of the majority of the particles of which they are
composed. Siltstones consist predominantly of silt-sized par-
un
ticles (0.0625 to 0.002 mm in diameter) and are intermediate
rocks between claystones and sandstones. When the claystones
are harder and platy or fissile, they are known as shales.
Claystones and shales may be gray, black, reddish, or green
and may contain some carbonate minerals (calcareous shales).
A massive, firmly indurated fine-grained argillaceous rock
consisting of quartz, feldspar, and micaceous minerals is
known as argillite. Argillites do not slake in water as some
shales do. As an aid in distinguishing these fine-grained
sediments from fine-grained, foliated metamorphic rocks such
as slates and phyllites, it may be noted that the cleavage
surfaces of shales are generally dull and earthy while those of
slates are more lustrous. Phyllite has a glossier luster resem-
bling a silky sheen. Clay ironstone concretions are generally
nodular particles consisting of mixtures of clay minerals and
iron oxides. They are commonly hard and range in color from
red-brown to purplish brown to orange-brown to orange to
yellow. They are commonly concentric and may contain soft
cores of clay minerals.
6
21.2 Clay ironstones may cause popouts in concrete subject
to freezing and thawing while saturated with water. Aggregates
containing abundant shale may be detrimental to concrete
because they can produce high shrinkage, but not all shales are
harmful. Some shales and siltstones may cause popouts and
scaling in concrete subject to freezing and thawing while
saturated with water (15,17). Some argillites, siltstones, and
shales are alkali-silica reactive and may cause popouts (18,19).
21.3 Although aggregates which are volumetrically unstable
in wetting and drying are not confined to any class of rock, they
do share some common characteristics. If there is a matrix or
continuous phase, it is usually physically weak and consists of
material of high specific surface, frequently including clay.
However, no general relation has been demonstrated between
clay content or type of clay and large volume change upon
wetting and drying. Volumetrically unstable aggregates do not
y
have mineral grains of high modulus interlocked in a continu-
ous rigid structure capable of resisting volume change.
op
21.4 Aggregates having high elastic modulus and low vol-
ume change from the wet to the dry condition contribute to the
volume stability of concrete by restraining the volume change
of the cement paste. In a relatively few cases, aggregates have
been demonstrated to contribute to unsatisfactory performance
of concrete because they have relatively large volume change
from the wet to the dry condition combined with relatively low
modulus of elasticity. On drying, such aggregates shrink away
from the surrounding cement paste and consequently fail to
restrain its volume change with change in moisture content.
22. Carbonate Rocks
22.1 Limestones, the most widespread of carbonate rocks.
They range from pure limestones consisting of the mineral
calcite to pure dolomites (dolostones) consisting of the mineral
dolomite. Usually they contain both minerals in various pro-
portions. If 50 to 90 % is the mineral dolomite, the rock is
called calcitic dolomite. The term “magnesium limestone” is
sometimes applied to dolomitic limestones and calcitic dolo-
mites but it is ambiguous and its use should be avoided. Most
carbonate rocks contain some noncarbonate impurities such as
quartz, chert, clay minerals, organic matter, gypsum, and
sulfides. Carbonate rocks containing 10 to 50 % sand are
arenaceous (or sandy) limestones (or dolomites); those con-
taining 10 to 50 % clay are argillaceous (or clayey or shaly)
limestones (or dolomites). Marl is a clayey limestone which is
fine-grained and commonly soft. Chalk is fine-textured, very
soft, porous, and somewhat friable limestone, composed
chiefly of particles of microorganisms. Micrite is very fine-
textured chemically precipitated carbonate or a mechanical
ooze of carbonate particles, usually 0.001 to 0.003 mm in size.
The term “limerock” is not recommended.
22.2 The reaction of the dolomite in certain carbonate rocks
with alkalies in portland cement paste has been found to be
associated with deleterious expansion of concrete containing
such rocks as coarse aggregate. Carbonate rocks capable of
such reaction possess a characteristic texture and composition.
The characteristic microscopic texture is that in which rela-
tively large crystals of dolomite (rhombs) are scattered in a
Page 75 of 180
 C294 − 12
finer-grained matrix of micritic calcite and clay. The charac-
teristic composition is that in which the carbonate portion
consists of substantial amounts of both dolomite and calcite,
and the acid-insoluble residue contains a significant amount of
clay. Except in certain areas, such rocks are of relatively
infrequent occurrence and seldom make up a significant
proportion of the material present in a deposit of rock being
considered for use in making aggregate for concrete.
23. Chert
23.1 Chert—the general term for a group of variously
colored, very fine-grained (aphanitic), siliceous rocks com-
posed of microcrystalline or cryptocrystalline quartz,
chalcedony, or opal, either singly or in combinations of varying
proportions. Identification of the form or forms of silica
requires careful determination of optical properties, absolute
specific gravity, loss on ignition, or a combination of these
characteristics. Dense cherts are very tough, with a waxy to
greasy luster, and are usually gray, brown, white, or red, and
less frequently, green, black or blue. Porous varieties are
usually lighter in color, frequently off-white, or stained
yellowish, brownish, or reddish, firm to very weak, and grade
to tripoli. Ferruginous, dense, red, and in some cases, dense,
yellow, brown, or green chert is sometimes called jasper.
Dense black or gray chert is sometimes called flint. A very
dense, even textured, light gray to white chert, composed
lc
mostly of microcrystalline to cryptocrystalline quartz, is called
novaculite. Chert is hard (scratches glass, but is not scratched
ia
by a knife blade) and has a conchoidal (shell-like) fracture in
the dense varieties, and a more splintery fracture in the porous
varieties. Chert occurs most frequently as nodules, lenses, or
fic
interstitial material, in limestone and dolomite formations, as
extensively bedded deposits, and as components of sand and
gravel. Most cherts have been found to be alkali-silica reactive
to some degree when tested with high-alkali cement, or in the
of
quick chemical test (Test Method C289). In the absence of
information to the contrary, all chert should be regarded as
potentially deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in hydraulic
cement paste. The degree of alkali-silica reactivity, and
un
whether a given chert will produce a deleterious degree of
expansion in concrete, are complex functions of several fac-
tors. The degree of the alkali-silica reactivity and whether a
given chert will produce a deleterious degree of expansion in
concrete are complex functions of several factors. Among them
are: the mineralogic composition and internal structure of the
chert; the amount of the chert as a proportion of the aggregates;
the particle-size distribution; the alkali content of the cement;
and the cement content of the concrete. However, opaline
cherts may produce deleterious expansion of mortar or con-
crete when present in very small proportions (less than 5 % by
mass of the aggregate). Cherts that are porous may be
susceptible to freezing and thawing deterioration in concrete
and may cause popouts or cracking of the concrete surface
above the chert particle.
7
DESCRIPTIONS OF METAMORPHIC ROCKS
24. General
24.1 Metamorphic rocks form from igneous, sedimentary,
or pre-existing metamorphic rocks in response to changes in
chemical and physical conditions occurring within the earth’s
crust after formation of the original rock. The changes may be
textural, structural, or mineralogic and may be accompanied by
changes in chemical composition. The rocks are dense and may
be massive but are more frequently foliated (laminated or
layered) and tend to break into platy particles. Rocks formed
from argillaceous rocks by dynamic metamorphism usually
split easily along one plane independent of original bedding;
this feature is designated “platy cleavage.” The mineral com-
position is very variable depending in part on the degree of
metamorphism and in part on the composition of the original
y
rock.
24.2 Most of the metamorphic rocks may derive either from
op
igneous or sedimentary rocks but a few, such as marbles and
slates, originate only from sediments.
24.3 Phyllites, slates, metaquartzites, gneisses, schists,
mylonite, and other rocks containing low temperature silica
and silicate minerals and highly strained or microcrystalline
quartz are potentially deleteriously reactive with alkalies in the
hydraulic cement paste.
25. Metamorphic Rocks
25.1 Marble—a recrystallized medium- to coarse-grained
carbonate rock composed of calcite or dolomite, or calcite and
dolomite. The original impurities are present in the form of
new minerals, such as micas, amphiboles, pyroxenes, and
graphite.
25.2 Metaquartzite—a granular rock consisting essentially
of recrystallized quartz. Its strength and resistance to weather-
ing derive from the interlocking of the quartz grains.
25.3 Slate—a fine-grained metamorphic rock that is dis-
tinctly laminated and tends to split into thin parallel layers. The
mineral composition usually cannot be determined with the
unaided eye.
25.4 Phyllite—a fine-grained thinly layered rock. Minerals,
such as micas and chlorite, are noticeable and impart a silky
sheen to the surface of schistosity. Phyllites are intermediate
between slates and schists in grain size and mineral composi-
tion. They derive from argillaceous sedimentary rocks or
fine-grained extrusive igneous rocks, such as felsites.
25.5 Schist—a highly layered rock tending to split into
nearly parallel planes (schistose) in which the grain is coarse
enough to permit identification of the principal minerals.
Schists are subdivided into varieties on the basis of the most
prominent mineral present in addition to quartz or to quartz and
feldspars; for instance, mica schist. Greenschist is a green
schistose rock whose color is due to abundance of one or more
Page 76 of 180
 C294 − 12
of the green minerals, chlorite or amphibole, and is commonly
derived from altered volcanic rock.
25.6 Amphibolite—a medium- to coarse-grained dark-
colored rock composed mainly of hornblende and plagioclase
feldspar. Its schistosity, which is due to parallel alignment of
hornblende grains, is commonly less obvious than in typical
schists.
25.7 Hornfels—equigranular, massive, and usually tough
rock produced by complete recrystallization of sedimentary,
igneous, or metamorphic rocks through thermal metamorphism
sometimes with the addition of components of molten rock.
Their mineral compositions vary widely.
25.8 Gneiss—one of the most common metamorphic rocks,
usually formed from igneous or sedimentary rocks by a higher
degree of metamorphism than the schists. It is characterized by
a layered or foliated structure resulting from approximately
parallel lenses and bands of platy minerals, usually micas, or
prisms, usually amphiboles, and of granular minerals, usually
quartz and feldspars. All intermediate varieties between gneiss
and schist, and between gneiss and granite are often found in
the same areas in which well-defined gneisses occur.
25.9 Serpentinite—a relatively soft, light to dark green to
almost black rock formed usually from silica-poor igneous
rocks, such as pyroxenites, peridotites, and dunites. It maylc
contain some of the original pyroxene or olivine but is largely
composed of softer hydrous ferromagnesian minerals of the
serpentine group. Very soft talc-like material is often present in
ia
serpentinite.
CONSTITUENTS OF ARTIFICIAL AGGREGATES
fic
26. General
26.1 Artificial aggregates are aggregates resulting from
reconstitution of natural materials, other than by physical
processes, such as crushing and screening, or from physical or
of
mechanical processing of pre-existing artificial materials to
produce aggregates for new work. Examples of reconstitution
processes are: (1) heat treatment, such as heating, sintering,
calcination, or partial or complete fusion of volcanic rocks,
un
clay, shale, or slate, with resulting mechanical disruption,
vitrification, recrystallization, bloating, or combinations of
these phenomena in production of lightweight aggregates, and
(2) formation of new materials as a consequence of industrial
processes, such as slag produced simultaneously with iron in a
blast furnace. An example of mechanical processing of pre-
existing artificial material is the recovery of hardened concrete
from constructions to produce aggregate.
27. Artificial Aggregate
27.1 Cinders (industrial) —the agglomerated residue from
combustion of coal or coke in an industrial furnace. Specifi-
cations may place limitations on content of combustible
residues, sulfides, and sulfate. Undesirable sulfur compounds
can be reduced by leaching during storage in stockpiles.
27.1.1 Industrial cinders are highly porous and variable in
firmness, friability, particle shape, and surface texture. The
matrix is a mixture of siliceous glass and finely divided
8
residues of original silt, fine sand, and calcined clay minerals.
Particles of unburned coal and coke may be present. Original
laminations of sandstone or siltstone occurring in the coal will
be represented by compact particles within the product. Such
particles and unburned coal and coke may produce unsound-
ness in concrete.
27.2 Blast-furnace slag—the nonmetallic product, consist-
ing essentially of silicates and aluminosilicates of calcium and
other bases, that is developed in a molten condition simulta-
neously with iron in a blast furnace. The glass phase of normal
blast-furnace slag is not deleteriously reactive with alkalies in
concrete.
NOTE 2—Steel furnace slag, unlike blast furnace slag, should not be
used as aggregate for hydraulic cement concrete.
27.2.1 Air-Cooled Blast-Furnace Slag—the material result-
ing from solidification of molten blast-furnace slag under
y
atmospheric conditions. Subsequent cooling may be acceler-
ated by application of water to the solidified surface. Such
op
slags are more or less crystallized, the crystals ranging from
submicroscopic to several millimetres in size. More than 20
compounds have been identified in air-cooled slag but even
well crystallized slag rarely contains more than five com-
pounds. The most typical crystalline constituent is melilite, a
compound of variable composition between akermanite (2CaO
· MgO · 2SiO2) and gehlenite (2CaO · Al2O3 · SiO2). Calcium
sulfide (CaS) is almost always present in small proportion.
27.2.1.1 Potentially deleterious constituents include iron
sulfides that may produce unsightly staining of concrete or may
result in formation of gypsum (calcium sulfate dihydrate,
CaSO4 · 2H2O) by weathering. Use of very old slag with high
alumina cement may cause ettringite formation and concrete
expansion. Rare chemical anomalies may cause inversion of
β-dicalcium silicate to γ-dicalcium silicate with accompanying
10 % increase in volume, resulting in “dusting” or “blowing”
of slag. Such inversion while cooling the slag allows removal
of the disintegrated material by screening during the produc-
tion of aggregate. Slower inversion may produce weak and
friable particles that are unsuitable as constituents of concrete
aggregate; this is determinable by appropriate tests.
27.2.2 Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag—the glassy, granular
material formed when molten blast-furnace slag is rapidly
chilled as by immersion in water. In the jet process, the steam
of molten slag is disrupted by a high-pressure water jet and the
water/slag mixture is separated by screening. Dry-granulated
slag is produced by a mechanical device that breaks the stream
of molten slag by impact into small particles which then are
quenched by water and air.
27.2.3 Lightweight Blast-Furnace Slag—the foamed prod-
uct formed when molten slag is expanded by applying a limited
amount of water, typically less than that required for
granulation, so that a relatively dry, cellular, lumpy product
results. Aggregate is produced by crushing and screening the
clinker. (see 27.2.2).
27.3 Expanded Shale, Clay, and Slate—aggregates pro-
duced by heating prepared materials of these types to a range
of temperature between incipient and complete fusion with
accompanying expansion (bloating) that occurs with formation
Page 77 of 180
 C294 − 12
and expansion of entrapped gases. The aggregate may be
prepared by prior crushing and screening of the raw materials
and fired with or without admixtures, with iron oxides, or
carbonaceous materials, crushing and screening of the fired
product, or by processing of pellets produced by any of several
methods. Other processes involve production of light-weight
aggregate by burning of mixtures of coal and shale, clays, or
other materials in moving grates exposed to heated gas flow.
27.3.1 Expansion and vesiculation of clays, shales, and
slates occurs during firing in the range from about 1000 to 1150
°C, but the results obtained for a particular material depend
upon the rate of heating, the temperature attained in the feed,
the composition of the kiln atmosphere, residency in the kiln,
and other factors. Expansion and vesiculation requires (1)
presence of one or more substances that release gas after fusion
has developed sufficient molten material to prevent its escape,
and (2) the molten material be of sufficient viscosity to retain
the expanding gas. The viscosity of the melt is determined to a
large extent by the bulk chemical composition of the raw
material as defined by proportions of SiO2 and Al2O3 and the
total of calcium, magnesium, ferrous iron, ferric iron, and
alkalies. Increasing alumina content tends to increase refrac-
tory quality of the feed and decreases vesiculation.
27.3.2 Gas is released by several processes. The most
lc
significant reaction apparently is partial reduction of ferric
oxide with release of oxygen. The ferric oxide is furnished by
limonite or hematite in the raw feed or by decomposition of
original iron-bearing minerals, most notably clays, micas, and
ia
clay-like minerals.
27.3.3 The internal structure or fabric of the clay, shale, or
slate is significant in the expansion process. Most beneficial is
fic
a dense, relatively impervious fabric that resists shrinkage
during heating and retards release of vapors and gases before
fusion effects a seal in the particles. The fabric is especially
important in firing of carbonaceous clays and shales inasmuch
as a porous, open fabric permits ready burning out of the
of
carbon, whereas a dense fabric retards oxidation by the kiln
atmosphere and retains CO and CO2 produced by reaction with
interstitial water or with water or oxygen released by hydrated
un
compounds or hydroxylated silicates.
27.3.4 The most promising sources of lightweight aggregate
are shales and clays containing illite, beidellite, members of the
montmorillonite (smectite) clays, and vermiculitechlorite.
These minerals approximate the composition that has been
found to yield a melt of optimum viscosity. Compared to
members of the kaolin group, they contain lesser proportions of
alumina and moderate proportions of alkalies and alkaline
earths, which serve as fluxes in the firing process.
27.3.5 The matrix of expanded clays, shales, and slates is
composed of an intimate intermingling of siliceous glass and
residues of granular minerals. Decomposition of calcium and
magnesium carbonates produces free lime, free magnesia, or
both compounds, which may cause expansion or popouts in
concrete constructions or products unless the aggregate is
water- or steam-cured prior to use. Laminations or seams of
sandstone or siltstone that were constituents of the geologic
formation at the source will occur as individual particles or as
portions of vesiculated particles in the aggregate. They may
9
display efflorescence and may include free lime or magnesia
when originally carbonaceous. The glass phase of expanded
clays, shales, and slates may be alkali reactive but expansion of
concrete from this cause has not been observed because any
siliceous gels that are generated are accommodated within the
abundant air-filled cavities that characterize the expanded
particles.
27.4 Diatomite (sintered)—lightweight aggregate produced
by crushing and screening of diatomaceous earth or shales,
spraying with oil, and firing in a rotary kiln. The main
constituents are opaline skeletons of diatoms together with
variable proportions of siliceous glass produced by the firing
process. Other constituents are fine sand, silt, clay, and finely
divided volcanic glass.
27.4.1 Some sintered diatomites used as aggregate for
concrete produce significant expansion with both low- and
y
high-alkali cements.
27.5 Vermiculite (exfoliated)—a micaceous mineral caused
op
to expand and exfoliate by rapid heating as a result of release
of combined water. The final volume of the particles can be as
much as 30 times the original size. However, the degree of
expansion, elasticity, brittleness, and fragility of the particles
varies widely, depending upon mineralogic composition of the
vermiculite, crystal size, purity, and conditions of firing.
27.5.1 Bodies of vermiculite ore may grade at the margins
to hydrobiotite and biotite mica and become intermingled with
varying proportions of granular or other non-micaceous min-
erals.
27.6 Perlite (expanded)—rhyolitic volcanic glass having a
relatively high water content and a perlitic structure that has
been heated sufficiently to cause it to break into small,
expanded particles. The product usually is produced only in
fine aggregate sizes and used in products for insulating
purposes.
27.6.1 Expanded perlite varies in particle shape, surface
texture, friability, and content of dense volcanic rock particles
and individual crystals. Typical expanded perlite is potentially
alkali reactive although significant expansion may not occur
because of porosity of the particles. Laboratory tests show that
certain perlites produce significant expansion of mortar stored
and tested in accordance with Test Method C227 with either
low- or high-alkali cements. Such volume change will not
necessarily cause structural distress if appropriately accommo-
dated in the design of structures or products.
27.7 Recycled concrete-hardened hydraulic-cement con-
crete that has been processed for use as concrete aggregate.
Extensive evaluations in several countries have shown that use
of recycled concrete as aggregate in new concrete is feasible
and may become routine. Approval of an available source of
concrete for recycling as aggregate should include two stages,
namely, (1) planning the examination of the constructions to be
demolished and (2) selection of procedures that should be
included in evaluation of the aggregate that can be obtained
economically for the intended new work. The following
relationships are of especial significance:
27.7.1 The potential compressive strength of concrete con-
taining recycled concrete as aggregate is controlled largely by
Page 78 of 180
 C294 − 12
the compressive strength of the concrete to be recycled,
provided the fine aggregate is crushed rock or natural sand of
suitable quality.
27.7.2 A substantial reduction in potential compressive
strength may result when the conventional fine aggregate is
replaced in whole or in part by fine aggregate derived from the
recycled concrete. Hansen4 concludes that all material smaller
than 2 mm in recycled concrete should be screened and wasted.
27.7.3 Use of recycled concrete decreases workability of
fresh concrete at given water content, increases water require-
ments for given consistency, increases drying shrinkage at
given water content, and reduces modulus of elasticity at given
water-cement ratio. The effects are greatest when the recycled
concrete is used as both coarse and fine aggregate.
27.7.4 Freezing and thawing resistance of the new concrete
relates to many factors, including the properties of the recycled
concrete in terms of compressive strength, parameters of the
air-void system, and frost resistance of the aggregate included
in the recycled concrete as well as the parameters of the
air-void system and other qualities of the cementitious matrix
of the new concrete.
27.7.5 Chemical admixtures, air-entraining admixtures, and
mineral admixtures included in the recycled concrete will not
modify significantly the properties of the fresh or hardened,
4
lc
Hansen, T. C., “Recycled Concrete and Recycled Aggregate,” Materials and
Structures, International Union of Testing and Research Laboratories for Materials
and Structures (RILEM), vol. 19, 1986, pp. 201–246.
ia
fic
REFERENCES
(1) Cullity, Bernard D., and Stock, S.R. and Stock, Stuart, 2001, Elements
of
of X-Ray Diffraction: Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 664 p.
(2) Warren, B. E., 1990, X-Ray Diffraction, Dover, 381 p.
(3) Winchell, A. N., 1937, Elements of Optical Mineralogy Part I.
Principles and Methods: New York, John Wiley and Sons, Fourth
Edition, 203 p.
un
(4) Winchell, A. N., 1933, Elements of Optical Mineralogy Part II.
Descriptions of Minerals: New York, John Wiley and Sons, Third
Edition, 459 p.
(5) Deer, W. A., Howie, R. A., and Zussman, J., 1992, An Introduction to
the Rock Forming Minerals: London, Longman, 2nd Edition, 696 p.
(6) Gaines, R. V., Skinner, H. C., Foord, E. E., Mason, B., and
Rosenzweig, A., 1997 , Dana’s New Mineralogy: The System of
Mineralogy of James Dwight Dana and Edward Salisbury Dana: New
York, John Wiley & Sons, 1819 p.
(7) Klein, C., (revised by Hurlbut, Jr., C.S.), 1993, Manual of Mineralogy
(after James D. Dana): New York, John Wiley & Sons, 704 p.
(8) Smith, O., 1953, Identification and Qualitative Chemical Analysis of
Minerals: Princeton, D. Van Nostrand Company, 385 p.
(9) Feigl, F., and Anger, V., 1972, Spot Tests in Inorganic Analysis:
Amsterdam, Elsevier, 669 p.
(10) .Chamot, E. M., and Mason, C. W., 1989 (republication of 1940 2nd
edition), Handbook of Chemical Microscopy, v. II: Chicago, Mc-
Crone Research Institute, 438 p
(11) Hutchison, C. S., 1974, Laboratory Handbook of Petrographic
10
new concrete, except insofar as they modify the conditions
enumerated in 27.7.1-27.7.4. High concentrations of water-
soluble chloride ion in the recycled concrete may contribute to
accelerated corrosion of steel embedments in the new concrete.
27.7.6 Prospective sources of recycled concrete may be
unsound or have been rendered unsound in service, such as
presence of physically unsound or chemically reactive
aggregate, deterioration by aggressive chemical attack or
leaching, damage by fire or service at high temperature, and so
on.
27.7.7 Significance of contaminants in the recycled concrete
should be analyzed in relation to the anticipated service, such
as presence of noxious, toxic, or radioactive substances;
presence of bituminous materials that may impair air entrain-
ment; appreciable concentrations of organic materials that my
produce excessive air entrainment; inclusion of metallic em-
y
bedments that may cause rust staining or blistering of surfaces;
and excessive fragments of glass, including bottle glass, that
are expected to produce harmful effects of alkali-silica reac-
op
tion.
28. Keywords
28.1 aggregates; artificial aggregates; carbonates; clays;
concrete; feldspars; ferromagnesian minerals; igneous rocks;
iron oxides; iron sulfides; metamorphic rocks; micas; minerals;
nomenclature; recycled concrete; rocks; sedimentary rocks;
silica; sulfates; zeolites
Techniques: New York, John Wiley & Sons, 527 p.
(12) Goldstein, J. I., Newbury, D. E., Echlin, P., Joy, D. C., Romig, A. D.,
Jr., Lyman, C. E., Fiori, C., and Lifshin, E., 1992, Scanning Electron
Microscopy and Microanalysis: A Text for Biologists, Materials
Scientists, and Geologists: New York, Plenum Press, 820 p.
(13) Potts, P. J., Bowles, J. F. W., Reed, S. J. B., and Cave, M. R., 1995,
Microprobe Techniques in the Earth Sciences, v. 6: London, Chap-
man & Hall, 419 p.
(14) Reed, S. J. B., 1996, Electron Microprobe Analysis and Scanning
Electron Microscopy in Geology: Cambridge, Cambridge University
Press, 201 p.
(15) Guide for Use of Normal and Heavyweight Aggregates in Concrete,
American Concrete Institute, ACI 221 R-96.
(16) Dolar-Mantuani, L., 1983, Handbook of Concrete Aggregates, Park
Ridge, NJ, Noyes Publications.
(17) Walker, S., 1943, Soundness of Aggregates, Report on Significance
of Tests of Concrete and Concrete Aggregates: Philadelphia, Ameri-
can Society of Testing and Materials, p. 112-122.
(18) Landgren, Robert and Hadley, David W., Surface Popouts Caused by
Alkali-Aggregate Reaction, RD 121, Portland Cement Association,
Skokie, Illinois, USA 2002, 20 pages.
(19) Whiting, N. M., 1999, Comparison of Field Observations with
Laboratory Test Results on Concretes Undergoing Alkali-Silica-
Reaction: Cement, Concrete and Aggregates, v. 21, no. 2, p. 142-148.
Page 79 of 180
 C294 − 12
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 80 of 180
11
 Designation: C295/C295M − 12
Standard Guide for
Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C295/C295M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This guide outlines procedures for the petrographic
examination of samples representative of materials proposed
for use as aggregates in cementitious mixtures or as raw
materials for use in production of such aggregates. This guide
is based on Ref (1).2
1.2 This guide outlines the extent to which petrographic
techniques should be used, the selection of properties that
should be looked for, and the manner in which such techniques
may be employed in the examination of samples of aggregates
for concrete.
1.3 The rock and mineral names given in Descriptive
Nomenclature C294 should be used, insofar as they are
appropriate, in reports prepared in accordance with this guide.
lc
ia
1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
fic
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
of
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
un
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:3
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on Concrete and
Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.65 on
Petrography.
Current edition approved April 1, 2012. Published May 2012. Originally
approved in 1954. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as C295/C295M–11.
DOI: 10.1520/C0295_C0295M-12.
2
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this standard.
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
C117 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
y
C294 Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Con-
crete Aggregates
op
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
E883 Guide for Reflected–Light Photomicrography
3. Qualifications of Petrographers
3.1 All petrographic examinations of aggregate for use in
concrete as described in this guide should be performed by a
petrographer with at least 5 years experience in petrographic
examination of concrete or concrete-making materials. The
petrographer should have completed college-level course work
pertaining to basic geology, mineralogy, petrography, and
optical mineralogy or have obtained equivalent knowledge
through experience and on-the-job training. Completion of
course work in concrete materials is also advantageous. The
petrographer should have experience evaluating the effects of
aggregates on the physical and chemical properties of hardened
concrete. Identification of individual minerals in aggregate
particles, classification of rock types, and categorizing the
physical and chemical properties of rocks and minerals should
also be included in the petrographer’s experience. The petrog-
rapher should have expertise to properly use the equipment and
apparatus described in Section 6 and provide detailed interpre-
tations of the petrographic examination. If the petrographer
does not meet these qualifications, the individual may perform
such examinations under the technical direction of a full-time
supervising petrographer who meets these qualifications. A
resume of the professional experience and education of the
petrographer shall be available.
3.1.1 Licensing, certification, or other accreditation by a
governmental agency or other organization stating the indi-
vidual is a professional geologist should not, by itself, consti-
tute sufficient qualification for examination of aggregates for
concrete.
Page 81 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
4. Summary of Method
4.1 The specific procedures employed in the petrographic
examination of any sample will depend to a large extent on the
purpose of the examination and the nature of the sample. In
most cases the examination will require the use of optical
microscopy. Complete petrographic examinations for particu-
lar purposes and to investigate particular problems may require
examination of aggregates or of selected constituents by means
of additional procedures, such as X-ray diffraction (XRD)
analysis, differential thermal analysis (DTA), infrared
spectroscopy, or other scanning electron microscopy (SEM)
energy-dispersive x-ray analysis (EDX). In some instances,
such procedures are more rapid and more definitive than are
microscopical methods.
4.2 Identification of the constituents of a sample is usually a
necessary step towards recognition of the properties that may
be expected to influence the behavior of the material in its
intended use, but identification is not an end in itself. The value
of any petrographic examination will depend to a large extent
on the representativeness of the samples examined, the com-
pleteness and accuracy of the information provided to the
petrographer concerning the source and proposed use of the
material, and the petrographer’s ability to correlate these data
with the findings of the examination.
4.3 This guide does not attempt to describe the techniques
lc
of petrographic work since it is assumed that the guide will be
used by persons who are qualified by education and experience
ia
to employ such techniques for the recognition of the charac-
teristic properties of rocks and minerals and to describe and
classify the constituents of an aggregate sample. In some cases,
the petrographer will have had experience adequate to provide
fic
detailed interpretation of the results. In others, the interpreta-
tion will be made in part by engineers or others qualified to
relate the observations to the questions to be answered.
of
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Petrographic examinations are made for the following
purposes:
5.1.1 To determine the physical and chemical characteristics
un
of the material that may be observed by petrographic methods
and that have a bearing on the performance of the material in
its intended use.
5.1.2 To describe and classify the constituents of the
sample,
5.1.3 To determine the relative amounts of the constituents
of the sample that are essential for proper evaluation of the
sample when the constituents differ significantly in properties
that have a bearing on the performance of the material in its
intended use, and
5.1.4 To compare samples of aggregate from new sources
with samples of aggregate from one or more sources, for which
test data or performance records are available.
5.2 This guide may be used by a petrographer employed
directly by those for whom the examination is made. The
employer should tell the petrographer, in as much detail as
necessary, the purposes and objectives of the examination, the
kind of information needed, and the extent of examination
2
desired. Pertinent background information, including results of
prior testing, should be made available. The petrographer’s
advice and judgment should be sought regarding the extent of
the examination.
5.3 This guide may form the basis for establishing arrange-
ments between a purchaser of consulting petrographic service
and the petrographer. In such a case, the purchaser and the
consultant should together determine the kind, extent, and
objectives of the examination and analyses to be made, and
should record their agreement in writing. The agreement may
stipulate specific determinations to be made, observations to be
reported, funds to be obligated, or a combination of these or
other conditions.
5.4 Petrographic examination of aggregate considered for
use in hydraulic-cement concrete is one aspect of the evalua-
tion of aggregate, but petrographic examination is also used for
y
many other purposes. Petrographic examinations provide iden-
tification of types and varieties of rocks present in potential
op
aggregates. However, as noted above, identification of every
rock and mineral present in an aggregate source is not required.
5.5 The petrographic examination should establish whether
the aggregate contains chemically unstable minerals such as
soluble sulfates, unstable sulfides that may form sulfuric acid
or create distress in concrete exposed to high temperatures
during service, or volumetrically unstable materials such as
smectites (formerly known as the montmorillonite-saponite
group of minerals or swelling clays). Specifications may limit
the quartz content of aggregates for use in concrete that may be
subject to high temperature (purposefully or accidentally)
because of the conversion to beta-quartz at 573 °C [1063 °F],
with accompanying volume increase.
5.6 Petrographic examination should identify the portion of
each coarse aggregate that is composed of weathered or
otherwise altered particles and the extent of that weathering or
alteration, whether it is severe, moderate, or slight, and should
determine the proportion of each rock type in each condition.
If the concrete in which the aggregate may be used will be
exposed to freezing and thawing in a critically saturated
condition, finely porous and highly weathered or otherwise
altered rocks should be identified because they will be espe-
cially susceptible to damage by freezing and thawing and will
cause the aggregate portion of the concrete to fail in freezing
and thawing. This will ultimately destroy the concrete because
such aggregates cannot be protected by adequately air-
entrained mortar. Finely porous aggregates near the concrete
surface are also likely to form popouts, which are blemishes on
pavements and walls.
5.7 Petrographic examinations may also be used to deter-
mine the proportions of cubic, spherical, ellipsoidal, pyramidal,
tabular, flat, and elongated particles in an aggregate sample or
samples. Flat, elongated, and thin chip-like particles in aggre-
gate increase the mixing water requirement and hence decrease
concrete strength.
5.8 Petrographic examination should identify and call atten-
tion to potentially alkali-silica reactive and alkali-carbonate
reactive constituents, determine such constituents
Page 82 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
quantitatively, and recommend additional tests to confirm or
refute the presence in significant amounts of aggregate con-
stituents capable of alkali reaction in concrete. See Specifica-
tion C33. Alkali-silica reactive constituents found in aggre-
gates include: opal, chalcedony, cristobalite, tridymite, highly
strained quartz, microcrystalline quartz, volcanic glass, and
synthetic siliceous glass. Aggregate materials containing these
constituents include: glassy to cryptocrystalline intermediate to
acidic volcanic rocks, some argillites, phyllites, graywacke,
gneiss, schist, gneissic granite, vein quartz, quartzite,
sandstone, and chert. Criteria are available for identifying the
minerals in the list above by their optical properties or by XRD
(2),(3). Criteria are available for identifying rocks by their
mineral composition and texture (4). Examination in both
reflected and transmitted light may be necessary to provide
data for these identifications. X-ray microanalysis using
energy-dispersive x-ray spectrometers with scanning electron
microscopy (SEM/EDX) or wavelength-dispersive x-ray spec-
trometers in electron microprobes (EMPA/WDX) may provide
useful information on the chemical composition of minerals
and rocks. Potentially deleterious alkali-carbonate reactive
rocks are usually calcareous dolomites or dolomitic limestones
with clayey insoluble residues. Some dolomites essentially free
of clay and some very fine-grained limestones free of clay and
not necessarily deleterious.
lc
with minor insoluble residue, mostly quartz, are also capable of
some alkali-carbonate reactions, however, such reactions are
5.9 Petrographic examination may be directed specifically
ia
at the possible presence of contaminants in aggregates, such as
synthetic glass, cinders, clinker, or coal ash, magnesium oxide,
calcium oxide, or both, gypsum, soil, hydrocarbons, chemicals
fic
that may affect the setting behavior of concrete or the proper-
ties of the aggregate, animal excrement, plants or rotten
vegetation, and any other contaminant that may prove unde-
sirable in concrete.
5.10 These objectives, for which this guide was prepared,
of
will have been attained if those involved with the evaluation of
aggregate materials for use in concrete construction have
reasonable assurance that the petrographic examination results
un
wherever and whenever obtained may confidently be com-
pared.
6. Apparatus and Supplies
6.1 The apparatus and supplies listed as follows comprise a
selection that will permit the use of the procedures described in
this guide. All specific items listed have been used, in connec-
tion with the performance of petrographic examinations, by the
procedures described herein; it is not, however, intended to
imply that other items cannot be substituted to serve similar
functions. Whenever possible the selection of particular appa-
ratus and supplies should be left to the judgment of the
petrographer who is to perform the work so that the items
obtained will be those with the use of which the petrographer
has the greatest experience and familiarity. The minimum
equipment regarded as essential to the making of petrographic
examinations of aggregate samples are those items, or equiva-
lent apparatus or supplies that will serve the same purpose, that
are indicated by asterisks in the lists given as follows.
3
6.1.1 Apparatus and Supplies for Preparation of Specimens:
6.1.1.1 Rock-Cutting Saw, * preferably with 350-mm [14-
in.] diameter or larger diamond blade, and automatic feed.
6.1.1.2 Horizontal Grinding Wheel, * preferably 400-mm
[16-in.] diameter.
6.1.1.3 Polishing Wheel, preferably 200- to 300-mm [8 to
12-in.] diameter.
6.1.1.4 Abrasives*, Silicon carbide grit No. 100 [122 µm],
220 [63 µm], 320 [31 µm], 600 [16 µm], and 800 [12 µm];
alumina M-305 [5 µm].4
6.1.1.5 Geologist’s Pick or Hammer.
6.1.1.6 Microscope Slides*, clear, noncorrosive, 25 by 45
mm [1 by 2 in.] in size.
6.1.1.7 Mounting Medium for Powder Mounts*—Canada
balsam, neutral, in xylene; suitable low-viscosity epoxy resins;
or Lakeside 70.
6.1.1.8 Xylene*.
y
6.1.1.9 Mounting Medium*, suitable for mounting rock
slices for thin sections.
op
6.1.1.10 Laboratory Oven*.
6.1.1.11 Plate-Glass Squares*, about 300 mm [12 in.] on an
edge for thin-section grinding.
6.1.1.12 Sample Splitter with pans.*
6.1.1.13 Micro Cover Glasses, * noncorrosive, square, 12 to
18 mm, 25 mm, [0.5 to 0.75 in., 1.0 in.] etc.
6.1.1.14 Plattner Mortar.
6.1.2 Apparatus and Supplies for Examination of Speci-
mens:
6.1.2.1 Petrographic Microscope*, with mechanical stage;
oculars and objective lenses that will allow magnifications of
up to 600 x, and objective-centering devices; full- and quarter-
wave compensators; quartz wedge; micrometer eyepiece; Ber-
trand lens.
6.1.2.2 Microscope Lamps*
6.1.2.3 Stereoscopic Microscope*, with objectives and ocu-
lars to give final magnifications from about 6× to about 150×.
6.1.2.4 Magnet*, preferably Alnico, or an electromagnet.
6.1.2.5 Needleholder and Points*.
6.1.2.6 Dropping Bottle, 60-mL [2 oz.] capacity.
6.1.2.7 Petri Culture Dishes.
6.1.2.8 Forceps, smooth, straightpointed.
6.1.2.9 Lens Paper.*
6.1.2.10 Immersion Media*, n = 1.410 to n = 1.785 in
steps of no more than 0.005.
6.1.2.11 Counter.
6.1.2.12 Photomicrographic Camera and accessories.
6.2 The items under Apparatus and Supplies include those
used to make thin sections. Semiautomatic thin section ma-
chines are available, and there are several thin-section makers
who advertise in Geotimes, the American Mineralogist, and
other mineralogical or geological journals. Laboratories may
find it reasonable to buy a thin-section machine or use a
commercial thin-section maker. Remotely located laboratories
have more need to be able to make their own thin sections.
4
The values given in micrometres are the approximate average grain size of
commercial silicon carbide grit in the designated size classification.
Page 83 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
6.3 It is necessary that facilities be available to the petrog-
rapher to check the index of refraction of the immersion media.
If accurate identification of materials is to be attempted, as for
example the differentiation of quartz and chalcedony, or the
differentiation of basic from intermediate volcanic glass, the
indices of refraction of the media need to be known with
accuracy. Media will not be stable for very long periods of time
and are subject to considerable variation due to temperature
change. In laboratories not provided with close temperature
control, it is often necessary to recalibrate immersion media
several times during the course of a single day when accurate
identifications are required. The equipment needed for check-
ing immersion media consists of an Abbé refractometer. The
refractometer should be equipped with compensating prisms to
read indices for sodium light from white light, or it should be
used with a sodium arc lamp.
6.4 A laboratory that undertakes any considerable amount of
petrographic work should be provided with facilities to make
photomicrographic records of such features as cannot ad-
equately be described in words. For illustrations of typical
apparatus, reference may be made to Ref (1) and manufacturers
of microscopes equipped with cameras and photomacrographic
equipment may be consulted. Much useful guidance regarding
photomicrography, especially using reflected light, is found in
Guide E883.
7. Sampling
lc
7.1 Samples for petrographic examination should be taken
ia
by or under the direct supervision of a geologist familiar with
the requirements for random sampling of aggregates for
concrete and in general following the requirements of Practice
fic
D75. Information on the exact location from which the sample
was taken, the geology of the site, and other pertinent data
should be submitted with the sample. The amount of material
actually studied in the petrographic examination will be
determined by the nature of the examination to be made and the
of
nature of the material to be examined, as discussed below.
7.1.1 Undeveloped quarries should be sampled by means of
cores drilled through the entire depth expected to be exploited.
un
Drilling of such cores should be in a direction that is essentially
perpendicular to the dominant structural feature of the rock.
Massive material may be sampled by “NX” (50-mm [2-in.]
diameter) cores. Thinly bedded or complex material should be
represented by cores not less than 100 mm [4 in.] in diameter.
There should be an adequate number of cores to cover the
limits of the deposit proposed for the project. The entire
footage of the recovered core should be included in the sample
and accurate data given as to elevations, depths, and core
losses.
7.1.2 Operating quarries and operating sand and gravel
deposits, in which stock piles of the material produced are
available, should be represented by not less than 45 kg [100 lb]
or 300 pieces, whichever is larger, of each size of material to
be examined. Samples from stock piles should be composed of
representative portions of larger samples collected with due
consideration given to segregation in the piles.
7.1.3 Exposed faces of nonproducing quarries, where stock
piles of processed material are not available, should be
4
represented by not less than 2 kg [4 lb] from each distinctive
stratum or bed, with no piece having a mass less than 0.5 kg [1
lb], or by a drilled core as described above.
7.1.4 Undeveloped sand and gravel deposits should be
sampled by means of test pits dug to the anticipated depth of
future economic production. Samples should consist of not less
than the quantities of material indicated in Table 1, selected so
as to be representative of the deposits.
NATURAL GRAVEL AND SAND
8. Procedure
8.1 Selection of Samples for Examination—Samples of
gravel and natural sand for petrographic examination should be
dry sieved in accordance with Method C136 to provide
samples of each sieve size. In the case of sands an additional
portion should then be tested in accordance with Test Method
y
C117, with the wash water being saved and removed by drying
in order to provide a sample of the material passing the 75-µm
op
(No. 200) sieve (See Specification E11).5 The results of the
sieve analysis of each sample made in accordance with Method
C136 should be provided to the petrographer making the
examination and used in calculating results of the petrographic
examination. Each sieve fraction should be examined
separately, starting with the largest size available. Rocks are
more easily recognized in larger pieces; the breakdown of a
heterogeneous type present in the larger sizes may have
provided particles of several apparently different types in the
smaller sizes. Some important and easily confused types may
be recognizable using the stereoscopic microscope if they are
first recognized and separated in the larger sizes, but may
require examination using the petrographic microscope if they
are first encountered in the smaller sizes.
8.2 The number of particles of each sieve fraction to be
examined will be fixed by the required precision of determi-
nation of the less abundant constituents. Assuming that the
field sampling and laboratory sampling procedures are accurate
and reliable, the number of particles examined, identified, and
counted in each sieve fraction will depend on the required
accuracy of the estimate of constituents present in small
5
Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Specification E11. The
alternative designation given in parentheses is for information only and does not
represent a different standard sieve size.
TABLE 1 Minimum Sizes for Samples from Undeveloped Sand
and Gravel Deposits
Quantity
Sieve Size
kg [lb] Pieces
Larger than 150-mm (6-in.)A ... ... B
75 to 150-mm (3 to 6-in.)A ... ... 300B
37.5 to 75-mm (11⁄2 to 3-in.)A 180 [400] ...
19.0 to 37.5-mm (3⁄4 to 11⁄2-in.)A 90 [200] ...
4.75 to 19.0-mm (No. 4 to 3⁄4-in.)A 45 [100] ...
Finer than 4.75-mm (No. 4)A,C 23 [50] ...
A
Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Specification E11. The
alternative designation given in parentheses is for information only and does not
represent a different standard sieve size.
B
Not less than one piece from each apparent type of rock.
C
Fine aggregate.
Page 84 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
quantities. The numbers given in this method are minimal.
They are based on experience and on statistical considerations
(5, 6). It is believed that at least 150 particles of each sieve
fraction should be identified and counted in order to obtain
reliable results. Precise determinations of small quantities of an
important constituent will require counts of larger numbers of
particles. If the sample of a sieve fraction contains many more
particles than need to be identified, the sample shall be reduced
in accordance with one of the procedures in Practice C702, so
as to contain a proper number of particles for examination.
9. Procedure for Examination of Natural Gravel
9.1 Coatings—The particles should be examined to estab-
lish whether exterior coatings are present. If coatings are
present, it should be determined whether the coatings consist of
materials likely to be deleterious in concrete (opal, gypsum,
easily soluble salts, organic matter). It should also be deter-
mined qualitatively how firmly the coatings are bonded to the
particles.
9.2 Rock Types—The sieve fraction should be sorted into
rock types by visual examination. If all or most of the groups
present are types easily identifiable in hand specimen by
examination of a natural or broken surface, and by scratch and
acid tests, no further identification may be needed. Fine-
lc
grained rocks that cannot be identified macroscopically or that
may consist of or contain constituents known to be deleterious
in concrete should be checked by examination with the
stereoscopic microscope. If they cannot be identified by that
ia
means, they should be examined by means of the petrographic
microscope. The amount of work done in identifying fine-
grained rocks should be adapted to the information needed
fic
about the particular sample. Careful examination of one size of
a sample, or study of information from previous examination
of samples from the same source, will usually reveal the
amount of additional detailed microscopical work required to
obtain information adequate for the purpose. In some instances,
of
petrographic methods other than microscopy, such as X-ray
diffraction, may be required or might most rapidly serve to
identify fine-grained rock materials.
un
9.3 Condition—The separated groups belonging to each
rock type should be examined to determine whether a further
separation by physical condition is necessary. If all of the
particles of a rock type are in a similar condition, that fact
should be noted. More frequently, particles in several degrees
of weathering will be found in a group. They should be sorted
into categories based on condition and on the expectation of
comparable behavior in concrete. The types of categories
intended are: (1) fresh, dense; (2) moderately weathered; (3)
very weathered; or (1) dense; (2) porous (or porous and
friable). It usually is not practicable to recognize more than
three conditions per rock type, and one or two may be
sufficient. An important constituent present in larger quantities
may sometimes require separation into four groups by condi-
tion. The conspicuous example is chert when it is the major
constituent of a gravel sample. It may be present as dense,
unfractured chert; as vuggy chert; as porous chert; and as dense
but highly fractured chert. The determination of which of these
four conditions characterizes a particle may be expected to
5
have an important influence on prediction of the behavior of
the particle in concrete.
9.4 Record:
9.4.1 Notes should be taken during the examination. Each
rock type should be described; the relevant features may
include the following:
9.4.1.1 Particle shape,
9.4.1.2 Particle surface texture,
9.4.1.3 Grain size,
9.4.1.4 Internal structure, including observations of pore
space, packing of grains, cementation of grains,
9.4.1.5 Color,
9.4.1.6 Mineral composition,
9.4.1.7 Significant heterogeneities,
9.4.1.8 General physical condition of the rock type in the
sample,
y
9.4.1.9 Coatings or incrustations, and
9.4.1.10 Presence of constituents known to cause deleteri-
op
ous chemical reaction in concrete.
9.4.2 Particle counts should be recorded so that tables can
be made for inclusion in the report. When the examination has
been completed, the notes should contain enough information
to permit the preparation of tables and descriptions. Tables
should be prepared showing the composition and condition of
the samples by sieve fractions, and the weighted average
composition, based on the grading of the sample as received
and on the distribution of constituents by sieve fractions.
Descriptions of constituent groups should be prepared contain-
ing the relevant features among those enumerated in the
preceding list.
10. Procedure for Examination of Natural Sand
10.1 The procedure for the examination of natural sand is
similar to that for the examination of gravel, with the modifi-
cations necessitated by the differences in particle size.
10.1.1 Sizes Coarser than 600 µm (No. 30)—Each sieve
fraction present that is coarser than the 600-µm (No. 30) sieve
should be reduced in accordance with one of the procedures in
Practice C702 until a split or splits containing at least 150
particles are obtained. The reduced sample of each sieve
fraction should be examined, and its constituents identified and
counted, using the stereoscopic microscope. It is convenient to
spread out the sample in a flat-bottom glass dish such as a Petri
dish and manipulate the grains with a forceps and dissecting
needle. The identification of grains in the coarser sand sizes is
often easier when the grains are just submerged in water. The
submergence lessens reflection from the outer surfaces and
may show diagnostic features that cannot be seen when the
grains are dry. There are exceptions to this generalization.
Where identification is difficult, the examination includes
examination of the natural surface (dry and wet), examination
of a broken surface (dry and wet), and scratch and acid tests.
Only after all of these steps have been taken and the grain is
still unidentified should the petrographer resort to the petro-
graphic microscope. Grains that cannot be identified using the
stereoscopic microscope, or that are suspected of consisting of
or containing substances known to react deleteriously in
Page 85 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
concrete, should be set aside to be examined with the petro-
graphic microscope. If the question of reaction with alkalies is
important in the examination of the sample, certain additions to
the procedure are indicated. If the coarser sand sizes contain
fine-grained, possibly glassy igneous rocks, several typical
particles of each variety of such rocks should be selected for a
more thorough examination. The petrographer should deter-
mine the presence or absence of glass by crushing typical
grains and examining them in immersion media, using the
petrographic microscope. In difficult or especially important
cases, it may be necessary to break suspected grains and to
make immersion mounts of part of the grain and a thin section
of another part. Where the sand contains chert and the potential
reactivity of the chert is an important consideration, a number
of chert particles from the fractions retained on the 600-µm
(No. 30) sieve should be set aside for determinations of the
index of refraction. Methylene blue staining techniques may be
useful in identifying the presence of smectite (7).
10.1.2 Sizes Finer than 600 µm (No. 30)—The sieve frac-
tions finer than the 600-µm (No. 30) sieve should each be
reduced in a sample splitter or by quartering (Note 1). These
splits should be further reduced on a miniature sample splitter
or by coning and quartering with a spatula on a clean sheet of
paper. The examination may be conducted as described previ-
ously for the coarser sizes. As required, the petrographic
microscope should be used. For this purpose, a representative
portion of each reduced split should be mounted in immersion
lc
oil on a clean glass slide and covered with a clean cover glass.
ia
No entirely satisfactory method of reducing a split to a
predetermined number of grains is known. The reduced split
can be sampled by spreading it in a thin layer on glass or clean
fic
paper, dragging the end of a dissecting needle moistened in
immersion oil through the sample and transferring the grains
that adhere to the needle to a drop of immersion oil on a clean
slide. If this is done carefully, a fairly representative sample
will be obtained. If the dissecting needle is made of magnetized
of
steel, a concentration of magnetic minerals may result. It is
usually necessary to make several mounts of the 300-µm (No.
50) and 150-µm (No. 100) sieve fractions to obtain at least 150
un
grains of each. The refractive index of the immersion oil should
be selected to make the identification of the important constitu-
ents as easy and as definite as possible. The use of an
immersion oil with an index of or just below the lower index
of quartz (1.544) is recommended. The slide should be
mounted on a petrographic microscope equipped with a me-
chanical stage. Several traverses should be made, and each
grain that passes under the intersection of the cross hairs should
be identified and counted. Care should be taken to move the
slide on the north-south adjustment between traverses so that
no grain will be counted twice. Each sieve fraction passing the
600-µm (No. 30) and retained on the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve
should be examined. Ordinarily, the material passing the 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve is mounted on a slide following the procedure
described above, examined by means of the petrographic
microscope, and its composition estimated. If an unusually
large amount of this size is present, or if it contains constituents
that may be expected to have an important effect on the
suitability of the aggregate for the intended use, it should be
6
counted. In this event, it is suggested that the fraction passing
the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve be washed over the 45-µm (No. 325)
sieve before being counted.
NOTE 1—About 4 or 5 g is usually sufficient and the volume will
usually be less than a level teaspoonful. In some gradings the fractions
retained on the 150-µm (No. 100) and 75-µm (No. 200) sieves may be
present in such small amounts that reduction is unnecessary.
10.1.3 Grain thin sections using an epoxy as mounting
medium also may be useful in classifying particles passing the
300-µm (No. 50) sieve.
DRILLED CORE, LEDGE ROCK, CRUSHED STONE,
AND MANUFACTURED SAND
11. Procedure for Examination of Drilled Core
11.1 Each core should be examined and a log prepared
y
showing length of core recovered, core loss and location;
location and spacing of fractures and parting planes; lithologic
op
type or types; alternation of types; physical condition and
variations in condition; toughness, hardness (8), coherence;
obvious porosity; grain size, texture, variations in grain size
and texture; type or types of breakage; and presence of
constituents capable of deleterious reaction in concrete. If the
size of the core permits, the probability that the rock will make
aggregate of the required maximum size should be considered.
If the surface of the core being examined is wetted, it is usually
easier to recognize significant features and changes in lithol-
ogy. Most of the information usually required can be obtained
by careful visual examination, scratch and acid tests, and
hitting the core with a hammer. In the case of fine-grained
rocks, it may be necessary to examine parts of the core, using
the stereoscopic microscope, or to prepare thin sections of
selected portions. Some considerations and procedures are
more applicable to particular rock types than to others.
Ordinarily, the layered rocks considered for concrete aggregate
will be limestone, and occasionally metamorphic rocks, such as
phyllite, gneiss, or schist. One of the most important questions
arising in the examination of limestone is that of the presence,
type, and distribution of argillaceous impurities. Limestones
that contain intercalated thin beds of soft shale may make
suitable sources of aggregate if the shale is so distributed that
it does not prevent manufacture of the required maximum size,
and if the shale can be eliminated or reduced in processing.
Where argillaceous impurities are present, it should be deter-
mined whether they actually consist of clay minerals or of
other minerals in clay sizes. If they do consist of clay minerals,
it should be established whether the clay minerals include
smectites (9). X-ray diffraction analysis is especially valuable
in identification and quantitative determination of clay miner-
als. Methylene blue staining techniques (7) are useful in
identifying smectite. In the examination of fine-grained igne-
ous rocks, particular attention should be directed to the nature
of the groundmass. This examination should include determi-
nation of the presence or absence of opal, chalcedony, natural
glass, and swelling clays; if any of these are found the amount
should be estimated; if natural glass is found the type should be
determined.
Page 86 of 180
 C295/C295M − 12
12. Procedure for Examination of Ledge Rock
12.1 The procedure used in examination should be the same
as for core samples to the extent that the spacing of samples
and size of the individual pieces allow. If the sample consists
of a relatively large quantity of broken stone produced by
blasting, it is desirable to inspect the whole sample, estimate
the relative abundance of rock types or varieties present, and
sample each type before further processing. Subsequent pro-
cedure should be the same as given below for crushed stone.
13. Procedure for Examination of Crushed Stone
13.1 The procedure for examination of crushed stone should
be similar to that for core, except that necessary quantitative
data should be obtained by particle counts of the separated
sieve fractions obtained as described in the section on Natural
Gravel and Sand.
from which the sand was produced is available, examination of
it will provide useful information.
CALCULATION AND REPORT
15. Calculation
15.1 Calculate the composition of each sieve fraction of a
heterogeneous sample and the weighted average composition
of the whole sample as follows:
15.1.1 Express the composition of each sieve fraction by
summing the total number of particles of that fraction counted,
and calculating each constituent in each condition as a percent-
age of the total amount (as number of particles in percent, in
each sieve fraction). It is convenient to calculate and record the
percentages to tenths at this stage. An example of these
calculations is given in the upper half of Table 2.
15.1.2 Obtain the percentage by mass of the sieve fraction in

y
the whole sample (individual percentages retained on consecu-
14. Procedure for Examination of Manufactured Sand tive sieves) from the grading of the sample as determined by

14.1 The examination procedure should be similar to that
for natural sand, with particular emphasis on the amount and
extent of fracturing and the amount and nature of rock dust
developed by the milling operations. If a sample of the rock
op
Method C136.
15.1.3 By multiplying the percentage of the constituent in
the sieve fraction, determined as described above by the
percentage of the sieve fraction in the whole sample, obtained

Individual
Percentage
Retained
19.0-mm ( ⁄ -in.)
34 B
lc
TABLE 2 Calculation of Results of Particle CountsA
Composition of Fractions Retained on Sieves Shown Below
12.5-mm (1⁄2-in.)B 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.)B 4.75-mm (No. 4)B
ia
on Sieve 17.4 32.6 29.5 20.5
C Number of Number of Number of Number of
Constituents % % % %
Particles Particles Particles Particles
A1 250 50.0 200 40.0 150 30.0 50 10.0
fic

A2 50 10.0 100 20.0 125 25.0 100 20.0

A3 10 2.0 50 10.0 75 15.0 100 20.0
B1 107 21.4 70 14.0 62 12.4 32 6.4
B2 76 15.2 53 10.6 19 3.8 87 17.4
B3 ... ... 20 4.0 43 8.6 96 19.2
C1 5 1.0 5 1.0 20 4.0 20 4.0
of

C2 2 0.4 2 0.4 6 1.2 10 2.0

C3 ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 1.0
Totals 500D 100 500D 100 500D 100 500D 100

Weighted Percentages of Constituents in Each Sieve Fraction

un

Weighted Composition
19.0-mm 12.5-mm 9.5-mm 4.75-mm of Sample
(3⁄4-in.)B (1⁄2-in.)B (3⁄8-in.)B (No. 4)B
A1 8.7 13.0 8.9 2.1 32.7 64.6 (Total A)
A2 1.7 6.5 7.4 4.1 19.7
A3 0.4 3.3 4.4 4.1 12.2
B1 3.7 4.6 3.7 1.3 13.3 31.8 (Total B)
B2 2.6 3.5 1.1 3.6 10.8
B3 ... 1.3 2.5 3.9 7.7
C1 0.2 0.3 1.2 0.8 2.5 3.6 (Total C)
C2 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.9
C3 ... ... ... 0.2 0.2
Total in sieve fraction 17.4 32.6 29.5 20.5
Total in sample, condition 1 48.5
Total in sample, condition 2 31.4
Total in sample, condition 3 20.1
A
This table indicates a convenient method of setting up a work sheet for recording results and calculations. The results developed here are entered in the form indicated
by Table number 3. Table number 3 is included in the petrographic report. Table number 2 is not.
B
Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Specification E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for information only and does not represent
a different standard sieve size.
C
Letters (A, B, C) refer to the various constituents found, subscript numbers (1, 2, 3) refer to the various conditions in which each constituent has been found, such as
relative degree of weathering.
D
The recommendation concerning the number of particles to be counted has been met; the selection of 500 particles per fraction for the example is to illustrate the
calculation; it is not intended to suggest that a predetermined number of particles per fraction should be selected.

Page 87 of 180
7
 C295/C295M − 12
as described above, calculate the percentage in the whole
sample of that constituent in that size (weighted percentage of
constituents in sieve fraction, Table 2). It is convenient to
calculate and record these percentages to tenths.
15.1.4 By adding the weighted percentages of each constitu-
ent in each sieve fraction, obtain the weighted percentage of
each constituent in the whole sample (see under weighted
composition of sample in Table 2).
15.1.5 Construct a table to show the composition of each
sieve fraction and the weighted composition of the whole
sample. Report values to the nearest whole number. Report
constituents amounting to 0.5 % or less of a sieve fraction or of
the whole sample as traces. Table 3 is an example constructed
from the data obtained in Table 2. As a convention, the total in
each sieve fraction and the total in the whole sample shall each
be 100 % without the traces. Difficulties in abiding by this
convention can usually be avoided by grouping minor constitu-
concrete should be mentioned. When appropriate, it should be
stated that a given sample was not found to contain any
undesirable features. When such is the case it may also be
appropriate, especially if the report of the petrographic exami-
nation is not accompanied by reports of results of physical and
chemical tests for which numerical limits may be applicable, to
add that the material appears acceptable for use provided the
applicable acceptance tests are made and the results are within
the appropriate limits. The report should not, however, contain
conclusions other than those based upon the finding of the
examination unless the additional data to support such conclu-
sions are included in or with the petrographic report and the
petrographer has been authorized to analyze the other relevant
nonpetrographic data.
16.3 The petrographic report should include recommenda-
tions regarding any additional petrographic, chemical,

y
ents of little engineering importance. It is preferable to tabulate physical, or geological investigations that may be required to
constituents known to react deleteriously in concrete so that evaluate adverse properties that are indicated by the petro-

their distribution will be apparent from inspection of the table,
even though the amount in the whole sample or in any fraction
is very small.
16. Report
16.1 The report of the petrographic examination should
summarize the essential data needed to identify the sample as
to source and proposed use, and include a description giving
the essential data on composition and properties of the material
lc
op
graphic examination that has been performed. Supplementary
petrographic investigations might include qualitative or quan-
titative analysis of the aggregate or of selected portions thereof
by X-ray diffraction, differential thermal methods, or other
procedures that are directed to identification and description of
the constituents of the aggregate.

17. Precision and Bias

ia
as revealed by the examination. The report should record the
test procedures employed, and give a description of the nature
and features of each important constituent of the sample,
accompanied by such tables and photographs as may be
fic
17.1 Those test methods that are used in connection with
this guide that have been standardized in ASTM are subject to
having precision and bias sections. Those that have not been
standardized will each be provided with such a section, if and
when standardized. None of the nonstandardized procedures

required. The findings and conclusions should be expressed in
terms likely to be intelligible to those who must make decisions
as to the suitability of a material for use as concrete aggregate.
16.2 When the sample has been found to possess properties
of
mentioned for optional use in this practice are used in ways that
lend themselves to the preparation of precision and bias
statements.

or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable 18. Keywords

effects in concrete, those properties or constituents should be 18.1 aggregate; analysis; composition; crushed rock;
described qualitatively and, to the extent practicable, quantita- crushed stone; examination; ledge rock; manufacture sand;
un

tively. The unfavorable effects that may be expected to ensue in natural sand; petrography; quarry

TABLE 3 Composition and Condition of an Aggregate Sample (Table Constructed from Calculations Shown in Table Number 2)A
Amount, as Number of Particles in Percent
In Fractions Retained on Sieves Shown BelowB In Whole SampleC
Constituents
19.0-mm 12.5-mm 9.5-mm 4.75-mm Condition Condition Condition
Totals
(3⁄4-in.)D (1⁄2-in.)D (3⁄8-in.)D (No. 4)D 1 2 3
A 62 70 70 50 33 20 12 65
B 37 29 25 43 13 11 8 32
C 1 1 5 7 2 1 tr 3
Total 100 100 100 100 ... ... ... 100
Weighted average 48 ... ... ...
Weighted average ... 32 ... ...
Weighted average ... ... 20 ...
A
For other forms of presentation of results of petrographic analysis, see Table numbers 1- 4 in (10).
B
Based on count of 500 particles in each sieve fraction. (The number of particles of each sieve fraction counted should be shown in the report and this may conveniently
be done as a footnote to the table.)
C
Based on grading of the sample as received, and on the distribution of constituents by sieve fractions shown at the left above. (If the petrographic report forms part of
a complete investigation of the sample, including a report of the grading, the grading need not be shown. If the petrographic report is to be submitted alone, the grading
of the sample should be included with it.)
D
Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Specification E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for information only and does not represent
a different standard sieve size.

Page 88 of 180
8
 C295/C295M − 12

REFERENCES

(1) Mather, Katharine and Mather, Bryant, “Method of Petrographic
Examination of Aggregates for Concrete,” Proceedings, ASTM,
ASTEA, Vol 50, pp. 1288-1312, 1950.
(2) Kerr, Paul F., “Optical Mineralology,” McGraw-Hill Book Company,
NY, NY, 1977.
(3) Jenkins, Snyder, “Introduction to X-ray Powder Diffractometery,”
John Wiley and Sons, Inc, NY, NY, 1996.
(4) Williams, Turner, Gilbert, “Petrography an Introduction to the Study
of Rocks in Thin Section,” W.H. Freeman and Co., NY, NY, 1982 .
(5) Simpson, G.G., and Rowe, A., Quantitative Zoology, McGraw-Hill
Col, Inc., New York, NY, pp. 182-185, 1950.
(6) Dryden, A.L., Jr., “Accuracy in Percentage Representation of Heavy
Mineral Frequencies,” Proceedings, U.S. Nat. Academy of Sciences,
Vol 17, No. 5, pp. 233-238, 1931.
(7) Higgs, Nelson B., “Preliminary Studies of Methylene Blue Adsorption
as a Method of Evaluating Degradable Smectite-Bearing Concrete
Aggregate Sands,” Cement and Concrete Research, Vol 16, pp.
528-534, 1986.
(8) Woolf, D.O., “Methods for the Determination of Soft Pieces in
Aggregate,” Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 47, p. 967, 1947.
(9) Carroll, Dorothy, “Clay Minerals: A Guide to Their X-Ray
Identification,” Special Paper 126, The Geological Society of
America, 1970.
(10) Mielenz, Richard C., “Petrographic Evaluation of Concrete
Aggregates,” Chapter 31, Significance of Tests and Properties of
Concrete and Concrete-Making Materials, Paul and Joseph F.
Lamond, eds., ASTM STP 169, pp. 341-364, 1994 .

y
op
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this guide since the last issue,
C295/C295M–11, that may impact the use of this guide. (Approved April 1, 2012)

(1) Revised 10.1.2 and Note 1 to clarify precision of measure-

ment.
lc
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this guide since the last issue, C295–08, that
ia
may impact the use of this guide. (Approved July 1, 2011)

(1) Revised the standard as a dual units guide.

fic

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
of

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
un

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

Page 89 of 180
9
 Designation: C 342 – 97
Standard Test Method for
Potential Volume Change of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C 342; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the poten-
tial expansion of cement-aggregate combinations by measuring
the linear expansion developed by the combinations in mortar
bars subjected to variations of temperature and water saturation
during storage under prescribed conditions of test.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
C 109/C109M Test Method for Compressive Strength of
lc
ia
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens)2
C 150 Specification for Portland Cement2
fic
C 227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method)3
C 305 Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement
Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency2
C 490 Practice for Use of Apparatus for the Determination
of
of Length Change of Hardened Cement Paste, Mortar, and
Concrete3
C 856 Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened
Concrete3
un
E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Pur-
poses4
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This test method has been found to produce significant
expansions of cement-aggregate combinations when the ce-
ment in some cases has a very low alkali content, and in other
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C-9 on Concrete
and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.26on
Chemical Reactions of Materials.
Current edition approved July 10, 1997. Published June 1998. Originally
published as C 342 – 54 T. Last previous edition C 342 – 90.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1 Page 90 of 180
An American National Standard
cases, where the aggregate is presumptively nonreactive with
alkalies. It has been suggested that the test method measures
interactions of phenomena possibly including microcracking
effects that are in some cases physical and perhaps in other
cases chemical.
3.2 No acceptance limits for expansion of cement-aggregate
y
combinations applicable either to cement or aggregate have
been developed or should be established.
op
3.3 This test method is intended primarily for use by those
interested in research on aggregates that are found in parts of
Oklahoma, Kansas, Nebraska, and Iowa.5
4. Apparatus
4.1 The apparatus shall conform to Test Method C 227
except as follows:
4.2 Containers—Containers for storing the specimens shall
be of corrosion-resistant material, and the inside dimensions
shall be approximately 32 by 89 by 310 mm. They shall be so
constructed that when used for storing specimens, the loss of
moisture is prevented by a tight-fitting cover or by sealing, or
by both. The capacity of the containers shall be such that not
more than 315 mL of water are required to immerse completely
three mortar specimens supported 13 mm above the bottom of
the container. Provision shall be made for supporting the
specimens 13 mm above the bottom of the container in such
manner that the weight of the specimens is not supported by the
gage studs, and the specimens are kept vertical, spaced
uniformly, and free from contact with the walls of the con-
tainer.
NOTE 1—Removable corrosion-resistant 0.3 to 0.9-mm sheet metal
spacers have been found to be satisfactory to space and support the
specimens. The top spacer is a rectangular strip (28 mm in width and 86
mm in length to fit into the interior cross-sectional dimension of the
container. The strip is perforated along the longitudinal center line with
5
For additional information refer to: Conrow, A. D., “Studies of Abnormal
Expansion of Portland Cement Concrete,” Proceedings, Am. Soc. Testing Mats.,
ASTEA, Vol 52, 1952, p. 1205; and “Final Report on Cooperative Tests of Proposed
Tentative Method of Test for Potential Volume Change of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations, and Proposed Tentative Method of Test for Potential Abnormal
Expansion of Cement-Aggregate Combinations,” by Subcommittee II-b, ASTM
Committee C-9, Proceedings, ASTEA, Am. Soc. Testing Mats., Vol 54, 1954; and
Hadley, David W., “Field and Laboratory Study of the Reactivity of Sand—Gravel
Aggregates,” Journal of the PCA Research and Development Laboratories, Vol 10
No. 1, 1968, pp.17–13; also Research Bulletin 221, R and D Laboratories of the
PCA, Skokie, IL,1968.
 C 342
three holes of a size to permit insertion of the gage studs at the ends of the
specimens. The hole for the center specimen is placed at the center of the
strip, and the centers of the other hole are placed 28 mm to either side of
the center. The bottom spacer is the same except for an added length of 13
mm at each end that are turned at right angles to the face of the strip to
form legs to support spacers 13 mm above the bottom of the container.
5. Temperature and Humidity
5.1 The temperature of the dry materials, water, molding
room, and moist cabinet and the humidity of the laboratory and
moist cabinet shall conform to Test Method C 227 (see also
Section 8).
6. Selection and Preparation of Materials
6.1 Selection of Aggregate—Materials proposed for use as
fine aggregate in concrete shall be processed as described in the
section on preparation of aggregate with a minimum of
crushing. Materials proposed for use as coarse aggregate in
concrete shall be processed by crushing to produce as nearly as
practical a graded product from which a sample can be
obtained. The sample shall have a grading as prescribed in the
section on preparation of aggregate and be representative of the
composition of the coarse aggregate as proposed for use.
6.1.1 When there is reason to expect the coarser sized
particles of crushed material to have a different composition
than the finer sizes, and the difference might significantly affect
expansion due to reaction with alkalies, the coarser sizes shall
be tested in a manner to that employed in testing the finer sizes.
6.1.2 Coarse aggregate crushed to sand size may give
lc
ia
accentuated expansion, owing to the increased surface exposed
upon crushing. Therefore, if coarse aggregate tested by this
method produces an excessive amount of expansion, the
material shall not be classed as objectionably reactive with
fic
alkali unless tests of concrete specimens confirm the findings
of the tests of the mortar.
6.2 Preparation of Aggregate—Fine and coarse aggregates
to which this test method is applied shall be graded in
of
accordance with the requirements prescribed in Table 1 unless
specified otherwise. Aggregates in which sufficient quantities
of the sizes specified in Table 1 do not exist shall be crushed
until the required material has been produced. In the case of
un
aggregates containing insufficient amounts of one or more of
the larger sizes listed in Table 1, and if no larger material is
available for crushing, the first size in which sufficient material
is available shall contain the cumulative percentage of material
down to that size as determined from the grading specified in
Table 1. When such procedures are required, special note shall
be made thereof in the test report. After the aggregate has been
separated into the various sieve sizes, each size shall be washed
with a water spray over the sieve to remove adhering dust and
TABLE 1 Grading Requirements
Sieve SizeA
Mass %
Passing Retained
4.75 mm 2.36 mm 10
2.36 mm 1.18 mm 25
1.18 mm 600 µm 25
600 µm 300 µm 25
300 µm 150 µm 15
A
Detailed requirements for these sieves are given in Specification E 11.
2 Page 91 of 180
fine particles from the aggregate. The sieve splits shall then be
dried and recombined in the quantity required for one batch of
mortar to the grading prescribed in Table 1.
6.3 Selection of Cement— Cement for use in tests made for
reasons other than to determine performance of cement-
aggregate combinations performance shall conform to the
requirements of Specification C 150 (Note 2). Cement for use
in this test method shall be passed through an 850-µm sieve to
remove lumps before use.
NOTE 2—It is recommended that each aggregate subjected to this
method be used with both high and low-alkali portland cements; other
combinations with pozzolans or ground blast-furnace slag, for example,
may be used. A low-alkali portland cement is defined in Specification
C 150 as one containing not more than 0.60 % alkalies (Na2O + 0.658
K2O). Cements of alkali contents as low and as high as can be obtained
should be used.
7. Preparation of Test Specimens
y
7.1 Number of Test Specimens—Three test specimens shall
be made from one batch for each cement-aggregate combina-
op
tion.
7.2 Preparation of Molds—Prepare the molds in accordance
with Specification C 490.
7.3 Proportioning of Mortar—The proportions of dry ma-
terials of the test mortar shall be 1 part cement to 2.25 parts
graded aggregate by mass. The quantities of dry materials to be
mixed at one time in the batch or mortar for making three
specimens shall be 500 g of cement and 1125 g of aggregate.
The amount of mixing water shall be enough to produce a flow
of 100 to 115 % determined in accordance with Test Method
C 109.
7.4 Mixing of Mortar—Mix the mortar in accordance with
Practice C 305.
7.5 Molding of Test Specimens—Mold the test specimens in
accordance with Test Method C 227.
8. Storage and Measurement of Test Specimens
8.1 Initial Storage—After the mold has been filled, place it
immediately in the moist closet or moist room. Specimens shall
remain in the molds in the moist closet or moist room for 24 6
2 h.
8.2 Subsequent Storage and Measurement:
8.2.1 At 24 6 2 h after molding, remove the specimens
from the molds and place them immediately on end in the
container. Introduce into the container enough distilled water,
not exceeding 315 mL, at a temperature of 23.0 6 1.7°C, to
cover the specimens by at least 13 mm, and place the cover on
the container. Place the container in storage at 23.0 6 1.7°C for
24 6 2 h, then remove the specimens from the container,
taking care that no more water is lost from the container than
is necessary, and take a comparator reading of the specimens.
When the reading is made, the specimen, comparator, and
reference bar shall be at a temperature of 23.06 1.7°C. Take
this reading as the base or starting reading.
8.2.2 Return the specimens to the same container and water
in which they were placed previously, adding more distilled
water, if necessary, to cover the specimens. Seal the cover to
the container, return the container to the same storage condi-
tions as before, and allow it to remain in storage until the
specimens are 28 days old. At this age take a comparator
 C 342
reading in accordance with the procedure given above for
obtaining the base or starting reading. Immediately thereafter,
return the specimens to the container, seal it again, and place it
in storage at 55.0 6 1.7°C for 7 days. After this period of time,
reduce the temperature to 23.0 6 1.7°C and store the container
at this temperature for 24 6 2 h. Then take a comparator
reading of each specimen in accordance with the procedure
described above, but do not return the specimens to the
container.
8.2.3 Pending later use in the test, set the containers and
water aside and mark the containers in such a way that the
specimens removed from each can be returned later. Place the
specimens in a drying oven maintained at 55.0 6 1.7°C for a
period of 7 days. After this, cool the specimens in a desiccator
to 23.0 6 1.7°C for 24 6 2 h, and take a comparator reading.
Then return the specimens to the container and water in which
they were stored earlier and store the container at 23.0 6
10.1.2 Examination:
10.1.2.1 Items to be noted in the examination include: (1)
Presence, location, and type of pattern of cracking; (2) Appear-
ance of surfaces, surface mottling; and (3) Surficial deposits or
exudations, their nature, thickness, and continuity.
10.1.2.2 When it is believed that additional features of
noteworthy importance are likely to be revealed thereby, a
further examination of the interior of the specimen may be
made, preferably by a petrographer in accordance with the
applicable provisions of Practice C 856. In such cases, the
presence of gel-filled pores and fissures, evidence of reaction
with aggregate particles of specific types and the nature of such
evidence, and the properties of the reaction products are among
the items to be noted.
11. Report

y
11.1 The report shall include the following:
1.7°C. During this storage time take a comparator reading of
11.1.1 Type and source of aggregate,
each specimen in accordance with the procedure described

op
above, at the following intervals: 11.1.2 Type and source of portland cement,
8.2.3.1 Twenty-four hours after return to the container 11.1.3 Chemical analysis of the cement including alkali
following drying. content as percent potassium oxide (K2O), sodium oxide
8.2.3.2 Seven days after return to the container following (Na2O), and calculated Na2O equivalent,
drying, 11.1.4 Grading of the aggregate if not that given in Table 1,
8.2.3.3 Twenty-eight days after return to the container
following drying, and
8.2.3.4 At 28-day intervals until the specimens are 52 weeks
of age.
lc 11.1.5 Type, source, proportions, and chemical analysis,
including K2O and Na2O, of any pozzolans or blast-furnace
slags employed in the tests,
11.1.6 Average length change in percentage at each reading
ia
of the specimens,
9. Calculation 11.1.7 Any relevant information concerning preparation of
9.1 Calculate the difference in comparator reading of the the aggregates,
specimens after the initial 24-h storage in water and the 11.1.8 Any significant features revealed by examination of
fic

comparator reading determined by any subsequent measure- the specimens during and after test, and
ment to the nearest 0.001 % of the effective gage length, and 11.1.9 Amount of mixing water, expressed as percent of
record as the expansion of the specimen during that period. cement by mass.
Indicate a contraction (negative expansion) by prefixing a
of

minus sign to the percentage expansion reported. Report the 12. Precision and Bias
average of the expansions of the three specimens of a given
12.1 Precision—Studies of the precision of this test method
cement-aggregate combination to the nearest 0.01 % as the
yielded results that indicated that when this test is properly
expansion for the combination at a given period.
un

conducted all specimens will have values for expansion within

10. Examination at End of Test
10.1 After the final length-change measurements have been
made, test each specimen for warping and examine it.
10.1.1 Warping—Determine the warping, if any, that each
specimen has manifested during the test period by placing the
specimen on a plane surface and measuring the maximum
separation between the specimen and the surface. Place the
specimen so that its ends curve down to the reference surface
and make the measurement to the nearest 0.25 mm.
0.003 % of the average, except that if the average exceeds
0.020 %, the values of all specimens should be within 15 % of
the average.
12.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material,
no statement on bias is being made.
13. Keywords
13.1 concrete; Conrow test; expansion; mortar; volume
change

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

3 Page 92 of 180
 C 342

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

4 Page 93 of 180
 Designation: C535 − 12

Standard Test Method for

Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C535; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 3. Terminology
1.1 This test method covers testing sizes of coarse aggregate 3.1 For definitions of terms used in this test method, refer to

y
larger than 19 mm (3⁄4 in.) for resistance to degradation using Terminology C125.
the Los Angeles testing machine (Note 1).
4. Summary of Test Method

op
NOTE 1—A procedure for testing coarse aggregate smaller than 37.5
mm (11⁄2 in.) is covered in Test Method C131. 4.1 This test is a measure of degradation of mineral aggre-
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the gates of standard gradings resulting from a combination of
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the actions including abrasion or attrition, impact, and grinding in
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- a rotating steel drum containing 12 steel spheres. As the drum
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The inch-pound values given in parentheses are for
lc rotates, a shelf plate picks up the sample and the steel spheres,
carrying them around until they are dropped to the opposite
side of the drum, creating an impact-crushing effect. The
contents then roll within the drum with an abrading and
information only. grinding action until the shelf plate picks up the sample and the
ia
steel spheres, and the cycle is repeated. After the prescribed
2. Referenced Documents number of revolutions, the contents are removed from the drum
2.1 ASTM Standards:2 and the aggregate portion is sieved to measure the degradation
fic

C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag- as percent loss.

gregates
C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small- 5. Significance and Use
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los 5.1 The test has been widely used as an indicator of the
of

Angeles Machine relative quality or competence of various sources of aggregate

C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse having similar mineral compositions. The results do not
Aggregates automatically permit valid comparisons to be made between
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements sources distinctly different in origin, composition, or structure.
un

for Test Methods for Construction Materials
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing
Size
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 2012. Published January 2013. Originally
approved in 1964. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as C535 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/C0535-12.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Assign specification limits with extreme care in consideration
of available aggregate types and their performance history in
specific end uses.
6. Apparatus
6.1 The Los Angeles Machine shall conform to the require-
ments of Test Method C131.
6.1.1 The operation and maintenance of the machine shall
be as prescribed in Test Method C131.
6.2 Sieves, conforming to Specification E11.
6.3 Balance—A balance or scale accurate within 0.1 % of
test load over the range required for this test
6.4 Charge—The charge (Note 2) shall consist of 12 steel
spheres averaging approximately 47 mm (127⁄32 in.) in

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 94 of 180
1
 C535 − 12
diameter, each having a mass between 390 and 445 g, and
having a total mass of 5000 6 25 g.
NOTE 2—Steel ball bearings 46.0 mm (113⁄16 in.) and 47.6 mm (17⁄8 in.)
in diameter, having a mass approximately 400 and 440 g each,
respectively, are readily available. Steel spheres 46.8 mm (127⁄32 in.) in
diameter having a mass approximately 420 g may also be obtainable. The
charge may consist of a mixture of these sizes conforming to the total
mass tolerance of 6.4.
10. Calculation
10.1 Calculate the loss (the difference between the original
mass and the final mass of the test sample) as a percentage of
the original mass of the test sample (Note 4).
NOTE 4—The percent loss determined by this method has no known
consistent relationship to the percent loss for the same material when
tested by Test Method C131.

7. Sampling 11. Report

7.1 Obtain the field sample in accordance with Practice D75 11.1 Report the following information:
and reduce to an adequate sample size in accordance with
Practice C702. 11.2 Identification of the aggregate as to source, type, and
nominal size, and
8. Test Sample Preparation 11.3 Grading designation from Table 1 used for the test, and
8.1 Wash the reduced sample and oven dry at 110 6 5°C 11.4 Loss by abrasion and impact of the sample expressed to
(230 6 9°F) to substantially constant mass, separate into

y
the nearest 1 % by mass.
individual size fractions, and recombine to the grading of Table
1 most nearly corresponding to the range of sizes in the
12. Precision and Bias

aggregate as furnished for the work. Record the mass of the
sample prior to test to the nearest 1 g.
9. Procedure
9.1 Place the test sample and charge in the Los Angeles
testing machine and rotate the machine at 30 to 33 r/min for
1000 revolutions (Note 3). After the prescribed number of
revolutions, discharge the material from the machine and make
a preliminary separation of the sample on a sieve coarser than
lc
ia
the 1.70-mm (No. 12) sieve. Sieve the finer portion on a
1.70-mm sieve in a manner conforming to Test Method C136.
Wash the material coarser than the 1.70-mm sieve and oven dry
fic
op
12.1 Precision
12.1.1 Single Operator Precision—The single-operator co-
efficient of variation has been found to be 2.7 %.3 Therefore,
results of two properly conducted tests by the same operator on
the same material are not expected to differ by more than 7.6
% of their average.3
12.1.2 Multilaboratory Precision—The multilaboratory co-
efficient of variation has been found to be 4.2 %.3 Therefore,
results of two different laboratories on identical samples of the
same material are not expected to differ from each other by
more than 11.8 % of their average.3

at 110 6 5°C (230 6 9°F) to substantially constant mass, and
determine the mass to the nearest 1 g .
9.1.1 If the aggregate is essentially free of adherent coatings
and dust, the requirement for washing after the test is optional.
However, in the case of referee testing, the washing procedure
of
NOTE 5—These precision values were obtained in an interlaboratory
study that included 10 laboratories and one type of aggregate (Limestone)
that had an average mass loss 28.5 %. Each laboratory was given an
aggregate sample conforming to grading 1 and another sample conforming
to grading 2. The results for the two gradings were averaged. The details
are given in Research Report RR:C09-1042.4

shall be performed. Elimination of washing after test will 12.2 Bias

seldom reduce the measured loss by more than about 0.2 % of
12.2.1 Because there is no accepted reference material
the original sample mass.
suitable for determining the bias in this test method, no
un

NOTE 3—Valuable information concerning the uniformity of the sample statement on bias is made.
under test may be obtained by determining the loss after 200 revolutions.
This loss should be determined by dry sieving the material on the
1.70-mm (No. 12) sieve without washing. The ratio of the loss after 200
revolutions to the loss after 1000 revolutions should not greatly exceed 3
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s%) and (d2s%) limits as
0.20 for material of uniform hardness. When this determination is made, described in Practice C670.
take care to avoid losing any part of the sample; return the entire sample, 4
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
including the dust of fracture, to the testing machine for the final 800 be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:C09-1042. Contact ASTM Customer
revolutions required to complete the test. Service at service@astm.org.

TABLE 1 Gradings of Test Samples

Sieve Size, mm (in.) (Square Openings) Mass of Indicated Sizes, g
Grading
Passing Retained on
1 2 3
75 (3) 63 (21⁄2) 2 500 ± 50 ... ...
63 (21⁄2) 50 (2) 2 500 ± 50 ... ...
50 (2) 37.5 (11⁄2) 5 000 ± 50 5 000 ± 50 ...
37.5 (11⁄2) 25.0 (1) ... 5 000 ± 25 5 000 ± 25
25.0 (1) 19.0 (3⁄4) ... ... 5 000 ± 25
Total 10 000 ± 100 10 000 ± 75 10 000 ± 50

Page 95 of 180
2
 C535 − 12
13. Keywords
13.1 abrasion; aggregate (coarse; large size); degradation;
impact; Los Angeles machine

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. MAINTENANCE OF SHELF

X1.1 The shelf of the Los Angeles machine is subject to
severe surface wear and impact. With use, the working surface
of the shelf is peened by the balls and tends to develop a ridge
of metal parallel to and about 32 mm (11⁄4 in.) from the junction
of the shelf and the inner surface of the cylinder. If the shelf is
radial position with respect to the cylinder. If either condition
is found, the shelf should be repaired or replaced before further
tests are made. The influence on the test result of the ridge
developed by peening of the working face of the shelf is not
known. However, for uniform test conditions, it is recom-

y
made from a section of rolled angle, not only may this ridge mended that the ridge be ground off if its height exceeds 0.1 in.
develop but the shelf itself may be bent longitudinally or (2 mm).

op
transversely from its proper position.
X1.2 The shelf should be inspected periodically to deter-
mine that it is not bent either lengthwise or from its normal

lc
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
ia
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
C535 – 09, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved December 15, 2012)

(1) Revised Section 12 Precision and Bias.

fic

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
of

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
un

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

Page 96 of 180
3
 Designation: C566 − 13

Standard Test Method for

Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C566; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope for Test Methods for Construction Materials

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the per- D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
centage of evaporable moisture in a sample of aggregate by E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
drying both surface moisture and moisture in the pores of the Sieves

y
aggregate. Some aggregate may contain water that is chemi- 2.2 Other Document:
cally combined with the minerals in the aggregate. Such water National Research Council Report SHRP-P-6193

op
is not evaporable and is not included in the percentage
determined by this test method. 3. Terminology
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the 3.1 Definitions:
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this 3.1.1 For definitions of terms used in this test method, refer
standard. to Terminology C125.

NOTE 1—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in

Specification E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for
information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size.
lc 4. Significance and Use
4.1 This test method is sufficiently accurate for usual
purposes, such as adjusting batch quantities of ingredients for
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
ia
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the concrete. It will generally measure the moisture in the test
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- sample more reliably than the sample can be made to represent
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- the aggregate supply. In cases where the aggregate itself is
altered by heat, or where more refined measurement is
fic

bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. For specific

precautionary statements, see 5.3.1, 7.2.1, and 7.3.1. required, the test should be conducted using a ventilated,
controlled temperature oven.
2. Referenced Documents 4.2 Large particles of coarse aggregate, especially those
2 larger than 50 mm, will require greater time for the moisture to
of

2.1 ASTM Standards:

C29/C29M Test Method for Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) travel from the interior of the particle to the surface. The user
and Voids in Aggregate of this test method should determine by trial if rapid drying
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag- methods provide sufficient accuracy for the intended use when
un

gregates drying large size particles.

C127 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
C128 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.20 on Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2013. Published February 2013. Originally
approved in 1965. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as C566 – 97 (2004).
DOI: 10.1520/C0566-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Balance—A balance or scale accurate, readable, and
sensitive to within 0.1 % of the test load at any point within the
range of use. Within any interval equal to 10 % of the capacity
of the balance or scale used to determine mass, the load
indication shall be accurate within 0.1 % of the difference in
masses.
5.2 Source of Heat—A ventilated oven capable of maintain-
ing the temperature surrounding the sample at 110 6 5°C.
Where close control of the temperature is not required (see
3
Available from the National Research Council, 2101 Constitution Ave., N.W.,
Washington, DC 20418.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 97 of 180
1
 C566 − 13
4.1), other suitable sources of heat may be used, such as an
electric or gas hot plate, electric heat lamps, or a ventilated
microwave oven.
5.3 Sample Container—A container not affected by the heat,
of sufficient volume to contain the sample without danger of
spilling, and of such shape that the depth of sample will not
exceed one fifth of the least lateral dimension.
5.3.1 Precaution—When a microwave oven is used, the
container shall be nonmetallic.
NOTE 2—Except for testing large samples, an ordinary frying pan is
suitable for use with a hot plate, or any shallow flat-bottomed metal pan
is suitable with heat lamps or oven. Note the precaution in 5.3.1.
5.4 Stirrer—A metal spoon or spatula of convenient size.
6. Sampling
6.1 Sample in accordance with Practice D75, except for the
7.3 When a hot plate is used, drying can be expedited by the
following procedure. Add sufficient anhydrous denatured alco-
hol to cover the moist sample. Stir and allow suspended
material to settle. Decant as much of the alcohol as possible
without losing any of the sample. Ignite the remaining alcohol
and allow it to burn off during drying over the hot plate.
7.3.1 Warning—Exercise care to control the ignition op-
eration to prevent injury or damage from the burning alcohol.
7.4 The sample is thoroughly dry when further heating
causes, or would cause, less than 0.1 % additional loss in mass.
7.5 Determine the mass of the dried sample to the nearest
0.1 % after it has cooled sufficiently not to damage the balance.
8. Calculation
8.1 Calculate total evaporable moisture content as follows:

y
p 5 100 ~ W 2 D ! /D (1)
sample size.
6.2 Secure a sample of the aggregate representative of the where:

op
moisture content in the supply being tested and having a mass p = total evaporable moisture content of sample, percent,
not less than the amount listed in Table 1. Protect the sample W = mass of original sample, g, and
against loss of moisture prior to determining the mass. D = mass of dried sample, g.
8.2 Surface moisture content is equal to the difference
7. Procedure
7.1 Determine the mass of the sample to the nearest 0.1 %.
7.2 Dry the sample thoroughly in the sample container by
means of the selected source of heat, exercising care to avoid
lc between the total evaporable moisture content and the
absorption, with all values based on the mass of a dry sample.
Absorption may be determined in accordance with Test
Method C127 or Test Method C128.
ia
loss of any particles. Very rapid heating may cause some
9. Precision and Bias
particles to explode, resulting in loss of particles. Use a
controlled temperature oven when excessive heat may alter the 9.1 Precision:
character of the aggregate, or where more precise measurement 9.1.1 The within-laboratory single operator standard devia-
fic

is required. If a source of heat other than the controlled
temperature oven is used, stir the sample during drying to
accelerate the operation and avoid localized overheating. When
using a microwave oven, stirring of the sample is optional.
of
tion for moisture content of aggregates has been found to be
0.28 % (Note 3). Therefore, results of two properly conducted
tests by the same operator in the same laboratory on the same
type of aggregate sample should not differ by more than 0.79 %

7.2.1 Caution—When using a microwave oven, occasion-
ally minerals are present in aggregates that may cause the
material to overheat and explode. If this occurs it can damage
the microwave oven.
un
(Note 3) from each other.
9.1.2 The between-laboratory standard deviation for mois-
ture content of aggregates has been found to be 0.28 % (Note
3). Therefore, results of properly conducted tests from two

laboratories on the same aggregate sample should not differ by

more than 0.79 % (Note 3) from each other.
9.1.3 Test data used to derive the above precision indices
TABLE 1 Sample Size for Aggregate
were obtained from samples dried to a constant mass in a
Nominal Maximum Size Mass of Normal Weight drying oven maintained at 110 6 5°C. When other drying
of Aggregate, mm (in.)A Aggregate Sample, min, kgB
procedures are used, the precision of the results may be
4.75 (0.187) (No. 4) 0.5
9.5 (3⁄8) 1.5 significantly different than that indicated above.
12.5 (1⁄2) 2
19.0 (3⁄4) 3 NOTE 3—These numbers represent, respectively, the 1s and 2s limits as
25.0 (1) 4 described in Practice C670.
37.5 (11⁄2) 6
50 (2) 8
9.2 Bias:
63 (21⁄2) 10 9.2.1 When experimental results are compared with known
75 (3) 13 values from accurately compounded specimens, the following
90 (31⁄2) 16
100 (4) 25 has been derived.
150 (6) 50 9.2.1.1 The bias of moisture tests on one aggregate material
A
Based on sieves meeting Specification E11. has been found to have a mean of +0.06 %. The bias of
B
Determine the minimum sample mass for lightweight aggregate by multiplying individual test values from the same aggregate material has
the value listed by the dry-loose unit mass of the aggregate in kg/m3 (determined
using Test Method C29/C29M) and dividing by 1600. been found with 95 % confidence to lie between −0.07 %
and +0.20 %.

Page 98 of 180
2
 C566 − 13
9.2.1.2 The bias of moisture tests on a second aggregate
material has been found to have a mean of < +0.01 %. The bias
of individual test values from the same aggregate material has
been found with 95 % confidence to lie between −0.14 %
and +0.14 %.
9.2.1.3 The bias of moisture tests overall on both aggregate
materials has been found to have a mean of +0.03 %. The bias
of individual test values overall from both aggregate materials
has been found with 95 % confidence to lie between −0.12 %
and +0.18 %.
9.2.2 Test data used to derive the above bias statements
were obtained from samples dried to a constant mass in a
drying oven maintained at 110 6 5°C. When other drying
procedures are used, the bias of the results may be significantly
different than that indicated above.
NOTE 4—These precision and bias statements were derived from
aggregate moisture data provided by 17 laboratories participating in the
SHRP Soil Moisture Proficiency Sample Program which is fully described
in the National Research Council Report SHRP-P-619. The samples tested
which relate to these statements were well-graded mixtures of fine and
coarse aggregate with moisture contents ranging from air dry to saturated
surface dry.
10. Keywords
10.1 aggregate; drying; moisture content

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

y
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards

op
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

lc
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/
ia
fic
of
un

Page 99 of 180
3
 Designation: C586 − 11

Standard Test Method for

Potential Alkali Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks as Concrete
Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder Method)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C586; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 3. Terminology
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the expan- 3.1 For definitions of terms relating to aggregates used in

y
sion of a specimen of carbonate rock while immersed in a this test method, refer to Descriptive Nomenclature C294.
solution of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) at room temperature.
The length changes occurring during such immersion indicate 4. Summary of Test Method

op
the general level of reactivity of the rock and whether tests 4.1 Small rock cylinders are immersed in a solution of
should be made to determine the effect of aggregate prepared NaOH except when removed for determination of length
from the rock upon the volume change in concrete. change. The length change of each specimen is periodically
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as determined.
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
lc 5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is intended to give a relatively rapid
indication of the potential expansive reactivity of certain
carbonate rocks that may be used as concrete aggregates. The
ia
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
test method has been successfully used in (1) research and (2)
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
preliminary screening of aggregate sources to indicate the
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
presence of material with a potential for deleterious expansion
fic

when used in concrete.

2. Referenced Documents
5.2 The test method is intended as a research and screening
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
method rather than as the basis of a specification requirement.
C294 Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Con-
It is intended to supplement data from field service records,
crete Aggregates
of

petrographic examinations according to Guide C295, and tests

C295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
of aggregate in concrete according to Test Method C1105.
Concrete
C1105 Test Method for Length Change of Concrete Due to 5.3 Alkalies participating in the expansive reactions with
Alkali-Carbonate Rock Reaction aggregate constituents in concrete usually are derived from the
un

D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable
E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
ASTM Test Methods
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.26 on Chemical Reactions.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2011. Published November 2011. Originally
approved in 1966. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as C586 – 05. DOI:
10.1520/C0586-11.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
hydraulic cement; under certain circumstances they may be
derived from other constituents of concrete or from external
sources. Two types of alkali reactivity of aggregates are
recognized: (1) alkali-silica reaction involving certain siliceous
rocks, minerals, and artificial glasses, and (2) alkali carbonate
reaction involving dolomite in certain calcitic dolomites, do-
lomitic limestones, and dolostones. This test method is not
suitable as a means to detect alkali-silica reaction.
6. Apparatus and Reagents
6.1 1 N Sodium Hydroxide Solution—Dissolve 40 6 1 g of
reagent-grade sodium hydroxide (NaOH) in distilled water,
dilute to 1 L and store in a polyethylene bottle.
6.2 Sawing, Drilling, and Grinding Equipment, suitable for
preparing test specimens of the dimensions given in Section 8.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 100 of 180
1
 C586 − 11
This will require one or more rock saws, depending upon the
size of the original sample, a drill press equipped with a small
diamond core barrel for removing the cylindrical core, and a
lap, grinder, or suitable modified lathe for shaping the ends of
the specimens.
6.3 Storage Bottles, approximately 50 to 100-mL capacity
with caps and openings of sufficient size to facilitate removal
of specimens. The polyethylene bottle shall be selected to
ensure that the solution will not be modified by reaction with
the material composing the container, including pigments or
other additives or by transpiration of phases through the walls
lc
ia
fic
of
un
FIG. 1 A Typical Length Comparator
2
of the container. Bottles with wall thickness not less than 0.50
mm and composed of high density polyethylene meeting the
requirements of Specification D1248 for materials of Type III,
Class A, are suitable.
6.4 Length Comparator, for convenient and rapid measure-
ment of lengths of specimens, the comparator shall be of such
design as to provide, permit, or include the following charac-
teristics. One type of comparator which has been found
satisfactory is shown in Fig. 1.
6.4.1 A positive means of contact with the conical ends of
the specimen to ensure reproducible measurement of length. A
y
op
Page 101 of 180
 C586 − 11
variety of contact points have been used successfully. Care
should be exercised to ensure that when using specimens with
conical ends as described in 8.3, contact is made on the end
along a circle which is concentric about the long axis of the
specimen. If the measuring device is a barrel micrometer, it
shall have a ratchet stop to produce a constant pressure on the
specimen,
6.4.2 A high-grade barrel or dial micrometer graduated to
read in 0.001 or 0.002–mm units, and accurate within 0.002
mm in any 0.020–mm range, and within 0.004 mm in any
0.200–mm range. The measuring device should be calibrated
throughout its range to determine both periodic and cumulative
errors for proper correction of observed data.
6.4.3 A sufficient range to allow for small differences among
gage lengths of various specimens. If care is taken in the
fabrication of the specimens, a measuring device with a travel
of not less than 7.5 mm provides ample range in the instrument,
and
6.4.4 A standard or reference shall be used for checking the
measuring device at regular intervals. The bar that serves as a
reference for the length comparator shall have an over-all
length of 35 6 2 mm. The length of the bar shall be known to
an accuracy of 0.002 mm. The bar shall be fused silica or a
steel alloy having a coefficient of thermal expansion not greater
than 1.0 × 10−6°C. Each end shall be machined to the same
shape as that of the rock specimens. If a steel alloy is used, it
shall be polished (see Note 1). The reference bar shall be
placed in the instrument in the same position each time a length
lc
ia
measurement is made. The micrometer setting of the measur-
ing device shall be checked by use of the reference bar at least
at the beginning and end of the readings made within a half day
when the apparatus is kept in a room maintained at constant
fic
temperature. It shall be checked more often when kept in a
room where temperature is not constant.
NOTE 1—Steel alloys with low thermal expansion coefficient should not
be heat treated because they lose their low coefficient of thermal
of
expansion when so treated.
7. Sampling
un
7.1 Sample the rock in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Practice D75, except that the sample mass of
each discernable stratum shall be at least 1 kg, and individual
pieces shall be not less than 75 × 75 × 75 mm in size.
7.2 Sampling should be under the direction of an individual
capable of distinguishing differences in lithology, and the
sample of rock should be taken to represent only the particular
lithology under consideration bearing in mind the limitations
and significance of this method as stated in Section 5. Each
sample of rock should be in one piece of sufficient size for
preparing the necessary test specimens.
7.3 One test specimen will sufficiently represent the sample
of rock unless shale seams or other discontinuities are present
or the bedding is not discernible. In these cases, prepare and
test 3 mutually perpendicular specimens. Of these three
specimens, testing shall be continued on that one showing the
greatest calculated length change after 28 days of immersion in
alkali solution. Discard the remaining two.
3
8. Test Specimens
8.1 Test specimens shall be in the form of right circular
cylinders or square prisms with conical or plane parallel ends,
unless otherwise specified.
8.2 The specimen shall have an over-all length of 35 6 5
mm and a diameter or sides of 9 6 1 mm for cylinders and
prisms respectively. Care shall be exercised in the preparation
of the specimens to avoid alteration of the cylindrical surface
by polishing or with materials which will affect the rate of
entry of alkali solution into the rock.
8.3 The included angle of the conical ends shall be approxi-
mately 120°.
8.4 Fabricate specimens having flat–end faces in such a
manner as to ensure that the faces are parallel to each other and
perpendicular to the major axis of the specimen (see Note 2).
y
NOTE 2—End faces parallel to each other and perpendicular to the
major axis of the specimen can be made by turning the specimen in a small
op
lathe and using tool steel to cut the ends.
9. Procedure
9.1 Place a position mark on the specimen to permit placing
the specimen in the comparator in the same position during
subsequent measurements.
9.2 Measure the length of the test specimen.
9.3 Immerse the specimen in distilled water at a room
temperature in the range of 20 to 27.5°C.
9.4 At intervals, remove the specimen, blot to remove
excess surface water and measure until the change in length
during a 24-h water immersion period does not exceed 0.02 %
as calculated in 10.1. The length when in this condition is taken
as the reference length. The reference length is usually
achieved after 1 to 4 days of immersion.
9.5 Immerse the water-saturated specimens in a bottle
containing a minimum of 35 mL of 1N NaOH solution per
specimen at room temperature and seal. Immerse no more than
two specimens in a bottle.
9.6 Measure the length of the specimens after 7, 14, 21, and
28 days of immersion in NaOH solution and at 4-week
intervals thereafter. If the tests continue beyond 1 year, make
measurements at 12-week intervals.
9.7 When measurements are made, remove the specimen
from the bottle, rinse with distilled water, blot to remove
excess surface water and determine its length in the same
position as during the initial measurement.
9.8 After measurement, immediately return the specimen to
the bottle and reseal.
9.9 Replace the solution every 6 months during the testing
period.
10. Calculation
10.1 Calculate the length change to the nearest 0.01 % of
the reference length as follows:
∆l 5 @ ~ l 1 2 l 0 ! /l 0 # 3 100 (1)
Page 102 of 180
 C586 − 11
where:
∆l = % length change at test age,
l 1 = length in mm (in.) at test age, and
l0 = reference length after equilibrium in water, as outlined
in 9.4.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following:
11.1.1 Identification number,
11.1.2 Type and source of rock,
11.1.3 Specimen shape and dimensions if other than right
circular cylinder,
11.1.4 Length change in percent to the nearest 0.01 % at
each time of measurement. Where no times of measurement are
specifically requested, data should be presented for at least the
following ages: 1, 4, 8, and 16 weeks and the age at the final
measurement.
11.1.5 Significant features revealed by examination of
specimen during and after storage in alkali solution, such as
cracking, warping, splitting, etc., and
11.1.6 Other significant information as deemed necessary,
such as petrographic and chemical analyses.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision:
same operator and which presumably represent the same
lc
12.1.1 If the results of replicate specimens measured by the
material, differ by more than 0.10 percentage point for expan-
sions less than 1.0 %, it is highly probable that the specimens
ia
represent rocks that are significantly different in chemical
composition, texture, or both.
12.1.2 The single-operator, single-comparator, single-
fic
specimen precision has been found to be 60.02 percentage
point (3S) as defined in Practice E177.
of
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
un
X1. INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS
X1.1 Since the expansion caused by reactions between
cement alkalies and carbonate aggregates is sensitive to subtle
changes in aggregate lithology, the results of measurements
should be interpreted with full recognition of the variables
which would affect the results obtained. The acceptance or
rejection of aggregate sources based solely on the results of this
test is not recommended since, in commercial production,
expansive and nonexpansive materials may occur in close
proximity and the securing of samples adequately representa-
4
12.1.3 The multi-operator, single-comparator, single-
specimen precision has been found to be 60.03 percentage
point (3S) as defined in Practice E177.
12.1.4 The multi-operator, multi-comparator, single-
specimen precision has been found to be 60.05 percentage
point (3S) as defined in Practice E177.
12.1.5 In a single laboratory, single operator study of the
range of expansion of pairs of rock cylinders from 29 samples
of rock from a single quarry (each pair of cylinders cut from a
different sample block approximately 75 × 75 × 50 mm in
size), the following data were found:
12.1.5.1 For pairs of specimens giving average expansion of
less than 0.50 %, the average standard deviation was found to
be 0.0255 %3; therefore, the difference in expansion between
pairs of cylinders cut from a single block should only exceed
0.072 %3 one time in twenty when the average expansion is
less than 0.50 %.
y
12.1.5.2 For pairs of specimens giving average expansion of
more than 0.50 %, the average standard deviation was found to
op
be 0.095 %3; therefore, the difference in expansion between
pairs of cylinders cut from a single block should only exceed
0.269 %3 one time in twenty when the average expansion is
more than 0.50 %.
12.2 Bias—The procedure in this test method for measuring
expansion has no bias because the expansion can be defined
only in terms of this test method.
13. Keywords
13.1 aggregate; alkali reactivity; carbonate rocks; concrete;
deleterious expansion
3
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and (d2s) limits as described in
Practice C670.
tive of the variability of the production of the source is a
difficult task and requires the efforts of an individual trained to
distinguish differences in lithology.
X1.2 The relationship of the test results to the behavior of
large quantities of rock from a given source will depend upon
the degree to which the petrographic and chemical properties
of the rock vary within the source.
Page 103 of 180
 C586 − 11
X1.3 Research results have indicated that the expansive
behavior of aggregate in concrete is qualitatively predicted by
the results of the rock cylinder test. Quantitative prediction of
the expansion of concrete containing reactive aggregate de-
pends upon (1) the degree of aggregate reactivity, (2) the
amount of reactive constituent, (3) the alkali content of the
cement, and (4) the environment. Appreciable expansion
should indicate the need for further testing. In the light of
current knowledge, it appears that expansions in excess of
0.10 % are indicative of chemical reaction and should warrant
additional testing preferably in concrete using Test Method
C1105. Usually expansive tendencies are evident after 28 days
of immersion in alkali, however, exceptions to this have been
noted. Deleterious expansion of concrete appears to depend
upon the magnitude and rate of aggregate expansion and the
time at which it begins; however, quantitative predictions of
concrete expansion in service solely from results of this test
method are not possible.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue, C586
– 05, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved October 1, 2011.)

y
(1) Revised 1.2 to delete comment regarding informational (3) Revised 7.3 regarding the testing of specimens of rock in

op
units. which discontinuities exist or bedding cannot be discovered.
(2) Deleted informational inch-pound units throughout.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
lc
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
ia
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
fic

address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/
of
un

Page 104 of 180

5
 Designation: C638 − 14

Standard Descriptive Nomenclature of

Constituents of Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding
Concrete1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C638; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 3. Terminology
1.1 This descriptive nomenclature is intended to give accu- 3.1 Definitions:

y
rate descriptions of some common or important naturally 3.1.1 For definitions of terms used in this standard, refer to
occurring and synthetic constituents of aggregates for Terminologies C125 and C219.
radiation-shielding concrete, that, at the same time, are not

common or important constituents of concrete aggregates in
general use. While most of the minerals and rocks discussed
below may occur in small quantities in aggregates in general
use, they are not major constituents of such aggregates.
Common constituents of aggregates in general use are de-
scribed in Descriptive Nomenclature C294. Radiation-
shielding concrete often contains such aggregates, but other
special aggregates are used in some circumstances.
lc
1.2 The synthetic aggregates included are ferrophosphorus
ia
and boron frit.
1.3 The descriptions are not adequate to permit the identi-
fication of materials, since accurate identification of natural
fic
op
4. Types of Materials
4.1 Two classes of materials are described below. The first
class consists of minerals and rocks formed from them, and
synthetic materials, that have high relative density (specific
gravity) and in addition contain substantial proportions of
atoms of high or moderately high atomic weight. They are
referred to as heavy or high-density aggregates. The second
class consists of minerals and synthetic glasses of substantial
boron content that are particularly effective in absorbing
thermal neutrons without producing highly penetrating gamma
rays. The boron-frit glasses are included because of their
frequent use.

and synthetic aggregate constituents in many cases can only be
made by a qualified geologist, mineralogist, or petrographer,
using the apparatus and procedures of those sciences.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
of
HEAVY AGGREGATES
5. Descriptions of Naturally Occurring Constituents
5.1 Members of this group have higher relative density

standard. No other units of measurement are included in this (specific gravity) than aggregates in general use. Six are iron
standard. minerals, of which five are important iron ore minerals and the
sixth is an ore of titanium. Two are barium minerals worked as
2. Referenced Documents the principal sources of barium salts. The other is
un

2.1 ASTM Standards:2 ferrophosphorus, a mixture of synthetic iron phosphides.

C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
C219 Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement
C294 Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Con-
crete Aggregates
1
This descriptive nomenclature is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee
C09 on Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee C09.41 on Hydraulic Cement Grouts.
Current edition approved June 1, 2014. Published June 2014. Originally
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as C638 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/C0638-14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
5.2 The constituents are described below first as minerals,
and then as major constituents of ores when their aspect as
major constituents of ores affects the behavior of ores as
concrete aggregates.
6. Iron Minerals and Ores
6.1 Hematite (Fe2O3)—Hematite has a hardness of 5 to 6 on
Mohs’ scale (will be scratched by hard steel), and a relative
density (specific gravity) of 5.26 when pure. The color varies
from bright red to dull red to steel gray; luster varies from
metallic to submetallic to dull; the streak is cherry red or
reddish brown; it is nonmagnetic.
6.1.1 Hematite Ores—Rocks of which hematite is the major
constituent vary from one deposit to another, and within the

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 105 of 180
1
 C638 − 14
deposit, in specific gravity, toughness, compactness, amount of
impurities, degree of weathering, and suitability for use as
concrete aggregate. Hematite appears to be the iron ore mineral
most exploited as a source of iron. The ores of the Lake
Superior region are banded sedimentary ores consisting of
layers rich in hematite, and sometimes goethite, iron silicates,
such as stilpnomelane, minnesotaite, greenalite, grunerite, and
iron carbonate, alternating with silica-rich layers of chert or
fine-grained quartz or a mixture. The Birmingham, AL ores are
oolitic with hematite replacements of oölites and fossils in a
matrix that ranges from fine-grained earthy hematite, with or
without calcite, to crystalline calcite. Hematite ores dust in
handling, with the dust ranging in color from moderate red to
dusky red to moderate reddish brown (5R 4/6 to 5R 3/4 to 10R
4/6).3
6.2 Ilmenite (FeTiO3 with minor Mg and Mn)—Ilmenite has
a hardness of 5 to 6 and relative density (specific gravity) of
4.72 6 0.04 when pure. The color is iron black with metallic
to submetallic luster; the streak is black; it is feebly magnetic.
6.2.1 Ilmenite Ores—These ores consist of crystalline ilme-
nite with either magnetite or hematite and constituents of the
associated gabbroic or anorthositic rocks. Massive ilmenite
ores can form coarsely crystalline massive tough rocks but
vary, from deposit to deposit, and within a deposit, in relative
density (specific gravity), composition, hardness, and suitabil-
ity for use as concrete aggregate. Many ilmenite ores consist of
ilmenite disseminated in rock rather than concentrated as a
major rock-forming mineral. Ilmenite concentrated from beach
lc
ia
sands is usually altered to a variable degree, and its mechanical
properties probably differ from those of unaltered ilmenite.
One of the most widely used types of heavy aggregates is
fic
ilmenite ore.
6.3 Lepidocrocite (FeO(OH))—Lepidocrocite has a hard-
ness of 5 and relative density (specific gravity) of 4.09 when
pure. The color varies from ruby red to reddish brown and the
streak is dull orange. Lepidocrocite and goethite occur
of
together, and lepidocrocite may be a constituent of goethite and
limonite ores.
6.4 Goethite (HFeO2)—Goethite has the same chemical
un
composition as lepidocrocite but crystallizes differently. The
hardness is 5 to 51⁄2 and the relative density (specific gravity)
is 4.28 6 0.01 when pure and 3.3 to 4.3 in massive goethite.
The color varies with the form, from crystals that are blackish
brown with imperfect adamantine-metallic luster, to dull or
silky luster in fibrous varieties; massive goethite is yellowish
brown to reddish brown; clayey material is brownish yellow to
ocher yellow. The streak is brownish yellow to ocher yellow.
6.4.1 Goethite Ores—These ores range from hard tough
massive rocks to soft crumbling earths; these alterations
frequently occur within fractions of an inch.
6.5 Limonite—A general name for hydrous iron oxides of
unknown composition frequently cryptocrystalline goethite
with adsorbed and capillary water, and probably mixtures of
such goethite with similar lepidocrocite or hematite, or both,
3
National Research Council, Washington, DC, Rock Color Chart , 1948,
reissued 1964 by Geological Soc. Am., New York, NY.
2
with adsorbed and capillary water4. The relative density
(specific gravity) ranges from 2.7 to 4.3 and the color from
brownish black through browns to yellows. Limonite deposits
range from recognizable crystalline goethite to dull massive
material of indefinite composition, and therefore, properly
limonite. Limonites of high iron content are also called brown
iron ores. Frequently they contain sand, colloidal silica, clays,
and other impurities.
6.6 Magnetite (FeFe2O4)—Magnetite has a hardness of 51⁄2
to 61⁄2 and relative density (specific gravity) of 5.17 when pure.
It is strongly magnetic; the color is black with metallic to
semimetallic luster; the streak is black.
6.6.1 Magnetite Ores—These ores can form dense, tough,
usually coarse-grained rocks with few impurities. Magnetite
ores are associated with metamorphic or igneous or sedimen-
tary rocks, and therefore, the impurities associated with mag-
y
netite ores may include a wide variety of rock-forming and
accessory minerals. Magnetite occurs in association with
hematite and ilmenite; magnetic ores are widely distributed,
op
but many are not suitable for use as heavy aggregate because
the magnetite occurs disseminated through rock rather than as
a major rock-forming mineral. One of the most widely used
types of heavy aggregates is magnetite ore.
7. Barium Minerals
7.1 Witherite (BaCO3)—Witherite has a hardness of 3 to 31⁄2
and a relative density (specific gravity) of 4.29 when pure. The
color ranges from colorless to white to grayish or many pale
colors. Like calcite and aragonite, witherite is decomposed
with effervescence by dilute hydrochloric acid (HCl).
Witherite, the second most common barium mineral, occurs
with barite and galena. England is the chief producer of
witherite, and barium-containing heavy aggregates in Great
Britain might be expected to contain witherite as a major
constituent.
7.2 Barite (BaSO4) (also, but improperly, called barytes)—
Barite has a hardness of 3 to 31⁄2 and a relative density (specific
gravity) of 4.50 when pure. The color ranges from colorless to
white to many usually pale colors.
7.2.1 Barite is the most common barium mineral and the
major barium ore. It occurs in veins transecting many kinds of
rocks, concentrated in sedimentary rocks, and as residual
nodules in clays formed by the solution of sedimentary rocks.
In many of its occurrences it is accompanied by clay or a
calcium sulfate mineral (gypsum or anhydrite) or both. Al-
though barite from residual deposits is often weathered, it is
possible to obtain clean, well-graded barite aggregate.
8. Ferrophosphorus
8.1 Ferrophosphorus, a material produced in the production
of phosphorus, consists of a mixture of iron phosphides, and
has been used as coarse and fine aggregate in radiation-
shielding concrete. Published relative density (specific gravity)
range from 5.72 to 6.50 for coarse aggregate. The coarse
4
Palache, Charles, et al., The System of Mineralogy of J. D. Dana and E. S.
Dana, Vol 1, Elements, Sulfides, Sulfosalts, Oxides, Ed. 7, New York, NY, 1944, p
685.
Page 106 of 180
 C638 − 14
TABLE 1 Commercially Important Boron Minerals
Name Chemical Composition Solubility in Cold Water Produced
Borax Na2B4O7.10H2O 1.6g/100 mL at 10°C: 3.86 g/ United States, Argentina, Chile
100 mL at 30°C
Kernite Na2B4O7.4H2O slowly soluble United Stats, Argentina
Colemanite Ca2B6O11.5H2O 0.09 g/100 mL United States, Turkey, USSR
Ulexite NaCaB5O9.8H2O slightly decomposed with loss of United States, Turkey, USSR,
Na2O Argentina, Chile
Sassolite (boricacid) H3BO3 5.15 g/100mL Italy
Tncalconite Na2B4O7.5H2O like borax common dehydration product of
borax
Priceite Ca4B10O19.7H2O insoluble Turkey, USSR, United States
Inyoite Ca2B6O11.13H2O relatively insoluble USSR, United States
Hydroboracite CaMgB6O11.6H2 O relatively insoluble USSR
Szaibelyite (Mg, Mn)(BO2)(OH) insoluble USSR

aggregate is reported to degrade easily and has been associated found in borate deposits. The presence of one or more of these
with extreme retardation of set in concrete. Ferrophosphorus in in varying unknown amounts in a borate ore used in shielding
concrete releases flammable, and possibly toxic, gases which concrete may cause problems in making concrete with con-

y
can develop high pressures if confined5. trolled strength, setting time, volume stability, and workability,
8.2 Several iron phosphides are known, including silver aside from the problem of varying degrees of retardation as the

gray to blue gray Fe2P, with relative density (specific gravity)
of 6.50, FeP2 with relative density (specific gravity) of 5.07,
and Fe3P and FeP. Ferrophosphorus aggregates are silver gray
but develop some rusty staining on exposure.
BORON-CONTAINING MATERIALS
9. Boron Minerals
9.1 The gamma rays that result from neutron capture by the
lc
ia
lighter isotope of boron, boron-10, are much less penetrating
than those which result from neutron capture by hydrogen; and
for this reason boron and boron compounds are often used in
neutron shields. The unusually high capture capability of
fic
op
time composition, and thus the solubility, of the borate ore may
range from lot to lot or within a lot.
9.3 Borate production in the United States is virtually
limited to borax and borax derivates obtained from natural
brines at Searles Lake, CA, and brines produced by treating
borates from the Kramer deposit at Boron, CA. California
colemanite deposits, which also contain ulexite, are apparently
not regularly worked but colemanite ores have been obtained
from them for use in shielding concrete. Turkish borate ores,
which have been referred to as “borocalcite,” but probably are
ulexite or colemanite or mixtures of the two, have been used in
shielding concrete in Germany and Japan7.

boron-10 permits its use in relatively small quantities. Boron is
most frequently incorporated in the concrete as borate minerals
or synthetic boron frits. Both methods of incorporating boron
cause some retardation of time of setting of the concrete, which
of
9.4 Boron minerals that are stable and insoluble are usually
not available in large quantities for use as aggregates. The
recorded exceptions are described below.
9.4.1 Paigeite—((Fe++Mg)Fe+++BO5)—Paigeite has a hard-
ness of 5 and specific gravity ranging from 4.7 at the paigeite

can be counteracted by the use of a suitable accelerator. The

experience recorded in the United States suggests that the cost end to 3.6 at the ludwigite end of the paigeite-ludwigite series.
of synthetic frits, which is higher than the cost of borate, may It is coal black or greenish black and insoluble in water, and
be counterbalanced by uniform composition of the frits, which tough. It is a high-temperature mineral occurring with magne-
un

permits effective control of the properties of the concrete.
9.2 Minerals that are commercially important sources of
boron are principally sodium, calcium, and magnesium borate
precipitates from waters in arid volcanic regions, or alteration
products of such precipitates (Table 1)6. These hydrated
minerals include some that are easily altered by changes in
relative humidity and temperature. Some of them are soluble in
or partly decomposed by cold water. Clay, gypsum, and salt are
5
Clendenning, T. G., Kellam, B., and MacInnis, C., “Hydrogen Evolution from
Ferrophosphorous Aggregate in Portland Cement Concrete,” Journal of the Ameri-
can Concrete Institute , No 12, December 1968, Proceedings, Vol 65, pp.
1021–1028. Mather, Bryant, discussion of Davis, Harold S., “Concrete for Radiation
Shielding—In Perspective,” and closure by author in“ Concrete for Nuclear
Reactors,” ACI SP-34, Vol 1, 1972 , pp 11–13.
6
Compiled from: Smith, W. C., “Borax and Borates,” Gillson, J. L., ed.,
Industrial Rocks and Minerals, 3rd Ed., American Institute of Mining,
Metallurgical, and Petroleum Engineers, New York, NY, 1960, pp 103–118, and
Palache, C., Berman, H., and Frondel, C., Dana’s System of Mineralogy , 7th ed.,
Vol II, John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY 1951.
tite in contact metamorphic deposits. Paigeite has been used as
a heavy boron-containing aggregate in Japan.
9.4.2 Tourmaline (Na(Mg, Fe, Mn, Li, Al)3Al6[Si6O18]·
(BO3)3(OH,F)4)—Tourmaline has a hardness of 7 and specific
gravity ranging from 3.03 to 3.25; it ranges widely in color, but
common varieties are brown or black. It is characteristically a
mineral of granites, pegmatites, and pneumatolytic veins, but
persists as a detrital mineral in sediments. Concrete having
effective neutron-shielding characteristics has been described
in which the coarse aggregate was serpentine and the fine
aggregate a tourmaline sand concentrate.
10. Boron-Frit Glasses
10.1 Boron-frit glasses are clear, colorless, synthetic glasses
produced by fusion and quenching used in making ceramic
7
Henrie, J. O., “Properties of Nuclear Shielding Concrete, ” Journal of the
American Concrete Institute, Vol 31, July 1959, Proceedings , Vol 56, pp 37–46.

Page 107 of 180

3
 C638 − 14
glazes. They may be obtained in many compositions, but those 11. Keywords
most useful in shielding concrete contain calcium, relatively 11.1 aggregates; boron; concrete; iron; minerals
high amounts of silica and alumina, and low amounts of
alkalies. Increased silica and alumina decrease the solubility of
the frits and thus diminish their retarding effect in shielding
concrete. When there is a hazard from secondary radiation,
limits on allowable proportions of sodium and potassium may
be imposed.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (C638 – 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved June 1, 2014.)

y
(1) Added Section 3.

op
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards

lc
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
ia
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
fic
of
un

Page 108 of 180

4
 Designation: C641 − 09

Standard Test Method for

Iron Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C641; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* produce stains on the surface of the concrete in which the

1.1 This test method covers the testing of lightweight aggregate is incorporated.
concrete aggregates to evaluate the potential degree of staining 4. Apparatus
from iron compounds.

y
4.1 Balance—A balance or scale accurate to within 0.1 % of
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the the test load at any point within the range of use.
standard. The inch-pound values given in parentheses are

op
provided for information only. 4.2 Sieves—9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) and 600-µm (No. 30) sieves
conforming to Specification E11.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address the safety
problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the 4.3 Filter Paper—shall comply with Specification E832
user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health class E2 with a minimum diameter of 250 mm.
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.

2. Referenced Documents
lc 4.4 Cheesecloth Wrapping—Two thicknesses, reagent grade
cheesecloth, approximately 457 mm (18 in.) square is sufficient
for wrapping each sample.
4.5 Steam Bath—Any suitable apparatus that will meet the
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
ia
requirement of the test procedure. Water in the steam bath, and
C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Struc- makeup water, shall be iron-free water or distilled water.
tural Concrete
NOTE 1—An oven top glassware sterilizer made of nonferrous materials
C331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete
fic

is satisfactory.
Masonry Units
C702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing 5. Reagents
Size 5.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that
of

E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test all reagents shall conform to the specifications of the Commit-
Sieves tee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
E832 Specification for Laboratory Filter Papers where such specifications are available.3
un

3. Significance and Use 5.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references

to water shall be understood to mean distilled water or water of
3.1 This test method evaluates the potential degree of equal purity.
staining attributable to the presence of iron compounds in a
lightweight aggregate sample primarily by means of a visual 5.3 Concentration of Reagents:
classification method. Such compounds may or may not 5.3.1 Concentrated Acid and Ammonium Hydroxide—When
reagents are specified by name it shall be understood that
concentrated reagents of the following specific gravity are
1
intended:
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee Hydrochloric acid (HCl) sp gr 1.19
Ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH) sp gr 0.90
C09.21 on Lightweight Aggregates and Concrete.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2009. Published November 2009. Originally
approved in 1969. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as C 641 – 07. DOI:
3
10.1520/C0641-09. “Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications,” Am. Chemi-
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or cal Soc., Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not listed by
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM the American Chemical Society, see “Reagent Chemicals and Standards,” by Joseph
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Rosin, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., New York, NY, and the “United States
the ASTM website. Pharmacopeia.”

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 109 of 180
1
 C641 − 09
5.3.2 Diluted acid is described in terms of the number of
volumes of the concentrated reagent to be added to a given
number of volumes of water. Thus HCl (1 + 2) means 1 volume
of HCl (sp gr 1.19) added to 2 volumes of water.
6. Sampling
6.1 Sample in accordance with Practice D75.
6.2 After reducing a field sample to an appropriate size in
accordance with Practice C702, thoroughly dry the aggregate
and prepare by sieving material to pass the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.)
sieve and is retained on the 600-µm (No. 30) sieve.
7. Procedure
7.1 Select two portions each weighing 100 g from the
aggregate sample prepared for test.
7.2 Crimp the edges of two filter papers to form cup-shaped
receptacles approximately 130 mm (5 in.) in diameter and 60
mm (21⁄2 in.) in depth. Place one of the 100-g portions in each
filter cup, spreading to a uniform depth. Fold the sides of the
cup to the center and press in that position.
7.3 Wrap both portions of the prepared sample, one on top
of the other, in cheesecloth. Saturate with distilled water and
water as make-up water as required. lc
expose to steam in the steam bath for 16 h, adding distilled
7.4 Remove from the steam bath, and carefully remove the
aggregate from the filter papers. Wash both papers in water,
ia
place on a watch glass, and oven dry at a temperature of 110 6
5 °C (230 6 9 °F). The insoluble products of the decomposi-
tion of iron compounds in the aggregate will be deposited on
the filter paper as red, green, or black stains.
fic
of
un
Stain Index = 100
FIG. 1 Visual Degree of Staining
2
7.5 Rate the extent of staining on the filter papers by the
Visual Classification Method.
7.5.1 Visual Classification Method—Evaluate the extent and
intensity of the stains on the filter paper in accordance with the
photographic stain index reference standards shown in Figs.
1-5: The photographic stain index ranges from No Stain (stain
index = 0) to a Very Heavy Stain (stain index = 100).
7.6 When required by Specification C330 and Specification
C331, follow the procedure of the Chemical Analysis Method.
7.6.1 Chemical Analysis Method—The iron deposits may
be dissolved from the filter papers by careful application of
HCl from a dropping bottle and rinsing with hot distilled water
from a wash bottle. Otherwise, dissolve the iron compound on
the washed and dried filter papers by digesting in HCl (1 + 1)
and filtering out the residue of filter pulp washing thoroughly
y
with hot water. Precipitate the iron in the filtrate as ferric
hydroxide Fe(OH)3 by adding NH4OH dropwise to neutralize
the acid using methyl red indicator solution. Redissolve the
op
Fe(OH)3 precipitate using 10 cm3 of HCl (1 + 1) and determine
the iron quantitatively as Fe2O3 by standard titration proce-
dures.
NOTE 2—The iron may be determined by using other standard quanti-
tative procedures.
8. Calculation
8.1 Calculate the determined Fe2O3 to the nearest 0.01 mg
(to be reported to the nearest 0.1) as follows:
Fe2 O 3 , mg/200 g 5 E 3 V (1)
Page 110 of 180
 C641 − 09

y
op
Stain Index = 80
FIG. 2
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Stain Index = 60 Stain Index = 40

FIG. 3 FIG. 4

where: 9. Report
E = Fe2O3 equivalent of standard titration solution, mg/ 9.1 The report shall include the following:
mL, 9.1.1 Identification of the sample,
V = millilitres of standard titration solution required by the 9.1.2 Stain index, as evaluated by the Visual Classification
stains from the 200-g sample. Method, when required, and

Page 111 of 180

3
 C641 − 09
9.1.3 Iron content as milligrams of Fe2O3 per 200 g of
sample evaluated by the Chemical Analysis Method.

10. Precision and Bias

10.1 Precision—The precision of this test method has not
yet been determined, but an interlaboratory testing program is
underway. The precision statements will be included when the
data are compiled and reviewed.
10.2 Bias—Bias for this test method cannot be determined
since there is no reference standard available for comparison.

11. Keywords
11.1 iron; lightweight aggregate; staining

y
op
Stain Index = 20
FIG. 5
lc
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
ia
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this test method since the last issue,
C 641 – 07, that may impact the use of this test method. (Approved October 1, 2009)
fic

(1) Revised 4.3.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of

of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
un

and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

Page 112 of 180

4
 Designation: C 682 – 94

Standard Practice for

Evaluation of Frost Resistance of Coarse Aggregates in Air-
Entrained Concrete by Critical Dilation Procedures1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C 682; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 3. Significance and Use

1.1 This practice covers the evaluation of frost resistance of 3.1 This practice is primarily intended to provide the pro-
coarse aggregates in air-entrained concrete. It was developed spective user with a technique for estimating the frost suscep-
particularly for use with normal weight aggregates not having tibility of concrete aggregates for known or assumed field
vesicular, highly porous structure. environmental conditions. The significance of the results in

y
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded terms of potential field performance will depend upon the
as the standard. degree to which field conditions can be expected to correlate

op
with those employed in the laboratory. It is of utmost impor-
2. Referenced Documents tance, therefore, that the user of this practice assess at first the
2.1 ASTM Standards: following anticipated field exposure conditions:
C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates2 3.1.1 The condition of the aggregate as it enters the concrete
C 138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content mixture (that is, stream wet, partially saturated, or dry),
(Gravimetric) of Concrete2
C 143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Con-
crete2
C 150 Specification for Portland Cement2
lc 3.1.2 The curing procedures anticipated for the concrete,
3.1.3 The age and degree of saturation of the concrete when
first exposed to freezing,
3.1.4 The length of the season of potential exposure to
C 171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Con-
ia
freezing temperatures, the frequency of freezing and thawing
crete2 cycles, and the minimum temperature to be reached by the
C 173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed concrete, at the given location,
Concrete by the Volumetric Method2 3.1.5 The accessibility of water to the concrete during the
fic

C 192 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Speci- period of potential frost damage, and
mens in the Laboratory2 3.1.6 Effect of climatic conditions between seasons of
C 231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed freezing weather on the degree of saturation of the concrete at
Concrete by the Pressure Method2 the onset of freezing.
of

C 260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Con- 3.2 The laboratory moisture conditioning procedures speci-
crete2 fied in 5.3 and 7.4 are intended to permit simulation of a range
C 295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates of environments that aggregates and concretes might be
for Concrete2 expected to encounter under field conditions. This approach
un

C 671 Test Method for Critical Dilation of Concrete Speci- provides information by which to estimate durability when
mens Subjected to Freezing2 there is a lack of knowledge as to actual field conditions.
E 104 Practice for Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity
by Means of Aqueous Solutions3 4. Apparatus
2.2 ACI Standard: 4.1 The apparatus shall be in accordance with Test Method
211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Nor- C 671.
mal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete4
5. Coarse Aggregate Preparation
1 5.1 Sampling—Sample in accordance with the applicable
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C-9 on Concrete
and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.67on sections of Guide C 295.
Resistance of Concrete to Its Environment. 5.2 Grading—When aggregates are to be compared using
Current edition approved March 15, 1994. Published May 1994. Originally this practice, gradings of each must be within the limits set
published as C 682 – 71 T. Last previous edition C 682 – 87 (1992)e1.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
forth in Table 1 of Specification C 33. The nominal maximum
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 11.03.
4
Manual of Concrete Practice, Am. Concrete Institute, Part I, 1985.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 113 of 180

 C 682
aggregate size shall not exceed one third the minimum dimen-
sion of the test specimen to be used.
5.3 Conditioning—Whenever possible, maintain the aggre-
gates to be tested in or bring to the condition representative of
that which might be expected in the field. It should be noted,
however, that aggregate moisture states other than dry or
saturated are very difficult to maintain during preparation of
tests specimens. Reproducibility of over-all test results is likely
to be affected adversely by variability in aggregate moisture.
NOTE 1—If the aggregates are not processed in the manner described
above, the following treatment may be used to simulate a relatively severe
exposure. Air-dry the aggregate to constant weight, then vacuum saturate
by placing it under a vacuum (2 mm Hg maximum absolute pressure) for
1 h followed by the introduction of water to the sample while still under
vacuum. Following vacuum saturation, allow the aggregates to soak for 24
h before being incorporated into concrete specimens. Record a history of
moisture conditioning since the effectiveness of vacuum saturation or
resaturation will vary with aggregate type.
6. Concrete Mixture
6.1 Ingredients—The portland cement shall meet the re-
quirements of Specification C 150. Use fine aggregate, in-
tended for the project, graded in accordance with Specification
C 33. Batches for a particular test series shall use cement and
fine aggregate taken from the same lot. Use an air-entraining
admixture meeting the requirements of Specification C 260.
6.2 Proportions—Using ACI Recommended Practice 211.1,
proportion all concrete to conform to the following require-
ments:
lc
ia
6.2.1 The cement content shall be 517 6 5 lb/yd3 (307 6
2.8 kg/m3) except when tests are being made where mixture
proportions are those proposed for the work.
6.2.2 The air content used in the computation of proportions
fic
for all concrete shall be in accordance with Table 1. The
amount of air-entraining admixture used shall be such as to
give an air content as prescibed in Table 1, 6 1 %, when tested
according to Test Methods C 231 or C 173.
of
6.2.3 The water content and fine aggregate content shall be
adjusted to obtain a slump of 21⁄2 6 1⁄2 in. (63.5 6 12.7 mm)
in accordance with Test Method C 143. The workability of the
concrete mixture shall be suitable for consolidation by hand
un
rodding.
6.3 Mixing—Machine mix the concrete as prescribed in
Practice C 192. Mix the concrete for 3 min after all materials
have been introduced into the mixer, allow to rest in the mixer
for 3 min, remix for 2 min, and then discharge.
6.4 Replication—A minimum of two batches shall be made
for each test aggregate.
7. Specimen Preparation and Conditioning
7.1 Number of Specimens—At least 12 test specimens
should be made from each batch. If 7.4 is determined not to be
TABLE 1 Recommended Total Air Content for Air-Entrained
Concrete Under Severe Exposure Conditions
Total Air Content, %
Nominal Maximum Size of Aggregate, in. (mm)
3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄2 (12.5) 3⁄4 (19.0) 1 (25.0) 11⁄2 (37.5) 2 (50.0) 3 (75.0)
7.5 7.0 6.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5
2 Page 114 of 180
practical, the minimum number of specimens may be reduced
to six per batch and 7.4.1 is then followed.
7.2 Specimen Preparation—The type and size of the test
specimen and the method for molding shall be in accordance
with the Test Specimen Section of Test Method C 671, unless
otherwise specified.
7.3 Curing—Immediately after molding the specimens and
setting the gage studs, snugly cover the cylinders and seal with
a material conforming to the requirements of Specification
C 171 to minimize evaporation. After 1 day in the molds at a
temperature between 65 and 75°F (18 and 24°C), remove the
specimens from the molds and store in saturated limewater at
73 6 3°F (23 6 1.7°C) for 13 days.
7.4 Conditioning—Whenever possible, all the specimens
from each batch should be brought to the moisture condition
representative of that which might be anticipated in the field at
the time of initial freezing. However, as noted previously,
y
moisture states other than dry or saturated are difficult to
achieve and maintain, and so the reproducibility of test results
op
(for specimens at other moisture states) may be unacceptable.
If it is not practical or possible to condition the concrete test
specimens in the manner described above, employ the follow-
ing procedure, which provides conditions that bracket the
moderate to very severe range of conditioning.
7.4.1 After the 14 days of curing, condition a minimum of
three specimens from each batch for 3 weeks in 35°F (1.7°C)
water prior to testing. Condition a minimum of three other
specimens from each batch for 1 week at 75 % relative
humidity and 73 6 3°F (23 6 1.7°C) followed by 2 weeks in
35°F water. The relative humidity environment may be pro-
vided either by a humidity-controlled room or a saturated
solution of sodium acetate (see Practice E 104).
NOTE 2—If specimens larger than 3 by 6 in. (75 by 150 mm) are used,
they may require longer conditioning periods to reach similar average
moisture contents.
8. Method of Test
8.1 Following completion of the specimen conditioning,
immediately commence testing in accordance with the Proce-
dure Section of Test Method C 671.
9. Interpretation of Results
9.1 Published reports and field experience (1-5)5 have
established that this practice can discriminate among aggre-
gates of varying frost susceptibility. However, many years of
experience with various freeze-thaw tests for concrete (6-
15)and extensive study of this particular practice support the
need for using extreme care in performing such tests and in
interpreting the results. Items of particular concern include the
following:
9.1.1 Minor changes in exposure conditions as simulated in
the laboratory can obscure real differences in the performance
of aggregates, particularly of those in the range of intermediate
quality. Therefore, choice of exposure, and capability for
repeating it in successive test programs are both extremely
important.
5
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this practice.
 C 682
9.1.2 Major research on this approach to aggregate evalua-
tion has been performed using relatively homogeneous aggre-
gate fractions (2, 3). A petrographer sorted the test aggregate
into relatively homogeneous mineralogical fractions and these
fractions into relatively homogeneous subclasses with respect
to weathering, impurities, etc. (See Guide C 295.) This ap-
proach has several features to recommend it:
9.1.2.1 The probability of detecting differences in behavior
is enhanced.
9.1.2.2 Many aggregate sources are frost susceptible in the
as produced state because of the occurrence of minor but
highly unsound fractions. Since beneficiation is a common
solution in such cases, it is necessary that the several fractions
be evaluated separately so that efficient beneficiation can be
developed.
9.1.2.3 It may be hoped that data will be developed through
studies of the significance of deleterious fractions that will
facilitate intelligent decision making with regard to such
matters as blending and selective usage.
9.1.3 There are alternative approaches in the framework of
this approach for aggregates that are relatively homogeneous
and for the many cases in which information on the frost
susceptibility of the as produced material is needed. First,
nothing in the approach described in 9.1.2 precludes a decision
that the aggregate is adequately characterized as one fraction
and should be tested as such. Moreover, if several fractions are
lc
ia
fic
of
un
FIG. 1 Procedural Approaches to Frost-Susceptibility Tests (see Larson and Cady 3)
3 Page 115 of 180
identified, a decision can still be made to test the aggregate in
bulk form.
9.1.4 It is unlikely that any single test for aggregate evalu-
ation will display all the desired attributes of simplicity, low
cost reliability, reproducibility, speed, etc., for all aggregate
types. A systematic approach taking advantage of the services
of a trained petrographer and a battery of tests seems more
likely to provide the needed information. Fig. 1 indicates one
such systematic approach in which this practice (identified as
the slow-cooling method) serves a major role.
9.1.4.1 The left branch of Fig. 1 covers cases where general
acceptance of a source as produced is to be determined. If field
performance information is available on aggregates with simi-
lar characteristics, a relative rating by one or more of the
methods listed may be sufficient. The slow-cooling method
may be used for cases where the determination of a period of
y
frost resistance is desirable and no field experience is available
for similar aggregates.
op
9.1.4.2 The right branch of the chart may be appropriate in
cases where economical aggregate sources in the intermediate
field performance range must be evaluated. Here the sample is
separated into relatively homogeneous fractions (see 9.1.2) and
the performance of each rated by single particle tests or by the
test described in this practice when the determination of a
period of frost resistance is desired. Decisions regarding
 C 682
beneficiation can be based on results of testing along this
branch (3).
10. Report
10.1 Because this practice permits variations in test condi-
tions that greatly affect the performance of aggregates, the
report should include the following information:
10.1.1 Identification and description of aggregate sample
including location of source, special processing or separation
employed in its preparation, and when applicable, petrographic
description of the mineralogic subgroup selected for testing,
10.1.2 Saturation condition of the aggregate when incorpo-
rated into the concrete and a history of its prior moisture
conditioning,
10.1.3 Concrete mixture proportions,
10.1.4 Measured characteristics of fresh concrete, including
air content, slump, and unit weight,
10.1.5 Curing procedure, and
10.1.6 Conditioning procedure.
10.2 Determine the test period of frost immunity for each
specimen and the average period of frost immunity for each
group of similar specimens, together with the 95 % confidence
interval of the mean in accordance with Test Method C 671.
11. Keywords
11.1 aggregate; frost resistance; coarse aggregate; frost
resistance; critical dilation procedures; dilation; freezing and
thawing; resistance; frost

y
REFERENCES

(1) Test for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Aggregates in Air-Entrained (9) Powers, T. C., “Basic Considerations Pertaining to Freezing and

op
Concrete (Powers Procedure), California Test Method 528-A, Califor- Thawing Tests,” Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 55, 1955, pp. 1132–1155.
nia Division of Highways, Materials and Research Department, May (10) Thomas, W. N., “Experiments on the Freezing of Certain Building
1961. Materials,” Building Research Technical Paper No. 17, Dept. of
(2) Larson, T. D., et al, “Identification of Concrete Aggregates Exhibiting Scientific and Industrial Research, 1938.
Frost Susceptibility,” National Cooperative Highway Research Pro- (11) Valore, R. C., “Volume Changes Observed in Small Concrete
gram Report 15, Highway Research Board, 1965.
(3) Larson, T. D., and Cady, P. D., “Identification of Aggregates Exhibiting
Frost Susceptibility,” National Cooperative Highway Research Pro-
gram Report 66, Highway Research Board, 1969.
(4) Tremper, B., and Spellman, D. L., “Test for Freeze-Thaw Durability of
lc Cylinders During Freezing and Thawing Using a Mercury Displace-
ment Dilatometer,” Journal of Research, National Bureau of Stan-
dards, Vol 43, 1949, pp. 1–27.
(12) Verbeck, G., and Klieger, P., “Calorimeter-Strain Apparatus for Study
of Freezing and Thawing Concrete,” Highway Research Board
ia
Concrete Aggregates,” Highway Research Board Bulletin 305, 1961.
Bulletin 176, 1958, pp. 9–22.
(5) Wills, M. H. Jr., “An Investigation of the Behavior of Two Frost
(13) Walker, R. D., “Identification of Aggregates Causing Poor Concrete
Susceptible Concretes When Exposed to the Slow Freeze-Thaw Test
Performance When Frozen,” National Cooperative Highway Re-
Method,” Unpublished Master’s Thesis, University of Maryland,
search Program Report 12, Highway Research Board, 1965, 47 pp.
fic

1962.
(6) Bloem, D. L., “Factors Affecting the Freezing and Thawing Resistance
of Concrete Made with Chert Gravel,” Highway Research Board
Record No. 18, 1963, pp. 48–60.
(7) Larson, T. D., et al, “A Critical Review of Literature Treating Methods
of
(14) Wills, M. H., et al, “Volume Change as a Measure of Freezing-and-
Thawing Resistance of Concrete Made with Different Aggregates,”
Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 63, 1963, pp. 946–965.
(15) Verbeck, G. and Landgren, R., “Influence of Physical Characteristics
of Aggregates on Frost Resistance of Concrete,” Proceedings,

of Identifying Aggregates Subject to Destructive Volume Change

When Frozen in Concrete and a Proposed Program of Research,
Special Report 80, Highway Research Board, 1964, 81 pp.
(8) Meininger, R. C., Fox, J. F., Jr., and Lepper, H. A., Jr., “A Single
Particle Freezing Resistance Test for Concrete Aggregate,” Proceed-
un
ASTM, ASTEA, Vol 60, 1960, pp. 1063–1079.
(16) Walker, R. D., Pence, H. J., Hazlett, W. H., and Wei Jen Ong,
“One-Cycle Slow-Freeze Test for Evaluating Aggregate Performance
in Frozen Concrete,” National Cooperative Highway Research Pro-

ings, ASTM, Vol 65, 1965, pp. 801–808. gram Report 65, Highway Research Board, 1969.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

4 Page 116 of 180

 Designation: C702/C702M − 11
Standard Practice for
Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C702/C702M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This practice covers three methods for the reduction of
large samples of aggregate to the appropriate size for testing
employing techniques that are intended to minimize variations
in measured characteristics between the test samples so se-
lected and the large sample.
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard.
NOTE 1—Sieve size is identified by its standard designation in Speci-
lc
fication E11. The alternative designation given in parentheses is for
ia
information only and does not represent a different standard sieve size.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
fic
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
of
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gregates
un
C128 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on Concrete
and Concrete Aggregatesand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.20 on
Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2011. Published September 2011. Originally
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as C702–98(2003). DOI:
10.1520/C0702_C0702M-11.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1
American Association State
Highway and Transportation
Officials Standard: T 248
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The terms used in this practice are defined
y
in Terminology C125.
4. Significance and Use
op
4.1 Specifications for aggregates require sampling portions
of the material for testing. Other factors being equal, larger
samples will tend to be more representative of the total supply.
This practice provides procedures for reducing the large
sample obtained in the field or produced in the laboratory to a
convenient size for conducting a number of tests to describe the
material and measure its quality in a manner that the smaller
test sample portion is most likely to be a representation of the
larger sample, and thus of the total supply. Failure to carefully
follow the procedures in this practice could result in providing
a nonrepresentative sample to be used in subsequent testing.
The individual test methods provide for minimum amount of
material to be tested.
4.2 Under certain circumstances, reduction in size of the
large sample prior to testing is not recommended. Substantial
differences between the selected test samples sometimes can-
not be avoided, as for example, in the case of an aggregate
having relatively few large size particles in the sample. The
laws of chance dictate that these few particles may be
unequally distributed among the reduced size test samples.
Similarly, if the test sample is being examined for certain
contaminants occurring as a few discrete fragments in only
small percentages, caution should be used in interpreting
results from the reduced size test sample. Chance inclusion or
exclusion of only one or two particles in the selected test
sample may importantly influence interpretation of the charac-
teristics of the original sample. In these cases, the entire
original sample should be tested.
5. Selection of Method
5.1 Fine Aggregate—Reduce the size of samples of fine
aggregate that are drier than the saturated-surface-dry condi-
tion (Note 2) using a mechanical splitter according to Method
A. Reduce the size of samples having free moisture on the
particle surfaces by quartering according to Method B, or by
treating as a miniature stockpile as described in Method C.
Page 117 of 180
 C702/C702M − 11
5.1.1 If the use of Method B or Method C is desired, and the
sample does not have free moisture on the particle surfaces,
moisten the sample to obtain free moisture on the particle
surfaces, mix thoroughly, and then reduce the sample size.
5.1.2 If use of Method A is desired and the sample has free
moisture on the particle surfaces, dry the entire sample to at
least the saturated-surface-dry condition, using temperatures
that do not exceed those specified for any of the tests
contemplated, and then reduce the sample size. Alternatively, if
the moist sample is very large, make a preliminary split using
a mechanical splitter having chute openings of 38 mm [11⁄2 in.]
or more in width to reduce the sample to not less than 5 kg [10
lb]. Dry the portion so obtained, and reduce it to test sample
size using Method A.
NOTE 2—The method of determining the saturated-surface-dry condi-
tion is described in Test Method C128. As a quick approximation, if the
fine aggregate will retain its shape when molded in the hand, it may be
considered to be wetter than saturated-surface-dry.
5.2 Coarse Aggregates and Mixtures of Coarse and Fine
Aggregates—Reduce the sample using a mechanical splitter in
accordance with Method A (preferred method) or by quartering
in accordance with Method B. The miniature stockpile Method
C is not permitted for coarse aggregates or mixtures of coarse
and fine aggregates.
6. Sampling
lc
ia
6.1 Obtain samples of aggregate in the field in accordance
with Practice D75, or as required by individual test methods.
When tests for sieve analysis only are contemplated, the size of
the field sample listed in Practice D75 is usually adequate.
fic
When additional tests are to be conducted, the user shall be
satisfied that the initial size of the field sample is adequate to
accomplish all intended tests. Use similar procedures for
aggregate produced in the laboratory.
of
un
FIG. 1 Large Sample Splitter for Coarse Aggregate
2
METHOD A—MECHANICAL SPLITTER
7. Apparatus
7.1 Sample Splitter—Sample splitters shall have an even
number of equal width chutes, but not less than a total of eight
for coarse aggregate, or twelve for fine aggregate, which
discharge alternately to each side of the splitter. For coarse
aggregate and mixed aggregate, the minimum width of the
individual chutes shall be approximately 50 % larger than the
largest particles in the sample to be split (Note 3). For dry fine
aggregate in which the entire sample will pass the 9.5-mm
(3⁄8-in.) seive, a splitter having chutes 12.5 to 20 mm
[1⁄2 to 3⁄4 in.] wide shall be used. The splitter shall be equipped
with two receptacles to hold the two halves of the sample
following splitting. It shall also be equipped with a hopper or
straightedged pan which has a width equal to or slightly less
y
than the over-all width of the assembly of chutes, by which the
sample may be fed at a controlled rate to the chutes. The
splitter and accessory equipment shall be so designed that the
op
sample will flow smoothly without restriction or loss of
material (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2).
NOTE 3—Mechanical splitters are commonly available in sizes adequate
for coarse aggregate having the largest particle not over 37.5 mm [11⁄2 in.].
8. Procedure
8.1 Place the original sample in the hopper or pan and
uniformly distribute it from edge to edge, so that when it is
introduced into the chutes, approximately equal amounts will
flow through each chute. Introduce the sample at a rate so as to
allow it to flow freely through the chutes and into the
receptacles below. Reintroduce the portion of the sample in one
of the receptacles into the splitter as many times as necessary
to reduce the sample to the size specified for the intended test.
Reserve the portion of material collected in the other receptacle
for reduction in size for other tests, when required.
Page 118 of 180
 C702/C702M − 11

y
op
NOTE 1— Small Sample Splitters for Fine Aggregate. May be constructed as either closed or open type. Closed type is preferred.
FIG. 2 Sample Splitters (Riffles)

9. Apparatus
METHOD B—QUARTERING

9.1 Apparatus shall consist of a straight-edged scoop,

lc thoroughly by turning the entire sample over three times. With
the last turning, shovel the entire sample into a conical pile by
depositing each shovelful on top of the preceding one. Care-
fully flatten the conical pile to a uniform thickness and
ia
shovel, or trowel; a broom or brush; and a canvas blanket diameter by pressing down the apex with a shovel so that each
approximately 2 by 2.5 m [6 by 8 ft]. quarter sector of the resulting pile will contain the material
originally in it. The diameter should be approximately four to
10. Procedure eight times the thickness. Divide the flattened mass into four
fic

10.1 Use either the procedure described in 10.1.1 or 10.1.2
or a combination of both.
10.1.1 Place the original sample on a hard, clean, level
surface where there will be neither loss of material nor the
of
equal quarters with a shovel or trowel and remove two
diagonally opposite quarters, including all fine material, and
brush the cleared spaces clean. Successively mix and quarter
the remaining material until the sample is reduced to the

accidental addition of foreign material. Mix the material desired size (Fig. 3).
un

FIG. 3 Quartering on a Hard, Clean Level Surface

Page 119 of 180

3
 C702/C702M − 11
10.1.2 As an alternative to the procedure described in
10.1.1, when the floor surface is uneven, place the field sample
on a canvas blanket and mix with a shovel as described in
10.1.1, or by alternately lifting each corner of the canvas and
pulling it over the sample toward the diagonally opposite
corner causing the material to be rolled. Flatten the pile as
described in 10.1.1. Divide the sample as described in 10.1.1,
or if the surface beneath the blanket is uneven, insert a stick or
pipe beneath the blanket and under the center of the pile, then
lift both ends of the stick, dividing the sample into two equal
parts. Remove the stick leaving a fold of the blanket between
the divided portions. Insert the stick under the center of the pile
at right angles to the first division and again lift both ends of
the stick, dividing the sample into four equal parts. Remove
two diagonally opposite quarters, being careful to clean the
fines from the blanket. Successively mix and quarter the
remaining material until the sample is reduced to the desired
12. Procedure
12.1 Place the original sample of damp fine aggregate on a
hard clean, level surface where there will be neither loss of
material nor the accidental addition of foreign material. Mix
the material thoroughly by turning the entire sample over three
times. With the last turning, shovel the entire sample into a
conical pile by depositing each shovelful on top of the
preceding one. If desired, flatten the conical pile to a uniform
thickness and diameter by pressing down the apex with a
shovel so that each quarter sector of the resulting pile will
contain the material originally in it. Obtain a sample for each
test by selecting at least five increments of material at random
locations from the miniature stockpile, using any of the
sampling devices described in 11.1.
13. Keywords

y
size (Fig. 4).
13.1 aggregate; aggregate—coarse; aggregate—fine; field

op
METHOD C—MINIATURE STOCKPILE SAMPLING testing—aggregate; sampling—aggregates; sample reduction;
(DAMP FINE AGGREGATE ONLY) specimen preparation
11. Apparatus
11.1 Apparatus shall consist of a straight-edged scoop,
lc
shovel, or trowel for mixing the aggregate, and either a small
sampling thief, small scoop, or spoon for sampling.
ia
fic
of
un

FIG. 4 Quartering on a Canvas Blanket

Page 120 of 180

4
 C702/C702M − 11

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

Page 121 of 180

5
 Designation: C1077 − 15

Standard Practice for

Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency
Evaluation1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C1077; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* C78/C78M Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete

y
1.1 This practice identifies and defines the duties, (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
responsibilities, and minimum technical requirements of test- C117 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

op
ing agency personnel and the minimum technical requirements
for equipment utilized in testing concrete and concrete aggre- C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
gates for use in construction. gregates
C127 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
1.2 This practice provides criteria for the evaluation of the and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
capability of a testing agency to perform designated ASTM test
methods on concrete and concrete aggregates. It can be used by
an evaluation authority in the inspection or accreditation of a
testing agency or by other parties to determine if the agency is
qualified to conduct the specified tests.
lc C128 Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
C136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
C138/C138M Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield,
ia
NOTE 1—Specification E329 provides criteria for the evaluation of and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
agencies that perform the inspection of concrete during placement. C143/C143M Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement
1.3 This practice provides criteria for Inspection Bodies and Concrete
fic

Accreditation Bodies that provide services for evaluation of
testing agencies in accordance with this practice.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
of
C172/C172M Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Con-
crete
C173/C173M Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method
C231/C231M Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-

priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- Concrete by the Pressure Method
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. C617/C617M Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
un

2. Referenced Documents C802 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Test Pro-

2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C31/C31M Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field
C39/C39M Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylin-
drical Concrete Specimens
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on Concrete
and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.98 on
Evaluation of Laboratories.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2015. Published March 2015. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as C1077–14. DOI:
10.1520/C1077-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
gram to Determine the Precision of Test Methods for
Construction Materials
C1064/C1064M Test Method for Temperature of Freshly
Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
C1231/C1231M Practice for Use of Unbonded Caps in
Determination of Compressive Strength of Hardened Con-
crete Cylinders
D75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
D2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
Fine Aggregate
E4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
E329 Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 122 of 180
1
 C1077 − 15
E1301 Guide for Proficiency Testing by Interlaboratory
Comparisons (Withdrawn 2012)3
2.2 ACI Standards:
ACI 214-77 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of
Strength Test Results of Concrete4
2.3 ISO Standards:
ISO 17011 Conformity Assessment—General Requirements
For Accreditation Bodies Accrediting Conformity Assess-
ment Bodies5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 For definitions of terms used in this practice, refer to
Terminology C125.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 evaluation authority, n—an independent entity, apart
from the testing agency being evaluated, that has the capability
to provide an unbiased evaluation of the technical activities of
concrete and concrete aggregates testing agencies in accor-
dance with Annex A1 or Annex A2.
3.2.1.1 Discussion—Two acceptable methods of evaluation
are inspection and accreditation, and these evaluations are
offered by many evaluation authorities. An inspection is an
evaluation of equipment and procedures based on the Test
Methods and Procedures section, along with a review of the
quality system. An inspection report is the final step in the
process for an inspection agency. The testing agency being
lc
evaluated performs corrective actions for any deficiencies
ia
noted, and these corrections are to be placed with the other
inspection documentation as part of the permanent record of
the inspection. An accreditation agency uses the results of the
fic
inspection report or the results of their own onsite assessment
as one phase of the accreditation process. As a separate phase,
the accreditation agency also reviews the testing agency’s
corrective actions for the deficiencies noted and issues a
certificate of accreditation once all of the deficiencies have
of
been corrected. There is no universally accepted evaluation
authority in the construction materials testing field; therefore,
testing agencies should give careful consideration when select-
un
ing an evaluation authority to gain the most benefit from the
evaluation. In most cases, a testing agency will select an
evaluation authority as a result of requirements in a project
specification, or contract, or in response to local codes, or other
industry requirements. In those circumstances, the require-
ments will stipulate the acceptable evaluation authorities. If
there are no specific requirements and the evaluation is in
anticipation of future work or to compete with other local
testing agencies, then the agency should contact the organiza-
tion(s) most likely to use their services for a list of acceptable
evaluation authorities. A list of evaluation authorities is pro-
vided in the Qualification of Personnel and Laboratory Evalu-
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American Concrete Institute (ACI), P.O. Box 9094, Farmington
Hills, MI 48333-9094, http://www.aci-int.org.
5
Available from International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de
la Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland, http://
www.iso.ch.
2
ation section of the Manual of Aggregate and Concrete
Testing.6 The list is merely a collection of organizations willing
to provide this service and is not an endorsement of any
particular organization. Other organizations may also be avail-
able to provide this service.
3.2.2 external technical services, n—those services required
by a testing agency that are provided by another organization.
3.2.3 field technician, n—an employee of the agency who is
assigned to perform sampling and testing functions outside the
laboratory.
3.2.4 laboratory technician, n—an employee of the agency
who is assigned to perform the actual testing operations
primarily conducted in the laboratory.
3.2.5 quality systems, n—those internal procedures and
practices that an agency utilizes to ensure continued compli-
ance with applicable testing standards for concrete and con-
y
crete aggregates.
3.2.6 testing agency, n—organization that measures,
op
examines, performs tests, or otherwise determines the charac-
teristics or performance of materials or products. This includes
organizations that offer commercial testing services, an in-
house quality control function, an academic institution, or any
other organization providing the required testing services,
whether performed in the laboratory or in the field.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The testing and inspection of concrete and concrete
aggregates are important elements in obtaining quality con-
struction. A testing agency providing these services must be
selected with care.
4.2 A testing agency shall be deemed qualified to perform
and report the results of its tests if the agency meets the
requirements of this practice. The testing agency services shall
be provided under the technical direction of a registered
professional engineer.
4.3 This practice establishes essential characteristics per-
taining to the organization, personnel, facilities, and quality
systems of the testing agency. This practice may be supple-
mented by more specific criteria and requirements for particu-
lar projects.
5. Organization
5.1 The following information shall be readily available for
review:
5.1.1 Description of the organization, including:
5.1.1.1 Complete legal name and address of the main office
and each testing agency location,
5.1.1.2 Names and positions of the principal officers and the
responsible, registered professional engineer in charge, and
5.1.1.3 Description of the testing agency management struc-
ture.
5.1.2 Listing of the relevant technical services offered, and
5.1.3 All external technical services normally utilized.
6
Manual of Aggregate and Concrete Testing, Annual Book of ASTM
Standards , Vol 04.02.
Page 123 of 180
 C1077 − 15
5.2 The testing agency shall designate an individual with
access to management who has the responsibility of seeing that
procedures required in this document are being carried out.
6. Personnel Qualifications
6.1 Information shall be made available to substantiate
personnel qualifications as follows:
6.1.1 All relevant testing services are provided under the
full-time technical direction of a registered professional engi-
neer with at least 5 years experience in construction materials
testing.
6.1.2 Supervising laboratory technicians shall possess a
minimum of 3 years relevant experience and current technician
certification. The technician certification program must include
a written examination and performance examination of rel-
evant tests. Relevant tests that must be covered by the
certification program are: Practices C31/C31M, C172/C172M,
and C617/C617M or C1231/C1231M, and Test Methods C39/
C39M, C117, C127, C128, C136, C138/C138M, C143/
C143M, C173/C173M, C231/C231M, and C1064/C1064M.
Test Method C78/C78M is also considered a relevant test if it
is included on the agency’s list of technical services. In cases
where the supervising laboratory technician is supervising
technicians who only test concrete, the applicable relevant tests
lc
are the concrete tests listed in the group. Where the supervising
laboratory technician is supervising technicians who only test
aggregates, the applicable relevant tests are the aggregate tests
listed in the group.
6.1.3 Supervising field technicians shall possess a minimum
ia
of 3 years relevant experience and current technician certifi-
cation. The technician certification program must include a
written examination and performance examination of relevant
fic
tests. Relevant tests that must be covered by the certification
program are: Practices C31/C31M and C172/C172M and Test
Methods C138/C138M, C143/C143M, C173/C173M, C231/
C231M, and C1064/C1064M.
of
6.1.4 Concrete laboratory technicians shall possess current
technician certification. The technician certification program
must include a written examination and performance examina-
tion of relevant tests. Relevant tests that must be covered by the
un
certification program are: Test Method C39/C39M and Practice
C617/C617M or C1231/C1231M. Test Method C78/C78M is
also considered a relevant test if it is included on the agency’s
list of technical services.
6.1.5 Aggregate laboratory technicians shall possess current
technician certification. The technician certification program
must include a written examination and performance examina-
tion of relevant tests. Relevant tests that must be covered by the
certification program are: Test Methods C117, C127, C128,
and C136.
6.1.6 Concrete field technicians shall possess current tech-
nician certification. The technician certification program must
include a written examination and performance examination of
relevant tests. Relevant tests that must be covered by the
certification program are: Practices C31/C31M and C172/
C172M and Test Methods C138/C138M, C143/C143M, C173/
C173M, C231/C231M, and C1064/C1064M.
6.1.7 The technician certification program shall meet the
following criteria:
3
6.1.7.1 The written examination shall be of sufficient length
and detail to cover the test method or practice, including, as
applicable: the significance of the test or practice, sampling,
specimen preparation, procedure, calculations, and reporting of
results,
6.1.7.2 The performance examination shall include a dem-
onstration of the test method or practice, to document the
technician’s ability to correctly perform the procedure in
accordance with the standard, and
6.1.7.3 The written and performance examinations shall
include all relevant test methods that are listed in the section
above for the type of technician being certified.
NOTE 2—A list of technician certification programs is provided in the
Qualification of Personnel and Laboratory Evaluation section of the
Manual of Aggregate and Concrete Testing.6 The list is merely a collection
of certification programs and is not an endorsement of any particular
program. Other programs may also be available.
y
6.1.7.4 The certification body shall establish the period of
certification but not to exceed five years.
op
6.1.7.5 The period for which the certification is valid shall
be clearly and prominently stated on any documents that attest
to the certification(s) held by the individual.
7. Test Methods and Procedures
7.1 The testing agency shall be capable of performing the
required ASTM test methods, guides, or practices in 7.2 and
may request additional evaluation for the optional methods in
7.3 to the extent that those services are provided by the agency.
7.2 Required Test Methods and Practices:
7.2.1 For Agencies Testing Concrete:
7.2.1.1 Sampling, Practice C172/C172M,
7.2.1.2 Slump, Test Method C143/C143M,
7.2.1.3 Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content, Test Method
C138/C138M,
7.2.1.4 Air Content, Test Method C173/C173M (volumetric
method), or Test Method C231/C231M (pressure method), or
both.
7.2.1.5 Temperature, Test Method C1064/C1064M,
7.2.1.6 Making and Curing Test Specimens, Practice C31/
C31M,
7.2.1.7 Compressive Strength, Test Method C39/C39M,
7.2.1.8 Capping Cylinders, Practice C617/C617M or Prac-
tice C1231/C1231M.
7.2.2 For Agencies Testing Concrete Aggregates:
7.2.2.1 Sieve Analysis, Test Method C136,
7.2.2.2 Material Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve, Test
Method C117, and
7.2.2.3 Specific Gravity and Absorption, Test Method C127
(Coarse Aggregate) and Test Method C128 (Fine Aggregate).
7.3 Optional Test Methods or Practices:
7.3.1 Some testing agencies conduct other tests on concrete
and concrete aggregates in addition to those listed in The
Required Test Methods and Practices Section. These optional
test methods and practices could include any of the test
methods or practices developed by Committee C09 and con-
tained in volume 04.02, as well as other related standards such
as Practice D75 and Test Method D2419. The agency shall
have evidence of proper facilities, equipment, and trained
Page 124 of 180
 C1077 − 15
personnel to comply with the applicable test method or
practice, if it is included in the scope of services as defined by
the agency. The agency and the evaluation authority will
mutually agree upon which optional test methods or practices
will be included in the agency’s evaluation. The evaluation
authority shall then select which of the optional test methods or
practices offered by the agency need to be demonstrated by the
personnel.
7.4 The testing agency shall use the latest version of each
referenced method within one year of its publication unless an
earlier version of the standard is required by the client.
7.5 Testing agency personnel shall have convenient access
to applicable standards.
8. Facilities, Equipment, and Supplemental Procedures
8.1 General—The testing agency shall have facilities and
equipment conforming to the requirements of the applicable
test method. This section contains equipment requirements and
procedures that clarify certain provisions of the test methods.
8.2 Procedures Related to Required Test Methods—In addi-
tion to standard test method requirements, the conditions listed
in 8.3 and 8.4 must be met.
8.3 For Agencies Testing Concrete:
8.3.1 Compressive Strength Testing Machines, shall con-
form to the applicable requirements of Test Method C39/
C39M.
lc
8.4 For Agencies Testing Concrete Aggregates:
ia
8.4.1 Sieve Accuracy—Verification of sieve accuracy shall
be performed at least annually on each sieve used in the test for
sieve analysis (Test Methods C117 and C136). Any one of the
fic
following three methods of verification is acceptable. Each
method of sieve verification shall include an inspection of the
sieve cloth for punctures or obvious defects.
8.4.1.1 Verification of each sieve used according to the
of
procedures prescribed in the Annex of Specification E11.
8.4.1.2 A comparison of the results of a split sample sieved
on different sieve sets. Results shall be verified for single
operator precision to be within the acceptable range of two
un
results stated in the test method.
8.4.1.3 Participation in the sieve analysis test in an aggre-
gate proficiency sample program, as described in the Quality
Systems section. Results shall be verified for multilaboratory
precision to be within the acceptable range of two results stated
in the test method.
8.4.2 Mechanical Sieve Shaker—When mechanical sieving
devices are used, the period of mechanical agitation shall be
checked at least annually for adequacy of sieving as described
in Test Method C136. Mechanical agitation periods must be
established for each different type of aggregate tested.
NOTE 3—Different types of aggregate refer to shape and composition,
not supplier. For example, agitation periods for elongated materials may
need to be extended, while softer materials that break down easily may
require a shorter period to minimize alteration of the particle size
distribution.
8.4.3 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption
Tests—When performing the procedures of Test Methods C127
and C128, duplicate tests shall be made at least once every 6
4
months. Results shall be verified for single operator precision
within the tolerance stated in the respective test method.
Participation in a proficiency sample program with relative
density (specific gravity) and absorption testing is an accept-
able alternative.
8.4.4 Balances or scales for all concrete and aggregate tests
shall be calibrated annually.
8.5 Procedures Related to Optional Test Methods:
8.5.1 If the applicable test method requires equipment
calibration and does not specify a frequency, then the testing
agency shall establish a frequency in its quality assurance
program and conform thereto.
8.5.2 In the event that the testing agency borrows or rents
equipment to perform an optional test method, the agency must
be able to document that it obtained the appropriate equipment
and that the equipment was calibrated, standardized, or veri-
y
fied.
8.6 All equipment listed in this section shall be calibrated or
op
verified before being placed in service. Equipment not in
operating condition or out of tolerance shall be marked as such
and taken out of service until corrected.
9. Testing Agency Records and Reports
9.1 The testing agency shall maintain a system of records
that permits verification of any issued report.
9.2 The records of the testing agency shall contain the
following information:
9.2.1 Standard operating procedures for the following:
9.2.1.1 Identification of the test sample,
9.2.1.2 Transfer of the sample from the field to the testing
facility, and
9.2.1.3 Recording of test results.
9.2.2 Calibrations or verifications of equipment required by
the test method for all of the tests offered in the scope of the
testing agency’s services. The records shall include:
9.2.2.1 The identification of the specific piece of equipment,
9.2.2.2 The identification of the equipment used to perform
the calibration or verification,
9.2.2.3 The name of the individual who performed the
calibration or verification,
9.2.2.4 The date the calibration or verification was
performed,
9.2.2.5 The quantity measured by the equipment (such as
length, force, or mass), and
9.2.2.6 The associated accuracy of the measurement or a
comparison of the measured quantity with the associated
allowable tolerances, as necessary to verify that the equipment
complies with the requirements in the relevant standards.
Where additional calibration or verification requirements have
been listed in the Facilities, Equipment, and Supplemental
Procedures Section, this information shall also be included in
the records.
9.2.3 Records on testing agency personnel that document
work experience, education, on-the-job training, and methods
used to ensure continued competence in performing the re-
quired test methods,
Page 125 of 180
 C1077 − 15
9.2.4 Audits and inspections by outside agencies and all
reports or certifications, with applicable dates, of any evalua-
tion or accreditations issued by any evaluating authorities,
9.2.5 The testing agency shall retain results of participation
in proficiency sample programs, including data sheets, sum-
mary reports and, if low proficiency sample ratings are
received, a record of the agency’s investigation into the reason
for the low ratings and corrective action taken.
9.2.6 Current standard test methods and other pertinent
reference material in a library,
9.2.7 Identification of the person performing the field tests,
and
9.2.8 Documents that establish the traceability to an accept-
able reference standard or a national standard for load cells,
proving rings, thermometers, test weights, and test equipment
used for verification or calibration of testing equipment.
9.3 Agency test reports shall accurately and clearly present
the specified test results and all pertinent data.
9.4 Test reports shall include the following information:
9.4.1 Name and address of the testing agency,
9.4.2 Identification of the report and the date issued,
9.4.3 Name of the client,
9.4.4 Project identification,
9.4.5 Sample identification,
9.4.6 Identification of the standard test method used, a
notation of all known deviations from the test method, and all
requirements of the test method that were not performed by the
lc
ia
testing agency (Note 5),
9.4.7 Test results and other pertinent data required by the
standard,
fic
9.4.8 Name of the registered professional engineer or his
designee, and
9.4.9 Identification of results obtained from tests performed
by other testing agencies.
of
9.5 Corrections or additions to reports shall clearly refer-
ence the report being amended.
9.6 All records required by this standard shall be stored
safely for at least 3 years, unless otherwise required by law or
un
governing specifications. Those records that are confidential in
nature, including test reports and other records generated as
required by contract with the client, shall be stored safely in
confidence to the client, unless otherwise required by law,
governing specification, or client requirements.
NOTE 4—There are circumstances when a longer retention period may
be advantageous to the testing agency. Records concerning the calibration,
verification, and standardization of equipment are an example. Records of
this type are often held throughout the useful life of the equipment.
NOTE 5—Deviation from standard test methods may adversely affect
results.
10. Quality Systems
10.1 The testing agency shall maintain a quality manual of
written procedures for ensuring the quality of the services
offered (Note 8). In addition to the following information, each
page in the manual shall contain a preparation or revision date
to ensure the latest procedure is being followed.
10.1.1 Internal quality assurance program, including:
5
10.1.1.1 Personnel training and evaluation including a de-
scription of the training program, the method of evaluation, the
frequency of the review, the criteria used, and the title or name
of the individual responsible for administering the evaluations,
10.1.1.2 Equipment calibration and maintenance,
10.1.1.3 A current library including all relevant test
methods, and
10.1.1.4 Inventory of all test equipment requiring both an
initial and a subsequent periodic calibration or verification that
is used by the agency to perform the test methods covered by
this standard and within the agency’s scope of services. The
inventory shall include the equipment description, identifica-
tion number, and next date of calibration or verification.
NOTE 6—The inventory should include equipment such as scales,
compression machines, and slump cones. Equipment such as tamping rods
and expendable supplies such as single-use cylinder molds need not be
included on the inventory.
y
10.1.1.5 Participation in proficiency sample programs
(PSP). The agency shall participate in concrete or aggregate
op
proficiency sample programs or both if the agency performs
testing in both areas. The PSP used must meet the following
criteria: (1) include a minimum of 10 participants, (2) issue a
report that includes the agency’s results, the average of all
results, the standard deviation of the results, and rating(s) based
on the number of standard deviations that the agency’s results
vary from the grand average for the test method(s) covered,
(3a) include at least one of the following methods if the agency
tests concrete: C39/C39M, C138/C138M, C143/C143M,
C173/C173M, or C231/C231M; and, (3b) include at least one
of the following methods if the agency tests concrete aggre-
gates: C136, C127, or C128, (4) be independent of the
participating agencies, (5) distribute samples at least once
annually, and (6) maintain a record of all sample test results
from participants for at least 3 years.
NOTE 7—For additional guidance in selecting a proficiency sample
program the testing agency may wish to consult Guide E1301.
10.1.2 The testing agency shall establish procedures for
responding to low proficiency sample program ratings. Ratings
are considered to be low if the agency’s result is beyond two
standard deviations from the grand average on the final report.
10.1.3 The testing agency shall establish procedures for
handling technical complaints from clients that includes the
title or name of the individual responsible for handling the
complaint, the review system in the agency and the type of
reply to be issued.
10.1.4 The laboratory shall have a procedure in its quality
system that shall be implemented when it is determined that
equipment is out of calibration or testing procedures are found
to be deficient. The laboratory shall halt any work affected by
any deficiency until corrective actions have been completed
and documented. The laboratory shall review all affected work
performed between the time when the equipment or testing
procedure was last verified and when the deficiency was
discovered. The laboratory shall evaluate the significance of
any deficiency on reported results and, if necessary, notify
clients of the possibility of nonconforming test results.
10.1.5 The testing agency shall establish procedures for
ensuring the quality of external technical services, such as:
Page 126 of 180
 C1077 − 15
calibration services used by the agency, equipment and mate-
rials procured by the agency from vendors, and subcontractors
(that is, an agency contracted to perform a standard test method
or part of a test method). The agency should be able to
demonstrate that the subcontractor is competent and is in
compliance with the requirements of the test methods. The
agency should maintain records of the subcontractor and
vendor evaluations. The selection and evaluation criteria for
the subcontractor should include a review of external audits,
inspections, certifications, and accreditations held by the
agency.
NOTE 8—Other recommended quality programs for a testing agency
include: (1) Conducting within-laboratory statistical computations on
concrete tests. Randomly selecting 10 tests per month and determining the
within-test standard deviation (see ACI 214-77 and Practice C802 for
statistical methods); (2) Participation in an interlaboratory proficiency
program on concrete tests. A quarterly exchange of samples between
agencies in accordance with Practice C802 will provide excellent quality
assurance data.
11. Testing Agency Evaluation
11.1 The testing agency shall have its facilities, equipment,
personnel, and procedures evaluated at intervals of approxi-
mately 2 years by an evaluation authority to confirm its ability
to perform the required tests.
11.2 Two methods of evaluation, either inspection or
accreditation, are acceptable.
11.2.1 Responsibilities and duties of evaluation authorities
conducting assessments (identified as Inspection Bodies) shall
lc
ia
be in accordance with Annex A1.
fic
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
of
A1. EVALUATION AUTHORITIES CONDUCTING ASSESSMENTS—INSPECTION BODIES
A1.1 Organization and Management
un
A1.1.1 The Inspection Body shall clearly disclose on the
inspection report any potential conflicts of interest it or its
inspection personnel may have with the testing agency being
inspected. This shall include any potential conflicts that could
be reasonably construed or perceived to impair the impartiality
of their evaluation.
A1.1.2 The Inspection Body shall be under the direction of
a manager who is knowledgeable of the applicable standards
and inspection processes used.
A1.1.3 The Inspection Body shall implement a quality
system appropriate to the type of inspections performed. The
Inspection Body shall maintain a quality system manual
documenting the procedures and techniques used to accom-
plish the objectives of its inspection.
6
11.2.2 Responsibilities and duties of evaluation authorities
conducting assessments as part of an accreditation process
(identified as Accreditation Bodies) shall be in accordance with
Annex A2.
11.3 The personnel and equipment used by the agency
during the evaluation shall be representative of the personnel
and equipment available during the period between evalua-
tions. Temporary acquisition of personnel or equipment to
enhance the results of the evaluation shall not be permitted.
11.4 The testing agency shall provide an initial written
corrective action response within 30 days of receipt of defi-
ciencies noted in the final report. The agency then will
complete all corrections within 60 days of receipt of the final
report.
11.4.1 If an inspection service is used, the agency shall
y
supplement the final report with a statement of corrective
actions taken, which is signed by the agency’s professional
op
engineer.
11.4.2 If an accreditation service is used, the agency shall
report deficiency corrections to the Accreditation Body who
will issue a certificate of accreditation when its requirements
are satisfied.
12. Keywords
12.1 aggregates; concrete; criteria; evaluation; quality as-
surance (QA); testing ; testing agency
A1.1.3.1 The Inspection Body shall maintain documenta-
tion of instructions and procedures for conducting inspections
and inspection planning. These current written procedures shall
be available to inspection personnel. Deviations from written
procedures shall be documented during the conduct of an
inspection.
A1.1.4 The Inspection Body shall maintain a training pro-
gram for its personnel that includes the following:
A1.1.4.1 A review of each test method or practice as listed
in the “Required Test Methods and Practices” section;
A1.1.4.2 Demonstrations by the trainer of the procedures
used in each of these test methods or practices;
A1.1.4.3 Demonstrations by the trainer of the proper use of
measurement tools (inspection equipment) needed to evaluate
testing agency equipment;
Page 127 of 180
 C1077 − 15
A1.1.4.4 An evaluation by the trainer of the trainee’s ability
to properly execute the procedures of each test method or
practice and to correctly use the measurement tools;
A1.1.4.5 At least one month of supervision by the trainer of
onsite testing agency inspection work by the trainee; and
A1.1.4.6 A final evaluation by the trainer of the trainee’s
competence to conduct an inspection based on performance
during the training period.
A1.1.5 The Inspection Body shall maintain an evaluation
program for its inspectors that includes the following:
A1.1.5.1 An annual review of inspection techniques; and
A1.1.5.2 An annual review of performance based on cus-
tomer feedback, including the inspector’s knowledge and
communication during inspections.
A1.2 Facilities and Equipment
A1.2.1 The Inspection Body shall have the facilities and
equipment necessary to provide effective inspection services to
its customers.
A1.2.1.1 All equipment used for training and inspections
shall be identified and documented.
A1.2.1.2 All measuring equipment shall be maintained in
accordance with documented procedures and verified for
accuracy before being put into service and at time intervals
defined in the quality system manual. When results from the
measurement equipment are questionable, such equipment
shall not be used until its accuracy has been verified.
lc
A1.2.1.3 Verification or standardization of measuring equip-
ia
ment shall be traceable to applicable national standards. The
frequency of verifications or standardizations shall be in
accordance with the governing standard or the Inspection
fic
Body’s quality system manual. Records of such verifications or
standardizations shall be maintained.
A1.2.1.4 Reference measurement standards shall be used
only for verification or standardization of measuring equip-
ment. The reference measurement standards shall be standard-
of
ized by a competent body traceable to nationally recognized
standards.
A1.3 Inspection Methods and Procedures
un
A1.3.1 The Inspection Body shall offer inspection services
for testing agencies at the frequency required in the standard or
as otherwise requested by the testing agency.
A1.3.2 The inspection services shall include either the
required concrete or concrete aggregate test methods and
practices, or both, listed in 7.2.
A1.3.3 The Inspection Body shall provide inspection ser-
vices for any optional method requested by the testing agency
within the scope of its services, provided the agency’s equip-
ment and procedures can be assessed in a laboratory setting.
NOTE A1.1—There are some test methods and practices that involve
7
observation and assessment techniques of uniquely qualified personnel
that may not be possible to be evaluated by inspection personnel.
A1.3.4 The Inspection Body shall evaluate equipment and
procedures for each test method or practice presented by the
testing agency,
A1.3.4.1 The Inspection Body shall use its equipment to
evaluate the testing agency’s test equipment and verify the
capability of the agency’s equipment to measure to the toler-
ances specified in the relevant standards. Alternatively, review
of accuracy verification or standardization records is permitted.
A1.3.4.2 The inspector shall observe demonstration of tech-
niques and procedures by testing agency personnel for each test
method or practice presented. At the discretion of the inspector,
it is permitted for some procedural aspects of test methods or
practices to be described by agency personnel in lieu of
demonstration.
y
A1.3.5 The Inspection Body shall review the qualifications
and proficiencies of testing personnel of the agency being
op
inspected. It is permitted to use a representative sampling to
evaluate proficiency of testing personnel.
A1.3.6 The Inspection Body shall interview selected testing
personnel to evaluate their awareness of test methods and
practices and their proficiency in performing them.
A1.3.7 The Inspection Body shall review at least the three
previous years of records of testing agency participation in
proficiency sample programs as required by this practice.
A1.3.8 The Inspection Body shall review typical data re-
cording procedures and reports generated by the testing
agency.
A1.4 Inspection Reports
A1.4.1 The Inspection Body shall issue a final inspection
report of findings that lists the test methods and practices
covered. The inspection report shall note any deficiencies of
testing agency equipment, procedures relative to the pertinent
standards, qualification of testing personnel, and other require-
ments of this standard.
A1.4.1.1 Corrections or additions to an inspection report or
the testing agency’s documentation of correction of deficien-
cies shall be retained with the original inspection report.
A1.4.1.2 The complete inspection report, including docu-
mentation of actions to correct deficiencies, shall be provided
to an Accreditation Body, when the report of the Inspection
Body is used as part of the process for accreditation of a testing
agency.
A1.5 Statement of Conformance
A1.5.1 Upon request, the Inspection Body shall provide a
statement indicating that inspection services were conducted in
accordance with this Annex.
Page 128 of 180
 C1077 − 15
A2. EVALUATION AUTHORITIES CONDUCTING ASSESSMENTS—ACCREDITATION BODIES
A2.1 Organization and Management
A2.1.1 The Accreditation Body shall clearly disclose any
potential conflicts of interest it or its assessors may have with
the testing agency being accredited. This shall include any
potential conflicts that could be reasonably construed or
perceived to impair the impartiality of their assessment.
A2.1.2 The Accreditation Body shall be under the direction
of one or more managers who are knowledgeable on the
applicable standards and accreditation processes used.
A2.1.3 The Accreditation Body shall maintain a manage-
ment system documenting the processes it uses to accomplish
the objectives of its assessment for accreditation of testing
agencies.
A2.1.3.1 The management system shall document the
duties, responsibilities, and authorities of management and
assessors. The qualifications of assessors relative to education,
training, work and assessment experience, and scope of exper-
tise shall be defined. The system should define what constitutes
conflict of interest for assessors.
A2.1.3.2 The management system shall document informa-
tion about the assessment and accreditation processes for
lc
review by users of its accreditation service. The information
shall include procedures used for surveillance of accredited
facilities, if any, and the process to be used by testing agencies
ia
for complaints or appeals.
A2.1.3.3 The management system shall document the pro-
cedures used for extending, suspending, withdrawing, or re-
fic
ducing accreditation of testing agencies. The written proce-
dures shall be available to assessors. Deviations from written
procedures during the conduct of an assessment shall be
documented.
A2.1.3.4 The management system shall document the poli-
of
cies for retention of records for assessor personnel and for
assessments.
A2.1.3.5 The management system shall define the process
un
used to inform the public about the status and scope of
accredited testing agency facilities.
A2.1.4 The Accreditation Body shall include the results of
an on-site inspection of testing agency facilities and testing
personnel as part of the assessment for the accreditation of a
testing agency facility.
A2.1.5 If the Accreditation Body provides services for
on-site inspections of testing agencies, a training program for
its inspection personnel shall be maintained in accordance with
A1.1.4 and its facilities and equipment shall comply with A1.2.
A2.1.6 The Accreditation Body shall maintain a manage-
ment review and audit process of its assessors that includes the
following:
A2.1.6.1 A periodic monitoring of assessors by peers or
other means;
A2.1.6.2 An annual review of assessments; and
8
A2.1.6.3 An annual review of assessor performance based
on customer feedback during the conduct of assessments.
A2.2 Assessment Methods and Procedures
A2.2.1 The Accreditation Body is permitted to use inspec-
tion reports from separate Inspection Bodies that comply with
Annex A1, for the on-site assessment portion of the evaluation.
A2.2.2 If the Accreditation Body performs on-site assess-
ment of facilities and personnel as part of the evaluation, those
methods and procedures shall comply with the requirements of
A1.3.
A2.2.3 The Accreditation Body shall assign an evaluation
y
team with a leader for its evaluation services. The members of
the evaluation team shall be qualified and trained for the
services to be performed in accordance with the quality system
op
manual of the Accreditation Body.
A2.2.4 The evaluation team shall review the testing agen-
cy’s quality manual and conduct an evaluation for conformance
with the procedures indicated in the quality manual. The
agency’s quality manual shall conform to the requirements of
this practice.
A2.3 Assessment Reports
A2.3.1 The evaluation report of the Accreditation Body
shall include:
A2.3.1.1 An evaluation, including notes on deficiencies
requiring corrective action, of the testing agency’s quality
manual. This shall include an evaluation of the qualifications
and testing proficiency of personnel.
A2.3.1.2 An evaluation, including notes of deficiencies
requiring corrective action, of conformance to the standard test
methods and practices performed by the testing agency, includ-
ing the adequacy of equipment and facilities.
A2.3.1.3 An evaluation, including notes on deficiencies
requiring corrective action, of participation in proficiency
sample testing programs.
A2.3.2 The Accreditation Body shall require the testing
agency to respond with documentation of investigations made
and corrective actions taken to any deficiencies noted in the
evaluation report.
A2.3.3 The Accreditation Body shall provide the testing
agency a statement on the acceptability of the agency’s
response and actions taken to address any noted deficiencies.
This statement shall be incorporated into the agency’s record
prior to notification of accreditation.
A2.3.4 The Accreditation Body shall provide a certificate or
other means recognizing the accredited status of the testing
agency. The materials and standards for which the agency has
been evaluated and the duration of the accreditation shall be
indicated on the certificate or on other means used to recognize
accreditation.
Page 129 of 180
 C1077 − 15
A2.4 Statement of Conformance NOTE A2.1—Accreditation Bodies that have documented compliance
with ISO 17011 are acceptable provided they comply with the provisions
A2.4.1 Upon request from the user, the Accreditation Body of this Annex.
shall provide a statement indicating conformance with the
provisions of this Annex to perform accreditation of testing
agencies.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this practice since the last issue, C1077–14,
that may impact the use of this practice. (Approved Feb. 1, 2015.)

(1) Revised 2.1, 6.1.2, and 6.1.4.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned

y
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

op
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

lc
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/
ia
fic
of
un

Page 130 of 180

9
 Designation: C 1137 – 97

Standard Test Method for

Degradation of Fine Aggregate Due to Attrition1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C 1137; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope crease in fineness modulus (as defined in Definitions C 125)

1.1 This test method provides a procedure for indicating the
degree to which a fine aggregate may be subject to degradation
due to the mixing and agitation of portland cement concrete.
1.2 The values given in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
and the increase in amount of materials finer than the 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The tendency of some fine aggregates to degrade from
the grinding action in a concrete mixer may affect mixing water

y
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the demand, entrained air, and slump. Such aggregates may com-
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the ply with the requirements of Specification C 33. When it is

op
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- suspected that degradation during mixing is a problem, this test
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- method may be useful in evaluating the extent of the problem.
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 4.2 This test method may be used for preliminary screening
to indicate the need for further evaluation through petrographic
2. Referenced Documents examination (Practice C 295) or testing the quality of mortar
2.1 ASTM Standards:
C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates2
C 117 Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No.
200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing2
lc made from the fine aggregate in question.
4.3 This test method may be of considerable value in
comparing the results obtained with unknown materials against
those with materials of known performance in concrete.
ia
C 125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete 5. Apparatus
Aggregates2
C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse 5.1 Sieves, conforming to Specification E 11: 75-µm (No.
Aggregates2 200), 150-µm (No. 100), 300-µm (No. 50), 600-µm (No. 30),
fic

C 295 Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates 1.18-mm (No. 16), 2.36-mm (No. 8), 4.75-mm (No. 4), and
for Concrete2 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.).
C 702 Practice for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to 5.2 Balance—A balance or scale readable and accurate to
Testing Size2 0.1 g or 0.1 % of the test load, whichever is greater, at any
point within the range of use.
of

C 1005 Specification for Reference Masses and Devices for

Determining Mass for Use in the Physical Testing of 5.3 Oven—An oven of appropriate size capable of main-
Hydraulic Cements3 taining a uniform temperature of 110 6 5°C (230 6 9°F).
D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates4 5.4 Attrition Device—A stainless steel octagonal tank, 140
un

E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Pur- mm (51⁄2 in.) high and 110 mm (41⁄2 in.) minimum inside width,
poses5 with a motor-driven 19-mm (3⁄4-in.) vertical shaft so mounted
that it can be lowered into the desired position within the
3. Summary of Test Method octagonal tank. Mounted on the shaft there shall be three
3.1 A sample of fine aggregate, of specified grading, is horizontal sets of six pitched stainless steel blades6 and the
subjected to vigorous agitation under water from the action of shaft and blades shall rotate at approximately 850 r/min when
a high-speed impeller. Degradation is measured by the de- in operation. A lid shall be provided with a hole for the shaft.
See Figs. 1 and 2.
5.5 Rotating Device—An electric motor-driven device or
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C-9 on Concrete drill press suitable for driving the impeller clockwise as shown
and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee C09.20 on
Normal Weight Aggregates.
Current edition approved Aug. 10, 1997. Published June 1998. Originally
6
published as C 1137 – 90. Last previous edition C 1137 – 90. Available from WEMCO, Minerals Products Division, 1796 Tribute Rd., P.O.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02. Box 15619, Sacramento, CA 95852 (916-929-9363). A 1⁄2-in. attrition tank with 4-in.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.01. attriting element (impeller) that can be used in a 850-r/min drill press or in a
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03. WEMCO laboratory floatation machine are mentioned in Bulletin No. F7, B2,
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. September 1982, parts No. 23828 (impeller), 23844 (tank), and 44519 (cover).

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 131 of 180

 C 1137

y
op
lc
FIG. 1 Attrition Machine

6. Sample Preparation
6.1 Sample the aggregate in accordance with Practice D 75
ia
and reduce to test portion size in accordance with Practice
C 702.
6.2 Prepare at least two test portions of 500 6 5 g each to
have gradings specified in advance. Table 1 lists five alternative
fic

gradings that may be specified.

6.3 In preparing test portions to one of the gradings from
Table 1, first remove fines as necessary by washing (in
accordance with Test Method C 117), then oven dry and sieve
of

(in accordance with Method C 136) into separate size fractions,

and reblend.
6.4 If the test is to be performed on one of the standard
gradings from Table 1, use the grading nearest that of the
un

as-received sample. Where different fine aggregates are to be

compared, use the same initial grading for each.
7. Procedure
7.1 Determine the mass of the test portion of oven-dry fine
aggregate to the nearest 0.1 g and record.
TABLE 1 Alternative Test Gradings
TOP VIEW—TOP IMPELLER
% Passing
BLADE ENDS BENT LEFT Sieve Size
A
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE) No. 1 1A No. 2 No. 2AB No. 3
Impeller—102 mm (4 in.) diameter 3 1.5 mm (No. 16 gage) thick; Three Layers 4.75-mm (No. 4) 100 100 100 100 100
Shaft—19 mm (3⁄4 in.) diameter extending 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) below bottom layer and 2.36-mm (No. 8) 80 100 88 100 100
the ends of the blades bent to 45° pitch. Blades on the top and bottom layer bent 1.18-mm (No. 16) 50 60 74 80 85
to the left (counterclockwise) and the middle layer bent to the right (clockwise). 600-µm (No. 30) 25 30 49 50 60
FIG. 2 Impeller Details 300-µm (No. 50) 10 10 20 20 30
150-µm (No. 100) 2 0 5 0 10
75-µm (No. 200) 0 0 0 0 0

Fineness Modulus 3.33 3.00 2.64 2.50 2.15

in Fig. 1. It shall be capable of driving the impeller at
A
approximately 850 r/min with the sample and water in the tank. Similar to No. 1 but with the fine and coarser fractions removed.
B
Similar to No. 2 but with the fine and coarser fractions removed.

2 Page 132 of 180

 C 1137
7.2 Insert the container and impeller in the drill press and
adjust the vertical stop on the feed to position the bottom of the
impeller shaft 3 6 1 mm (1⁄8 6 1⁄32 in.) above the bottom of the
container. Make this adjustment prior to each test before
introducing the sample. Raise the impeller out of the container.
Using a funnel, place the sample in the container. Brush any
remaining material from the funnel into the container and add
175 g 6 5 g of water. Lower the impeller to the previously set
test position by turning the feed and chuck by hand simulta-
neously until the impeller penetrates through the material.
Place the lid firmly on the container to avoid loss of the fine
aggregate and the water.
7.3 Run the attrition device for 6 6 1⁄10 min if at 850 r/min
or for 5100 6 85 r.
7.4 Remove the container, lid, and impeller from the drill
press and place in a pan. Using a minimum amount of water,
wash the sample from the container, impeller, and lid into the
7.7 Test the sample in accordance with Test Method C 117
and test the remainder in accordance with Method C 136.
7.8 Repeat the test using the duplicate sample.
7.9 Determine the mass of the clean, dry impeller after the
test and record its mass to detect any long-term change in the
impeller.
8. Report
8.1 Report the following data for both samples:
8.1.1 Grading as-received,
8.1.2 Grading as-tested (from Table 1 or as otherwise
specified),
8.1.3 Grading after attrition,
8.1.4 Percent finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve after
attrition,
8.1.5 Fineness modulus before and after attrition, and

y
8.1.6 The mass of the clean, dry impeller after the test.
pan. Avoid loss of any portion of the sample.
7.5 Allow the samples to settle until the wash is clear, then
9. Precision and Bias

op
decant off as much as possible, taking care to avoid loss of any
portion of the sample. 9.1 Data on the precision and bias for this test method have
7.6 Oven dry the degraded sample to constant mass, and not been obtained.
determine and record the mass. If loss from sample is 3 g or
less than the original mass, proceed with the following steps. If 10. Keywords
the loss of mass is more than 3 g the test run is considered
invalid.
lc 10.1 agitation; attrition; degradation; fine aggregates; mix-
ing

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
ia
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
fic

and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
of

reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).
un

3 Page 133 of 180

 Designation: C 1252 – 98

Standard Test Methods for

Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate (as
Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and
Grading)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C 1252; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 These test methods describe the determination of the 2.1 ASTM Standards:
loose uncompacted void content of a sample of fine aggregate. B 88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube2
When measured on any aggregate of a known grading, void B 88M Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

y
content provides an indication of that aggregate’s angularity, [Metric]2
sphericity, and surface texture compared with other fine aggre- C 29/29M Test Method for Unit Weight and Voids in

op
gates tested in the same grading. When void content is Aggregate3
measured on an as-received fine-aggregate grading, it can be an C 117 Test Method for Material Finer Than 75-µm (No.
indicator of the effect of the fine aggregate on the workability 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing3
of a mixture in which it may be used. C 125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete
1.2 Three procedures are included for the measurement of Aggregates3
void content. Two use graded fine aggregate (standard grading
or as-received grading), and the other uses several individual
size fractions for void content determinations:
1.2.1 Standard Graded Sample (Test Method A)—This test
lc C 128 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of
Fine Aggregate3
C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates3
method uses a standard fine aggregate grading that is obtained C 670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
ia
by combining individual sieve fractions from a typical fine for Test Methods for Construction Materials3
aggregate sieve analysis. See the section on Preparation of Test C 702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to
Samples for the grading. Testing Size3
fic

1.2.2 Individual Size Fractions (Test Method B)—This test C 778 Specification for Standard Sand4
method uses each of three fine aggregate size fractions: (a) D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates5
2.36 mm (No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16); (b) 1.18 mm (No. 16) 2.2 ACI Document:
to 600 µm (No. 30); and (c) 600 µm (No. 30) to 300 µm (No. ACI 116R Cement and Concrete Terminology6
of

50). For this test method, each size is tested separately.

1.2.3 As-Received Grading (Test Method C)—This test 3. Terminology
method uses that portion of the fine aggregate finer than a 3.1 Terms used in these test methods are defined in Termi-
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. nology C 125 or ACI 116R.
un

1.2.4 See the section on Significance and Use for guidance

on the method to be used.
1.3 The values stated in SI units shall be regarded as the
standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A nominal 100-mL calibrated cylindrical measure is
filled with fine aggregate of prescribed grading by allowing the
sample to flow through a funnel from a fixed height into the
measure. The fine aggregate is struck off and its mass is
determined by weighing. Uncompacted void content is calcu-
lated as the difference between the volume of the cylindrical
measure and the absolute volume of the fine aggregate col-
lected in the measure. Uncompacted void content is calculated

1 2
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C-9 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
3
Concrete and Concrete Aggregatesand are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
4
C09.20on Normal Weight Aggregates. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.01.
5
Current edition approved May 10, 1998. Published December 1998. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03.
6
published as C 1252 – 93. Last previous edition C 1252 – 93. Available from the American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Detroit, MI 48219.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 134 of 180

 C 1252
using the bulk dry specific gravity of the fine aggregate. Two
runs are made on each sample and the results are averaged.
4.1.1 For a graded sample (Test Method A or Test Method
C) the percent void content is determined directly, and the
average value from two runs is reported.
4.1.2 For the individual size fractions (Test Method B), the
mean percent void content is calculated using the results from
tests of each of the three individual size fractions.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Test Methods A and B provide percent void content
determined under standardized conditions which depends on
the particle shape and texture of a fine aggregate. An increase
in void content by these procedures indicates greater angular-
ity, less sphericity, or rougher surface texture, or combination
thereof. A decrease in void content results is associated with
more rounded, spherical, or smooth-surfaced fine aggregate, or
determine the specific gravity of the size fractions used in the
test.
5.4 Void content information from Test Methods A, B, or C
will be useful as an indicator of properties such as: the mixing
water demand of hydraulic cement concrete; flowability, pum-
pability, or workability factors when formulating grouts or
mortars; or, in bituminous concrete, the effect of the fine
aggregate on stability and voids in the mineral aggregate; or the
stability of the fine-aggregate portion of a base course aggre-
gate.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Cylindrical Measure—A right cylinder of approxi-
mately 100-mL capacity having an inside diameter of approxi-
mately 39 mm and an inside height of approximately 86 mm

a combination thereof.
5.2 Test Method C measures the uncompacted void content
y
made of drawn copper water tube meeting the requirements of
Specification B 88, Type M or B 88M, Type C. The bottom of
the measure shall be metal at least 6 mm thick, shall be firmly

op
of the minus 4.75-mm (No. 4) portion of the as-received
material. This void content depends on grading as well as sealed to the tubing, and shall be provided with means for
particle shape and texture. aligning the axis of the cylinder with that of the funnel. See
5.3 The void content determined on the standard graded Fig. 1.
sample (Test Method A) is not directly comparable with the 6.2 Funnel—The lateral surface of the right frustum of a
average void content of the three individual size fractions from
the same sample tested separately (Test Method B). A sample
consisting of single size particles will have a higher void
content than a graded sample. Therefore, use either one method
lc cone sloped 60 6 4° from the horizontal with an opening of
12.7 6 0.6-mm diameter. The funnel section shall be a piece of
metal, smooth on the inside and at least 38 mm high. It shall
have a volume of at least 200 mL or shall be provided with a
or the other as a comparative measure of shape and texture, and
ia
supplemental glass or metal container to provide the required
identify which test method has been used to obtain the reported volume. See Fig. 2.
data. Test Method C does not provide an indication of shape
and texture directly if the grading from sample to sample
fic

changes.
5.3.1 The standard graded sample (Test Method A) is most
useful as a quick test which indicates the particle shape
properties of a graded fine aggregate. Typically, the material
of

used to make up the standard graded sample can be obtained

from the remaining size fractions after performing a single
sieve analysis of the fine aggregate.
5.3.2 Obtaining and testing individual size fractions (Test
un

Method B) are more time consuming and require a larger initial

sample than using the graded sample. However, Test Method B
provides additional information concerning the shape and
texture characteristics of individual sizes.
5.3.3 Testing samples in the as-received grading (Test
Method C) may be useful in selecting proportions of compo-
nents used in a variety of mixtures. In general, high void
content suggests that the material could be improved by
providing additional fines in the fine aggregate or more
cementitious material may be needed to fill voids between
particles.
5.3.4 The bulk dry specific gravity of the fine aggregate is
used in calculating the void content. The effectiveness of these
test methods of determining void content and its relationship to
particle shape and texture depends on the bulk specific gravity
of the various size fractions being equal, or nearly so. The void
content is actually a function of the volume of each size
fraction. If the type of rock or minerals, or its porosity, in any
of the size fractions varies markedly it may be necessary to FIG. 1 Nominal 100-mL Cylindrical Measure

2 Page 135 of 180

 C 1252
FIG. 2 Suitable Funnel Stand Apparatus with Cylindrical Measure
in Place
lc
ia
NOTE 1—Pycnometer top C94557 is satisfactory for the funnel section,
except that the size of the opening has to be enlarged and any burrs or lips
that are apparent should be removed by light filing or sanding before use.
fic
This pycnometer top must be used with a suitable glass jar with the bottom
removed (Fig. 2).
6.3 Funnel Stand—A three- or four-legged support capable
of holding the funnel firmly in position with the axis of the
funnel colinear (within a 4° angle and a displacement of 2 mm)
of
with the axis of the cylindrical measure. The funnel opening
shall be 115 6 2 mm above the top of the cylinder. A suitable
arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.
un
6.4 Glass Plate—A square glass plate approximately 60 by
60 mm with a minimum 4-mm thickness used to calibrate the
cylindrical measure.
6.5 Pan—A metal or plastic pan of sufficient size to contain
the funnel stand and to prevent loss of material. The purpose of
the pan is to catch and retain fine aggregate particles that
overflow the measure during filling and strike off.
6.6 Metal Spatula, with a blade approximately 100 mm
long, and at least 20 mm wide, with straight edges. The end
shall be cut at a right angle to the edges. The straight edge of
the spatula blade is used to strike off the fine aggregate.
6.7 Scale or Balance, accurate and readable to 60.1 g
within the range of use, capable of weighing the cylindrical
measure and its contents.
7. Sampling
7.1 Obtain the sample(s) used for this test in accordance
7
Available from Hogentogler and Co., Inc., 9515 Gerwig, Columbia, MD 21045.
3 Page 136 of 180
with Practices D 75 and Practice C 702, or from sieve analysis
samples used for Test Method C 136, or from aggregate
extracted from a bituminous concrete specimen. For Methods
A and B, wash the sample over a 150-µm (No. 100) or 75-µm
(No. 200) sieve in accordance with Test Method C 117 and
then dry and sieve into separate size fractions in accordance
with the procedures of Test Method C 136. Maintain the
necessary size fractions obtained from one (or more) sieve
analysis in a dry condition in separate containers for each size.
For Method C, dry a split of the as-received sample in
accordance with the drying procedure in Test Method C 136.
8. Calibration of Cylindrical Measure
8.1 Apply a light coat of grease to the top edge of the dry,
empty cylindrical measure. Weigh the measure, grease, and
glass plate. Fill the measure with freshly boiled, deionized
water at a temperature of 18 to 24°C. Record the temperature
y
of the water. Place the glass plate on the measure, being sure
that no air bubbles remain. Dry the outer surfaces of the
op
measure and determine the combined mass of measure, glass
plate, grease, and water by weighing. Following the final
weighing, remove the grease and determine the mass of the
clean, dry, empty measure for subsequent tests.
8.2 Calculate the volume of the measure as follows:
where:
1000 M
V5 D
V 5 volume of cylinder, mL,
M 5 net mass of water, g, and
D 5 density of water, kg/m3(see table in Test Method
C 29/C 29M for density at the temperature used.)
Determine the volume to the nearest 0.1 mL.
NOTE 2—If the volume of the measure is greater than 100.0 mL, it may
be desirable to grind the upper edge of the cylinder until the volume is
exactly 100.0 mL to simplify subsequent calculations.
9. Preparation of Test Samples
9.1 Test Method A—Standard Graded Sample—Weigh out
and combine the following quantities of fine aggregate which
have been dried and sieved in accordance with Test Method
C 136.
Individual Size Fraction Mass, g
2.36 mm (No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16) 44
1.18 mm (No. 16) to 600 µm (No. 30) 57
600 µm (No. 30) to 300 µm (No. 50) 72
300 µm (No. 50) to 150 µm (No. 100) 17
190
The tolerance on each of these amounts is 60.2 g.
9.2 Test Method B—Individual Size Fractions—Prepare a
separate 190-g sample of fine aggregate, dried and sieved in
accordance with Test Method C 136, for each of the following
size fractions:
Individual Size Fraction Mass, g
2.36 mm (No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16) 190
1.18 mm (No. 16) to 600 µm (No. 30) 190
600 µm (No. 30) to 300 µm (No. 50) 190
The tolerance on each of these amounts is 61 g. Do not mix
these samples together. Each size is tested separately.
9.3 Test Method C—As Received Grading—Pass the sample
 C 1252
(dried in accordance with Test Method C 136) through a
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. Obtain a 190 6 1-g sample of the
material passing the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve for test.
9.4 Specific Gravity of Fine Aggregate—If the bulk dry
specific gravity of fine aggregate from the source is unknown,
determine it on the minus 4.75-mm (No. 4) material in
accordance with Test Method C 128. Use this value in subse-
quent calculations unless some size fractions differ by more
than 0.05 from the specific gravity typical of the complete
sample, in which case the specific gravity of the fraction (or
fractions) being tested must be determined. An indicator of
differences in specific gravity of various particle sizes is a
comparison of specific gravities run on the fine aggregate in
different gradings. Specific gravity can be run on gradings with
and without specific size fractions of interest. If specific gravity
differences exceed 0.05, determine the specific gravity of the
individual 2.36-mm (No. 8) to 150-µm (No. 100) sizes for use
with Method A or the individual size fractions for use with Test
Method B either by direct measurement or by calculation using
the specific gravity data on gradings with and without the size
fraction of interest. A difference in specific gravity of 0.05 will
change the calculated void content about 1 %.
10. Procedure
10.1 Mix each test sample with the spatula until it appears to
be homogeneous. Position the jar and funnel section in the
stand and center the cylindrical measure as shown in Fig. 2.
Use a finger to block the opening of the funnel. Pour the test
lc
ia
sample into the funnel. Level the material in the funnel with the
spatula. Remove the finger and allow the sample to fall freely
into the cylindrical measure.
10.2 After the funnel empties, strike off excess heaped fine
fic
aggregate from the cylindrical measure by a single pass of the
spatula with the width of the blade vertical using the straight
part of its edge in light contact with the top of the measure.
Until this operation is complete, exercise care to avoid vibra-
of
tion or any disturbance that could cause compaction of the fine
aggregate in the cylindrical measure (Note 3). Brush adhering
grains from the outside of the container and determine the mass
of the cylindrical measure and contents to the nearest 0.1 g.
un
Retain all fine aggregate particles for a second test run.
NOTE 3—After strike-off, the cylindrical measure may be tapped lightly
to compact the sample to make it easier to transfer the container to the
scale or balance without spilling any of the sample.
10.3 Recombine the sample from the retaining pan and
cylindrical measure and repeat the procedure. Average the
results of two runs. See Section 11.
10.4 Record the mass of the empty measure. Also, for each
run, record the mass of the measure and fine aggregate.
11. Calculation
11.1 Calculate the uncompacted voids for each determina-
tion as follows:
V2~F/G!
U5 V 3100
where:
V 5 volume of cylindrical measure, mL,
4 Page 137 of 180
F 5 net mass of fine aggregate in measure, g (gross mass
minus the mass of the empty measure),
G 5 bulk dry specific gravity of fine aggregate, and
U 5 uncompacted voids in the material, %.
11.2 For the standard graded sample (Test Method A)
calculate the average uncompacted voids for the two determi-
nations and report the results as Us.
11.3 For the individual size fractions (Test Method B)
calculate as follows:
11.3.1 First, the average uncompacted voids for the deter-
minations made on each of the three size-fraction samples:
U1 5 uncompacted voids, 2.36 mm (No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16), %,
U2 5 uncompacted voids, 1.18 mm (No. 16) to 600 µm (No. 30), %, and
U3 5 uncompacted voids, 600 µm (No. 30) to 300 µm (No. 50), %.
11.3.2 Second, the mean uncompacted voids (Um) including
the results for all three sizes:
Um5~U11U21U3!/3
y
11.4 For the as-received grading (Test Method C) calculate
op
the average uncompacted voids for the two determinations and
report the result as UR.
12. Report
12.1 Report the following information for the standard
graded sample (Test Method A):
12.1.1 Uncompacted voids (Us), % to the nearest one tenth
of a percent (0.1 %), and
12.1.2 Specific gravity value used in the calculations.
12.2 Report the following percent voids to the nearest one
tenth of a percent (0.1 %) for the individual size fractions (Test
Method B):
12.2.1 Uncompacted voids for size fractions: (a) 2.36 mm
(No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16) (U1); (b) 1.18 mm (No. 16) to 600
µm (No. 30) (U2); and (c) 600 µm (No. 30) to 300 µm (No. 50)
(U3),
12.2.2 Mean uncompacted voids (Um), and
12.2.3 Specific gravity value(s) used in the calculations, and
whether the specific gravity value(s) were determined on a
graded sample or the individual-sized fractions used in the test.
12.3 Report the following information for the as-received
sample (Test Method C):
12.3.1 Uncompacted voids (UR), % to the nearest one tenth
of a percent (0.1 %).
12.3.2 Specific gravity value used in the calculation.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 Precision—Criteria for judging the acceptability of test
results obtained by this test method are given as follows:
NOTE 4—The figures in Column 2 are the standard deviations that have
been found to be appropriate for the materials and conditions of test
described in Column 1. The figures given in Column 3 are the limits that
should not be exceeded by the difference between the results of two
properly conducted tests.
Material and Type Index Standard Acceptable
DeviationA Range of
Two ResultsA
Single-operator precision:
Graded standard sandB 0.13 % 0.37 %
Manufactured fine aggregateC 0.33 % 0.94 %
Multilaboratory precision:
 C 1252
Graded standard sandB 0.33 % 0.93 % conducted in accordance with Method C—As Received Grading on a manufac-
Manufactured fine aggregateC 1.1 % 3.1 % tured fine aggregate.

13.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material

A
These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s) and (d2s) limits as described suitable for determining the bias for the procedures in these test
in Practice C 670.
B
These estimates of precision are based on “graded standard sand” as methods, bias has not been determined.
described in Specification C 778, which is considered rounded, and is graded from
600 µm (No. 30 sieve) to 150 µm (No. 100 sieve), and may not be typical of other
fine aggregates.
14. Keywords
C
These estimates of precision are based on results from the AASHTO Materials
Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Proficiency Sample Program. The data are based
14.1 angularity; fine aggregate; particle shape; sand; surface
on the analyses of 103 paired test results from 103 laboratories. The tests were texture; void content

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible

y
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

op
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

lc
ia
fic
of
un

5 Page 138 of 180

 Designation: C1260 − 14

Standard Test Method for

Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar
Method)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C1260; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* C305 Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement

1.1 This test method permits detection, within 16 days, of Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency
the potential for deleterious alkali-silica reaction of aggregate C490/C490M Practice for Use of Apparatus for the Deter-
in mortar bars. mination of Length Change of Hardened Cement Paste,

y
Mortar, and Concrete
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as C511 Specification for Mixing Rooms, Moist Cabinets,
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this

op
Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the
standard. When this test method refers to combined-unit Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes
standards, the selection of the measurement systems is at the C670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
user’s discretion. for Test Methods for Construction Materials
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the C856 Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. A specific precau-
lc Concrete
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
E11 Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
tionary statement is given in the section on Reagents.
ia
3. Terminology
2. Referenced Documents
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of other terms relating to
2.1 ASTM Standards:2 concrete or aggregates, see Terminology C125.
fic

C109/C109M Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens)
C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Ag-
of
3.1.1 relative density (OD), n—as defined in Test Methods
C127 or C128, for coarse and fine aggregates, respectively.
4. Significance and Use

gregates 4.1 This test method provides a means of detecting the

C127 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific potential of an aggregate intended for use in concrete for
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate undergoing alkali-silica reaction resulting in potentially delete-
C128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific rious internal expansion. It is based on the NBRI Accelerated
un

Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
C150/C150M Specification for Portland Cement
C151/C151M Test Method for Autoclave Expansion of Hy-
draulic Cement
C295/C295M Guide for Petrographic Examination of Ag-
gregates for Concrete
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee C09 on
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
C09.26 on Chemical Reactions.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2014. Published August 2014. Originally
approved in 1989. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as C1260 – 07. DOI:
10.1520/C1260-14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Test Method (1-4).3 It is especially useful for aggregates that
react slowly or produce expansion late in the reaction.
However, it does not evaluate combinations of aggregates with
cementitious materials nor are the test conditions representa-
tive of those encountered by concrete in service.
4.2 Because the specimens are exposed to a NaOH solution,
the alkali content of the cement is not a significant factor in
affecting expansions.
4.3 When excessive expansions (see Appendix X1) are
observed, it is recommended that supplementary information
be developed to confirm that the expansion is actually due to
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to a list of references at the end of
the text.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Page 139 of 180
1
 C1260 − 14
alkali-silica reaction. Sources of such supplementary informa-
tion include: (1) petrographic examination of the aggregate
(Guide C295/C295M) to determine if known reactive constitu-
ents are present; (2) examination of the specimens after tests
(Practice C856) to identify the products of alkali reaction; and
(3) where available, field service records can be used in the
assessment of performance.
4.4 When it has been concluded from the results of tests
performed using this test method and supplementary informa-
tion that a given aggregate should be considered potentially
deleteriously reactive, the use of mitigative measures such as
low-alkali portland cement, mineral admixtures, or ground
granulated blast-furnace slag should be evaluated (see last
sentence of 4.1).
5. Apparatus
5.1 The apparatus shall conform to Specification C490/
C490M, except as follows:
5.2 Sieves—Square hole, woven-wire cloth sieves, shall
conform to Specification E11.
5.3 Mixer, Paddle, and Mixing Bowl—Mixer, paddle, and
mixing bowl shall conform to the requirements of Practice
C305, except that the clearance between the lower end of the
paddle and the bottom of the bowl shall be 5.1 6 0.3 mm.
5.4 Tamper and Trowel—The tamper and trowel shall con-
form to Test Method C109/C109M.
lc
5.5 Containers—The containers shall be of such a nature
ia
that the bars can be totally immersed in either the water or 1N
NaOH solution. The containers shall be made of material that
can withstand prolonged exposure to 80°C and must be
fic
resistant to a 1N NaOH solution (see Note 1). The containers
must be so constructed that when used for storing specimens,
the loss or gain of moisture is prevented by tight-fitting covers,
by sealing, or both (see Note 2). The bars in the solution must
of
be placed and supported so that the solution has access to the
entire surface of the bar; therefore, it should be ensured that the
specimens do not touch the sides of the container or each other.
The specimens, if stood upright in the solution, shall not be
un
supported by the metal gauge stud.
NOTE 1—The NaOH solution will corrode glass or metal containers.
NOTE 2—Some microwave-proof food storage containers made of
polypropylene or high-density polythylene have been found to be accept-
able.
5.6 Oven, or Water Bath—A convection oven or water bath
with temperature control maintaining 80.0 6 2.0°C.
6. Reagents
6.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH)—USP or technical grade
may be used, provided the Na+ and OH− concentrations are
shown by chemical analysis to lie between 0.99N and 1.01N.
6.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references
to water shall be understood to mean reagent water conforming
to Type IV of Specification D1193.
6.3 Sodium Hydroxide Solution—Each litre of solution shall
contain 40.0 g of NaOH dissolved in 900 mL of water, and
shall be diluted with additional distilled or deionized water to
2
obtain 1.0 L of solution. The volume proportion of sodium
hydroxide solution to mortar bars in a storage container shall
be 4 6 0.5 volumes of solution to 1 volume of mortar bars. The
volume of a mortar bar may be taken as 184 mL. Include
sufficient test solution to ensure complete immersion of the
mortar bars.
6.3.1 Warning—Before using NaOH, review: (1) the safety
precautions for using NaOH; (2) first aid for burns; and (3) the
emergency response to spills, as described in the manufactur-
er’s Material Safety Data Sheet or other reliable safety litera-
ture. NaOH can cause very severe burns and injury to unpro-
tected skin and eyes. Suitable personal protective equipment
should always be used. These should include full-face shields,
rubber aprons, and gloves impervious to NaOH. Gloves should
be checked periodically for pin holes.
7. Conditioning
y
7.1 Maintain the temperature of the molding room and dry
materials at not less than 20°C and not more than 27.5°C. The
op
temperature of the mixing water, and of the moist closet or
moist room, shall not vary from 23°C by more than 2.0°C.
7.2 Maintain the relative humidity of the molding room at
not less than 50 %. The moist closet or room shall conform to
Specification C511.
7.3 Maintain the storage oven or water bath in which the
specimens are stored in the containers at a temperature of 80.0
6 2.0°C.
8. Sampling and Preparation of Test Specimens
8.1 Selection of Aggregate—Process materials proposed for
use as fine aggregate in concrete as described in the section on
Preparation of Aggregate with a minimum of crushing. Process
materials proposed for use as coarse aggregate in concrete by
crushing to produce as nearly as practical a graded product
from which a sample can be obtained. Grade the sample as
prescribed in Table 1. The sample shall represent the compo-
sition of the coarse aggregate as proposed for use.
8.1.1 When a given quarried material is proposed for use
both as coarse and as fine aggregate, test it only by selection of
an appropriate sample crushed to the fine aggregates sizes,
unless there is reason to expect that the coarser size fractions
have a different composition that the finer sizes and that these
differences might significantly affect expansion due to reaction
with the alkalies in cement or from the environment of service.
In this case test the coarser size fractions in a manner similar
to that employed in testing the fine aggregate sizes.
8.2 Preparation of Aggregate—Grade all aggregates to
which this test method is applied in accordance with the
TABLE 1 Grading Requirements
Sieve Size
Mass, %
Passing Retained on
4.75 mm (No. 4) 2.36 mm (No. 8) 10
2.36 mm (No. 8) 1.18 mm (No. 16) 25
1.18 mm (No. 16) 600 µm (No. 30) 25
600 µm (No. 30) 300 µm (No. 50) 25
300 µm (No. 50) 150 µm (No. 100) 15
Page 140 of 180
 C1260 − 14
requirements given in Table 1. Crush aggregates in which
sufficient quantities of the sizes specified in Table 1 do not exist
until the required material has been produced. In the case of
aggregates containing insufficient amounts of one or more of
the larger sizes listed in Table 1, and if no larger material is
available for crushing, the first size in which sufficient material
is available shall contain the cumulative percentage of material
down to that size as determined from the grading specified in
Table 1. When such procedures are required, make a special
note thereof in the test report. After the aggregate has been
separated into the various sieve sizes, wash each size with a
water spray over the sieve to remove adhering dust and fine
particles from the aggregate. Dry the portions retained on the
various sieves and, unless used immediately, store each such
portion individually in a clean container provided with a
tight-fitting cover.
8.3 Selection and Preparation of Cement:
8.3.1 Reference Cement—Use a portland cement meeting
the requirements of Specification C150/C150M (Note 3). In
addition, the autoclave expansion in Test Method C151/C151M
shall be less than 0.20 %.
NOTE 3—The alkali content of the cement has been found to have
negligible (3) or minor (5) effects on expansion in this test.
8.3.2 Preparation of Cement—Pass cement for use in this
test through an 850-µm (No. 20) sieve to remove lumps before
use.
8.4 Preparation of Test Specimens:
lc
ia
8.4.1 Number of Specimens—Make at least three test speci-
mens for each cement-aggregate combination.
8.4.2 Preparation of Molds—Prepare the specimen molds in
accordance with the requirements of Practice C490/C490M
fic
except, the interior surfaces of the mold shall be covered with
a release agent (see Note 4). A release agent will be acceptable
if it serves as a parting agent without affecting the time of
setting of the cement and without leaving any residue that will
of
inhibit the penetration of water into the specimen.
NOTE 4—TFE-fluorocarbon tape complies with the requirements for a
mold release agent.
un
8.4.3 Proportioning of Mortar—Proportion the dry materi-
als for the test mortar using 1 part of cement to 2.25 parts of
graded aggregate by mass for aggregates with a relative density
(OD) at or above 2.45. For aggregates with a relative density
(OD) below 2.45, determine the aggregate proportion as
follows:
Aggregate proportion 5 2.25 3 D/2.65
where:
D = relative density (OD) of test aggregate.
8.4.3.1 For aggregates with a relative density (OD) equal to
or greater than 2.45, the quantities of dry materials to be mixed
at one time in the batch of mortar for making three specimens
shall be 440 g of cement and 990 g of aggregate made up by
recombining the portions retained on the various sieves in the
grading prescribed in Table 1 (8.2). Use a water-cement ratio
equal to 0.47 by mass (see Note 5).
8.4.3.2 For aggregates with a relative density (OD) less than
2.45, the quantities of dry materials to be mixed at one time in
3
the batch of mortar for making three specimens shall be 440 g
of cement and mass of aggregate shall be 440 g multiplied by
the aggregate proportion determined in 8.4.3. This aggregate
mass shall be made up by recombining the portions retained on
the various sieves in the grading prescribed in Table 1 (8.2).
Use a water-cement ratio equal to 0.47 by mass (see Note 5).
NOTE 5—Ruggedness tests indicated that mortar bar expansions were
less variable at a fixed water to cement ratio than when gaged to a constant
flow (3).
8.4.4 Mixing of Mortar—Mix the mortar in accordance with
the requirements of Practice C305.
8.4.5 Molding of Test Specimens—Mold test specimens
within a total elapsed time of not more than 2 min and 15 s
after completion of the original mixing of the mortar batch. Fill
the molds with two approximately equal layers, each layer
being compacted with the tamper. Work the mortar into the
y
corners, around the gauge studs, and along the surfaces of the
mold with the tamper until a homogeneous specimen is
obtained. After the top layer has been compacted, cut off the
op
mortar flush with the top of the mold and smooth the surface
with a few strokes of the trowel.
9. Procedure
9.1 Initial Storage and Reading—Place each mold in the
moist cabinet or room immediately after molds have been
filled. The specimens shall remain in the molds for 24 6 2 h.
Remove the specimens from the molds and, while they are
being protected from loss of moisture, properly identify and
make an initial comparatory reading. Make and record the
initial and all subsequent readings following the length change
measurement procedures of Specification C490/C490M. Place
the specimens made with each aggregate sample in a storage
container with sufficient tap water to totally immerse them. The
temperature of the water used to immerse the specimens shall
be 23.0 6 2.0°C. Seal and place the containers in an oven or
water bath at 80.0 6 2.0°C for a period of 24 h.
9.2 Zero Readings—Remove the containers from the oven
or water bath one at a time. Remove other containers only after
the bars in the first container have been measured and returned
to the oven or water bath. The time elapsed between removal
and return of the specimens to the oven or water bath shall not
exceed 10.0 min. Remove the bars one at a time from the water
and dry their surface with a towel paying particular attention to
the two metal gauge studs. Take the zero reading (see Note 6)
of each bar immediately after drying, and read as soon as the
bar is in position. Complete the process of drying and reading
within 15 6 5 s of removing the specimen from the water.
After readings, leave the specimen on a towel until compara-
tory readings have been taken on the remainder of the bars.
Place all specimens made with each aggregate sample in a
container with sufficient 1N NaOH, at 80.0 6 2.0°C for the
samples to be totally immersed. Seal the container and return it
to the oven or water bath.
NOTE 6—The reference bar should be read prior to each set of
specimens since the heat from the mortar bars may cause the length of the
comparator to change.
9.3 Subsequent Storage and Measurement—Make subse-
quent comparator readings of the specimens periodically, with
Page 141 of 180
 C1260 − 14
at least three intermediate readings, for 14 days after the zero
reading, at approximately the same time each day. If readings
are continued beyond the 14-day period, take at least one
reading per week. The procedure is identical to that described
in the section on Zero Readings except that the specimens are
returned to their own container after measurement.
10. Calculation
10.1 Calculate the difference between the zero comparatory
reading of the specimen and the reading at each period to the
nearest 0.001 % of the effective gauge length and record as the
expansion of the specimen for that period. Report the average
expansion of the three specimens of a given cement-aggregate
combination to the nearest 0.01 % as the expansion for the
combination for a given period.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Type and source of aggregate,
11.1.2 Type and source of portland cement,
11.1.3 Autoclave expansion and alkali content of cement as
percent potassium oxide (K2O), sodium oxide (Na2O), and
calculated sodium oxide (Na2O) equivalent (Na2Oeq = %Na2O
+ 0.658 × %K2O),
the specimens,
lc
11.1.4 Average length change in percent at each reading of
11.1.5 Any relevant information concerning the preparation
of aggregates, including the grading of the aggregate when it
ia
differs from that given in 8.2,
11.1.6 Any significant features revealed by examination of
the specimens during and after test,
fic
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
of
X1. INTERPRETATION OF TEST RESULTS
X1.1 There is good agreement in the published literature (1,
un
2, 7-10) for the following expansion limits:
X1.1.1 Expansions of less than 0.10 % at 16 days after
casting are indicative of innocuous behavior in most cases (see
Note X1.1).
X1.1.2 Expansions of more than 0.20 % at 16 days after
casting are indicative of potentially deleterious expansion (see
4.3).
X1.1.3 Expansions between 0.10 and 0.20 % at 16 days
after casting include both aggregates that are known to be
4
11.1.7 Amount of mixing water expressed as mass percent
of cement, and
11.1.8 A graph of the length change data from the time of
the zero reading to the end of the 16 day period.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Within-Laboratory Precision—It has been found that
the average within-laboratory coefficient of variation for ma-
terials with an average expansion greater than 0.1 % at 14 days
is 2.94 % (6) (Note 7). Therefore, the results of two properly
conducted tests within the same laboratory on specimens of a
sample of aggregate should not differ by more than 8.3 %
(Note 7) of the mean expansion.
12.2 Multi-Laboratory Precision—It has been found that the
average multilaboratory coefficient of variation for materials
with an average expansion greater than 0.1 % at 14 days is
y
15.2 % (6) (Note 7). Therefore, the results of two properly
conducted tests in different laboratories on specimens of a
op
sample of aggregate should not differ by more than 43 % (Note
7) of the mean expansion.
NOTE 7—These numbers represent, respectively, the (1s %) and (d2s %)
limits as described in Practice C670.
12.3 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material for
determining the bias of this test method, no statement on bias
is being developed.
13. Keywords
13.1 aggregate; alkali-silica reactivity; length change; mor-
tar; sodium hydroxide
innocuous and deleterious in field performance. For these
aggregates, it is particularly important to develop supplemental
information as described in 4.3. In such a situation, it may also
be useful to take comparator readings until 28 days (8, 10).
NOTE X1.1—Some granitic gneisses and metabasalts have been found
to be deleteriously expansive in field performance even though their
expansion in this test was less than 0.10 % at 16 days after casting (10).
With such aggregate, it is recommended that prior field performance be
investigated. In the absence of field performance data, mitigative measures
should be taken as discussed in 4.4.
Page 142 of 180
 C1260 − 14
REFERENCES

(1) Oberholster, R. E., and Davies, G., “An Accelerated Method for
Testing the Potential Alkali Reactivity of Siliceous Aggregates.”
Cement and Concrete Research, Vol 16, 1986, pp. 181–189.
(2) Davies, G., and Oberholster, R. E., “Use of the NBRI Accelerated Test
to Evaluate the Effectiveness of Mineral Admixtures in Preventing the
Alkali-Silica Reaction,” Cement and Concrete Research, Vol 17,
1987, pp. 97–107.
(3) Davies, G., and Oberholster, R. E., “An Interlaboratory Test Pro-
gramme on the NBRI Accelerated Test to Determine the Alkali-
Reactivity of Aggregates,” National Building Research Institute,
CSIRO, Special Report BOU 92-1987, Pretoria, RSA, 1987, 16 pp.
(4) Oberholster, R. E., “Alkali Reactivity of Siliceous Rock Aggregates:
Diagnosis of the Reaction, Testing of Cement and Aggregate and
Prescription of Preventative Measures,” Alkali in Concrete, Research
and Practice, Copenhagen, 1983, Danish Concrete Association, pp.
419–433.
(5) Hooton, R. D., “Interlaboratory Study of the NBRI Rapid Test Method
(6) Rogers, C.A., “Multi-laboratory Study of the Accelerated Mortar Bar
Test (ASTM Test Method C1260) for Alkali-Silica Reaction,”
Cement, Concrete, and Aggregates, Vol 21, 1999, pp. 185–194.
(7) Hooton, R. D., and Rogers, C. A., “Evaluation of Rapid Test Methods
for Detecting Alkali-Reactive Aggregates,” Proceedings, Eighth In-
ternational Conference on Alkali-Aggregate Reaction, Kyoto, 1989,
pp. 439–444.
(8) Hooton, R. D., “New Aggregate Alkali-Reactivity Test Methods,”
Report MAT-91-14, Ontario Ministry of Transportation, November
1991.
(9) Fournier, B., and Berube, M. A., “Application of the NBRI Acceler-
ated Mortar Bar Test to Siliceous Carbonate Aggregates Produced in
the St. Lawrence Lowlands, Part 2: Proposed Limits, Rates of
Expansion, and Microstructure of Reaction Products,” Cement and
Concrete Research, Vol 21, 1991, pp. 1069–1082.
(10) Hooton, R. D., and Rogers, C. A., “Development of the NBRI Rapid
Mortar Bar Test Leading to its Use in North America,” Proceedings,

y
and CSA Standardization Status,” Report EM-92, Ontario Ministry of Ninth International Conference on AAR in Concrete, London, 1992,
Transport, March 1990, pp. 225–240. pp. 461–467.

op
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

lc
Committee C09 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(C1260 – 07) that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved Aug. 1, 2014.)

(1) Revised 1.2, 2.1, 5.1, and 9.1.

ia
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
fic

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
of

make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
un

(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Page 143 of 180

5
 American Association State
Designation: D 75 – 03 Highway and Transportation
Officials Standard
AASHTO No.: T2

Standard Practice for

Sampling Aggregates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 75; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of original
adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A superscript
epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope E 141 Practice for Acceptance of Evidence Based on the

1.1 This practice covers sampling of coarse and fine aggre- Results of Probability Sampling5
gates for the following purposes:
3. Terminology
1.1.1 Preliminary investigation of the potential source of

y
supply, 3.1 Definitions:
1.1.2 Control of the product at the source of supply, 3.1.1 maximum size of aggregate, n—in specifications for,

1.1.3 Control of the operations at the site of use, and
1.1.4 Acceptance or rejection of the materials.
NOTE 1—Sampling plans and acceptance and control tests vary with the
type of construction in which the material is used. Attention is directed to
Practices E 105 and D 3665.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
lc
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
ia
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
fic
op
or descriptions of aggregate—the smallest sieve opening
through which the entire amount of aggregat is required to
pass. C 125, D 8
3.1.2 maximum aggregate size, (Superpave) n—in specifi-
cations for, or descriptions of aggregate—one size larger than
the nominal maximum aggregate size.
3.1.3 nominal maximum aggregate size (of aggregate),
n—in specifications for, or descriptions of aggregate—the
smallest sieve opening through which the entire amount of the
aggregate is permitted to pass. C 125, D 8
3.1.4 nominal maximum aggregate size (Superpave), n—in
specifications for, or descriptions of aggregate—one size larger
than the first sieve that retains more than 10 % aggregate.

2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1.4.1 Discussion—These definitions in 3.1.2 and 3.1.4

C 125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete apply to hot mix asphalt (HMA) mixtures designed using the
Aggregates2 Superpave system only, and differ from the definitions pub-
C 702 Practice for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to lished in D 8
Testing Size2
of

3.1.4.2 Discussion—Specifications on aggregates usually

D 8 Terminology Relating to Materials for Roads and Pave- stipulate a sieve opening through which all of the aggregate
ments3 may, but not need to, pass so that a slated maximum portion of
D 2234/D 2234M Test Method for Collection of a Gross the aggregate may be retained on that sieve. A sieve opening so
un

Sample of Coal4 designed is the nominal maximum size.

D 3665 Practice for Random Sampling of Construction
Materials3 4. Significance and Use
E 105 Practice for Probability Sampling of Materials5 4.1 Sampling is equally as important as the testing, and the
E 122 Practice for Calculating Sample Size to Estimate, sampler shall use every precaution to obtain samples that will
With a Specified Tolerable Error, the Average Quality of a show the nature and condition of the materials which they
Lot or Process5 represent.
4.2 Samples for preliminary investigation tests are obtained
1
by the party responsible for development of the potential
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D04 on Road and
Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.30 on source (Note 2). Samples of materials for control of the
Methods of Sampling. production at the source or control of the work at the site of use
Current edition approved July 10, 2003. Published September 2003. Originally are obtained by the manufacturer, contractor, or other parties
approved in 1920. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as D 75 – 97.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
responsible for accomplishing the work. Samples for tests to be
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03. used in acceptance or rejection decisions by the purchaser are
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 05.05. obtained by the purchaser or his authorized representative.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 144 of 180

 D 75 – 03
NOTE 2—The preliminary investigation and sampling of potential
aggregate sources and types occupies a very important place in determin-
ing the availability and suitability of the largest single constituent entering
into the construction. It influences the type of construction from the
standpoint of economics and governs the necessary material control to
ensure durability of the resulting structure, from the aggregate standpoint.
This investigation should be done only by a responsible trained and
experienced person. For more comprehensive guidance, see the Appendix.
5. Securing Samples
5.1 General—Where practicable, samples to be tested for
quality shall be obtained from the finished product. Samples
from the finished product to be tested for abrasion loss shall not
be subject to further crushing or manual reduction in particle
size in preparation for the abrasion test unless the size of the
finished product is such that it requires further reduction for
testing purposes.
5.2 Inspection—The material shall be inspected to deter-
mine discernible variations. The seller shall provide suitable
equipment needed for proper inspection and sampling.
5.3 Procedure:
5.3.1 Sampling from a Flowing Aggregate Stream (Bins or
Belt Discharge)—Select units to be sampled by a random
method, such as Practice D 3665, from the production. Obtain
at least three approximately equal increments, selected at
random from the unit being sampled, and combine to form a
field sample whose mass equals or exceeds the minimum
recommended in 5.4.2. Take each increment from the entire
cross section of the material as it is being discharged. It is
lc
ia
usually necessary to have a special device constructed for use
at each particular plant. This device consists of a pan of
sufficient size to intercept the entire cross section of the
fic
discharge stream and hold the required quantity of material
without overflowing. A set of rails may be necessary to support
the pan as it is passed under the discharge stream. Insofar as is
possible, keep bins continuously full or nearly full to reduce
segregation.
of
NOTE 3—Sampling the initial discharge or the final few tons from a bin
or conveyor belt increases the chances of obtaining segregated material
and should be avoided.
un
5.3.2 Sampling from the Conveyor Belt—Select units to be
sampled by a random method, such as Practice D 3665, from
the production. Obtain at least three approximately equal
increments, selected at random, from the unit being sampled
and combine to form a field sample whose mass equals or
exceeds the minimum recommended in 5.4.2. Stop the con-
veyor belt while the sample increments are being obtained.
Insert two templates, the shape of which conforms to the shape
of the belt in the aggregate stream on the belt, and space them
such that the material contained between them will yield an
increment of the required weight. Carefully scoop all material
between the templates into a suitable container and collect the
fines on the belt with a brush and dust pan and add to the
container.
5.3.3 Sampling from Stockpiles or Transportation Units—
Avoid sampling coarse aggregate or mixed coarse and fine
aggregate from stockpiles or transportation units whenever
possible, particularly when the sampling is done for the
purpose of determining aggregate properties that may be
2 Page 145 of 180
dependent upon the grading of the sample. If circumstances
make it necessary to obtain samples from a stockpile of coarse
aggregate or a stockpile of combined coarse and fine aggregate,
design a sampling plan for the specific case under consider-
ation. This approach will allow the sampling agency to use a
sampling plan that will give a confidence in results obtained
therefrom that is agreed upon by all parties concerned to be
acceptable for the particular situation. The sampling plan shall
define the number of samples necessary to represent lots and
sublots of specific sizes. General principles for sampling from
stockpiles are applicable to sampling from trucks, rail cars,
barges, or other transportation units. For general guidance in
sampling from stockpiles, see the Appendix.
5.3.4 Sampling from Roadway (Bases and Subbases)—
Sample units selected by a random method, such as Practice
D 3665, from the construction. Obtain at least three approxi-
y
mately equal increments, selected at random from the unit
being sampled, and combine to form a field sample whose
mass equals or exceeds the minimum recommended in 5.4.2.
op
Take all increments from the roadway for the full depth of the
material, taking care to exclude any underlying material.
Clearly mark the specific areas from which each increment is
to be removed: a metal template placed over the area is a
definite aid in securing approximately equal increment
weights.
5.4 Number and Masses of Field Samples:
5.4.1 The number of field samples (obtained by one of the
methods described in 5.3) required depends on the criticality
of, and variation in, the properties to be measured. Designate
each unit from which a field sample is to be obtained prior to
sampling. The number of field samples from the production
should be sufficient to give the desired confidence in test
results.
NOTE 4—Guidance for determining the number of samples required to
obtain the desired level of confidence in test results may be found in Test
Method D 2234/D 2234M, Practice E 105, Practice E 122, and Practice
E 141.
5.4.2 The field sample masses cited are tentative. The
masses must be predicated on the type and number of tests to
which the material is to be subjected and sufficient material
obtained to provide for the proper execution of these tests.
Standard acceptance and control tests are covered by ASTM
standards and specify the portion of the field sample required
for each specific test. Generally speaking, the amounts speci-
fied in Table 1 will provide adequate material for routine
grading and quality analysis. Extract test portions from the
field sample according to Practice C 702 or as required by
other applicable test methods.
6. Shipping Samples
6.1 Transport aggregates in bags or other containers so
constructed as to preclude loss or contamination of any part of
the sample, or damage to the contents from mishandling during
shipment.
6.2 Shipping containers for aggregate samples shall have
suitable individual identification attached and enclosed so that
field reporting, laboratory logging, and test reporting may be
facilitated.
 D 75 – 03
TABLE 1 Size of Samples 7. Keywords
Aggregate SizeA Field Sample Mass, min, kgB
7.1 aggregates; exploration of potential sources; aggregates;
Fine Aggregate
number and sizes needed to estimate character; aggregates;
2.36 mm 10 sampling
4.75 mm 10
Coarse Aggregate
9.5 mm 10
12.5 mm 15
19.0 mm 25
25.0 mm 50
37.5 mm 75
50 mm 100
63 mm 125
75 mm 150
90 mm 175
A
For processed aggregates, use the nominal maximum size as indicated by the
appropriate specification or description. If the specification or description does not
indicate a nominal maximum size (for example, a sieve size indicating 90-100%
passing), use the maximum size (that sieve indicating 100% passing).

y
B
For combined coarse and fine aggregates (for example, base or subbase
aggregate), the minimum weight shall be coarse aggregate minimum mass plus 10
kg.

op
APPENDIXES

lc
(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. SAMPLING AGGREGATE FROM STOCKPILES OR TRANSPORTATION UNITS

X1.1 Scope layer, which may have become segregated, should be removed
ia
X1.1.1 In some situations it is mandatory to sample aggre- and the sample taken from the material beneath. Sampling
gates that have been stored in stockpiles or loaded into rail tubes approximately 30-mm min by 2-m min in length may be
cars, barges, or trucks. In such cases the procedure should inserted into the pile at random locations to extract a minimum
fic

ensure that segregation does not introduce a serious bias in the of five increments of material to form the sample.
results.
X1.3 Sampling from Transportation Units
X1.2 Sampling from Stockpiles
X1.3.1 In sampling coarse aggregates from railroad cars or
of

X1.2.1 In sampling material from stockpiles it is very

barges, effort should be made to enlist the services of power
difficult to ensure unbiased samples, due to the segregation
equipment capable of exposing the material at various levels
which often occurs when material is stockpiled, with coarser
particles rolling to the outside base of the pile. For coarse or and random locations. Where power equipment is not avail-
able, a common procedure requires excavation of three or more
un

mixed coarse and fine aggregate, every effort should be made

to enlist the services of power equipment to develop a separate,
small sampling pile composed of materials drawn from various
levels and locations in the main pile after which several
increments may be combined to compose the field sample. If
necessary to indicate the degree of variability existing within
the main pile, separate samples should be drawn from separate
areas of the pile.
X1.2.2 Where power equipment is not available, samples
from stockpiles should be made up of at least three increments
taken from the top third, at the mid-point, and at the bottom
third of the volume of the pile. A board shoved vertically into
the pile just above the sampling point aids in preventing further
segregation. In sampling stockpiles of fine aggregate the outer
trenches across the unit at points that will, from visual
appearance, give a reasonable estimate of the characteristics of
the load. The trench bottom should be approximately level, at
least 0.3 m in width and in depth below the surface. A
minimum of three increments from approximately equally
spaced points along each trench should be taken by pushing a
shovel downward into the material. Coarse aggregate in trucks
should be sampled in essentially the same manner as for rail
cars or barges, except for adjusting the number of increments
according to the size of the truck. For fine aggregate in
transportation units, sampling tubes as described in X1.2 may
be used to extract an appropriate number of increments to form
the sample.

3 Page 146 of 180

 D 75 – 03
X2. EXPLORATION OF POTENTIAL AGGREGATE SOURCES
X2.1 Scope
X2.1.1 Sampling for evaluation of potential aggregate
sources should be performed by a responsible trained and
experienced person. Because of the wide variety of conditions
under which sampling may have to be done it is not possible to
describe detailed procedures applicable to all circumstances.
This appendix is intended to provide general guidance and list
more comprehensive references.
X2.2 Sampling Stone from Quarries or Ledges
X2.2.1 Inspection—The ledge or quarry face should be
inspected to determine discernible variations or strata. Differ-
ences in color and structure should be recorded.
X2.2.2 Sampling and Size of Sample—Separate samples
having a mass of at least 25 kg should be obtained from each
discernible stratum. The sample should not include material
weathered to such an extent that it is no longer suitable for the
purpose intended. One or more pieces in each sample should be
at least 150 by 150 by 100 mm in size with the bedding plane
plainly marked, and this piece should be free of seams or
fractures.
X2.2.3 Record—In addition to the general information ac-
companying all samples the following information should
accompany samples taken from ledges or quarry faces:
lc
X2.2.3.1 Approximate quantity available. (If quantity is
ia
very large this may be recorded as practically unlimited.)
X2.2.3.2 Quantity and character of overburden.
X2.2.3.3 A detailed record showing boundaries and location
fic
of material represented by each sample.
NOTE X2.1—A sketch, plan, and elevation, showing the thickness and
location of the different layers is recommended for this purpose.
X2.3 Sampling Roadside or Bank Run Sand and Gravel
of
Deposits
X2.3.1 Inspection—Potential sources of bank run sand and
gravel may include previously worked pits from which there is
un
an exposed face or potential deposits discovered through
X3. NUMBER AND SIZE OF INCREMENTS NEEDED TO ESTIMATE CHARACTER OF UNIT SAMPLED
X3.1 Scope
X3.1.1 This appendix presents the rationale used by the
responsible committee in the development of this practice.
X3.2 Descriptions of Terms Specific to This Standard
X3.2.1 field sample—a quantity of the material to be tested
of sufficient size to provide an acceptable estimate of the
average quality of a unit.
X3.2.2 lot—a sizable isolated quantity of bulk material
from a single source, assumed to have been produced by the
same process (for example, a day’s production or a specific
mass or volume).
X3.2.3 test portion—a quantity of the material of sufficient
size extracted from the larger field sample by a procedure
4 Page 147 of 180
air-photo interpretation, geophysical exploration, or other types
of terrain investigation.
X2.3.2 Sampling—Samples should be so chosen from each
different stratum in the deposit discernible to the sampler. An
estimate of the quantity of the different materials should be
made. If the deposit is worked as an open-face bank or pit,
samples should be taken by channeling the face vertically,
bottom to top, so as to represent the materials proposed for use.
Overburdened or disturbed material should not be included in
the sample. Test holes should be excavated or drilled at
numerous locations in the deposit to determine the quality of
the material and the extent of the deposit beyond the exposed
face, if any. The number and depth of test holes will depend
y
upon the quantity of the material needed, topography of the
area, nature of the deposit, character of the material, and
op
potential value of the material in the deposit. If visual inspec-
tion indicates that there is considerable variation in the
material, individual samples should be selected from the
material in each well defined stratum. Each sample should be
thoroughly mixed and quartered if necessary so that the field
sample thus obtained will be at least 12 kg for sand and 35 kg
if the deposit contains an appreciable amount of coarse
aggregate.
X2.3.3 Record—In addition to the general information ac-
companying all samples the following information should
accompany samples of bank run sand and gravel:
X2.3.3.1 Location of supply.
X2.3.3.2 Estimate of approximate quantity available.
X2.3.3.3 Quantity and character of overburden.
X2.3.3.4 Length of haul to proposed site of work.
X2.3.3.5 Character of haul (kind of road, maximum grades,
and so forth)
X2.3.3.6 Details as to extent and location of material
represented by each sample.
NOTE X2.2—A sketch of plans and elevations, showing the thickness
and location of different layers, is recommended for this purpose.
designed to ensure accurate representation of the field sample,
and thus of the unit sampled.
X3.2.4 unit—a batch or finite subdivision of a lot of bulk
material (for example, a truck load or a specific area covered).
X3.3 Test Unit, Size, and Variability
X3.3.1 The unit to be represented by a single field sample
should neither be so large as to mask the effects of significant
variability within the unit nor be so small as to be affected by
the inherent variability between small portions of any bulk
material.
X3.3.2 A unit of bulk material composed of graded aggre-
gate or aggregate mixtures might consist of a full truckload. If
it were possible, the entire load might be tested; as a practical
 D 75 – 03
matter, a field sample is composed of three or more increments X3.3.3 Significant variability with a lot of material, where it
chosen at random from the material as it is loaded or unloaded might exist, should be indicated by statistical measures, such as
from the truck. Research has shown that such a procedure the standard deviation between units selected at random from
permits an acceptable estimate to be made of the average within the lot.
gradation that might be measured from 15 or 20 increments
from the truck.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above

y
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

5 Page 148 of 180

 Designation: D 2419 – 02

Standard Test Method for

Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 2419; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope D 653 Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained

1.1 This test method is intended to serve as a rapid field- Fluids4
correlation test. The purpose of this test method is to indicate, E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth and Sieves for Testing
under standard conditions, the relative proportions of clay-like Purposes5
2.2 AASHTO Standard:

y
or plastic fines and dust in granular soils and fine aggregates
that pass the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. The term “sand equiva- T 176 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded
lent” expresses the concept that most granular soils and fine Aggregates and Soils by Use of Sand Equivalent Test6

op
aggregates are mixtures of desirable coarse particles, sand, and 3. Terminology
generally undesirable clay or plastic fines and dust.
3.1 Definitions:
NOTE 1—Some agencies perform the test on material with a top size 3.1.1 fine aggregate—aggregate passing the 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.)
smaller than the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. This is done to avoid trapping the
sieve and almost entirely passing the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve
clay-like or plastic fines and dust below flaky shaped 4.75 to 2.36 mm
(No. 4 to 8) sized particles. Testing smaller top sized material may lower
the numerical results of the test.
1.2 Units of Measurement:
lc and predominantly retained on the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve (see
Terminology D 8).
3.1.2 sand equivalent—a measure of the amount of silt or
clay contamination in the fine aggregate (or soil) as determined
1.2.1 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
ia
by test (see Terminology D 653). (For further explanation, see
standard, with the exception of the dimensions of the special
Summary of Test Method and Significance and Use.)
sand equivalent test apparatus described in Fig. 1, in which the
3.1.3 soil—sediments or other unconsolidated accumula-
the inch dimensions are standard. Values in parentheses are for
tions of solid particles produced by the physical and chemical
fic

information only.
disintegration of rocks which may or may not contain organic
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
matter (see Terminology D 653).
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 4. Summary of Test Method
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
of

4.1 A measured volume of soil or fine aggregate and a small

bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. quantity of flocculating solution are poured into a graduated
2. Referenced Documents plastic cylinder and are agitated to loosen the claylike coatings
from the sand particles in the test specimen. The specimen is
un

2.1 ASTM Standards:

then “irrigated” using additional flocculating solution forcing
C 670 Practice for Preparing Precision and Bias Statements
the claylike material into suspension above the sand. After a
for Test Methods for Construction Materials2
prescribed sedimentation period, the height of flocculated clay
C 702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to
is read and the height of sand in the cylinder is determined. The
Testing Size2
sand equivalent is the ratio of the height of sand to the height
D 8 Terminology Relating to Materials for Roads and Pave-
of clay times 100.
ments3
D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates3 5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method assigns an empirical value to the
relative amount, fineness, and character of claylike material
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D04 on Road present in the test specimen.
and Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.51 on
Aggregate Tests.
4
Current edition approved July 10, 2002. Published September 2002. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.08.
5
published as D 2419 – 65 T. Last previous edition D 2419 – 96. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
2 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02. Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03. Officials, 444 N. Capitol St. NW, Suite 225, Washington, DC 20001.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 149 of 180

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
 D 2419 – 02

y
op
Assembly
A
Part No. Description
Siphon Assembly:
lc List of Material
Stock Size, In. Material
ia
1 siphon tube ⁄ diameter by 16
14 copper tube (may be plated)
2 siphon hose ⁄ ID by 48
3 16 rubber tube, pure gum or equivalent
3 blow hose 3⁄16 ID by 2 rubber tube, pure gum or equivalent
4 blow tube 1⁄4 diameter by 2 copper tube (may be plated)
5 2-hole stopper No. 6 rubber
fic

6 irrigator tube 1⁄4 OD 0.035 wall by 20 SS tube, Type 316

7 clamp Pinchcock, Day, BKH No. 21730 or equivalent

B A,B Graduate Assembly:

8 tube 1.50 OD by 17 transparent acrylic plastic

9 base ⁄ by 4 by 4
14 transparent acrylic plastic
of

CC Weighted Foot Assembly:

10 sand reading indicator 11⁄4 diameter by 0.59 nylon 101 type 66 annealed
11 rod ⁄ diameter by 171⁄2
14 brass (may be plated)
12 weight 2 diameter by 2.078 C. R. steel (may be plated)
un

13 roll pin 1⁄16 diameter by1⁄2 corrosion-resistant metal

14 foot 11⁄16 hex by 0.54 brass (may be plated)
15 solid stopper No. 7 rubber
A
Assembly B—Accuracy of scale should be6 0.010 in. per tenth of an inch. Error at any point on scale should be6 0.030 in. of true distance to zero.
B
Assembly B—Graduations on graduate should be in tenths of an inch. Inch marks should be numerically designated as shown. The inch and half-inch division lines
should be approximately 1⁄4 in. long. All division lines should be 0.015 in. deep with width across top 0.030 in.
C
Assembly C—Weighted foot assembly should weigh 1000 6 5 g.
Metric Equivalents
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
0.001 0.025 0.13 3.30 0.62 15.75 2 50.80
0.005 0.127 3⁄16 4.76 0.63 16.00 2.078 52.78
0.010 0.254 0.25 6.35 0.75 19.05 4 101.60
0.015 0.381 1⁄4 6.35 3⁄4 19.05 10.10 256.54
0.020 0.508 0.30 7.62 1 25.4 15 381.00
0.030 0.762 5⁄16 7.94 11⁄16 26.99 16 406.40
0.035 0.889 3⁄8 9.51 1.24 31.50 17 431.80
1⁄16 1.59 0.50 12.70 11⁄4 31.75 17.5 444.50
0.100 2.54 0.54 13.72 1.50 38.10 20 508.00
1⁄8 3.17 0.59 14.99 11⁄2 38.10 48 1219.2

NOTE 1—The sand reading indicator and foot specified by ASTM Method D 2419 – 69. Fig. 1, may be used where this equipment is previously
available.
FIG. 1 Sand Equivalent Test Apparatus

2 Page 150 of 180

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
 D 2419 – 02
5.2 A minimum sand equivalent value may be specified to
limit the permissible quantity of claylike fines in an aggregate.
5.3 This test method provides a rapid field method for
determining changes in the quality of aggregates during
production or placement.
6. Interferences
6.1 Maintain the temperature of the working solution at 22
6 3°C (72 6 5°F) during the performance of this test.
NOTE 2—If field conditions preclude the maintenance of the tempera-
ture range, frequent referee samples should be submitted to a laboratory
where proper temperature control is possible. It is also possible to
establish temperature correction curves for each material being tested
where proper temperature control is not possible. However, no general
correction should be utilized for several materials even within a narrow
range of sand equivalent values. Samples that meet the minimum sand
equivalent requirement at a working solution temperature below the
recommended range need not be subject to referee testing.
6.2 Perform the test at a location free from vibration.
Excessive vibration may cause the suspended material to settle
at a greater rate than normal.
6.3 Do not expose the plastic cylinders to direct sunlight any
more than is necessary.
6.4 Occasionally it may be necessary to remove a fungus
growth from the working calcium chloride solution container
and from the inside of the flexible tubing and irrigator tube.
This fungus can easily be seen as a slimy substance in the
solution, or as a mold growing on the inside of the container.
lc
ia
6.4.1 To remove this growth, prepare a cleaning solvent by
diluting sodium hypochlorite solution (household chlorine
bleach) with an equal quantity of water.
6.4.2 After discarding the contaminated solution, fill the
fic
solution container with the prepared cleaning solvent: allow
about 1 L of the cleaning solvent to flow through the siphon
assembly and irrigator tube, then place the pinch clamp on the
end of the tubing to cut off the flow of solvent and to hold the
of
solvent in the tube. Refill the container and allow to stand
overnight.
6.4.3 After soaking, allow the cleaning solvent to flow out
through the siphon assembly and irrigator tube.
un
FIG. 2 Mechanized Shakers
3 Page 151 of 180
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
6.4.4 Remove the siphon assembly from the solution con-
tainer and rinse both with clear water. The irrigator tube and
siphon assembly can be rinsed easily by attaching a hose
between the tip of the irrigator tube and water faucet and
backwashing fresh water through the tube.
6.5 Occasionally the holes in the tip of the irrigator tube
may become clogged by a particle of sand. If the obstruction
cannot be freed by any other method, use a pin or other sharp
object to force it out using extreme care not to enlarge the size
of the opening.
6.6 Working solution which is more than two weeks old
shall be discarded.
6.7 Mixing and storage container(s) for solutions shall be
thoroughly rinsed prior to mixing a fresh batch of solution.
6.8 Fresh solution shall not be added to old solution
regardless of age.
y
7. Apparatus
7.1 A graduated transparent acrylic plastic cylinder, rubber
op
stopper, irrigator tube, weighted foot assembly and siphon
assembly all conforming to the respective specifications and
dimensions shown in Fig. 1. See Annex A1 for alternative
apparatus.
7.2 Measuring Tin— A cylindrical tin approximately 57 mm
(21⁄4 in.) in diameter having a capacity of 85 6 5 mL.
7.3 4.75-mm (No. 4) Sieve, conforming to the requirements
of Specification E 11.
7.4 Funnel, wide-mouth, for transferring test specimens into
the graduated cylinder.
7.5 Bottles, two 3.8-L (1.0-gal) to store stock solution and
working solution.
7.6 Flat Pan, for mixing.
7.7 Clock or Watch, reading in minutes and seconds.
7.8 Mechanical Sand Equivalent Shaker, designed to hold
the required graduated plastic cylinder in a horizontal position
while subjecting it to a reciprocating motion parallel to its
length and having a throw of 203.2 6 1.0 mm (8 6 0.04 in.)
and operating at 175 6 2 cpm. A typical apparatus is shown in
Fig. 2. The shaker shall be securely fastened to a firm and level
mount.
 D 2419 – 02
NOTE 3—Moving parts of the mechanical shaker should be provided
with a safety guard for protection of the operator.
7.9 Manually Operated Sand Equivalent Shaker—
(optional), as shown in Fig. 3, or equivalent, capable of
producing an oscillating motion at a rate of 100 complete
cycles in 45 6 5 s, with a hand-assisted half stroke length of
12.7 6 0.5 cm (5 6 0.2 in.). The device shall be designed to
hold the required graduated cylinder in a horizontal position
while subjecting it to a reciprocating motion parallel to its
length. The shaker shall be fastened securely to a firm and level
mount. If only a few tests are to be run the shaker may be held
by hand on a firm level mount.
7.10 Oven, of sufficient size, and capable of maintaining a
temperature of 110 6 5°C (230 6 9°F).
7.11 Filter Paper, Watman No. 2V or equivalent.
8. Reagents and Materials
8.1 Stock Solution— The materials listed in 8.1.1, 8.1.2 or
8.1.3 may be used to prepare the stock solution. If the use of
formaldehyde as the biocide is of concern, the materials in
8.1.2 or 8.1.3 should be used. A fourth alternative is not to use
any biocide provided the time of storage of stock solution is not
sufficient to promote the growth of fungi.
8.1.1 Stock solution with formaldehyde.
8.1.1.1 Anhydrous Calcium Chloride, 454 g (1.0 lb) of
technical grade.
8.1.1.2 USP Glycerin, 2050 g (1640 mL).
8.1.1.3 Formaldehyde, (40 volume % solution) 47 g (45
lc
ia
mL).
8.1.1.4 Dissolve the 454 g (1.0 lb) of calcium chloride in
1.89 L (1⁄2 gal) of distilled water. Cool and filter through ready
pleated rapid filtering paper. Add the 2050 g of glycerin and the
fic
47 g of formaldehyde to the filtered solution, mix well, and
dilute to 3.78 L (1 gal).
8.1.2 Stock solution with glutaraldehyde.
8.1.2.1 Calcium Chloride Dihydrate, 577 g (1.27 lb) of A.
of
C. S. grade.
un
FIG. 3 Manually Operated Shaker
4 Page 152 of 180
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
NOTE 4—ACS grade calcium chloride dihydrate is specified for the
stock solution prepared with glutaraldehyde because tests indicate that
impurities in the technical grade anhydrous calcium chloride may react
with the glutaraldehyde resulting in an unknown precipitate.
8.1.2.2 USP Glycerin, 2050 g (1640 mL).
8.1.2.3 1,5-Pentanedial (Glutaraldehyde), 50 % solution in
water 59 g (53 mL).
8.1.2.4 Dissolve the 577 g (1.27 lb) of calcium chloride
dihydrate in 1.89 L (1⁄2 gal) of distilled water. Cool and add the
2050 g of glycerin and the 59 g of glutaraldehyde to the
solution, mix well, and dilute to 3.78 L (1 gal).
NOTE 5—1,5-pentanedial, also known as glutaraldehyde, glutaric dial-
dehyde, and trade name UCARCIDE 250, may be obtained as “Glutaral-
dehyde Solution 50 %.”7
8.1.3 Stock solution with Kathon CG/ICP.
8.1.3.1 Calcium Chloride Dihydrate, 577 g (1.27 lb) of A.
y
C. S. grade.
8.1.3.2 USP Glycerin, 2050 g (1640 mL).
8.1.3.3 Kathon CG/ICP8, 63 g (53 mL).
op
8.1.3.4 Dissolve the 577 g (1.27 lb) of calcium chloride
dihydrate in 1.89 L (1⁄2 gal) of distilled water. Cool and add the
2050 g of glycerin and the 63 g of Kathon CG/ICP to the
solution, mix well, and dilute to 3.78 L (1 gal).
8.2 Working Calcium Chloride Solution—Prepare the work-
ing calcium chloride solution by diluting one measuring tin (85
6 5 mL) full of the stock calcium chloride solution to 3.8 L
(1.0 gal) with water. Use distilled or demineralized water for
the normal preparation of the working solution. However, if it
is determined that the local tap water is of such purity that it
does not affect the test results, it is permissible to use it instead
of distilled or demineralized water except in the event of
dispute.
7
Available from Aldrich Chemical Company, P. O. Box 2060, Milwaukee, WI
53201 or Fisher Scientific, 711 Forbes Ave., Pittsburg, PA 15219.
8
Kathon CG/ICP may be obtained from Rohm and Hass Chemical Company,
Independence Mall West, Philadelphia, PA 19105.
 D 2419 – 02
NOTE 6—The effect of local tap water on sand equivalent test results
may be determined by comparing the results of three sand equivalent tests
using distilled water with the results of three sand equivalent tests using
the local tap water. The six test specimens required for this comparison
shall be prepared from the sample of material and oven-dried as prescribed
in this test method.
9. Sample Preparation
9.1 Sample the material to be tested in accordance with
Practice D 75.
9.2 Thoroughly mix the sample and reduce it as necessary
using the applicable procedures in Practice C 702.
9.3 Obtain at least 1500 g of material passing the 4.75-mm
(No. 4) sieve in the following manner:
9.3.1 Separate the sample on the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve by
means of a lateral and vertical motion of the sieve, accompa-
nied by a jarring action so as to keep the sample moving
continuously over the surface of the sieve. Continue the sieving
until not more than 1 weight % of the residue passes the sieve
during 1 min. Perform the sieving operation either by hand or
by a mechanical apparatus. When thoroughness of mechanical
sieving is being determined, test by the hand method described
above using a single layer of material on the sieve.
9.3.2 Break down any lumps of material in the coarse
fraction to pass the 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve. Use a mortar and
rubber-covered pestle or any other means that will not cause
appreciable degradation of the aggregate.
9.3.3 Remove any coatings of fines adhering to the coarse
aggregate. These fines may be removed by surface-drying the
lc
ia
coarse aggregate, then rubbing between the hands over a flat
pan.
9.3.4 Add the material passing the sieve obtained in 9.3.2
fic
and 9.3.3 to the separated fine portion of the sample.
9.4 Prepare test specimens from the material passing the
4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve portion of the sample by either the
procedure described in 9.4.1 or 9.4.2.
of
NOTE 7—Experiments show that as the amount of material being
reduced by splitting or quartering is decreased, the accuracy of providing
representative portions is decreased. For this reason, it is imperative that
extreme care be exercised when preparing the test specimens.
un
9.4.1 Test Specimen Preparation, Procedure A:
9.4.1.1 If it appears necessary, dampen the material to avoid
segregation or loss of fines during the splitting or quartering
operations. Use care in adding moisture to the sample to retain
a free-flowing condition of the material.
9.4.1.2 Using the measuring tin, dip out four of these
measures from the sample. Each time a measure full of the
material is dipped from the sample, tap the bottom edge of the
measure on a work table or other hard surface at least four
times and jog it slightly to produce a measure of consolidated
material level-full or slightly rounded above the brim.
9.4.1.3 Determine and record the amount of material con-
tained in these four measures either by weight or by volume in
a dry plastic cylinder.
9.4.1.4 Return this material back to the sample and proceed
to split or quarter the sample, using the applicable procedures
in Practice C 702 and making the necessary adjustments to
obtain the predetermined weight or volume. When this weight
or volume is obtained, two successive splitting or quartering
5 Page 153 of 180
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
operations without adjustment should provide the proper
amount of material to fill the measure, and therefore provide
one test specimen.
9.4.1.5 Dry the test specimen to constant weight at 110 6
5°C (230 6 9°F) and cool to room temperature before testing.
NOTE 8—Sand equivalent results on test specimens that have not been
dried will generally be lower than the results obtained on identical test
specimens that have been dried. As a time-saving expedient, it is
permissible to test most materials without drying when the sand equivalent
value is used to determine compliance with a specification giving a
minimum acceptable test value. If the resulting test value is lower than
that specified, however, it will be necessary to rerun the test on a dried test
specimen. If the sand equivalent determined from a test on one dried test
specimen, is below the minimum specification limit, it will be necessary
to perform two additional tests on dried test specimens from the same
sample. The sand equivalent for a sample shall be determined in
accordance with the calculation section.
y
9.4.2 Test Specimen Preparation, Procedure B:
9.4.2.1 Maintaining a free-flowing condition, dampen the
op
material sufficiently to prevent segregation or loss of fines.
9.4.2.2 Split or quarter out 1000 to 1500 g of the material.
Mix thoroughly with a hand trowel in a circular pan by
scooping toward the middle of the pan while rotating it
horizontally. Mixing or remixing should be continued for at
least 1 min to achieve uniformity. Check the material for the
necessary moisture condition by tightly squeezing a small
portion of the thoroughly mixed sample in the palm of the
hand. If a cast is formed that permits careful handling without
breaking, the correct moisture range has been obtained. If the
material is too dry, the cast will crumble and it will be
necessary to add water and remix and retest until the material
forms a cast. If the material shows any free water it is too wet
to test and must be drained and air-dried, mixing it frequently
to ensure uniformity. This overly wet material will form a good
cast when checked initially, so the drying process should
continue until a squeeze check on the drying material gives a
cast which is more fragile and delicate to handle than the
original. If the “as received” moisture content is within the
limits described above, the sample may be run immediately. If
the moisture content is altered to meet these limits, the sample
should be put in the pan, covered with a lid or with a damp
towel that does not touch the material, and allowed to stand for
a minimum of 15 min.
9.4.2.3 After the minimum curing time, remix for 1 min
without water. When thoroughly mixed, form the material into
a cone with a trowel.
9.4.2.4 Take the tin measure in one hand and push it directly
through the base of the pile while holding the free hand firmly
against the pile opposite the measure.
9.4.2.5 As the can travels through the pile and emerges, hold
enough hand pressure to cause the material to fill the can to
overflowing. Press firmly with the palm of the hand, compact-
ing the material until it consolidates in the can. The excess
material should be struck off level with the top of the can,
moving the edge of the trowel in a sawing motion across the
brim.
9.4.2.6 To obtain additional test specimens, repeat the
procedures in 9.4.2.3 through 9.4.2.5.
 D 2419 – 02
10. Preparation of Apparatus
10.1 Fit the siphon assembly to a 3.8-L (1.0-gal) bottle of
working calcium chloride solution. Place the bottle on a shelf
90 6 5 cm (36 6 2 in.) above the working surface, (see Fig. 4).
NOTE 9—Instead of the 3.8-L (1.0-gal) bottle, a glass or plastic vat
having a larger capacity may be used provided the liquid level of the
working solution is maintained between 90 and 120 cm (36 and 48 in.)
above the work surface.
10.2 Start the siphon by blowing into the top of the solution
bottle through a short piece of tubing while the pinch clamp is
open.

11. Procedure
11.1 Siphon 4 6 0.1 in. (102 6 3 mm) (indicated on the
graduated cylinder) of working calcium chloride solution into
the plastic cylinder.

y
11.2 Pour one of the test specimens into the plastic cylinder
using the funnel to avoid spillage (see Fig. 5).

op
11.3 Tap the bottom of the cylinder sharply on the heel of
the hand several times to release air bubbles and to promote
thorough wetting of the specimen.
11.4 Allow the wetted specimen and cylinder to stand FIG. 5 Transfer of Samples from Measuring Tin to Cylinder
undisturbed for 10 6 1 min.
11.5 At the end of the 10-min soaking period, stopper the
cylinder, then loosen the material from the bottom by partially
inverting the cylinder and shaking it simultaneously.
11.6 After loosening the material from the bottom of the
lc 11.6.2 Manual Shaker Method:
11.6.2.1 Secure the stoppered cylinder in the three spring
clamps of the carriage of the hand-operated sand equivalent
shaker and reset the stroke counter to zero.
cylinder, shake the cylinder and contents by any of the
ia
following three methods: NOTE 10—To prevent spillage, be sure the stopper is firmly seated in
11.6.1 Mechanical Shaker Method—Place the stoppered the cylinder before placing in the manual shaker.
cylinder in the mechanical sand equivalent shaker, set the time, 11.6.2.2 Stand directly in front of the shaker and force the
fic

and allow the machine to shake the cylinder and the contents pointer to the stroke limit marker painted on the backboard by
for 45 6 1 s. applying an abrupt horizontal thrust to the upper portion of the
right-hand spring steel strap. Then remove the hand from the
strap and allow the spring action of the straps to move the
of

carriage and cylinder in the opposite direction without assis-

tance or hindrance.
11.6.2.3 Apply enough force to the right-hand spring steel
strap during the thrust portion of each stroke to move the
un

pointer to the stroke limit marker by pushing against the strap

FIG. 4 Graduated Cylinder, Irrigator Tube, Weighted Foot
Assembly, and Siphon
with the ends of the fingers to maintain a smooth oscillating
motion (see Fig. 6). The center of the stroke limit marker is
positioned to provide the proper stroke length and its width
provides the maximum allowable limits of variation. The
proper shaking action is accomplished only when the tip of the
pointer reverses direction within the marker limits. Proper
shaking action can best be maintained by using only the
forearm and wrist action to propel the shaker.
11.6.2.4 Continue the shaking action for 100 strokes.
11.6.3 Hand Method:
11.6.3.1 Hold the cylinder in a horizontal position as illus-
trated in Fig. 7 and shake it vigorously in a horizontal linear
motion from end to end.
11.6.3.2 Shake the cylinder 90 cycles in approximately 30 s
using a throw of 23 6 3 cm (9 6 1 in.). A cycle is defined as
a complete back and forth motion. To shake the cylinder at this
speed properly, it will be necessary for the operator to shake
with the forearms only, relaxing the body and shoulders.

6 Page 154 of 180

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
 D 2419 – 02
FIG. 6 Use of Manual Shaker
lc
ia
fic
of
FIG. 7 Using Hand Method of Shaking
un
11.7 Following the shaking operation, set the cylinder
upright on the work table and remove the stopper.
11.8 Irrigation Procedure:
11.8.1 During the irrigation procedure, keep the cylinder
vertical and the base in contact with the work surface. Insert
the irrigator tube in the top of the cylinder, remove the spring
clamp from the hose, and rinse the material from the cylinder
walls as the irrigator is lowered. Force the irrigator through the
material to the bottom of the cylinder by applying a gentle
stabbing and twisting action while the working solution flows
from the irrigator tip. This flushes the fine material into
suspension above the coarser sand particles (see Fig. 8).
11.8.2 Continue to apply a stabbing and twisting action
while flushing the fines upward until the cylinder is filled to the
15-in. (38.0 cm) graduation. Then raise the irrigator tube
slowly without shutting off the flow so that the liquid level is
maintained at about the 15-in. (38.0-cm) graduation while the
irrigator tube is being withdrawn. Regulate the flow just before
7 Page 155 of 180
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
y
op
FIG. 8 Irrigation
the irrigator tube is entirely withdrawn and adjust the final level
to the 15-in. (38.0-cm) graduation.
11.9 Allow the cylinder and contents to stand undisturbed
for 20 min 6 15 s. Start the timing immediately after
withdrawing the irrigator tube.
11.10 At the end of the 20-min sedimentation period, read
and record the level of the top of the clay suspension as
prescribed in 11.12. This is referred to as the “clay reading.” If
no clear line of demarcation has formed at the end of the
specified 20-min sedimentation period, allow the sample to
stand undisturbed until a clay reading can be obtained; then
immediately read and record the level of the top of the clay
suspension and the total sedimentation time. If the total
sedimentation time exceeds 30 min, rerun the test using three
individual specimens of the same material. Record the clay
column height for the sample requiring the shortest sedimen-
tation period as the clay reading.
11.11 Sand Reading Determination:
11.11.1 After the clay reading has been taken, place the
weighted foot assembly over the cylinder and gently lower the
assembly until it comes to rest on the sand. Do not allow the
indicator to hit the mouth of the cylinder as the assembly is
being lowered.
11.11.2 As the weighted foot comes to rest on the sand, tip
the assembly toward the graduations on the cylinder until the
indicator touches the inside of the cylinder. Subtract 10-in.
(25.4 cm) from the level indicated by the extreme top edge of
the indicator and record this value as the “sand reading” (see
Fig. 9).
NOTE 11—See Annex A1 for the use of alternative foot apparatus and
measurement procedure.
11.11.3 When taking the sand reading, use care not to press
down on the weighted foot assembly since this could give an
erroneous reading.
 D 2419 – 02
12.3.1 Calculate SE values: 41.2, 43.8, 40.9.
12.3.2 After raising each to the next higher whole number
they become 42, 44, 41.
12.3.3 Determine the average of these values as follows:
~42 1 44 1 41!/3 5 42.3 (3)

12.3.4 Since the average value is not a whole number, it is

raised to the next higher whole number, and the sand equiva-
lent value is reported as 43.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 Precision—The following estimates of precision for
this test method are based on results from the AASHTO
Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Reference Sample
program, with testing conducted using this test method and
AASHTO Method T 176. There are no significant differences

y
between the two methods. The data are based on the analyses
of eight paired test results from 50 to 80 laboratories, with the
range of average sand equivalent values for the samples

op
varying from approximately 60 to 90.
13.1.1 Single Operator Precision—The single operator
standard deviation has been found to be 1.5 for sand equivalent
FIG. 9 Sand Reading
values greater than 80 and 2.9 for values less than 80 (1s).9
Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by the same

reading.
lc
11.12 If clay or sand readings fall between 0.1-in. (2.5-mm)
graduations, record the level of the higher graduation as the
operator on similar material should not differ by more than 4.2
and 8.2, respectively (d2s).
13.1.2 Multi-laboratory Precision—The multi-laboratory
standard deviation has been found to be 4.4 for sand equivalent
ia
12. Calculation and Report values greater than 80 and 8.0 for values less than 80
12.1 Calculate the sand equivalent to the nearest 0.1 % as (1s).9Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests from
follows: different laboratories on similar material should not differ by
more than 12.5 and 22.6,9 respectively (d2s).
fic

SE 5 ~ sand reading/clay reading! 3 100 (1)

13.1.3 Additional precision data is available from a study
done by one state agency involving the circulation of pairs of
where: samples to over 20 laboratories on three separate occasions.
SE = sand equivalent. The range of average sand equivalent values for these samples
of

12.2 If the calculated sand equivalent is not a whole
number, report it as the next higher whole number. For
example, if the clay level were 8.0 and the sand level were 3.3,
the calculated sand equivalent would be:
un
varied from approximately 30 to 50; these were materials
containing much more fines than the AMRL samples reported
on in 13.1.1 and 13.1.2.
13.1.3.1 The Multi-laboratory standard deviation from these

~3.3/8.0! 3 100 5 41.2 (2)
Since this calculated sand equivalent is not a whole number
it would be reported as the next higher whole number which is
42.
12.3 If it is desired to average a series of sand equivalent
values, average the whole number values determined as de-
scribed in 12.2. If the average of these values is not a whole
number, raise it to the next higher whole number as shown in
the following example:
single agency tests was found to be 3.2 (1s). Therefore, within
the laboratories of this agency, results of two properly con-
ducted tests from different laboratories on similar material
should not differ by more than 9.1 (d2s).
13.2 Bias—The procedure in this test method has no bias
because the value of sand equivalent is defined only in terms of
the test method.
9
These numbers represent, respectively, the (ls) and (d2s) limits as described in
Practice C 670.

8 Page 156 of 180

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
 D 2419 – 02
ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. READING PROCEDURE FOR THE SAND READING WHEN THE 1969 SAND READING INDICATOR AND FOOT
CONFORMING TO FIG. OF ASTM D2419 – 69 IS BEING USED

y
op
FIG. A1.1 1969 Weighted Foot Assembly from Test Method D 2419 – 69

A1.1 Differences in 1969 Equipment:

A1.1.1 See Fig. A1.1 for the 1969 weighted foot (Assembly
C) and the details of the 1969 Foot (Item 14).
lc position on the mouth of the cylinder and gently lower
theassembly until it comes to rest on the sand. While the
weighted foot is being lowered, keep one of the adj. screws
(see Item 10 on Fig. A1.1) in contact with the cylinder wall
ia
A1.2 Sand Reading Procedure when 1969 foot assembly is near the graduations so that it can be seen at all times. When
used: the weighted foot has come to rest on the sand, read and record
A1.2.1 After the clay reading has been taken, place the the level of the horizontal slot of the adj. screw as the “Sand
fic

weighted foot assembly over the cylinder with the guide cap in Reading” value.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
of

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
un

responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

9 Page 157 of 180

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved);
Reproduction authorized per License Agreement with Neil Trigwell (Bodycote Materials Testing Ltd); Tue Feb 22 12:34:46 EST 2005
 Designation: D 3398 – 00

Standard Test Method for

Index of Aggregate Particle Shape and Texture1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 3398; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope * 3. Significance and Use

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the particle
index of aggregate as an overall measure of particle shape and
texture characteristics.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses may be
approximate, except with regard to sieve size and size of
3.1 This test method provides an index value to the relative
particle shape and texture characteristics of aggregates. This
value is a quantitative measure of the aggregate shape and
texture characteristics that may affect the performance of road
and paving mixtures. This test method has been successfully
used to indicate the effects of these characteristics on the

y
aggregate, the standard SI designations shown in parentheses compaction and strength characteristics of soil-aggregate and
are the standard as stated in Specification E 11. asphalt concrete mixtures.6,7,8,9

1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
op
4. Apparatus
4.1 Cylindrical Molds—Cylindrical molds for determining
voids in aggregate, in accordance with the procedure described
in this test method, shall be machined to accurate dimensions

2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
C 127 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of
lc on the inside, and sufficiently rigid to retain their forms under
rough usage. The dimensions of the molds shall conform to the
limits in Table 1.
4.2 Tamping Rods—Round, straight, steel tamping rods,
ia
Coarse Aggregate2 having the tamping end rounded to a hemispherical tip, shall be
C 128 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of enclosed in a loose-fitting steel sleeve as shown in Fig. 1, to
Fine Aggregate2 control the height of drop to exactly 2 in. (50 mm). The
C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse dimensions and mass of the tamping rods shall conform to the
fic

Aggregates2 limits in Table 2.

C 702 Practice for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to 4.3 Balance—A balance having a minimum capacity of 15
Testing Size2 kg and meeting the requirements of Specification D 4753,
D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates3 Class GP5.
of

D 1883 Test Method for Bearing Ratio of Laboratory-

Compacted Soils4 5. Sampling
D 3665 Practice for Random Sampling of Construction 5.1 Sample the aggregate to be tested in accordance with
Materials3 Practices D 75 and D 3665, and reduce to the appropriate test
un

D 4753 Specification for Evaluating, Selecting, and Speci-
fying Balances and Scales for Use in Testing Soil, Rock,
and Related Construction Materials4
E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth and Sieves for Testing
Purposes5
sample size in accordance with Practice C 702.
6. Calibration of Mold
6.1 Determine the volume of the mold in millilitres as
described below at least two times, and use the average volume

6
Huang, E. Y., “A Test for Evaluating the Geometric Characteristics of Coarse
Aggregate Particles,” ASTM Proceedings, Vol 62, 1962, pp. 1223–1242.
7
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D04 on Roads Huang, E. Y., Auer, A., and Triffo, R. P., “Effect of Geometric Characteristics
and Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.51 on of Coarse Aggregates on Strength of Soil-Aggregate Mixtures,” ASTM Proceedings,
Aggregate Tests. Vol 64, 1964, pp. 922–933.
8
Current edition approved July 10, 2000. Published September 2000. Originally McLeod, Norman W., and McLean, J. A., “A Laboratory Investigation of the
published as D 3398 – 75. Last previous edition D 3398 – 97. Compaction of Dense Graded Asphalt Concrete,” paper presented at the 19th
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02. Annual Conference of the Canadian Technical Asphalt Association, Regina
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03. Saskatchewan, Canada, 1974.
9
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.08. McLeod, Norman W., and Davidson, J. Keith, “Particle Index Evaluation of
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. Aggregate Paving Mixtures,” Proceedings, Association of Asphalt Paving Tech-
nologies, Vol 50, 1981, pp. 251–290.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 158 of 180

 D 3398
TABLE 1 Dimensions of Cylindrical Molds
Mold Inside Inside Min Thickness of
For Testing Aggregate
Designa- Diameter, Height, Metal, in. (mm)
tionA,B in. (mm) in. (mm) Bottom Wall Passing, in. (mm) Retained, in. (mm)
A 8.00 6 0.01 9.33 6 0.01 0.24 0.24 11⁄2 1
(203.2 6 0.2) (237.0 6 0.2) (6.1) (6.1) (38.1) (25.4)
BC 6.00 6 0.01 7.00 6 0.01 0.24 0.24 1 (25.4) 3⁄4 (19.0)

(152.40 6 0.2) (177.8 6 0.2) (6.1) (6.1) 3⁄4 (19.0) 1⁄2 (12.7)

C 4.00 6 0.01 4.6 6 0.01 0.20 0.20 1⁄2 (12.7) 3⁄8 (95)

(101.6 6 0.1) (118.5 6 0.2) (5.1) (5.1) 3⁄8 (9.5) No. 4 (4.75)
D 3.00 6 0.01 3.50 6 0.01 0.16 0.16 No. 4 (4.75) No. 8 (236)
(76.2 6 0.2) (88.9 6 0.2) (4.1) (4.1) No. 8 (2.36) No. 16 (118)
No. 16 (1.18) No. 3 (600 µm)
E 2.00 6 0.01 2.33 6 0.01 0.15 0.15 No. 30 (600 µm) No. 50 (300 µm)
(50.8 6 0.2) (59.3 6 0.2) (3.8) (3.8) No. 50 (300 µm) No. 100 (150 µm)
No. 100 (150 µm) No. 200 (175 µm)
A
A cylindrical mold with a given designation must be used with the tamping rod having the same designation.
B
A mold designated for testing a given aggregates size fraction may also be used to test any smaller size fraction.
C
The mold specified in Test Method D 1883 is the same size.

y
TABLE 2 Dimensions and Mass of Tamping Rods
Rod
Diameter, Length,

op
Designa- Mass, g
in. (mm) in. (mm)
tionA
A 0.83 6 0.01 32.0 6 0.01 2204 6 10
(21.2 6 0.2) (814.0 6 0.2)
B 0.63 6 0.1 24.0 6 0.01 930 6 10
(15.9 6 0.2) (610.0 6 0.2)

lc C

E
0.42 6 0.01
(10.6 6 0.2)
0.31 6 0.01
(7.9 6 0.2)
0.21 6 0.01
(5.3 6 0.2)
16.0 6 0.01
(406.9 6 0.2)
12.0 6 0.01
306.0 6 0.2)
7.9 6 0.01
(201.7 6 0.2)
276 6 3

116 6 1

34 6 0.5
ia
A
A tamping rod with a given designation must be used with a mold having the
same designation.

TABLE 3 Aggregate Specimen Size for Test Using Various Molds

fic

Mold Designation Aggregate Specimen Size, lb (kg)

A 30 (13.6)
B 13 ( 5.9)
C 4 ( 1.8)
of

D 2 ( 0.9)
E 0.6 ( 0.3)

TABLE 4 Specific Volume of Water at Different TemperaturesA

un

Temperature, °F (°C) Specific Volume, mL/g

54 (12) 1.0005
57 (14) 1.0007
FIG. 1 Tamping Rod and Sleeve 61 (16) 1.0010
64 (18) 1.0014
68 (20) 1.0018
in the calculation of the percentage of voids in 8.2. 72 (22) 1.0022
6.1.1 Fill the mold with water at room temperature and 75 (24) 1.0027
79 (26) 1.0032
cover with a piece of plate glass in such a way as to eliminate 82 (28) 1.0038
bubbles and excess water. 86 (30) 1.0044
6.1.2 Determine the mass of water in the mold to an 90 (32) 1.0050
accuracy of 4 g or less. A
Values other than those shown may be obtained from the Handbook of
6.1.3 Measure the temperature of the water and determine Chemistry and Physics, Chemical Rubber Publishing Co., Cleveland, Ohio.

the volume of the mold by multiplying the mass of the water by

the corresponding specific volume of water given in Table 4 for
the temperature involved.
7. Test Specimen Preparation
7.1 Obtain a sample that yields at least the mass required for
the mold being used (see Table 3) for each size fraction to be
tested. Test each size fraction, listed in 7.2, when present in the
aggregate in amounts of 10 % or more.
7.2 Wash the sample of aggregate by decantation of the
wash water through the No. 200 (75-µm) sieve or through a
sieve at least one size smaller than that which is to be the lower
limit of the smallest sieve-size fraction to be tested. Continue

2 Page 159 of 180

 D 3398
the washing and decanting operation until the wash water is
clear. Then flush the residue on the sieve back into the
aggregate sample. Dry the sample to constant weight at a
temperature of 230 6 9°F (110 6 5°C) and sieve the material
in accordance with Test Method C 136 into the following size
fractions:
Passing Retained
11⁄2 in. (37.5 mm) 1 in. (25.0 mm)
1 in. (25.0 mm) 3⁄4 in. (19.0)
3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm) 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm)
1⁄2 in. (12.5 mm) 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm)
3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm)
No. 4 (4.75 mm)
No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm)
No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm)
No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600 µm)
No. 30 (600 µm) No. 50 (300 µm)
No. 50 (300 µm) No. 100 (150 µm)
No. 100 (150 µm) No. 200 (75 µm)
It is not necessary to include sieves in the sieve analysis
below the smallest size which is available in an amount of
more than 10 %.
7.3 After the required amount of material has been sieved
for each size fraction to be tested, determine the bulk-dry
specific gravity of each size fraction in accordance with Test
Methods C 127 and C 128, whichever is applicable, except that
when arriving at the saturated surface-dry condition for fine
aggregate in Test Method C 128, hard-finished paper towels
should be used to dry the particles until no more moisture is
evident on the fresh towels.
NOTE 1—The standard mold procedure for the determination of the
lc
ia
saturated surface-dry condition of fine aggregate in Test Method C 128
does not work well with these uniform size fractions. For example,
rounded aggregates with small particle indexes will not retain the cone
mold shape at any moisture content.
fic
NOTE 2—Many aggregates, either from lithologic differences in the
various particle size fractions or an extensive vesicular pore system that is
progressively destroyed as particle size decreases, will have significant
variation in bulk dry specific gravity of the different size fractions. For
these aggregates, failure to determine the actual specific gravity for each
of
size fraction (to use in the voids calculation) may cause gross errors in the
particle index determination.
8. Determination of Voids
un
8.1 Using oven-dried specimens for each size fraction, run
determinations of percentage of voids at each of the two levels
of compaction in accordance with the procedure given in this
section. First, run two tests on the specimens for each size at
the compaction of 10 drops of the tamping rod per layer. Then
using the same specimens for each size, fill the mold twice
using 50 drops of the rod per layer as the compactive effort.
8.1.1 Place the cylindrical mold on a uniform, solid foun-
dation. Fill the mold in three layers. Gently place the aggre-
gate, from the lowest height possible, into the mold until it is
approximately one-third full. Level the surface with the fingers,
and compact the layer using 10 drops of the tamping rod evenly
distributed over the surface. Apply each drop by holding the
rod vertically with its rounded end 2 in. (50 mm) above the
surface of the aggregate (controlled by the slot-and-pin ar-
rangement, as shown in Fig. 1) and releasing it so that it falls
freely. Place a second layer in the mold using the same
procedure, filling the mold approximately two-thirds full. As
before, level the surface and apply 10 drops of the rod. Fill the
3 Page 160 of 180
remaining space in the mold with a third layer and again level
the surface and apply the same compactive effort, 10 drops of
the rod. After the final layer has been compacted, add indi-
vidual pieces of aggregate to make the surface of the aggregate
mass even with the rim of the mold, with no projections above
the rim. Determine the mass of the aggregate in the mold to an
accuracy of at least 4 g.
8.1.2 Repeat the filling of the mold using the same specimen
and compaction. Make a second determination of the mass of
the aggregate in the mold as described in 8.1.1. Use the average
mass of the two runs in calculating the percentage of voids at
10 drops for each size.
NOTE 3—The masses obtained in the replicate determinations should
agree within approximately 0.5 %.
8.1.3 For the higher degree of compaction, follow the steps
y
outlined in 8.1.1 and 8.1.2, except use 50 drops of the tamping
rod in compacting each layer. Again average the masses from
the two runs for use in computing the percentage of voids at 50
op
drops for each size fraction.
8.2 Calculate the percentage of voids in each size fraction of
the aggregate at 10 drops per layer and at 50 drops per layer,
respectively, by the following relationships:
V10 5 @1 – ~M10/sv!# 3 100
V50 5 @1 – ~M50/sv!# 3 100
(1)
(2)
where:
V10 = voids in aggregate compacted at 10 drops per layer,
%,
V50 = voids in aggregate compacted at 50 drops per layer,
%,
M10 = average mass of the aggregate in the mold com-
pacted at 10 drops per layer, g,
M50 = average mass of the aggregate in the mold com-
pacted at 50 drops per layer, g,
s = bulk-dry specific gravity of the aggregate size
fraction, and
v = volume of the cylindrical mold, mL.
9. Particle Index
9.1 Determine the particle index (Ia) for each size fraction
tested by the nomograph in Fig. 2 or as follows:
Ia 5 1.25 V10 – 0.25 V50 – 32.0 (3)
9.2 Calculate the weighted particle index of an aggregate
containing several sizes by averaging the particle index data for
each size fraction, weighted on the basis of the percentage of
the fractions in the original grading of the sample as received;
or preferably, on the basis of the average grading of the
material proposed to be used in the work. Table 5, shown with
examples of test values inserted for purposes of illustration, is
a suggested form of recording and reporting the data. For sizes
represented by less than 10 % in the grading, for which no
particle index data were obtained, use the average particle
index of the next coarser and finer sizes for which data are
available or the particle index for the next coarser or finer size
if a value is available only in one direction.
 D 3398
been developed at this time, therefore, this standard should not
be used for acceptance or rejection of a material for purchasing
purposes.
10.2 Bias—No information can be presented on the bias of
the procedure in this test method for measuring the index of
particle shape and texture, because no material having an
accepted reference value is available.

11. Keywords
11.1 aggregate shape; aggregate texture; aggregate voids

y
op
FIG. 2 Chart for Determining Particle Index (Ia)
lc
ia
TABLE 5 Example Calculation of Weighted Particle Index for an
Aggregate
Weighted
fic

Sieve Size Average

Aggregate Particle Index of (Aggregate
Grading, % each Size Group Grading 3
Passing Retained Particle Index +
100)
⁄ in.
34 ⁄ in.
12 3 17.2A 0.5
of

⁄ in.
12 ⁄ in.
38 42 17.2B 7.2
3⁄8 in. No. 4 36 15.8B 5.7
No. 4 No. 8 7 15.2C 1.1
No. 8 No. 16 10 14.6B 1.5
14.6A
un

No. 16 No. 30 2 0.3

100 16.3
A
Use particle index for next size since less than 10 %.
B
Particle index measured for these sizes.
C
Use average particle index for No. 8 to No. 16 and 3⁄8to No. 4 sieves since
quantity less than 10 %.

10. Precision and Bias

10.1 Precision—This test method is primarily used in re-
search work. A precision statement for this standard has not

4 Page 161 of 180

 D 3398
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the location of selected changes to this method. This section may also include descriptions of the
test method that have been incorporated since the last issue. changes or reasons for the changes, or both.
For the convenience of the user, Committee D-4 has high- (1) Paragraph 10.1 was revised.
lighted those changes that may impact the use of this test

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at

y
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

5 Page 162 of 180

 Designation: D 3665 – 99
Standard Practice for
Random Sampling of Construction Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 3665; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This practice covers the determination of random loca-
tions (or timing) at which samples of construction materials
can be taken. For the exact physical procedures for securing the
sample, such as a description of the sampling tool, the number
of increments needed for a sample, or the size of the sample,
reference should be made to the appropriate standard method.
The selection procedures in Section 4 utilize the table of
three-digit numbers given in Table 1.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
C 172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete2
lc
ia
C 183 Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing of
Hydraulic Cement3
D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates4
D 140 Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials4
fic
D 345 Test Method for Sampling and Testing Calcium
Chloride for Roads and Structural Applications4
D 979 Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures4
D 5361 Practice for Sampling Compacted Bituminous Mix-
of
tures for Laboratory Testing4
E 105 Practice for Probability Sampling of Materials5
E 122 Practice for Choice of Sample Size to Estimate a
Measure of Quality for a Lot or Process5
un
E 141 Practice for Acceptance of Evidence Based on the
Results of Probability Sampling5
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This practice is useful for determining the location or
time, or both, to take a sample in order to eliminate any
intentional or minimize any unintentional bias on the part of
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D-4 on Road and
Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.30 on
Methods of Sampling.
Current edition approved Feb. 10, 1999. Published May 1999. Originally
published as D 3665 – 78. Last previous edition D 3665 – 94.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1 Page 163 of 180
the person taking the sample.
NOTE 1—The effectiveness of this practice in achieving random
samples is limited only by the conscientiousness of the user in following
the stipulated procedures.
3.2 A less detailed procedure is included in 5.8 for normal
usage and is considered the most practical means except where
y
the sampling is deemed extremely critical or where dispute is
anticipated.
3.3 The selection procedures and examples in this standard
op
provide a practical approach for ensuring that construction
material samples are obtained in a random manner. Additional
details concerning the number of sample increments, the
number of samples, the quantities of material in each, and the
procedures for extracting sample increments or samples from
the construction lot or process are contained in Practices C 172,
C 183, D 75, D 140, D 979, D 5361, and Test Method D 345.
3.4 This standard contains examples citing road and paving
materials. The concepts outlined therein are applicable to the
random sampling of any construction material and can easily
be adapted thereto.
3.5 Additional sampling guidance is provided in Practice
E 105 concerning probability sampling, Practice E 122 con-
cerning choosing sample sizes to estimate the average quality
of a lot or process (see Note 2), and in Practice E 141 for
acceptance of evidence based on results of probability sam-
pling.
NOTE 2—The guidance contained in Practice E 122 is not available in
other documents referenced in this section.
3.6 The best and most practical method for ensuring that
samples of construction materials include the full range of a
construction process is by incorporating a stratified-random
sampling procedure into the sampling process. To implement a
stratified-random sampling procedure, divide the lot to be
sampled into the desired number of equal sublots and randomly
sample each sublot in accordance with this standard.
NOTE 3—If the sublots are of unequal size, it will likely be necessary to
weight the samples in order to maintain a fair and defensible sampling
process.
4. Selection Procedures
4.1 Sampling from a Belt or Flowing Stream of Material:
4.1.1 Determine the length of time, t, in minutes, for the lot
of material to be sampled to pass the sampling point and
determine the number of samples, n, to be taken from the lot.
 D 3665
TABLE 1 Table of Random Numbers
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 0.272 0.519 0.098 0.459 1.000 0.554 0.250 0.246 0.736 0.432
2 0.994 0.978 0.693 0.593 0.690 0.028 0.831 0.319 0.073 0.268
3 0.039 0.449 0.737 0.501 0.960 0.254 0.239 0.474 0.031 0.720
4 0.144 0.695 0.339 0.621 0.128 0.032 0.413 0.617 0.764 0.257
5 0.312 0.138 0.670 0.894 0.682 0.061 0.832 0.765 0.226 0.745

6 0.871 0.838 0.595 0.576 0.096 0.581 0.245 0.786 0.412 0.867
7 0.783 0.874 0.795 0.430 0.265 0.059 0.260 0.563 0.632 0.394
8 0.358 0.424 0.684 0.074 0.109 0.345 0.618 0.176 0.352 0.748
9 0.494 0.839 0.337 0.325 0.699 0.083 0.043 0.809 0.981 0.499
10 0.642 0.514 0.297 0.869 0.744 0.824 0.524 0.656 0.608 0.408

11 0.485 0.240 0.292 0.335 0.088 0.589 0.127 0.396 0.401 0.407
12 0.728 0.819 0.557 0.050 0.152 0.816 0.404 0.079 0.703 0.493
13 0.029 0.262 0.558 0.159 0.767 0.175 0.979 0.521 0.781 0.843
14 0.918 0.348 0.311 0.232 0.797 0.921 0.995 0.225 0.397 0.356
15 0.641 0.013 0.780 0.478 0.529 0.520 0.093 0.426 0.323 0.504

16 0.208 0.468 0.045 0.798 0.065 0.315 0.318 0.742 0.597 0.080

y
17 0.346 0.429 0.537 0.469 0.697 0.124 0.541 0.525 0.281 0.962
18 0.900 0.206 0.539 0.308 0.480 0.293 0.448 0.010 0.836 0.233
19 0.228 0.369 0.513 0.762 0.952 0.856 0.574 0.158 0.689 0.579

op
20 0.746 0.170 0.974 0.306 0.145 0.139 0.417 0.195 0.338 0.901

21 0.363 0.103 0.931 0.389 0.199 0.488 0.915 0.067 0.878 0.640
22 0.663 0.942 0.278 0.785 0.638 0.002 0.989 0.462 0.927 0.186
23 0.545 0.185 0.054 0.198 0.717 0.247 0.913 0.975 0.555 0.559
24 0.360 0.349 0.569 0.910 0.420 0.492 0.947 0.115 0.884 0.452
25 0.789 0.815 0.464 0.484 0.020 0.007 0.547 0.941 0.365 0.261

26
27
28
29
0.279
0.680
0.078
0.676
0.609
0.235
0.444
0.830
0.086
0.706
0.178
0.531
0.852
0.827
0.651
0.888
lc 0.890
0.572
0.423
0.305
0.108
0.769
0.672
0.421
0.076
0.310
0.517
0.307
0.089
0.036
0.660
0.502
0.662
0.329
0.657
0.112
0.607
0.477
0.972
0.808
30 0.861 0.899 0.643 0.771 0.037 0.241 0.582 0.578 0.634 0.077
ia
31 0.111 0.364 0.970 0.669 0.548 0.687 0.639 0.510 0.105 0.549
32 0.289 0.857 0.948 0.980 0.132 0.094 0.298 0.870 0.309 0.441
33 0.961 0.893 0.392 0.377 0.864 0.472 0.009 0.946 0.766 0.287
fic

34 0.637 0.986 0.753 0.566 0.213 0.807 0.017 0.460 0.515 0.630
35 0.834 0.121 0.255 0.453 0.376 0.583 0.422 0.371 0.399 0.366

36 0.284 0.490 0.402 0.151 0.044 0.436 0.747 0.694 0.136 0.585
37 0.038 0.814 0.594 0.911 0.324 0.322 0.895 0.411 0.160 0.367
38 0.351 0.283 0.027 0.220 0.685 0.527 0.943 0.556 0.853 0.612
of

39 0.143 0.384 0.645 0.479 0.489 0.052 0.187 0.990 0.912 0.750
40 0.512 0.056 0.018 0.122 0.303 0.803 0.553 0.729 0.205 0.925

41 0.296 0.705 0.156 0.616 0.534 0.168 0.564 0.866 0.739 0.850
42 0.451 0.536 0.768 0.518 0.481 0.880 0.835 0.734 0.427 0.847
un

43 0.837 0.405 0.591 0.370 0.104 0.848 0.004 0.414 0.354 0.707
44 0.724 0.153 0.841 0.829 0.470 0.391 0.388 0.163 0.817 0.790
45 0.665 0.825 0.671 0.623 0.770 0.400 0.068 0.440 0.019 0.944

46 0.573 0.716 0.266 0.456 0.434 0.467 0.603 0.169 0.721 0.779
47 0.332 0.702 0.300 0.570 0.945 0.968 0.649 0.097 0.118 0.242
48 0.755 0.951 0.937 0.550 0.879 0.162 0.791 0.810 0.625 0.674
49 0.439 0.491 0.855 0.446 0.773 0.542 0.416 0.350 0.957 0.419
50 0.700 0.877 0.442 0.286 0.526 0.071 0.154 0.988 0.333 0.626

Following the instructions accompanying Table 1, pick n 0.091

numbers to determine the times t to select the necessary 0.420
0.217
samples. 0.370
4.1.2 Example: 0.006

4.1.2.1 The lot of material to be sampled from a flowing These numbers are used directly (decimals disregarded) to
stream at a transfer point is defined as 480 min of production. determine the sample selection times. Any number over 480
Five samples are required from the lot. From Table 1, the should be discarded and another chosen.
following five numbers were picked: 4.1.2.2 Thus, samples will be taken at the following times

2 Page 164 of 180

 D 3665
TABLE 1 Continued
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
51 0.523 0.613 0.752 0.733 0.528 0.072 0.820 0.929 0.777 0.461
52 0.905 0.182 0.567 0.249 0.227 0.229 0.604 0.304 0.217 0.142
53 0.373 0.120 0.602 0.793 0.692 0.863 0.954 0.873 0.107 0.675
54 0.057 0.953 0.041 0.090 0.223 0.508 0.806 0.438 0.203 0.586
55 0.967 0.040 0.708 0.271 0.189 0.342 0.740 0.801 0.985 0.263

56 0.917 0.715 0.758 0.005 0.666 0.599 0.934 0.100 0.987 0.085
57 0.131 0.646 0.659 0.047 0.051 0.562 0.435 0.731 0.362 0.317
58 0.326 0.605 0.443 0.601 0.386 0.560 0.378 0.172 0.445 0.636
59 0.299 0.106 0.237 0.732 0.796 0.476 0.099 0.804 0.735 0.950
60 0.101 0.055 0.776 0.686 0.171 0.533 0.936 0.095 0.982 0.211

61 0.267 0.598 0.754 0.658 0.274 0.215 0.177 0.218 0.330 0.628
62 0.471 0.102 0.454 0.568 0.963 0.357 0.882 0.507 0.157 0.580
63 0.535 0.881 0.014 0.966 0.958 0.190 0.180 0.759 0.433 0.355
64 0.277 0.458 0.295 0.196 0.772 0.148 0.466 0.291 0.688 0.046
65 0.719 0.167 0.181 0.653 0.328 0.070 0.015 0.155 0.631 0.063

66 0.385 0.858 0.713 0.883 0.916 0.084 0.561 0.999 0.379 0.668

y
67 0.862 0.928 0.822 0.812 0.977 0.395 0.788 0.920 0.673 0.698
68 0.486 0.938 0.757 0.749 0.991 0.219 0.264 0.932 0.898 0.006
69 0.091 0.872 0.959 0.922 0.727 0.811 0.075 0.374 0.133 0.730

op
70 0.146 0.482 0.930 0.611 0.179 0.011 0.248 0.886 0.344 0.926

71 0.709 0.184 0.390 0.409 0.191 0.117 0.860 0.135 0.406 0.134
72 0.996 0.896 0.760 0.347 0.053 0.372 0.193 0.756 0.565 0.914
73 0.971 0.859 0.147 0.114 0.418 0.889 0.792 0.064 0.652 0.288
74 0.202 0.538 0.026 0.949 0.696 0.008 0.846 0.259 0.415 0.425
75 0.212 0.321 0.778 0.940 0.496 0.231 0.664 0.903 0.473 0.909

76
77
78
79
0.207
0.818
0.701
0.035
0.799
0.503
0.984
0.380
0.487
0.906
0.174
0.001
0.022
0.224
0.141
0.381
lc 0.813
0.904
0.704
0.251
0.891
0.892
0.908
0.497
0.500
0.455
0.048
0.214
0.368
0.343
0.828
0.794
0.725
0.924
0.997
0.552
0.437
0.197
0.058
0.588
ia
80 0.221 0.200 0.587 0.353 0.584 0.270 0.885 0.110 0.956 0.711

81 0.647 0.403 0.530 0.738 0.280 0.457 0.650 0.276 0.661 0.973
82 0.667 0.722 0.327 0.723 0.410 0.635 0.012 0.907 0.316 0.677
83 0.644 0.590 0.021 0.269 0.042 0.062 0.387 0.183 0.964 0.544
fic

84 0.302 0.123 0.116 0.282 0.851 0.256 0.648 0.845 0.782 0.993
85 0.633 0.933 0.331 0.546 0.842 0.016 0.236 0.164 0.923 0.976

86 0.060 0.681 0.683 0.775 0.624 0.955 0.126 0.655 0.919 0.113
87 0.165 0.532 0.431 0.341 0.092 0.244 0.222 0.336 0.034 0.216
88 0.875 0.691 0.383 0.382 0.596 0.301 0.275 0.188 0.868 0.805
of

89 0.726 0.902 0.252 0.130 0.238 0.398 0.763 0.463 0.615 0.140
90 0.273 0.393 0.285 0.161 0.619 0.865 0.551 0.030 0.571 0.258

91 0.253 0.821 0.600 0.023 0.606 0.849 0.610 0.577 0.082 0.774
92 0.340 0.654 0.173 0.495 0.498 0.992 0.192 0.506 0.751 0.129
un

93 0.194 0.290 0.592 0.983 0.509 0.998 0.522 0.627 0.741 0.540
94 0.166 0.450 0.210 0.204 0.840 0.826 0.833 0.516 0.965 0.375
95 0.712 0.314 0.033 0.823 0.629 0.939 0.887 0.066 0.743 0.081

96 0.622 0.800 0.710 0.575 0.678 0.465 0.802 0.969 0.150 0.784
97 0.313 0.294 0.897 0.718 0.614 0.876 0.025 0.049 0.620 0.125
98 0.137 0.087 0.003 0.483 0.201 0.209 0.320 0.935 0.447 0.787
99 0.243 0.679 0.844 0.069 0.024 0.543 0.714 0.234 0.505 0.428
100 0.361 0.359 0.230 0.761 0.334 0.149 0.511 0.475 0.854 0.119

after production begins (to the nearest 1 min and arranged in NOTE 5—While the above exact times were picked, in practice, the user
chronological order): may wish to round off actual sampling times to the nearest 5 min.
min 4.2 Sampling From a Windrow of Material:
6
91 4.2.1 Determine the total length of one windrow in metres
217 that represents a lot of material and determine the number of
370
420
samples, n, to be taken from the lot. Following the instruction
accompanying Table 1, pick n numbers to determine the length,
NOTE 4—The user may wish to decide a minimum time to allow the
(l), from the start of the windrow from which samples will be
plant to become fully operational. In cases where the picked number
results in a time less than this, the user should discard the picked number taken.
and choose another. 4.2.2 Example:

3 Page 165 of 180

 D 3665
4.2.2.1 A lot of material has been placed in windrows 900 m
in length. It is desired to secure three samples from this lot.
From Table 1 the following three numbers are picked:
0.526
0.704
0.193

4.2.2.2 These numbers are then multiplied by 900 giving the

number of metres from the beginning of the windrow at which
to sample. Thus, samples (rounded to the nearest metre and
arranged in sequence) are selected at the following intervals:
174 m (900 3 0.193)
473 m (900 3 0.526)
634 m (900 3 0.704)

4.3 Sampling In-Place Paving Material:

4.3.1 Determine the length of one pavement representing a
lot of material, the width of the pavement, w, and the number
of samples needed for each lot, n. Following the instructions

y
accompanying Table 1, pick l numbers corresponding to the
length of pavement, followed by picking w numbers for width

op
determination.
4.3.2 Example:
4.3.2.1 A lot is defined as 1.6 km of in-place 3.6-m wide
pavement. Two samples are to be taken from each lot. Since FIG. 1 Quadrants for Random Sampling from a Loaded Truck
there are 1600 m in the lot, enter the table and pick two
numbers, which are then multiplied by 1600 m. In this
instance, the two numbers chosen were:
0.376
0.529
lc are required. Using Table 1, the following three numbers were
picked:
0.251
0.424
0.865
ia
4.3.2.2 Thus, the two samples will be taken at 602 and 846 4.4.2.2 Thus, trucks numbered 5 (0.251 3 20), 8
m from the beginning of the pavement. (0.424 3 20), and 17 (0.865 3 20) should be sampled.
4.3.2.3 Determine the location from the edge of the pave- 4.4.2.3 To determine the quadrant locations, the following
fic

ment by selecting two additional numbers from Table 1, which numbers were picked:
are then multiplied by 3.6. In this case, the two numbers chosen 0.110
were: 0.380
0.064
0.512
0.708
of

These are multiplied by 4 with the following results:

4.3.2.4 Therefore, the first sample should be taken 602 m Quadrant 1 from truck No. 5 (4 3 0.110)
Quadrant 2 from truck No. 8 (4 3 0.380)
from the beginning of the pavement (see 4.3.2.2) and 1.8 m Quadrant 1 from truck No. 17 (4 3 0.064)
from the designated (right or left) edge of the pavement.
un

5. Instructions for Using the Three-Digit Table of

4.3.2.5 The second sample should be taken 846 and 2.5 m
Numbers (Table 1)
from the designated (right or left) edge of the pavement.
4.4 Sampling From a Loaded Truck: 5.1 Table 1 consists of all numbers from 0.001 to 1.000.
4.4.1 Determine the number of truck loads that represent a Each number appears only once.
lot of material and determine the number of samples, n, needed 5.2 Electronic calculators or random number generators can
from each lot. To determine which trucks to sample, pick n be used to select rows and columns. If pointers are used, to use
numbers from Table 1 and multiply these numbers by the Table 1 correctly and to eliminate bias, copy Table 1 from the
number of trucks in the lot. To determine the quadrant in each book and place the two pages on a flat surface next to each
truck to be sampled, choose n numbers from Table 1 and other, point without looking to a number in the table. It may be
multiply by 4. Select the quadrant in accordance with the advantageous to use a pointer such as a mechanical pencil with
following criterea. Quadrant locations of the truck are num- the lead retracted, the tip of a letter opener, or other pointed
bered as shown in Fig. 1. device.
5.3 After picking a number, the basis is established for
Calculated Random Number, N Quadrant
N # 1.0 1 locating the sought-after number in a more random, unbiased
1.0 < N # 2.0 2 method.
2.0 < N # 3.0 3 5.4 Examine the first two digits of the three-digit number
3.0 < N # 4.0 4
chosen. This number locates the line number (the vertical
4.4.2 Example: column on the left) to be used in finding the sought-after
4.4.2.1 Twenty trucks are considered a lot and three samples number.

4 Page 166 of 180

 D 3665
NOTE 6—The digits 0.001 to 0.009 are invalid for choosing the line
number. The number 1.000 is used for line number 100.
5.5 Once the line number is chosen, repeat the procedure in
5.2 and, using the first digit, pick the column number (the
horizontal numbers at the top of the table).
5.6 The intersection of the results from 5.4 and 5.5 is the
sought-after number.
5.7 The procedure, to be unbiased, must be followed as
detailed in the foregoing or by some other locally devised
method by which the user has no control over the numbers
chosen. The table must be entered separately for any and all
numbers selected. Repeat the selection procedure if an unus-
able number results.
5.8 Two alternative methods are described in 5.8.1 and
5.8.2. They are not considered as correct theoretically as the
procedure described in 5.2 through 5.7; however, except in
cases of dispute, they are considered to be acceptable alterna-
5.8.1 Alternative 1— Enter the table as described in 5.2,
deciding beforehand that the required number of digits will be
selected by moving up, down, right, or left from the number
picked. Discard unusable numbers, and continue to the next
number in the same direction. Decide beforehand what action
to take when a number on the periphery of the table is reached
and additional selections are needed.
5.8.2 Alternative 2— The user decides beforehand to begin
in the top left corner (or top center, or bottom right, etc.) and
move right and down (or left and up) picking the number of
required usable numbers. Other variances might be: moving in
the preplanned direction, picking every other number, or every
third number, etc. Exercise care in using this method, giving
numbers in the middle of the table an equal chance of being
selected for any given time period.
6. Keywords

y
tives for normal usage. 6.1 random number tables; sampling, random

op
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards

lc
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
ia
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).
fic
of
un

5 Page 167 of 180

 Designation: D 3744 – 97
Standard Test Method for
Aggregate Durability Index1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 3744; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the determination of a durability
index of an aggregate. The calculated durability index is a
value indicating the relative resistance of an aggregate to
production of detrimental clay-like fines when subjected to the
prescribed mechanical methods of degradation.
1.2 Units of Measure:
1.2.1 With regard to sieve sizes and size of aggregate as
determined by the use of testing sieves, the values in inch-
pound units are shown for the convenience of the user, but the
standard sieve designation shown in parentheses is the standard
value as stated in Specification E 11.
1.2.2 With regard to other units of measure, the values
shown in parentheses are for information purposes.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
lc
ia
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
fic
C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates2
D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates3
D 2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
of
Fine Aggregate3
D 4753 specification for Evaluating, Selecting, and Speci-
fying Balances and Scales for Use in Testing Soil, Rock,
and Related Construction Materials4
un
E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth and Sieves for Testing
Purposes4
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 This test method was developed to permit prequalifica-
tion of aggregates proposed for use in the construction of
transportation facilities. Basically, the test establishes an ag-
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D-4 on Road
and Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.51 on
Aggregate Tests.
Current edition approved July 10, 1997. Published February 1998. Originally
published as D 3744 – 79. Last previous edition D 3744 – 97.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1 Page 168 of 180
gregate’s resistance to generating fines when agitated in the
presence of water. Separate and different test procedures are
used to evaluate the coarse and the fine portions of a material.
3.2 A sample of coarse aggregate is prepared to a specific
grading and then washed in a mechanical washing vessel for a
2-min agitation time. After discarding the minus No. 4 (4.75-
mm) material, dry the washed test sample.
y
3.3 The coarse aggregate test sample is then agitated in the
mechanical washing vessel for a period of 10 min. A represen-
op
tative portion of the resulting wash water and minus No. 200
(75-µm) size fines is collected and mixed with a stock calcium
chloride solution and placed in a plastic cylinder. After a
20-min sedimentation time, the level of the sediment column is
read. The height of the sediment value is then used to calculate
the durability index of the coarse aggregate (Dc).
3.4 The fine aggregate sample is prepared by washing a
specific quantity of the material in the mechanical washing
vessel for a 2-min agitation period. All minus No. 200 (75-µm)
size material is washed from the sample through a No. 200
(75-µm) sieve and discarded. The plus No. 200 (75-µm)
fraction is dried.
3.5 The fine aggregate test sample is tested by the Standard
Sand Equivalent Test Method (Test Method D 2419) except for
modifications to the test sample preparation and duration of the
shaking time. The mechanical shaker method is required. A
shaking time of 10 min instead of 45 s is used.
3.6 This test method includes procedures for testing aggre-
gates exhibiting a wide range in specific gravity, including
lightweight and porous coarse aggregates, and also procedures
for testing small maximum size aggregate which is too fine to
test as a coarse aggregate and too coarse to consider as a fine
aggregate, such as a pea gravel or a very coarse sand.
3.7 The durability index for coarse aggregate (Dc) or for fine
aggregate (Df) is calculated, as applicable, by appropriate
equations presented in the method. The durability index of a
well-graded aggregate containing both coarse and fine fractions
is defined as the lowest of the two values, Dc or D f, obtained
by the test. This value should be the controlling value for
specification purposes.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This test assigns an empirical value to the relative
amount, fineness, and character of clay-like material that may
be generated in an aggregate when subjected to mechanical
degradation.
 D 3744
4.2 The procedure has been used in limited geographical
areas of the United States and the results have been correlated
with aggregate performance in various construction applica-
tions, including: aggregate base, permeable material for back-
fill, fine concrete aggregate, and riprap for rock slope protec-
tion.5,6
4.3 A minimum durability index may be specified to pro-
hibit the use of an aggregate in various construction applica-
tions that is prone to degradation, resulting in generation of
clay-like fines.
4.4 This test method provides a rapid test for evaluation of
the quality of a new aggregate source. Research has indicated
it may also be suitable for use instead of the sodium sulfate
soundness test for evaluating the durability characteristics of
fine aggregate for use in portland-cement concrete, thereby
reducing the need for time-consuming and expensive sound-
ness tests.5
4.5 Although the application of this method has been
limited to aggregates for specific construction uses, the possi-
bility exists for expanding the application of this method to
control the quality of aggregates used in other areas of
construction, such as aggregates for use in bituminous paving
mixtures, coarse aggregate for use in portland-cement concrete,
and aggregate for use as railroad ballast.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Mechanical Washing Vessel (Pot)—A flat-bottomed,
straight-sided cylindrical vessel conforming to the specifica-
lc
ia
tions and dimensions shown in Fig. 1.
5.2 Collection Pan— A round pan (at least 9 in. (229 mm)
in diameter and approximately 4 in. (102 mm) deep), suitable
to collect the wash water from the washed sample. The pan
fic
shall have vertical or nearly vertical sides and shall be
equipped as necessary to hold the wire mesh of an 8-in.
(203-mm) diameter sieve at least 3 in. (76.2 mm) above the
bottom. An adaptor that will not allow loss of fines or wash
of
water may be used to nest the sieve with the container, or the
sieve may be nested with a blank sieve frame resting in the
bottom of the pan.
5.3 Agitator—A mechanical device designed to hold the
un
wash vessel in an upright position while subjecting it to a
lateral reciprocating motion at a rate of 285 6 10 complete
cycles per minute. The reciprocating motion shall be produced
by means of an eccentric in the base of the carrier and the
length of the stroke shall be 1.75 6 0.025 in. (44.5 6 0.6 mm).
The clearance between the cam and follower of the eccentric
shall be 0.001 to 0.004 in. (0.25 to 1.02 mm). Fig. 2 shows a
Tyler portable sieve shaker modified to meet these require-
ments.
5.4 All equipment required to perform the Test for Sand
Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate (Test Method
D 2419).
5
Hamilton, R. D., Smith, R. E., and Sherman, G. B., “Factors Influencing the
Durability of Aggregates,” Research Report 633476, State of California, Division of
Highways, Materials and Research Department, June 1971.
6
Hveem, F. N., and Smith, T. N., “Durability of Aggregates,” Research Report,
State of California, Division of Highways, Materials and Research Department,
January 1964.
2 Page 169 of 180
5.5 Sieves—The sieves shall conform to Specification E 11.
5.6 Balance — A balance having a minimum capacity of
500 g and meeting the requirements of Specification D 4753,
Class GP5.
6. Reagents and Materials
6.1 Calcium Chloride Solutions—Stock and working cal-
cium chloride solutions as specified in the Reagents and
Materials section of Test Method D 2419 are required.
6.2 Water—Distilled or demineralized water will be needed
for the normal performance of this method. This is necessary
because the test results may be affected by certain minerals
dissolved in water. However, if it is determined that local tap
water is of such purity that it does not affect the test results, it
is permissible to use it except when otherwise specified in the
procedure in place of distilled or demineralized water. For
referee purposes, distilled or demineralized water shall be used
y
for all steps in the test.
op
7. Temperature Control
7.1 This test may be normally performed without strict
temperature control; however, for referee purposes, retest the
material with the temperature of the distilled or demineralized
water and the working calcium chloride solution at 72 6 5°F
(22 6 3°C).
8. Sampling
8.1 Obtain samples of the aggregate to be tested in accor-
dance with Practice D 75.
9. Initial Sample Preparation
9.1 Dry aggregate samples sufficiently to permit a complete
separation on the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and to develop a
free-flowing condition in the portion passing the sieve. Drying
may be performed by any means that does not heat the
aggregate in excess of 140°F (60°C) or cause degradation of
the particles. The use of sunlight, ovens, or forced drafts of
warm air are the most common drying methods.
9.2 If the sample contains an appreciable amount of clay,
turn the aggregate frequently during the drying process to
obtain even drying throughout and prevent the formation of
hard clay lumps.
9.3 Break up any hard clods and remove coatings of fines
from the coarse aggregate particles by any means that will not
appreciably reduce the natural individual particle sizes.
9.4 Determine the sample grading by sieving in accordance
with Test Method C 136 on the 3⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄8-in. and Nos. 4, 8, and
16 (19.0, 12.5, 9.5, 4.75, 2.36, and 1.18-mm) sieves. Discard
any material that is retained on the 3⁄4-in. (19.0-mm) sieve.
9.5 Determine the test procedures to be used for establishing
the durability index of the aggregate based upon the grading of
the aggregate as determined in 9.4.
9.5.1 If less than 10 % of the aggregate passes the No. 4
(4.75-mm) sieve, test coarse aggregate (Procedure A) only.
9.5.2 If less than 10 % of the aggregate is coarser than the
No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve, test fine aggregate (Procedure B) only.
9.5.3 When both coarse and fine aggregate fractions are
each present in quantities equal to or greater than 10 % and if
the percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve is greater than
 D 3744

y
op
lc
SI Equivalent
ia
in. mm in. mm in. mm
9 17⁄32 242.1 7 5⁄8 193.7 ⁄
14 6.4
8 5⁄8 219.1 3 1⁄2 88.9 ⁄
1 16 1.6
8 33⁄64 216.3 2 1⁄2 64.8 1⁄32 0.79
fic

7 29⁄32 200.8 3⁄4 19.0 1⁄64 0.40

7 27⁄32 199.2

NOTE 1—The gasket shall be 1⁄8 in. neoprene rubber, having an inside diameter of 7 27⁄32 6 1⁄64in. and an outside diameter of 8 33⁄646 1⁄64 in.
NOTE 2—The pot shall be a flat bottom, straight-sided, cylindrical vessel with a capacity of approximately 2 gal. The top edge shall be flared outward
of

to form a seat for the gasket and lid.

NOTE 3—Three trunk clamps are required and shall be placed at one-third intervals. The clamps shall be attached to the pot by rivets or welds so that
the pot remains watertight. When fitted with the 1⁄8-in. gasket and clamped in place, the lid shall form a watertight seal with the flared edge of the pot.
NOTE 4—The vessel shall be 20-gage stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. All dimensions shall be within 61⁄32 in., unless otherwise noted.
FIG. 1 Mechanical Washing Vessel
un

Aggregate Size Air Dry Mass, g

10 %, use both Procedures A and B on the appropriate ⁄ to 1⁄2 in. (19.0 to 12.5 mm)
34 1070 6 10
aggregate sizes. If the percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) ⁄ to ⁄8 in. (12.5 to 9.5 mm)
12 3 570 6 10
sieve is less than or equal to 10 %, use Procedure A or 3⁄8 in. to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 910 6 5

Procedure C. 2550 6 25

9.5.4 If most of the aggregate (75 to 80 %) is between the
3⁄8-in. and No. 16 (9.5 and 1.18-mm) sieves, use Procedure C
only.
PROCEDURE A—COARSE AGGREGATE
For materials with less than 10 % in any of the size fractions
given in 10.1, prepare the test sample using the actual
percentage for the deficient fraction and proportionally in-
crease the mass of the remaining fractions to obtain the 2550
test sample. Two examples follow.

10. Test Sample Preparation

10.1 Prepare a 2550 6 25-g (air-dry) preliminary test
sample using the grading given below:

3 Page 170 of 180

 D 3744

y
op
lc
ia
FIG. 2 Modification of Tyler Portable Sieve Shaker

percentage of absorption of the aggregate in accordance with

fic

Example 1—Less than 10 % in 3⁄4 to 1⁄2 in. (19.0 to 12.5 mm) fraction
Test Method C 127.
Aggregate Size Percent Calculation Air Dry Mass, g
⁄ to 1⁄2 in. (19.0 to 12.5 mm)
34 6 0.06 3 2550 153 6 10 10.3.3 Adjust the total mass of the test sample using the
⁄ to ⁄8 in. (12.5 to 9.5 mm)
12 3 26 570 ~2550 2 153! 923 6 10 following equation:
570 1 910
specific gravity of aggregate
of

⁄ to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm)

38 68 910 ~2550 2 153! 1474 6 5 A djusted sample mass, g 5 3W (1)
570 1 910 2.65
Totals 100 25506 25 Adjust the mass of material in each size fraction proportion-
Example 2—Less than 10 % in two fractions ally to the masses specified in 10.1.
un

Aggregate Size Percent Calculation Air Dry

⁄ to 1⁄2 in. (19.0 to 12.5 mm)
34 4 0.04 3 2550
⁄ to 3⁄8 in. (12.5 to 9.5 mm)
12 7 0.07 3 2550
3⁄8 to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 89 2550 − (102 + 179)
Totals 100
10.2 Place the preliminary test sample in the mechanical
washing vessel, add 1000 6 5 ml of distilled or demineralized
water, clamp the vessel lid in place, and secure the vessel in the
sieve shaker.
10.3 Because of the low specific gravity or high absorption
rate, or both, of some aggregates, the proportions of aggregate
to water may not permit the intended interparticle abrasion.
Testing of these materials will require adjustment of the test
specimen mass or volume of both wash and test water, or both.
10.3.1 Wash all materials that are not completely inundated
when 1000 ml of water are added to the test sample and test
with adjusted sample masses and water volumes.
10.3.2 Determine the bulk, oven-dry specific gravity, and
10.3.4 Adjust the volume of test water using the following
Mass, g equation:
102 6 10
179 6 10 Adjusted water 5 1000 1 ~A 3 W! 2 50 (2)
2269 6 5
where:
25506 25
A 5 absorption of aggregate, %, and
W 5 mass of oven-dryed test sample, g.
10.4 Begin agitation after a time of 60 6 10 s has elapsed
from the introduction of the wash water. Agitate the vessel in
the sieve shaker for 120 6 5 s.
10.5 After the 2-min agitation time is completed, remove
the vessel from the shaker, unclamp the lid and pour the
contents onto a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve. Rinse any remaining
fines from the vessel onto the sieve and direct water (from a
flexible hose attached to a faucet) onto the aggregate until the
water passing through the sieve comes out clear.
10.6 Dry the fraction retained on the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve
to constant mass at a temperature of 230 6 9°F (110 6 5°C)
and weigh. If the loss in mass due to washing in accordance

4 Page 171 of 180

 D 3744
with 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, and 10.5 is equal to or less than 75 g, a
test sample suitable for further testing has been prepared and
the procedures in 10.7-10.12 should be omitted. If the loss in
mass exceeds 75 g, the preliminary test sample can be retained
and used if a second sample is washed by the same procedure
and the two samples are combined according to the specified
masses to provide the desired test sample.
10.7 Determine the grading to be used in preparing the
preliminary test sample as follows:
10.7.1 If each of the aggregate sizes listed in the following
table represents 10 % or more of the 3⁄4-in. to No. 4 (19.0-mm
to 4.75-mm) portion, as determined from the masses recorded
in 9.4, use the oven-dry masses of material specified below for
preparing the preliminary test sample.
Aggregate Size Oven-Dry Mass,
g particles to settle to the bottom.
⁄ to 1⁄2in. (19.0 to 12.5 mm)
34 1050 6 10
⁄ to 3⁄8 in. (12.5 to 9.5 mm)
12 550 6 10
3⁄8 in. to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 900 6 5
2500 6 25
10.8 Prepare a 2500-g preliminary test sample using the
prescribed grading. Dry the test sample to constant mass at a
temperature of 230 6 9°F (110 6 5°C).
10.9 Mechanically wash the preliminary sample in the same
manner as prescribed in 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, and 10.5.
10.10 Repeat 10.8 and 10.9, if necessary, to obtain sufficient
material to yield a washed test sample of 2500 6 25 g and
contain each size fraction in the quantity specified in 10.7.1.
lc
10.11 After allowing the oven-dried material to cool, sepa-
ia
rate the washed coarse aggregate on the 1⁄2, 3⁄8-in., and No. 4
(12.5, 9.5, and 4.75-mm) sieves. Discard the material passing
the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
fic
10.12 Prepare the washed test sample using the masses
specified in 10.7.1 from representative portions of each size of
washed material. Occasionally it may be necessary to wash a
third preliminary test sample to obtain the required mass of
material of a specific size.
of
11. Procedure for Coarse Aggregate
11.1 Place the plastic cylinder (sand equivalent test cylinder
un
as required in Test Method D 2419) on a work table which will
not be subjected to vibrations during the performance of the
sedimentation phase of the test. Pour 0.24 oz (7 ml) of the stock
calcium chloride solution into the cylinder. Place a Nos. 4 and
200 (4.75-mm and 75-µm) sieve on the pan or vessel provided
to collect the wash water with the No. 4 sieve on top. The No.
4 sieve serves only to protect the No. 200 sieve.
11.2 Place the washed test sample (as prepared in Section
10) in the mechanical washing vessel. Then add the amount of
distilled or demineralized water as determined in 10.3, clamp
the lid in place, and secure the vessel in the sieve shaker. Begin
agitation after a period of 60 s has elapsed from the introduc-
tion in the wash water. Agitate the vessel for 600 6 15 s.
11.3 Immediately following the agitation period, take the
vessel from the sieve shaker and remove the lid. Agitate the
contents of the vessel by moving the upright vessel vigorously
in a horizontal circular motion five or six times in order to
bring the fines into suspension. Immediately pour the contents
of the vessel into the nested Nos. 4 and 200 (4.75-mm and
5 Page 172 of 180
75-µm) sieves placed in the pan provided to collect the wash
water. Discard the material retained on the No. 4 (4.75-mm)
sieve. Collect all wash water and passing No. 200 (75-µm)
material in the collecting pan. To assure that all material finer
than No. 200 (75-µm) sieve is washed through the sieve, take
the following steps:
11.3.1 As the wash water is draining through the No. 200
(75-µm) sieve, apply a jarring action to the sieve by lightly
bumping the side of the sieve frame with the heel of the hand.
11.3.2 When a concentration of the material is retained on
the No. 200 (75-µm) sieve, rerinse the fine material by pouring
the wash water through the sieve again. To rerinse the material:
11.3.2.1 Allow the wash water to stand undisturbed in the
collection pan for a few moments to permit the heavier
11.3.2.2 Pour the upper portion of the wash water into
y
another container.
11.3.2.3 Pour the wash water back through the No. 200
op
(75-µm) sieve and again collect all wash water and passing No.
200 (75-µm) material in the collection pan.
11.3.2.4 Repeat the rinsing procedure as necessary until all
of the minus No. 200 (75-µm) material has been washed
through the sieve.
11.4 Add distilled or demineralized water to bring the
volume of dirty wash water to 1000 6 5 ml. Then transfer the
wash water to a vessel suitable for stirring and pouring.
11.5 Place a funnel in the graduated plastic cylinder. Stir the
wash water by hand to bring the fines into suspension. While
the water is still turbulent, pour enough of the wash water into
the cylinder to bring the level of the liquid to the 15-in.
(380-mm) mark.
11.6 Remove the funnel, place the stopper in the end of the
cylinder, and prepare to mix the contents immediately.
11.7 Mix the contents of the cylinder by alternately turning
the cylinder upside down and right side up, allowing the bubble
to completely traverse the length of the cylinder 20 times in
approximately 35 s.
11.8 At the completion of the mixing process, place the
cylinder on the work table and remove the stopper. Allow the
cylinder to stand undisturbed for 1200 6 15 s. Then immedi-
ately read and record the height of the sediment column to the
nearest 0.1 in. (2.5 mm).
NOTE 1—There are two unusual conditions that may be encountered in
this phase of the test procedure. One is that a clearly defined line of
demarcation may not form between the sediment and the liquid above it
in the specified 20-min period. If this should occur in a test in which
distilled or demineralized water is used, allow the cylinder to stand
undisturbed until the clear demarcation line does form; then immediately
read and record the height of the column of sediment and the total
sedimentation time. If this should occur in a test in which tap water is
used, discontinue the test and retest using an untested portion of the
sample with distilled or demineralized water. The second unusual condi-
tion is that the liquid immediately above the line of demarcation may still
be darkly clouded at the end of 20 min, and the demarcation line, although
distinct, may appear to be in the sediment column itself. As for the first
case, if tap water was used, rerun the test using a new sample with distilled
or demineralized water; otherwise read and record this line of demarcation
at the end of the specified 20-min sedimentation period as usual.
 D 3744
PROCEDURE B—FINE AGGREGATE
12. Test Sample Preparation
12.1 Split or quarter a representative portion from the
material passing the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve of sufficient mass
to obtain an oven-dry mass of 500 6 25 g.
12.2 Dry the preliminary test sample to constant mass at a
temperature of 230 6 9°F (110 6 5°C). Cool to room
temperature.
12.3 Place the preliminary test sample in the mechanical
washing vessel, add 1000 6 5 ml of distilled or demineralized
water, and clamp the vessel lid in place. Secure the vessel in the
sieve shaker in sufficient time to begin agitation after 600 6 30
s have elapsed from the introduction of the wash water. Agitate
the vessel for a period of 1206 5 s.
12.4 After the 2-min agitation period is completed, remove
the vessel from the shaker, unclamp the lid, and carefully pour
the contents into the protected No. 200 (75-µm) sieve described
in 11.1. Rinse any remaining fines from the vessel onto the
sieve. Direct the water (from flexible hose attached to a faucet)
onto the aggregate until the water passing through the sieve
comes out clear.
12.5 It may be necessary to flood clayey or silty samples
prior to pouring them over the sieve to prevent clogging the
No. 200 (75-µm) sieve. Flood by adding water to the vessel
following the agitation period. Repeated flooding may be
necessary in extreme cases before all of the contents of the
vessel can be poured over the sieve.
lc
12.6 Following the rinsing, transfer the material from the
ia
sieve to a drying pan, and dry to constant mass at a temperature
of 2306 9°F (110 6 5°C). It is necessary to wash the material
from the No. 200 (75-µm) sieve in order to transfer the retained
fic
material to a drying pan. Leave the pan in a slanting position
until the free water that drains to the lower side becomes clear;
then pour off this clear water. Use large shallow pans and
spread the sample as thin as possible to speed drying.
12.7 Split or quarter the washed and dried material to
of
provide a test sample of sufficient size to fill the 3 oz (85 mL)
tin to level full. Predetermine the exact amount of material to
be split using the following procedures.
un
12.7.1 Fill the measuring tin to overflowing with the pre-
pared material.
12.7.2 Consolidate the material in the tin by tapping the
bottom edge with a hard object.
12.7.3 Strike off to level full using a straight edge and
determine the weight of the material.
NOTE 2—The use of a sample splitter meeting the requirements of
Practice C 702 is considered preferable.
13. Procedure for Fine Aggregate
13.1 Conduct a sand equivalent test in accordance with Test
Method D 2419, except use a mechanical shaker to continu-
ously shake the cylinder and contents for 600 6 15 s.
PROCEDURE C—AGGREGATES TOO FINE TO BE
TESTED AS COARSE AGGREGATE AND TOO
COARSE TO BE TESTED AS FINE AGGREGATE
14. Test Sample Preparation
14.1 Procedure C has been developed to test aggregates,
6 Page 173 of 180
such as pea gravel, and other aggregates contained primarily
between the 3⁄8 in. and No. 16 (9.5 and 1.18-mm) sieves. Such
aggregates are too fine to be tested as coarse aggregate and too
coarse to be tested as sand.
14.2 Prepare a test sample using the procedure in Section
12, except eliminate the procedure of sieving and recombining
the dry material as required in 12.7.
15. Procedure
15.1 Fill the plastic cylinder to the 4 6 0.1-in. (102 6
2.5-mm) level with distilled or demineralized water. Pour the
prepared test specimen into the cylinder using a funnel to avoid
spillage. Tap the bottom of the cylinder sharply with the heel of
the hand, as necessary, to release air bubbles and promote
thorough wetting. Allow to stand undisturbed for 10 6 1 min.
15.2 Stopper the cylinder, loosen the material from the
bottom, and place the cylinder in the mechanical sand equiva-
y
lent shaker. Start the timer and allow the machine to shake the
cylinder and contents for 306 1 min.
op
15.3 At the end of the shaking period, remove the cylinder
from the shaker and transfer the water and passing 200 (75-µm)
material to another cylinder containing 0.24 oz (7 mL) of stock
calcium chloride solution. Nest the Nos. 8 and 200 (2.36-mm
and 75-µm) sieves into a funnel that empties into the second
cylinder. Hold the mouth of the inverted cylinder over the
nested sieves and remove the stopper, permitting the sample
and water to pour onto the sieves. Rinse the remaining fines
from the inverted cylinder onto the sieves with a small amount
of fresh water. Rinse the material retained on the sieves with
additional fresh water to ensure that all minus No. 200 (75 µm)
material passes through the sieve. Take care not to fill the
cylinder above the 15-in. (380-mm) mark. Allow time for the
water to drain through the sieves and then add enough fresh
distilled water to bring the level of the liquid to the 15-in.
(380-mm) mark. Stopper the cylinder and mix the contents by
inverting 20 times in 35 s.
15.4 Allow the cylinder to stand undisturbed for 12006 15
s from the time of completion of mixing, then read the top of
the clay suspension to the nearest 0.1 in. (2.5 mm).
CALCULATION
16. Procedure A—Coarse Aggregate
16.1 Compute the durability index of the coarse aggregate
to the nearest whole number using the following equation:
Dc 5 30.3 1 20.8 cot ~0.29 1 0.15 H! (3)
where:
Dc 5 durability index,
H 5 height of sediment, in., and the quantity (0.29 + 0.15
H) is in radians.
16.2 Solutions of Eq 3 are given in Table 1.
17. Procedure B—Fine Aggregate
17.1 Calculate the durability index of the fine aggregate to
the nearest 0.1 using the following equation:
sand reading
Df 5 clay reading 3 100 (4)
17.2 If the calculated durability index is not a whole
 D 3744
TABLE 1 Durability Index of Coarse Aggregate

NOTE 1—Dc 5 30.3 + 20.8 cot (0.29 + 0.15 H).

Sediment Height Sediment Height Sediment Height Sediment Height Sediment Height
Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
0.0 0.0 100 3.0 76.2 53 6.0 152.4 39 9.0 228.6 29 12.0 304.8 18
0.1 2.5 96 3.1 78.7 52 6.1 154.9 38 9.1 231.1 29 12.1 307.3 18
0.2 5.1 93 3.2 81.3 52 6.2 157.5 38 9.2 233.7 28 12.2 309.9 18
0.3 7.6 90 3.3 83.8 51 6.3 160.0 38 9.3 236.2 28 12.3 312.4 17
0.4 10.2 87 3.4 86.4 51 6.4 162.6 37 9.4 238.8 28 12.4 315.0 17
0.5 12.7 85 3.5 88.9 50 6.5 165.1 37 9.5 241.3 27 12.5 317.5 16
0.6 15.2 82 3.6 91.4 49 6.6 167.6 37 9.6 243.8 27 12.6 320.0 16
0.7 17.8 80 3.7 94.0 49 6.7 170.2 36 9.7 246.4 27 12.7 322.6 15
0.8 20.3 78 3.8 96.5 48 6.8 172.7 36 9.8 248.9 26 12.8 325.1 15
0.9 22.9 76 3.9 99.1 48 6.9 175.3 36 9.9 251.5 26 12.9 327.7 14
1.0 25.4 74 4.0 101.6 47 7.0 177.8 35 10.0 254.0 26 13.0 330.2 14
1.1 27.9 73 4.1 104.1 47 7.1 180.3 35 10.1 256.5 25 13.1 332.7 13
1.2 30.5 71 4.2 106.7 46 7.2 182.9 35 10.2 259.1 25 13.2 335.3 13
1.3 33.0 70 4.3 109.2 46 7.3 185.4 34 10.3 261.6 25 13.3 337.8 12
1.4 35.6 68 4.4 111.8 45 7.4 188.0 34 10.4 264.2 24 13.4 340.4 12
1.5 38.1 67 4.5 114.3 45 7.5 190.5 34 10.5 266.7 24 13.5 342.9 11

y
1.6 40.6 66 4.6 116.8 44 7.6 193.0 33 10.6 269.2 24 13.6 345.4 11
1.7 43.2 65 4.7 119.4 44 7.7 195.6 33 10.7 271.8 23 13.7 348.0 10
1.8 45.7 63 4.8 121.9 43 7.8 198.1 33 10.8 274.3 23 13.8 350.5 9

op
1.9 48.3 62 4.9 124.5 43 7.9 200.7 32 10.9 276.9 23 13.9 353.1 9
2.0 50.8 61 5.0 127.0 43 8.0 203.2 32 11.0 279.4 22 14.0 355.6 8
2.1 55.4 60 5.1 129.5 42 8.1 205.7 32 11.1 281.9 22 14.1 358.1 7
2.2 55.9 59 5.2 132.1 42 8.2 208.3 31 11.2 284.5 22 14.2 360.7 7
2.3 58.4 59 5.3 134.6 41 8.3 210.8 31 11.3 287.0 21 14.3 363.2 6
2.4 61.0 58 5.4 137.2 41 8.4 213.4 31 11.4 289.6 21 14.4 365.8 5
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
63.5
66.0
68.6
71.1
73.7
57
56
55
54
54
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
139.7
142.2
144.8
147.3
149.9
40
40
40
39
39
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
lc
215.9
218.4
221.0
223.5
226.1
30
30
30
29
29
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
292.1
294.6
297.2
299.7
302.3
20
20
20
19
19
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
15.0
368.3
370.8
373.4
375.9
378.5
381.0
4
4
3
2
1
0
ia
number, report it as the next higher whole number. For the hanger rods and attempting to move the sieve base. If any
example, if the clay reading was recorded as 8.0 and the sand play is noticed, replace the cam or bearing, or both.
fic

reading was recorded as 3.3, the calculated durability index 19.4 Lubricate the sieve shaker at least each 3 months.
would be: Df 5 (3.3/8.0) 3 100 or 41.2; report as 42.
REPORT
17.3 If it is desired to average a series of values, average the
whole number values as determined in 17.2. If the average of 20. Report
of

these values is not a whole number, round it to the next higher
whole number as shown in the following example:
Example—Calculated Df values are 41.2, 43.8, and 40.9
which, when rounded to the next higher whole number,
un
20.1 Report the “as-received” sieve analysis of the aggre-
gate subjected to testing, the sieve analysis of the coarse
sample used, and the sieve analysis of the fine sample used.

Report the calculated durability index (Dc or Df) with an

become 42, 44, and 41. The average of these values is then
determined: (42 + 44 + 41)/3 5 42.3; and reported as 43.
18. Procedure C—Aggregates Too Fine to Be Tested as
Coarse Aggregate and Too Coarse to Be Tested as
Fine Aggregate
18.1 Calculate the durability index in accordance with
Section 16.
PRECAUTION
19. Precautions
19.1 Perform the test in a location free of vibrations,
because vibrations may cause the suspended material to settle
at a greater rate than normal.
19.2 Do not expose the plastic cylinders to direct sunlight
any longer than is necessary.
19.3 Frequently check the play between the cam and eccen-
tric on the modified Tyler portable shaker by grasping one of
indication as to whether Procedure A, B, or C was used.
20.2 The report should include a statement as to whether or
not strict temperature control was maintained, and whether tap,
distilled, or demineralized water was used.
PRECISION AND BIAS
21. Precision and Bias
21.1 Criteria for judging the acceptability of the durability
index values determined by this method are very limited. The
data that are tabulated herein were developed by one state
agency in the western United States on materials common to
that geographical area. The criteria were established by per-
forming 48 individual tests on each of six different aggregates,
two of which were coarse aggregates and four of which were
fine aggregates. Two tests by two operators in twelve labora-
tories were performed on each material.
21.2 An indication of the precision of this method of test
can be obtained from the data presented in Table 2. The

7 Page 174 of 180

 D 3744
TABLE 2 PrecisionA aggregate (Dc) and the durability index of fine aggregate (Df)
Durability Index Standard Deviation
Difference Two-Sigma increases as the index decreases.
Limits
21.3 The maximum single-operator standard deviation has
Coarse Aggregate:B
Single-Operator Precision:
been found to be 3.58. Therefore, the results of two properly
60 3.58 10.1 conducted tests by the same operator on the same material
65 3.07 8.7 should not differ by more than 10.1.
70 2.56 7.2
75 2.04 5.8 21.4 The maximum multilaboratory standard deviation has
80 1.53 4.3 been found to be 5.11. Therefore, the results of two properly
85 1.01 2.9
Multilaboratory Precision:
60 4.35 12.3
65 3.72 10.5
70 3.10 8.8
75 2.47 7.0
80 1.85 5.2
85 1.22 3.5
C
Fine Aggregate:
Single-Operator Precision:
50 2.40 6.8

y
55 2.24 6.3
60 2.08 5.9
65 1.92 5.4

op
70 1.76 5.0
75 1.61 4.5
Multilaboratory Precision:
50 5.11 14.4
55 4.77 13.5
60 4.43 12.5
65 4.10 11.6

A
70
75
3.76
3.42
10.6
9.7
Preliminary analyses of data from California Transportation Laboratory study
lc
“Precision of Selected Aggregate Test Methods,” 48 individual tests per material, 2
tests by 2 operators in 12 laboratories.
ia
B
Data for two materials.
C
Data for four materials.

single-operator standard deviation and the multilaboratory

fic

standard deviation for both the durability index of coarse

of
un

8 Page 175 of 180

 D 3744
conducted tests from two different laboratories on samples of 22. Keywords
the same aggregate should not differ by more than 14.4.
22.1 aggregate degradation; aggregate durability
21.5 Bias—No information can be presented on the bias of
the procedure in this test method for measuring the durability
index, because no material having an accepted reference value
is available.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at

y
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

9 Page 176 of 180

 Designation: D 4791 – 99

Standard Test Method for

Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated
Particles in Coarse Aggregate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D 4791; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope 3.1.2 flat and elongated particles of aggregate—those par-

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the per- ticles having a ratio of length to thickness greater than a
centages of flat particles, elongated particles, or flat and specified value.
elongated particles in coarse aggregates. 3.1.3 length—maximum dimension of the particle.

y
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 3.1.4 width—maximum dimension in the plane perpendicu-
as the standard except in regard to sieve size and the size of lar to the length

aggregate, which are given in SI units in accordance with
Specification E 11. The SI units in parentheses are for infor-
mation purposes only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
lc
ia
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
C 125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates2
fic
op
3.1.5 thickness—maximum dimension perpendicular to the
length and width.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Individual particles of aggregate of specific sieve sizes
are measured to determine the ratios of width to thickness,
length to width, or length to thickness.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Flat or elongated particles of aggregates, for some
construction uses, may interfere with consolidation and result
in harsh, difficult to place materials.
5.2 This test method provides a means for checking com-

C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse pliance with specifications that limit such particles or to
Aggregates2 determine the relative shape characteristics of coarse aggre-
C 702 Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to gates.
Testing Size2 6. Apparatus
of

D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates3

E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth and Sieves for Testing 6.1 The apparatus used shall be equipment suitable for
Purposes4 testing aggregate particles for compliance with the definitions
in 3.1, at the dimensional ratios desired.
un

3. Terminology 6.1.1 Proportional Caliper Device—The proportional cali-

3.1 Definitions: per devices illustrated in Fig. 1, Fig. 2, and Fig. 3 are examples
3.1.1 flat or elongated particles of aggregate—those par- of devices suitable for this test method. The device illustrated
ticles of aggregate having a ratio of width to thickness or length in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 consists of a base plate with two fixed posts
to width greater than a specified value (see Terminology and a swinging arm mounted between them so that the
C 125). openings between the arms and the posts maintain a constant
ratio. The axis position can be adjusted to provide the desired
ratio of opening dimensions. Fig. 1 illustrates a device on
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D-4 on Road which ratios of 1:2, 1:3, 1;4, and 1:5 may be set. The device
and Paving Materials and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D04.51 on illustrated in Fig. 3 contains several fixed posts and has the
Aggregate Tests. capability of measuring various ratios simultaneously.
Current edition approved July 10, 1999. Published September 1999. Originally
published as D 4791 – 89. Last previous edition D 4791 – 95.
6.1.1.1 Verification of Ratio—The ratio settings on the
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.02. proportional caliper device shall be verified by the use of a
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.03. machined block, micrometer, or other appropriate device.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1 Page 177 of 180

 D 4791
TABLE 2

a. Test for elongation

y
b. Test for flatness

op
Metric Equivalents
in. mm in. mm in. mm
1⁄8 3.2 7⁄8 21.2 21⁄2 64.0
3⁄16 4.8 1 25.4 27⁄8 72.0
1⁄4 6.3 11⁄16 27.0 33⁄4 96.0
5⁄16 7.9 11⁄2 38.0 8 207.0
3⁄8 9.5 15⁄8 41.0 16 414.0

lc FIG. 2 Use of Proportional Caliper

sample to constant mass at a temperature of 230 6 9°F (1106

5°C). If determination is by particle count, drying is not
necessary.
ia
8.2 Sieve the sample to be tested in accordance with Test
FIG. 1 Proportional Caliper Method C 136. Using the material retained on the 9.5 mm (3⁄8
6.1.2 Balance—The balance or scales used shall be accurate in.) or 4.75 mm (No. 4), as required by the specification being
fic

to 0.5 % of the mass of the sample. used, reduce each size fraction present in the amount of 10 %
or more of the original sample in accordance with Practice
7. Sampling C 702 until approximately 100 particles are obtained for each
7.1 Sample the coarse aggregate in accordance with Practice size fraction required.
of

D 75. The mass of the field sample shall be the mass shown in
Practice D 75.
7.2 Thoroughly mix the sample and reduce it to an amount
suitable for testing using the applicable procedures described in
un
8.3 Flat Particle Test and Elongated Particle Test—Test
each of the particles in each size fraction, and place in one of
three groups: (1) flat, (2) elongated, (3) neither flat nor
elongated.

Practice C 702. The sample for test shall be approximately the 8.3.1 Use the proportional caliper device, positioned at the
mass desired when dry and shall be the end result of the proper ratio, shown in Fig. 2, as follows:
reduction. Reduction to an exact predetermined mass shall not 8.3.1.1 Flat Particle Test—Set the larger opening equal to
be permitted. The mass of the test sample shall conform to the the particle width. The particle is flat if the thickness can be
following: placed in the smaller opening.
Nominal Maximum Size Minimum Mass of 8.3.1.2 Elongated Particle Test—Set the larger opening
Square Openings, mm (in.) Test Sample, kg. (lb) equal to the particle length. The particle is elongated if the
9.5 (3⁄8) 1 (2)
12.5 (1⁄2) 2 (4) width can be placed within the smaller opening.
19.0 (3⁄4) 5 (11) 8.3.2 After the particles have been classified into the group
25.0 (1) 10 (22) described in 8.3, determine the proportion of the sample in
37.5 (11⁄2) 15 (33)
50 (2) 20 (44) each group by either count or by mass, as required.
63 (21⁄2) 35 (77) 8.4 Flat and Elongated Particle Test—Test each of the
75 (3) 60 (130) particles in each size fraction and place in one of two groups:
90 (31⁄2) 100 (220)
100 (4) 150 (330) (1) flat and elongated or (2) not flat and elongated.
112 (41⁄2) 200 (440) 8.4.1 Use the proportional caliper device, set at the desired
125 (5) 300 (660) ratio.
150 (6) 500 (1100)
8.4.2 Measurement:
8. Procedure 8.4.2.1 On proportional caliper devices similar to the de-
8.1 If determination by mass is required, oven dry the vices shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, set the larger opening equal

2 Page 178 of 180

 D 4791
lc
FIG. 3 Proportional Caliper
to the length of the particle. The particle is flat and elongated
ia
if the particle, when oriented to measure its thickness, can pass
completely through the smaller opening of the caliper.
8.4.2.2 On calipers similar to the one described in Fig. 3, set
fic
the minimum dimension of the proportional caliper device such
that the particle, when oriented to measure its thickness, passes
snugly between the post and swing arm. The particle is flat and
elongated if the particle, when oriented to measure its length,
fails to pass the desired large opening of the proportional
of
caliper device.
8.4.3 After the particles have been classified into the groups
described in 8.4, determine the proportion of the sample in
each group by count or mass, as required.
un
9. Calculation
9.1 Calculate the percentage of flat and elongated particles
to the nearest 1 % for each sieve size greater than 9.5 mm (3⁄8
in.) or 4.75 (No. 4), as required.
10. Report
10.1 Include the following information in the report:
10.1.1 Identification of the coarse aggregate tested, and
10.1.2 Grading of the aggregate sample, showing percent-
age retained on each sieve.
10.1.3 For flat particle tests and elongated particle tests:
3 Page 179 of 180
y
op
10.1.3.1 Number of particles in each sieve size tested,
10.1.3.2 Percentages, calculated by number or by mass, or
both, for: (1) flat particles, (2) elongated particles, and (3) total
flat particles and elongated particles for each sieve size tested,
and
10.1.3.3 The dimensional ratios used in the tests.
10.1.4 For flat and elongated particle tests:
10.1.4.1 Number of particles in each sieve size tested,
10.1.4.2 Percentages, calculated by number or by mass, or
both, for flat and elongated particles for each sieve size tested,
10.1.4.3 The dimensional ratio used in the tests, and
10.1.5 When required, weighted average percentages based
on the actual or assumed proportions of the various sieve sizes
tested. Report the grading used for the weighted average if
different from that in 10.1.2.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—The precision of this test method is being
determined.
11.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for this test method, no
statement on bias is being made.
12. Keywords
12.1 aggregates; coarse aggregates; particle shape
 D 4791
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

y
op
lc
ia
fic
of
un

4 Page 180 of 180